Image Reader-A1 iR5000i/iR6000i: FY8-13HH-000

Image Reader-A1
iR5000i/iR6000i
REVISION 0
JUNE 2001
COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC.
FY8-13HH-000
CANON iR5000i/iR6000i REV.0 JUNE 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical
theory, installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all
localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this
manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to
improvements or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in
the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises.
In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period,
Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are
inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered
trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this
manual may not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or
in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.

Printed in Japan
Imprim au Japon
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
INTRODUCTION
1. Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol
Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution,
or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric
outlet.
Memo
REF.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the

topic in question.
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.
Refers to the Copier Basics Series for a better understanding of the contents.
COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i/iR6000i REV.0 JUNE 2001
INTRODUCTION
2. Outline of the Manual

This Service Manual contains basic information needed to service the Image Reader-A1/
iR5000i/iR6000i and its accessories (i.e., side paper deck, shift tray) in the field, conducted
for the purpose of maintaining its product quality and a specific level of performance. A
separate Service Manual is made available for each of its accessories (except for the side paper deck and shift tray); for details, refer to the appropriate manual.
This Service Manual consists of the following chapters:
1. System Unit
Chapter 1 Introduction:
Chapter 2
Main Controller:
Chapter 3
Installation:
2. Reader Unit
Chapter 1 Basic Operation:
Chapter 2
Original Exposure System:
Chapter 3
Image Processing System:
3. Printer Unit
Chapter 1 Introduction:
ii
Chapter 2
Sequence of Operations:
Chapter 3
Laser Exposure System:
Chapter 4
Image Formation System:
Chapter 5
Pickup/Feeding System:
features, specifications, names of parts, functions, operation, system configuration, routine maintenance by the user
functional construction, outline of electrical
circuitry, principles of operation of the image
processing system, power supply
site conditions and installation procedure,
relocation of the machine, installation of accessories
functional construction, outline of electrical

circuitry, basic sequence of operations
principles of operation of the exposure system, timing of operation, disassembly/assembly and adjustment
principles of operation of the image processing system, timing of operation, disassembly/
assembly and adjustment
safety of the laser, image formation, auxiliary

processes
basic operations, outline of electrical circuitry, basic sequence of operations
principles of operation of the laser exposure
system, timing of operation, disassembly/
principles of operation of the image formation system, timing of operation, disassembly/assembly and adjustment
principles of operation of the pickup/feeding
system, timing of operation, disassembly/
INTRODUCTION
Chapter 6
Fixing System:
Chapter 7
Externals and Controls:
Chapter 8
Paper Deck:
Chapter 9
Shift Tray:
principles of operation of the fixing system,

timing of operation, and disassembly/assembly and adjustment
principles of operation of the externals/controls, timing of operation, disassembly/assembly and adjustment
principles of operation, timing of operation,
disassembly/assembly and adjustment
principles of operation, timing of operation,
disassembly/assembly adjustment
4. Troubleshooting
Chapter 1 Maintenance and Inspection:
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Appendix:
table of periodically replaced parts, table of

consumables/durables, scheduled servicing
chart
Image Adjustment Basic Procedure:
basic procedure for image adjustment
Standards and Adjustments: standards and adjustments
Troubleshooting Image Faults/Malfunctions:
troubleshooting image faults/malfunctions
Service Mode:
how to use service mode, list of service
modes
Self Diagnosis:
codes, causes of errors, timing chart
general timing chart, general circuit diagrams
The descriptions are updated from time to time to reflect product improvements, and major changes are communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to familiarize themselves with the contents of this Service Manual and Service Information bulletins and acquire a level of knowledge and skill
required to promptly respond to the needs of the field.
iii
INTRODUCTION
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of
operation.
In the diagrams,
represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name
accompanies the symbol
, the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression turn on the power means flipping on the power switch, closing the
front cover, and closing the delivery unit cover, which results in supplying the machine
with power.
2. In the digital circuits, 1 is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is
High, while 0 is used to indicate Low. (The voltage value, however, differs from
circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in DRMD* indicates that the
DRMD signal goes on when 0.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be
checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the
DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product
improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of
Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate
faults in the machine.
iv
INTRODUCTION
System Configuration
The iR5000i/iR6000i may be configured with the following accessories for a fully integrated system:
[4]
[3]
[5]
[7]
[2]
[1]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2
Copy Tray-C1
Shift Tray-B1
DADF-D1 (standard)
Paper Deck-G1
Puncher Unit-B1/C1/D1
Image Reader-A1
Figure 1
INTRODUCTION
Important!
Be sure to turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power plug before starting
to disassemble the machine; in addition, keep the following in mind for the work:
1. In printer mode, turning off the main power switch can result in the loss of data being
processed. Check to make sure that the Execution/Memory lamp on the control panel
is off before operating the main power switch.
2. Do not turn off the main power switch while downloading is taking place. Otherwise,
the machine may become disabled.
3. The cassette heater and the drum heater remain powered as long as the environment
switch and the heater switch are on (even when the main power switch is off).
4. Not all power is removed when the front cover is opened if the main power switch is
on, requiring care.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Execution/Memory lamp
Main power switch
Cassette heater switch
Environment switch
Figure 2 Arrangement of the Switches
vi
SYSTEM UNIT
CONTENTS
Contents
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. Features .......................................... 1-1S
1.1.1 High Speed, High Image Quality ....................................... 1-1S
1.1.2 Hard Disk ........................... 1-1S
1.1.3 Stackless, Duplexing Mechanism ................................... 1-1S
1.1.4 Large-Capacity Paper Source
........................................... 1-1S
1.1.5 Variety of Delivery Processing
(with accessories) .............. 1-1S
1.1.6 Printer Type ....................... 1-1S
1.1.7 Addition of the Differential
PCB .................................... 1-1S
2. Specifications ................................. 1-2S
2.1 Copier ....................................... 1-2S
2.1.1 Type ................................... 1-2S
2.1.2 Method ............................... 1-2S
2.1.3 Functions ........................... 1-3S
2.1.4 Others ................................ 1-8S
2.2 Paper Deck-G1 ....................... 1-11S
2.3 Shift Tray-B1 ......................... 1-12S
3. Names of Parts ............................. 1-13S
3.1 External View ......................... 1-13S

3.2 Cross Section (Printer unit) ... 1-15S
3.3 Cross Section (Reader unit) ... 1-17S
4. Using the Machine ....................... 1-19S
4.1 Turning On the Power Switches
............................................... 1-19S
4.2 Control Panel ......................... 1-20S
4.3 Extension Mode ..................... 1-21S
4.4 User Mode .............................. 1-22S
5. System Construction .................... 1-26S
5.1 Functional Construction ........ 1-26S
5.2 Outline of Electrical Circuitry 1-27S
5.2.1 Construction of Electrical
Circuitry ........................... 1-27S
5.3 Inputs to and Outputs from the
Major PCBs ........................... 1-28S
5.3.1 Wiring Diagram of the Major
PCBs ................................ 1-28S
6. Routine Maintenance by the User 1-29S
6.1 Cleaning ................................. 1-29S
6.2 Inspection ............................... 1-32S
6.2.1 Making a Check ............... 1-32S
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER

1. Basic Operations ............................ 2-1S
1.1 Functional Construction .......... 2-1S
1.2 Outline of Electrical Circuitry . 2-2S
1.2.1 Outline ............................... 2-2S
1.2.2 Main Controller PCB ......... 2-2S
1.2.3 Hard Disk Drive ................. 2-2S
1.3 Start-Up Sequence ................... 2-4S
1.3.1 Outline ............................... 2-4S
1.3.2 Start-Up Sequence ............. 2-5S
1.4 Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs ................................... 2-7S
1.4.1
Wiring Diagram of the Major

PCBs .................................. 2-7S
2. Digital Image Processing ............... 2-8S
2.1 Outline ..................................... 2-8S
2.2 Input Image Processing ............ 2-9S
2.2.1 Image Data from the Reader
Unit .................................... 2-9S
2.2.2 Enlargement/Reduction (main
scanning direction) ............ 2-9S
2.2.3 Edge Emphasis .................. 2-9S
2.2.4 Editing ............................... 2-9S
2.2.5 Density Conversion (LUT) 2-9S
S1
CONTENTS
4.4 Power Save Mode .................. 2-14S

4.5 Low Power Mode ................... 2-15S
4.5.1 Shift from Standby Mode
(standby low-power) ... 2-15S
4.5.2 Shift to Standby Mode (low
power standby) ........... 2-15S
4.6 Sleep Mode ............................ 2-15S
(standby sleep) ............ 2-15S
4.6.2 Shift from Low Power Mode
(low power mode sleep)
......................................... 2-15S
4.6.3 Return to Standby Mode (sleep
standby) ...................... 2-15S
4.7 Off Mode ................................ 2-16S
(standby off mode) ..... 2-16S
4.7.2 Shift from Low Power Mode
(low power mode off mode)
......................................... 2-16S
4.7.3 Return to Standby Mode
(off mode standby) ..... 2-16S
4.8 Power Off Mode .................... 2-16S
2.2.6
Binary Processing (error diffusion; T-BIC) ....................... 2-9S

2.2.7 Binary Processing (dither
screen) .............................. 2-10S
2.3 Controlling the Image Memory
............................................... 2-11S
2.3.1 Compression/Decompression,
Rotation, Enlargement/Reduction ................................... 2-11S
2.3.2 SDRAM ........................... 2-11S
2.3.3 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) .. 2-11S
2.4 Output Image Processing ....... 2-11S
2.4.1 Smoothing ....................... 2-11S
2.4.2 Thickening (PDL output only)
......................................... 2-11S
2.4.3 Binary-Binary Density Conversion (read image output only)
......................................... 2-11S
3. Soft Counter ................................. 2-12S
4. Controlling the Power Supply ...... 2-14S
4.1 Outline ................................... 2-14S
4.2 Power Supply Mode .............. 2-14S
4.3 Standby Mode (normal operation)
............................................... 2-14S
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION
1. Selecting the Site ............................ 3-1S
2. Unpacking and Installation ............ 3-3S
2.1 Before Starting the Work ......... 3-3S
2.2 Installation ............................... 3-4S
2.3 Unpacking ................................ 3-5S
2.4 Mounting the Scanner .............. 3-6S
2.5 Mounting the Fixing Assembly
................................................. 3-7S
2.6 Checking the Charging Assemblies
................................................. 3-9S
2.7 Mounting the Developing Assembly
............................................... 3-12S
2.8 Mounting the Pickup Assembly
............................................... 3-13S
2.9 Mounting the Deck Locking Plate
(left deck) ............................... 3-14S
S2
2.10 Supplying Toner ..................... 3-15S

2.11 Setting the Cassette ................ 3-16S
2.12 Changing the Paper Size for the
Front Deck (right/left) ............ 3-17S
2.13 Checking Images/Operations and
User Mode .............................. 3-18S
2.14 Checking the Environment Switch
............................................... 3-20S
2.15 Installing the Machine ........... 3-21S
3. Relocating the Machine ............... 3-22S
4. Mounting the Delivery Roll ......... 3-23S
5. Mounting the Original Holder ..... 3-24S
6. Installing the Control Card IV ..... 3-25S
7. Installing the NE Controller-A1 ... 3-26S
7.1 Installation ............................. 3-26S
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. Features
1.1.1 High Speed, High Image Quality
Copying speed: 50 copies/min (iR5000i; 1-on-N; from cassette/deck)
60 copies/min (iR6000i; 1-on-N; from cassette/deck)
Reading resolution: 600 600 dpi
Printing resolution: 1200* 600 dpi (copier mode; smoothing ON; varies by model)
2400* 600 dpi (printer mode)
*Equivalent.
1.1.2 Hard Disk

The machine comes with a hard disk as standard, enabling memory-based sorting. The
machine is capable of making multiple copies by reading the original once.
1.1.3 Stackless, Duplexing Mechanism

The machine moves paper seamlessly when making double-sided copies without any
waste as by stacking it in a duplexing unit.
1.1.4 Large-Capacity Paper Source

The addition of an accessory will enable accommodation of as many as 7650 sheets of paper (80 g/m2).
Right front paper deck: 1500 sheets
Left front paper deck: 1500 sheets
Cassette 3: 550 sheets (if 64 g/m2, 600 sheets)
Cassette 4: 550 sheets (if 64 g/m2, 600 sheets)
Multifeeder: 50 sheets
Paper Deck-G1 (accessory): 3500 sheets
1.1.5 Variety of Delivery Processing (with accessories)

Finishing: 1-point or 2-point stapling (Finisher)
Saddle stitching: middle binding and folding for delivery (Saddle Finisher-F2 only)
Punching: making binding holes for delivery (Puncher Unit)
1.1.6 Printer Type

The machine possesses printer functions from the printer mechanisms of the iR5000/
6000; when combined with the Image Reader-A1, it provides functions expected of conventional copiers.
1.1.7 Addition of the Differential PCB

The differential PCB is an addition provided to send signals from the image reader to the
main controller of the machine.
1-1 S
2. Specifications
2.1 Copier
2.1.1 Type
Item
Body
Copyboard
Light source
Lens
Photosensitive medium
Specifications
Separate reader/printer
Fixed
Xenon tube
Lens array (F3.7)
Amorphous silicon drum (80-dia.)
T01-201-01
2.1.2 Method
Item
Reproduction
Charging
Exposure
Copy density adjustment
Development
Pickup
Auto
Manual
Transfer
Separation
Cleaning
Fixing
Specifications
Indirect statophotography
Corona
Laser
Auto or manual
Dry, 1-component toner production
Front paper deck (2 holders)
Front cassette (2 holders)
Manual feed tray
(5.5 mm deep; about 50 sheets of 80 m2 paper)
Corona
Corona (static separation)
Blade
Heat roller
100 V: 700 W (main) + 470 W (sub)
120/230 V: 600 W (main) + 600 W (sub)
T01-201-02
1-2 S
2.1.3 Functions
Item
Original type
Maximum original size
Specifications
Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.)
A3/279.4431.8 mm (11"17")
Direct
1: 1
Reduce I 1: 0.250
Reduce II 1: 0.500
Reduce III 1: 0.611
Reduce IV 1: 0.707
Reproduction ratio
Reduce V 1: 0.816
Reduce IV 1: 0.865
Enlarge I 1: 0.154
Enlarge II 1: 1.224
Enlarge III 1: 0.414
Enlarge IV 1: 2.000
Enlarge V 1: 4.000
Zoom
1: 0.250 to 4.00 (in 1% increments)
Wait time
iR5000i: 5 min or less (at 20C/168F)
iR6000i: 6 min or less (at 20C/168F)
First copy time
5.1sec (stream reading, right deck, Direct, A4/LTR,
non-AE, straight delivery)
3.8 sec (book mode, right deck pickup, Direct, A4/LTR,
non-AE, straight delivery)
Continuous reproduction 999 prints max. AB
A3 max.
Postcard min.
Print size
Single-sided
(vertical)
Inch 279.4 431.8 mm STMT min.
(11"17") max.
(vertical)
AB
A3 max.
A5 min.
Duplexing
(vertical)
Inch 279.4 431.8 mm STMT min.
(11"17") max.
(vertical)
T-01-201-03
1-3 S
Pickup
Right deck
Left deck
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Manual feed tray
Paper type
Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2)
A4, B5, LTR
Tracing paper
A4, B5
Colored paper (Canon-recommended)
A4
Thick paper (90 to 200 g/m2)
A4, B5, LTR
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R
279.4431.8 mm (11" 17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT
(vertical feeding)
Tracing paper
B4, A4, A4R
(vertical feeding) (64 to 80 g/m2)
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R
279.4431.8 mm (11" 17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (vertical feeding)
Tracing paper
A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R
Transparency (Canon-recommended)
A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR
B4, A4, A4R
Postcard (vertical feeding only)
Postcard, 2-in-1 postcard (vertical feeding only),
4-in-1 postcard (horizontal feeding only)
Label sheet (Canon-recommended)
B4, A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR
A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, LTR, LTRR
T-01-201-04
1-4 S
Item
Single-sided
Paper type
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R
279.4431.5 mm (11"17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT
(vertical feeding)
Tracing paper
A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R
Transparency (Canon-recommedned)
A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR
B4, A4, A4R
Postcard (vertical feeding only)
Postcard, 2-in-1 postcard (vertical feeding only),
4-in-1 postcard (horizontal feeding only)
Label sheet (Canon-recommended)
B4, A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR
Thick, paper (90 to 200 g/m2)
Reverse delivery Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2)
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R
279.4431.8 mm (11"17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (vertical feeding)
B4, A4, A4R
T01-201-05
1-5 S
Item
Auto
Double-sided
Manual feed tray
Paper type
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R , B5R
279.4431.8 mm (11"17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR,
STMT (vertical feeding)
B4, A4, A4R
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R
279.4431.8 mm (11"17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR,
STMT (vertical feeding)
B4, A4, A4R
T01-201-06
1-6 S
Item
Specifications
None
162 mm/16.4 in deep (approx.; about 1500 sheets of 80 g/
Paper deck
m2 paper)
(right, left)
Cassette 3/4
55 mm/2.2 in deep (approx.; about 550 sheets of 80 g/m2)
Delivery tray
250 sheets (approx.; of 80 g/m2)
Hard disk
10GB*1
Non-image Leading edge
Direct/Enlarge-Reduce: 4.0 1.5/-1.0mm < 4.5 1.8mm >*2
width
Trailing edge
Direct/Enlarge-Reduce: 2.5 1.5mm < 2.0 1.8 mm >*2
Left/right (1st side) Direct/Enlarge-Reduce: 2.5 1.5mm < 2.5 2.0 mm >*2
Auto clear
Yes (2 min standard; may be changed between 0 and
9 min in 1-min increments)
Auto power off
No
Low-power mode Yes (15 min standard; may be changed in user mode
for 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 90 min and 2, 3, 4 hr)
Power save Auto sleep
Yes (60 min standard; may be changed to 10, 15, 20, 30, 40,
mode
50, 60, 90 min, 2, 3, 4 hr in user mode)
Energy save mode Yes (-10% standard; may be changed to -10%, -25%,
-50%, no return time (0%) in user mode)
Accessories
Paper Deck-G1
Remote Diagnostic Device II
Control Card-IV
Finisher-F1
Saddle Finisher-F2
Puncher Unit-B1/C1/D1 (2/3/4 holes)
Network LIPS Printer Kit-A1 (100-V only)
Network Multi-PDL Printerkit-A1 (120/230V only)
Claw
Tray
*1: The HDD mounted in the machine or an HDD supplied as a service part may have a different memory size; all HDDs use the same area (amount) of memory and, therefore, the
fact will not cause a problem.
*2: The values within <> indicate the use of an ADF.
T01-201-07
The specifications are subject to change for product improvement.
1-7 S
2.1.4 Others
Operating
environment
Power supply
Item
Temperature
Humidity
Atmospheric
pressure
100V (50/60Hz)
120V (50/60Hz)
230V (50/60Hz)
Power
consumption
Noise
AB size
Inch/A size
A size
Inch/AB size
Maximum
Stand by
Continuous
copying
During copying
During standby
Ozone (after 250, 000 prints)
Width
Depth
Dimensions
Height
Weight
Paper
Consumables
Toner
(Magnetic negative)
Specifications
15 to 30C/59 to 86F
5% to 80%RH
810.6 to 1013.3 hpa (0.8 to 1.0 atm)
iR5000i
iR6000i
LLXxxxxx
LLZxxxxx
NRLxxxxx
NRQxxxxx
NRMxxxxx
NRSxxxxx
PPGxxxxx
PPTxxxxx
PPRxxxxx
PPUxxxxx
QCYxxxxx
QDDxxxxx
RDCxxxxx
RDHxxxxx
SCMxxxxx
SCNxxxxx
TCNxxxxx
TCTxxxxx
UFUxxxxx
UFVxxxxx
Image Reader-A1
XCWxxxxx
XCXxxxxx
XCYxxxxx
XCZxxxxx
iR5000i: 1.5 kW or less
iR6000i: 1.5 kW or less
iR5000i: 262 Wh
iR6000i: 282 Wh
(approx.; reference)
(approx.; reference)
iR5000i: 979 Wh (approx.; reference only)
iR6000i: 1008 Wh (approx.; reference only)
By sound power level (impulse mode)
iR5000i: 71 dB or less
0.05 ppm or less (Average)
643 mm/25.3 in
743 mm/29.3 in
1136 mm/44.7 in
210 kg (approx.)/470.4 lb (approx.)
Keep wrapped, and store avoiding humidity.
Avoid direct sunlight, and store at 40C,
85% RH or less.
T01-201-08
1-8 S
Reproduction ratio
Size
Paper size
copies/min (1-to-N)
iR5000i iR6000i
30
30
50
60
36
36
50
60
38
41
40
44
50
60
Direct
A3 (297420 mm)
A4 (210297 mm)
B4 (257364 mm)
B5 (182257 mm)
A4R (297210 mm)
B5R (257182 mm)
A5R (210149 mm)
A3
A4
B4
B5
A4R
B5R
A5R
Reduce II
(50%)
III
(61.1%)
IV
(70.7%)
V
(81.6%)
VI
(86.5%)
A3A5R
A5R
50
60
A3B5R
B5R
40
44
B4B5R
A3A4R
B4A4R
B5RA5R
A4B5
A3B4
B5R
A4R
A4R
A5R
B5
B4
40
38
38
50
50
36
44
41
41
60
60
36
Enlarge IV
(200.0%)
III
(141%)
II
(122.4%)
I
(115.4%)
A5RA3
A3
30
30
A4RA3
B5RB4
A4RB4
A5B5
B4A3
B5A4
A3
B4
B4
B5
A3
A4
30
36
36
50
30
50
30
36
36
60
30
60
Delivery by the machine, auto paper select, auto density select, non-sort, deck/cassette
T01-201-09 Copying Speeds (copier only)
1-9 S
Reproduction ratio
Direct
Reduce
Enlarge
Size
Paper size
279.4431.8 mm
(11"17")
LTR
LGL
LTRR
STMTR
279.4431.8 mm
(11"17")
LTR
LGL
LTRR
STMTR
II
(50.0%)
III
(64.7%)
IV
(73.3%)
V
(78.6%)
279.4431.8 mm
(11"17")STMTR
279.4431.8 mm
(11"17")LTRR
279.4431.8 mm
(11"17")LGL
LGLLTRR
IV
(200.0%)
STMTR*
279.4431.8 mm
(11"17")
LTRR
279.4431.8 mm
(11"17")
LGL
279.4431.8 mm
(11"17")
III
(129.4%)
II
(121.4%)
copies/min
iR5000i iR6000i
30
30
50
36
39
50
60
36
42
60
STMTR
50
60
LTRR
39
42
LGL
36
36
LTRR
39
42
279.4431.8 mm
(11"17")
30
30
279.4431.8 mm
(11"17")
30
30
279.4431.8 mm
(11"17")
30
30
* Cannot be set in an ADF as an original.

Delivery by the machine, auto paper select, auto density select, non-sort, deck/cassette
T01-201-10 Copying Speeds (copier only)
1-10 S
2.2 Paper Deck-G1

Item
Pickup
Paper accommodation
Paper type
Paper stack
Serial number
Paper size switch
Dimensions
Weight
Power supply
Operating environment
Temperature
Humidity
Atmospheric pressure
Specifications
Clawless (retard)
Side tray
A4, B5, LTR
Tracing paper (SM-1)
A4, B5
A4
A4, B5, LTR
Height: 385 mm (approx.; about 3500 sheets)
A4 type: XCQ xxxxx/LTR type: XCRxxxxx
By size guide plate (in steps),
in service mode (OPTION)
326.2 (W) 583 (D) 574.5 (H) mm/
12.8 (W) 23.0 (D) 22.6 (H) in
46 kg (approx.)/101.4 lb (approx.)
DC from host machine
Same as host machine
T01-202-01
1-11 S
2.3 Shift Tray-B1

Item
Specifications
Feeding
Shifting
LTR, LTRR, LGL, 279.4431.8 mm (11"17"),
A4, A4R, A3
Paper stack
Height: 60 mm /2.4 in
(approx.; about 500 sheets of 64 g/m2)
Stacking performance Delivery direction 50 mm or less
(w/ shift)
between stacks: 20 mm or more
Shift direction
within stack: [between stacks -5] mm
(w/ shift)
w/o shift
100 mm or less
XCSxxxxx
Serial number
365.3 (W) 547.0 (D), 255.7 (H) mm/
Dimensions (shift tray alone)
14.4 (W) 21.5 (D) 10.1 (H) in
4.2 kg (approx.)/9.3 lb (approx.)
Weight
DC from host machine
Power supply
2 W or less
Maximum power consumption
(15 W or less when connected to host)
Operating environment
Temperature
Humidity
Atmospheric pressure
Paper type
Paper size
T01-203-01
1-12 S
3. Names of Parts
3.1 External View
[1]
[3]
[18]
[19]
[14]
[17]
[13]
[4]
[16]
[12]
[15]
[2]
[9]
[5]
[10]
[7]
[11]
[6]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
ADF
Main power switch
Original pickup tray
Manual feed tray
Right upper cover
Right lower cover
Waste toner box, grip,
drum protection sheet case
[8] Right front paper deck
[9] Left front paper deck
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Front cover
Delivery tray
Parallel connector for downloading
Slot for expansion board
Control panel power switch
Top panel
Reader Unit (Image Reader-A1)
copyboard glass
F01-301-01 External View 1

1-13 S
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[8]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Delivery assembly cover

Control panel
Door switch assembly
Feeding assembly releasing lever
Service book case
[6] Leakage breaker

[7] Cassette heater switch
[8] Environment switch
F01-301-02 External View 2
1-14 S
3.2 Cross Section (Printer unit)

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[9] [10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[40]
[39]
[38]
[17]
[37]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[36]
[21]
[22]
[35]
[34]
[23]
[24]
[33]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[32]
[29]
[30]
[31]
F01-302-01 Cross Section
1-15 S
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
Fixing assembly
Fixing web
Feeding assembly
Laser mirror 3
Laser mirror 2
Laser mirror 1
Drum cleaner assembly
Primary charging assembly
Photosensitive drum
Laser mirror 4
Lens unit
Dust-proofing glass
Developing cylinder
Pre-transfer charging assembly
Manual feed pull-out roller
Manual feed feed roller
Manual feed separation roller
Registration roller
Transfer charging assembly
Separation charging assembly
1-16 S
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
[35]
[36]
[37]
[38]
[39]
[40]
Right deck feed roller

Right deck separation roller
Right deck pickup roller
Right deck
Cassette 3 pickup roller
Cassette 3 feed roller
Cassette 3 separation roller
Cassette 4 pickup roller
Cassette 4 feed roller
Cassette 4 separation roller
Cassette 4
Cassette 3
Left deck
Left deck separation roller
Left deck feed roller
Left deck pickup roller
Fixing lower roller
Internal delivery roller
External delivery roller
Fixing upper roller
3.3 Cross Section (Reader unit)
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
F01-303-01 Cross Section
1-17 S
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
ADF reading glass

No. 1 mirror
Scanning lamp
Copyboard glass
1-18 S
[5] CCD unit

[6] No. 3 mirror
[7] No. 2 mirror
4. Using the Machine

4.1 Turning On the Power Switches
The machine possesses two switches: main power switch and control panel power switch.
Normally, it is supplied with power when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other
than in energy saver mode, low power mode, or sleep mode).
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] Control panel power switch

[2] Main power lamp
[3] Main power switch
F01-401-01 Arrangement of Switches
1-19 S
4.2 Control Panel

[1]
[2]
[17]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[16] [15] [14]
Counter Check key

Display Contrast dial
Reset key
Number keys
Energy Saver key
Control panel power switch
(sub power supply)
[7] Stop key
[8] Start key
[4]
[5]
[13] [12] [11] [10]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[6] [7]
[9] [8]
Main power indicator

Clear key
Error lamp
Processing/Data lamp
ID key
Additional Function key
Guide key
Touch panel
Clip holder
F01-402-01
1-20 S
4.3 Extension Mode

Mode
Two-Page Separation
Transparency Interleaving
Shift
Cover/Sheet Insertion
Different Size Originals
Margin
Frame Erase
Image Combination
Image Separation
Nega/Posi
Sharpness
Mode Memory
Recall
Booklet
Image Repeat
Job build
Extra-Length
Description
Use it to copy left and right pages (as of an open book)
on separate sheets by a single operation.
Use it to insert a sheet of paper between transparencies
in transparency mode.
Use it to move the entire original image to the center
or a corner.
Use it to print on a sheet of a type different from the one
used for the body to serve as a front/back/chapter cover.
Use it to copy originals of different sizes
(different horizontal lengths or different sizes) on sheets
of corresponding sizes.
Use it to create a margin on the edge of a copy for binding.
Use it to erase the image of the frame or holes of an
original from its copy.
Use it to reduce 2, 4, or 8 originals automatically to
print on a single sheet.
Use it to enlarge a single original automatically by
dividing it into 2 or 4 to print on a sheet of a selected size.
Use it to reverse the black and white areas of the original
on its copies.
Use it to increase the black-and-white contrast of an
original on its copies.
Use it to store or recall a copying mode.
(Maximum nine modes.)
Use it to call as many as three stored copying modes.
Use it to copy single- or double-sided originals in such
a way to enable making a booklet.
Use it to repeat an image of the original vertically/
horizontally as many times as specified (until the sheet is full).
Use it to copy separately placed sets of originals at once.
Use it when making copies of an original of a non-default
length (manual feed mode; needs selection in service mode:
COPIER>OPTION>USER>MF-LG-ST).
T01-403-01 List of Functions
1-21 S
4.4 User Mode

Common
Settings
copy*/box/other
return*, do not return
Use it to turn on/off the buzzer.
(on*/off; input sound, alarm sound,
job end sound)
Use it to use Inch input. (on*/off)
Inch Entry
Drawer Enigibility For APS/ Use it to turn on cassette selection for
each cassette folder.
ADS
(manual feed: on/off*; cassette holder: on*/
off; paper type: consider/do not consider*)
Use it to select a paper type for the front
Store Paper Type
paper deck, each cassette, and side paper
deck. (plain paper*, letterhead, recycle paper,
thick paper, colored paper)
Use it to change the level of power save mode.
Energy Saver Mode
(-10%*/-25%/-50%/None)
Use it to turn on/off the mechanism used
Function Key Wake UP
to assign a function key for disabling sleep
mode/power save mode. (on/off*)
Energy Consumption in
Use it to set the level of power consumption
for sleep mode. (low*/high)
Sleep Mode
Use it to turn off the mechanism used to
LTRR/STMT
distinguish an LTRR/STMT original.
Originals Selection
(manual/LTRR*/STMT)
Use it to select a delivery function for the
Tray Designation
finisher tray. (tray A: copy*/printer/other;
tray B: copier/printer*/other)
Use it to set priority of printing.
Printing Priority
(copy*/print/other)
Use it to register standard mode for manual
Manual Paper Standard
feed. (register/do not register*)
Settings
Use it to set standard mode for local printing.
Local Printing Standard
(number of prints: 1* to 2000; double-sided
Mode
print: yes/no*; remove after printing: yes/no*;
integrate text: yes/no*; sort: sort*/group/staple
sort/shift sort/shift group; paper select: auto*/
select source)
Initializing Common Settings Use it to return common settings to factory
settings. (yes/no)
Initial Functions
Auto Clear Setting
Audible Tones
* Factory setting.
1-22 S
Copier Settings
Standard Key 1,2 Setting Use it to register a Preference key on the Basic screen. Select from mode keys and mode
memory keys of mode memory on the Extended Mode screen.
Use it to automatically rotate images based
Auto Orientation
on the result of computing original size and
reproduction ratio and to copy the resulting
images on selected paper. (ON*/OFF)
Use it to select a function by which sorter
Auto Collate
mode is switched to sort mode in response to
the placement of originals in the feeder.
(ON*/OFF)
Use it to specify whether to display copy
Job Duration Display
wait time. (ON/OFF*)
Use it to select priority on image orientation.
Image
(ON/OFF*)
Orientation Priority
Use it to specify whether to use film photo
Photo Mode
mode. (ON/OFF*)
Use it to change copy mode items stored as
Standard Settings
standard modes. (register/initialize)
Initialize Copier Settings Use it to reset to factory settings for each
item of copier settings. (yes/no)
Timer Settings
Date & Time
Use it to set the current date and time.

(12-digit number)
Change Auto Sleep Time Use it to set the interval from the end
of operation to the start of sleep state.
(10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 90 min; 1*, 2, 3, 4 hr)
Changing Auto Clear
Use it to set the interval from the end of
Time
operation to the start of the Basic screen
on the touch panel. (0, 1 to 9 min; 2 min*)
Low Power Mode Time Use it to set the interval from the end of
operation to the start of low power mode.
(10, 15*, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 90 min; 2 to 4
hr)
Time Until Unit Quiets Use it to set the interval from the end of
Down
operation to the start of silent mode.
(in which the laser scanner motor is put to
rest; 0 to 9 min; 1 min*)
Daily Timer Seting
Use it to set the time at which the control
panel power switch is automatically turned
off for the day of the week.
(Sunday through Saturday; 00:00 to 23:59,
1-min intervals)
* Factory setting.
1-23 S
Cleaning/Adjustment
Zoom Fine Adjustment
Use it to fine-adjust any small

discrepancy between original and
copy images for vertical and horizontal
reproduction ratios. (-1.0% to +1.0%;
0.1% increments; 0%*)
Feeder Cleaning
Use it to clean the pickup roller
assembly by feeding paper from the
ADF.
Wire Cleaning
Use it to clean the charging wire.
Saddle Stitcher
Use it to edge out the staple unit in
Staple Repositioning
the saddle stitcher unit.
Saddle Stitch Position
Use it to adjust the position of
Adjustment
saddle stitch. (-2.0 to +2.0 mm;
0.1mm-incrmenets; 0 mm*)
Exposure Recalibration Use it to correct any discrepancy
between original and print images
occurring while the density adjustment
index is kept at the middle. (9 steps; 5*)
Mail Box Settings
Box Set/Store
Photo Mode
Standard Scan Settings
Report Settings
Additional Functions
Settings
Use it to register/set a box. (100 boxes

max.; box No.: 0 to 99; ID No.: 4
digits; file storage period: 1, 2, 3, 6,
12 hr, 1, 2, 3, 7, 30 days, indefinite, 2
hr*; name: 24 characters max.;
initializing a box)
Use it to specify whether to use film
photo mode in conjunction with the box
function. (ON/OFF*)
Use it to change the standard mode for
read settings. (registering/initializing)
Use it to print additional function mode
settings.
* Factory setting.
1-24 S
System Settings
Administrator Info
Setteing
Machine info Setting

Department ID
Management
(1,000 groups)
Use it to register system administrator data. (control ID: 7 digits; password: 7 digits; administrator name:
32 characters; administrator mail address; administrator contact info; administrator comment)
Use it to register a device name and
location.
Use it to enable/disable* ID control
by group. (group ID, ID No., counter
upper limit, count control, count all
clear, counter print, non ID-specific
job print)
Clear message Board
Use it to delete messages on the bulletin board.

Network Initial Settings Use it to make settings related to
TCP/IP, NetWare, AppleTalk,
Ethernet driver.
Setting Report UI (acces- Use it to make settings for remote
sory accommodation)
UI. (use*/do not use)
* Factory setting.
1-25 S
5. System Construction
5.1 Functional Construction
The machine may be divided into the following six functional blocks:
Original
Optical path
Original illumination
CCD/AP PCB
Reader controller PCB
Original
Exposure System
Control
panel
Controller block
Main controller PCB
Accessory
boards
Image Processing System
DC controller
PCB
Laser driver PCB

DC power supply PCB
Control System
Hard disk
Laser scanner
Laser Exposure System
Charging
Cleaning
Photosensitive drum
Development
Image Formation System
Delivery
tray
Fixing
Feeding
Separation
Transfer
Pickup
control
Manual
feed tray
Lower feeding assembly
Left deck Right deck

Paper deck
(accessory)
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Pickup/Feed Systems
F01-501-01
1-26 S
Cassette inside
paper level detection
PCB
DC load
clutch
solenoid
motor
sensor
fan
etc.
Finisher
(accessory)
IC121
IC122
(RAM)
(DIMMROM)
M15
Laser scanner
motor
Laser driver
PCB
BD
PCB
IC104,105
IC109,110
IC127,130
(EEPROM)
IC125
(CPU)
Main controller PCB
DIMM/ROM
(IC117)
(RAM)
IC1010
(CPU)
Accessory
boards
DC load
clutch
solenoid
motor
sensor
etc.
Duplexing AC driver Potential

HVT PCB
control
driver PCB PCB
PCB
DC controller PCB
IC120
(IPC communication 2)
(CPU)
Control
IC6501 panel
(HDD)
Hard disk drive
LA2
Inverter
Scanner PCB
motor
M3
IC5021
Reader controller
PCB
IC5027
(EEPROM)
IC5008
IC5009
(RAM)
IC5016
(ROM)
IC5025
(CPU)
ADF
CCD/
AP
PCB
5.2 Outline of Electrical Circuitry
5.2.1 Construction of Electrical Circuitry

The machines major electrical mechanisms are controlled by the following PCBs:
[1] Main controller PCB. Controls the system as a whole, performs image processing.
[2] DC controller PCB. Controls the printer unit, controls finisher communications.
[3] Reader controller PCB. Controls the reader controller, controls ADF communications.
F01-502-01
1-27 S
5.3 Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs

5.3.1 Wiring Diagram of the Major PCBs
J6604
J103
Potential
control PCB J3
LCD panel
(LCD)
J107
Duplexing
driver PCB
J6502
J6509
J6507
J6601
Control J6504
Numeric
panel
keypad PCB
J956
Inverter
J6602
CPU
PCB
J6506 PCB J6501
J2302
Laser scanner
J116
motor
M15 J2511
Laser driver
PCB
J6503
J6603
J6508
J121
J6605
J6801
J2501
J1018
J120
BD PCB
J122
J2701
DC power
supply PCB
J1015
J1061
J4003
J102
Hard
disk
J113
Environment
sensor PCB J8492
J113
Cassette 3
paper level
detection PCB J806
J113
Cassette 4
paper level
detection PCB J810
Control
card IV
(accessory)
J5503 J5008
J1017
J1551
HVT PCB
J4502
Differential
PCB
J5502
J101 DC
controller
PCB
J5501 J5004
Controller
assembly
J1060
Reader
controller
PCB
J1532
Copy data
controller
(accessory)
J1022
J1530
CCD/AP
PCB
J5003
J6002
J102
AC driver PCB
Scanner motor
J2052
J104
J2101
Motor driver PCB
J5011
M3
J5007
J105
Inverter PCB
J5101
J2108
Note: The symbol

in the diagram indicates major wiring connections,
and does not indicate the flow of signals.
F01-503-01
1-28 S
6. Routine Maintenance by the User

6.1 Cleaning
Advise the user to clean the following at least once a week:
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Copyboard glass
Wire cleaning
Feeder cleaning
Roller assemblies
Sheet assemblies
Platen guide
White plate
(copyboard cover)
Read glass
Copyboard glass
Touch panel display
Wipe with a moist cloth; then, dry wipe.

Execute wire clean in user mode.
Execute feeder clean in user mode.
Remarks
Reader unit
ADF
ADF
ADF
ADF
Reader unit
Reader unit
Printer unit
T01-601-01
Clean the ADF as follows:

1) Open the feeder cover, and wipe the
rollers behind the feeder cover (8 pc. in
total) with a moist cloth while turning
the rollers; then, wipe them with a dry,
soft cloth. Likewise, clean the sheet
around the rollers in the same way.
F01-601-01
1-29 S
2) Wipe the rollers shown (3 pc. in total)

with a moist cloth while turning them;
then, wipe them with a dry, soft cloth.
Likewise, clean the sheet around them
in the same way.
F01-601-02
3) Open the C guide, and clean the rollers

(5 pc. in total) with a moist cloth while
turning he jam removal lever; then,
wipe them with a dry, soft cloth.
Likewise, clean the sheet around the
rollers in the same way.
F01-601-03
4) Wipe the rollers (4 pc. in total) with a

moist cloth while turning them; then,
wipe them with a dry, soft cloth.
F01-601-04
1-30 S
5) Close the C guide and the feeder cover,

and open the ADF.
Wipe the copyboard glass with a moist
cloth; then, wipe it with a dry, soft
cloth.
F01-601-05
6) Clean the white plate and the platen

guide with a moist cloth.
Likewise, clean the sheet around the
platen in the same way.
At the end, close the ADF.
F01-601-06
1-31 S
6.2 Inspection
Advise the user to check the circuit breaker at least once or twice a month as shown below.
6.2.1 Making a Check

1) Press the test button in the machines bottom left.
F01-602-01
2) Check to make sure that the open/close lever shifts to OFF and the power turns off.
F01-602-02
3) After making the above check, shift the open/close lever to ON.
F01-602-03
4) Enter the date in the Breaker Check Sheet found at the back of the Users Manual.
1-32 S
CHAPTER 2
MAIN CONTROLLER
1. Basic Operations
The machine may be divided into the following functional blocks; the controller block is
shaded in the diagram:
Reader unit
Control
panel
Controller block
Main controller PCB
Accessory
boards
Image Processing System

Hard disk drive
Printer unit
F02-101-01
2-1 S

1.2.1 Outline
The major mechanism of the controller block are controlled by the CPU on the main controller PCB. The CPU, such ICs as RAM and DIMM used in association with the CPU, and
hard disk drive have the following functions:
1.2.2 Main Controller PCB

Name
CPU
RAM
Description
Controls image processing of input image data from the reader unit.
Controls image processing of output image data to the printer unit.
Controls the hard disk drive.
Controls the network interface, DMA controller, PCI interface, and ROMRAM interface.
Controls the RAM interface.
RAM
Temporarily stores program data and image data.
DIMM-ROM Stores the system control program.
Stores the boot program.
T02-102-01 List of Control Items
1.2.3 Hard Disk Drive

Name
HDD
Description
Stores the system software.Box
Stores image data as part of the box function.
T02-102-02
2-2 S
Reader unit
Control
IC6501 panel
(CPU)
IC1010
(CPU)
(DIMM-ROM)
Accessory
boards
(RAM)
Main controller PCB
Hard disk drive

(HDD)
Printer unit
F02-102-01 major PCBs
2-3 S
1.3 Start-Up Sequence

1.3.1 Outline
The system software used to control the machine is stored on the had disk drive (HDD).
The CPU on the main controller PCB is programmed to read the system software from the
hard disk and write it to the SDRAM mounted to the DIMM socket on the main controller
PCB. (For this reason, it will be a while before the control panel becomes ready after the
main power switch is turned on.
The control panel shows the following screen while the CPU writes the system software
to the SDRAM, and the progress of the start-up sequence is indicated by means of a bar on
the screen.
Start-Up Screen
Wait
Progressive bar
F02-103-01
2-4 S
1.3.2 Start-Up Sequence

When the main power switch is turned on, the CPU on the main controller PCB executes
the self-diagnosis program stored in the boot ROM.
The self-diagnosis program is designed to check the condition of the SDRAM and hard
disk, and indicates any error it detects on the control panel in the form of an error code.
SD RAM
System
Image
area
data area
CPU
Hard disk drive (HDD)

Self-diagnostic
program
Boot
program
Boot ROM
Main controller PCB
: Access to the program at execution.
F02-103-02
Related Error Code

E601-0000, -0001
Error in Image Transfer Information
E602-0001, -0002
Write/Read Error
2-5 S
When the self-diagnosis program ends normally, the boot program also stored in the boot
ROM starts to read the system software from the hard disk to write it to the system area of
the SDRAM.
The machines system software consists of multiple modules, and the appropriate modules
needed at a specific time are called into the system area of the SDRAM for execution.
SD RAM
System
area
Image
data area
CPU
Hard disk drive

(HDD)
Self-diagnostic
program
Boot
program
Boot ROM
Main controller PCB
: Access to the program at execution.
: Flow of the system program.
F02-103-03
2-6 S

1.4.1 Wiring Diagram of the Major PCBs
J6604
J6502
J6503
LCD panel
(LCD)
J6509
J6507 Control
J956
program
PCB
panel
CPU
J6506 PCB
J6601
J6504
J6602
Keypad
PCB
J6501
J6603
J6508
J6605
J6801
J1018
J5501 J5004
J1017
Hard disk
drive
J1061
J1551
Differential
PCB
J5502
Printer unit
J5503 J5008
Control
Card-IV
(accessory)
J1060
J1532
Copy Data
Controller
(accessory)
Controller block
Reader unit
J1022
J1530
J122
J1015
Note: The
in the diagram indicates major wiring connections,
and does not indicate the flow of signals.
F02-104-01 Wiring Diagram of the Major PCBs
2-7 S
2. Digital Image Processing

2.1 Outline
The machines digital image processing and control of the image memory is performed by
the main controller PCB. The following is a block diagram showing digital image processing:
Reader unit
Reader PG
Image data
after shading
Enlargement/reduction
(main scanning direction)
Edge emphasis
8
Editing
8
Luminance/density
conversion (LOG conversion)
8
Density conversion Density adjustment

(F-value conversion)
(LUT)
Density correction
( conversion)
8
Binary processing
(error division; text,
text/photo, print photo)
1
Binary processing
(dither screen; print photo)
1
Image memory
control
Compression/
decompression,
rotation, enlargement/
reduction
SDRAM
I/O control
Print PG
HDD
Image server
Binary-binary density conversion

1
Smoothing
4 or 2
Thickening
4 or 2
Printer unit
F02-201-01
2-8 S
2.2 Input Image Processing

The input image data from the reader unit is processed as follows:
2.2.1 Image Data from the Reader Unit

The image data from the reader unit is 8-bit, 256-gradation luminance signals which have
been subjected to shading correction.
Further, the input is from two signal lines (odd-/even-number pixels).
2.2.2 Enlargement/Reduction (main scanning direction)

An image is enlarged/reduced by processing image data when writing it to the image
memory or reading it from the image memory.
2.2.3 Edge Emphasis

Edge emphasis is performed to enhance the crispness of text, text/photo, film photo, and
print photo modes while reducing moire as much as possible.
2.2.4 Editing
The machines editing functions include the following: blanking/framing, negative/positive reversal, slant, mirror, fold, repeat.
2.2.5 Density Conversion (LUT)

In this block, luminance image signals are converted into density image signals, and processing is performed so that the output density curve best suited to each mode may be obtained.
a. LOG Conversion
A LOG conversion table is used to convert luminance image signals possessing luminance data based on reflected light into density image signals possessing density data of
toner.
b. Density Adjustment (F-value conversion)
An F-value table suited to the setting of the Copy Density key on the control panel is
used to perform density adjustment. It, however, is not performed in memory copy mode.
c. Density Correction ( conversion)
The conversion table for text, text photo, film photo, or print photo is used to perform
density correction.
2.2.6 Binary Processing (error diffusion; T-BIC)

The machines error diffusion method (T-BIC) ensures the best binary processing by controlling texture for best printing results. The 8-bit image density signal of text, text/photo, or
print photo mode is converted into a 1-bit image density signal (binary).
2-9 S
2.2.7 Binary Processing (dither screen)

The machines dither screen method is designed to convert the 8-bit image density signal
of film photo mode into a 1-bit image density signal (binary), enabling 144 gradations for
binary images (12x12 pixels).
2-10 S
2.3 Controlling the Image Memory

The image data resulting from binary processing is processed as follows:
2.3.1 Compression/Decompression, Rotation, Enlargement/Reduction

Binary data is processed so that the images may be compressed/decompressed (for electronic sorting), rotated, or enlarged/reduced.
2.3.2 SDRAM
The SDRAM is used to temporarily store the image data held by the image memory.
2.3.3 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)

As opposed to its function as an image server, the box function is made use of to store image data.
2.4 Output Image Processing

The image data sent to the printer unit is processed as follows:
2.4.1 Smoothing
a. When Outputting Read Images
In the case of text/text photo mode, a 600x600-dpi input image is converted into an image of 1200* 600 dpi.
In smoothing, the image data is compared against several hundred templates (77 pixel
pattern matrixes), and each pixel in question is replaced as needed.
b. When Outputting Printer (PDL) Images
The type of smoothing best suited to PDL is performed while converting 300300-dpi
or 600600-dpi data into data of 2400* 600 dpi.
*Equivalent.
2.4.2 Thickening (PDL output only)

If so specified using the printer driver, thickening (processing) is performed to improve
the reproduction of fine lines.
Lines in a PDL output image are thickened by adding 1/2 pixels (1200 dpi) in horizontal
direction and 1/2 pixels in right vertical direction.
2.4.3 Binary-Binary Density Conversion (read image output only)

This processing is used as an auxiliary function serving as part of density adjustment
while copies are being made.
2-11 S
3. Soft Counter
The machine is equipped with a soft counter for counting the number of prints. The
counter reading is indicated in response to a press on the Check key on the control panel.
The counter is controlled by the main control PCB, and the count is incremented when
any of the following sensors detects paper during copying/printing operation.
Copying/printing operation
Single-sided
Double-sided
Finisher in use
Sensor name
Internal delivery sensor (PS35)
Double-sided pre-registration sensor (PS30)
Delivery sensor
T02-300-01
The counter function is composed of a total of 8 modes, each for large size and small size
(a total of 16 mode types) as shown below:
Copying/printing operation
Local copying
PDL printing
BOX printing
Remote copying/printing
Fax reception printing*2
Report printing
Duplexing printing
Scanning
Large size
A
C
E
G
I
K
M
O
Small size*1
B
D
F
H
J
L
N
P
*1: At time of shipment, B4 or less; to include B4 in the large-size category, use service
mode.
*2: The machine is not provided with a fax function, not counting printing of messages received by fax.
T02-300-02
2-12 S
The counter function is set at the factory as follows according to the model of machine:
Counter
Description*1
Counter 1
Counter 2
Counter 3
counter 4
Counter 5
Counter 6
Total (A through L)
Total large (ACEGIK)
Copy 1 (ABGH)
Copy 1 large (AG)
Pint 1 total (CDEF)
Fax total (1)
Default indication
Default change*2
100V model 120/230V model
ON
ON
No
OFF
ON
Yes
OFF
ON
Yes
OFF
ON
Yes
OFF
OFF
Yes
OFF
OFF
Yes
*1: The notation in parentheses indicates the corresponding counter mode (T02-300-02).
*2: The counter reading may be changed or its display may be enabled/disabled in service
mode (not applicable to counter 1).
T02-300-03
2-13 S
4. Controlling the Power Supply

4.1 Outline
The main controller PCB controls the following five power modes, in addition to the
mode it controls at when the main power switch is turned off (power-off mode):
standby mode (normal operation)
power save mode
low-power mode
sleep mode
off mode
4.2 Power Supply Mode

The machine possesses the following five modes for each of its power supplies: +3.3V
all-night (3.3 VB), +3.3 V non-all night (3.3 VA), +5 V non all-night (5 V), +24 V.
Mode
Standby
Power save
Low power
Sleep
Off mode
Power off
+3.3V all night
+3.3V non-all night +5V non-all night
+24V
T02-402-01
4.3 Standby Mode (normal operation)

Standby mode is used during normal operation or while the machine is ready for operation, i.e., nearly all its power supplies are powered.
In addition to the main controller PCB, the reader unit, printer unit, and control panel are
all ready for communication/control.
4.4 Power Save Mode

All power supplies are powered (same as standby mode).
The level of power consumption is reduced by lowering the control temperature of the
fixing assembly in standby state.
2-14 S
4.5 Low Power Mode

In low power mode, only the +24V power supply remains off; the level of power consumption for the reader unit and the printer unit is reduced for low power consumption.
4.5.1 Shift from Standby Mode (standby low-power)

A shift is made from standby mode to low power mode under the following conditions:
Low power mode is selected on the control panel.
Standby mode has continued for a specific period of time, selected in user mode.
4.5.2 Shift to Standby Mode (low power standby)

A shift is made from low power mode to standby mode under the following conditions:
The control panel power switch (soft switch) is on.
PDL data is received from the network or parallel power. (Electrically, the control
panel is off as in standby mode.)
4.6 Sleep Mode

In sleep mode, only the +3.3V all-night (3.3 VB) power supply is powered.
The CPU on the main controller PCB stops the programs, thereby saving power (the program is stopped).
This mode is used only when the machine is used as a printer equipped with a network
print option/PDL print option.
4.6.1 Shift from Standby Mode (standby sleep)

A shift is made from standby mode to sleep mode under the following conditions:
The control panel power switch (soft switch) is off.
Standby mode has continued for a specific period of time (selected in user mode).
4.6.2 Shift from Low Power Mode (low power mode sleep)
A shift from low power mode to sleep mode is made under the following conditions:
Low power mode has continued for a specific period of time (selected in user mode).
4.6.3 Return to Standby Mode (sleep standby)
The control panel power switch (soft switch) is on.

PDL data is received from the network/parallel port. (Electrically, the control panel is
off as in standby mode.)
2-15 S
4.7 Off Mode

In off mode, a minimum number of logic circuits on the main controller PCB are left
powered, and all others including the CPU (+3.3 V) all night power supply are tuned off.
This mode is used only when the copier is used on its own (i.e., without network print option/PDL print option).
4.7.1 Shift from Standby Mode (standby off mode)

A shift is made from standby mode to off mode under the following conditions:
Standby mode has continued for a specific period of time (selected in user mode).
4.7.2 Shift from Low Power Mode (low power mode off mode)
A shift is made from low power mode to off mode under the following conditions:
Low power mode has continued for a specific period of time (selected in user mode).
4.7.3 Return to Standby Mode (off mode standby)

In off mode, an auto return to standby mode by means of an external command is not possible. To turn on standby mode, the control panel power switch (soft switch) or the main
power switch must be turned off and then on.
The return operation is exactly the same as when the machine is turned on.
4.8 Power Off Mode

The machine is in power off mode when its main power switch remains off.
To return from power off mode, the main power switch must be turned on, thereby automatically returning the machine to standby mode.
2-16 S
CHAPTER 3
INSTALLATION
1. Selecting the Site

The site must satisfy the following conditions; if possible, pay a visit before the delivery
of the machine:
1. The temperature must be between 7.5 and 32.5C (59 and 86F) and the humidity
must be between 5% and 85%. Avoid an area near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier, or refrigerator.
2. Avoid an area near a source of fire or subject to dust or ammonium gas. If the site is
exposed to direct sunlight, provide a curtain.
3. The level of ozone generated by the machine is not likely to affect the health of people
around it. Some individuals, however, may find its odor unpleasant, calling for a good
means of ventilation.
4. Be sure that the machines feet will be in contact with the floor, and the machine will
remain level.
5. Be sure that the machine will be at least 10 cm away from any wall, and make sure
there will be adequate space for machine operation.
10 cm min.
50 cm min.
Body
60 cm min.
Front cover
50 cm min.
F03-100-01
6. Be sure that the room will be well ventilated and the machine will not be installed near
an air vent.
3-1 S
7. If multiple machines exist, be sure to arrange them so that the exhaust from one will
not be drawn into another. In general, the silicone gas (vaporized silicone oil from the
fixing assembly) will soil corona wires, shortening their lives. This phenomenon is
particularly conspicuous in a low humidity environment.
Ventilation
Wrong 1
Wrong 2
F03-100-02
3-2 S
F03-100-03
2. Unpacking and Installation

2.1 Before Starting the Work
Be sure to observe the following when installing the machine:
1. If the machine is moved from a cold to warm place for installation, condensation can occur in its pickup/feed assembly. Leave the machine
alone without unpacking for an hour or more before starting the work.
(The term condensation refers to the formation of droplets of water on a
metal surface caused by rapidly cooling moisture in the air.)
2. If flights of stairs are used to move the machine into or out of the site of
installation, be sure to observe the following:
2.1 Take out the ADF assembly, fixing/feeding assembly, and duplexing
unit, and move them separately from the body.
2.2 When lifting the machine, do not use its four grips (left, right); instead, hold it by its four bottom corners.
2.3 The machine weighs 210 kg. Be sure to work in a group of four.
3. Shift up the two adjusters found on the machines bottom (front) to
make sure that they are released. The adjusters can slip off while the
machine is being moved. Be sure to pay attention not to lose them.
4. Be sure to work in a group of three or more when installing the machine. When removing the pad and bottom plate, arrange one person at
the rear and one person at the front to hold the grips while one person
engages in removal.
3-3 S
2.2 Installation
Install the machine as follows; for details, see the appropriate item on the pages that follow:
1. Unpacking
unpacking, checking the attachments
2. Mounting the Image Reader-A1
3. Mounting the Fixing assembly
removing the separation claw releasing member, removing the fixing assembly nip releasing screws
4. Checking the Charging Assemblies
checking the transfer/separation, primary, and pre-transfer charging assemblies
5. Mounting the Developing Assembly
6. Mounting the Pickup assembly
removing the pickup roller releasing spacers
7. Mounting the Deck Locking Plate (left deck)
8. Supplying Toner
9. Setting the Cassette
10. Changing the Paper Size for the Front Deck (right/left)
changing the paper size, selecting the paper size (service mode)
11. Checking Images/Operations
connecting the grounding wire, turning on the main power, placing paper, and checking
images
12. Checking the Environment Switch
setting the drum, cassettes, mirrors, and lens heater
13. Installing the Machine
putting away the attachments, fixing the adjusters
3-4 S
2.3 Unpacking
Step
Work
1 Unpack the machine, and remove the plastic
sheets.
Do not remove the tape used to secure
the two adjusters found on the machines
bottom (front) until the machine has been
moved off the skids.
Otherwise, the adjusters can trip on the slope
plates, causing the machine to tumble.
2
Checks/remarks
Adjusters
Take out and open the cardboard box, and fit the
grip to the front of the machine.
Be sure to orient the stopper as shown

when inserting it. Otherwise, it can slip off
when the body is being lifted.
[2]
3
4
Take out the two slope plates from inside the

skid.
Holding the two grips (front, rear) found on the
side of the delivery assembly, lift the machine
slightly to remove the pad.
(weight of the machine: about 210 kg)
3-5 S
Step
Work
5 Holding the two grips (front, rear) on the
side of the pickup assembly, lift the machine
slightly to remove the pad.
Checks/remarks
Turn over the slope plates; then match the

pin holes in the skids with those in the slope
plates, and fit the pins (one each).
Holding the grips (front, rear) found on the
machine, move the machine off the skid by
sliding it on the slope plates.
7
8
Remove the packaging tape from the body.

From the cardboard box that comes with the Check to make sure that none is
machine, take out the parts and auxiliary ma- missing.
terials.
3-6 S
2.4 Installing the Image Reader-A1

Work
Step
1 Take out the image reader from the cardboard box, and remove the plastic bag and
the protective sheet.
2 Mount the two reader unit fixings (front) [1]
that come with the machine with RS tightening screws [2].
Checks/remarks
[2]
[1]
As if to insert it into the protrusion of the

reader unit fixing (front) [1], mount the
reader unit [3].
[3]
[1]
Remove the three scanner fixing screws [4].

[4]
You will need to secure the scanner

in place when moving the machine. Be
sure to store away the removed scanner
fixing screws.
[4]
[4]
3-7 S
Step
Work
5 Remove the seven mounting screws [5], and
detach the reader unit rear cover [6].
Checks/remarks
[5]
[5]
[5]
[6]
Mount the two reader unit fixings (rear) [7]

that come with the machine using an RS
tightening screw [8].
[8]
[7]
Mount the reader unit rear cover.
Mount the reader I/F cable [9] as shown.
[9]
Mount the reader power cable [10] as shown.
Memo
3-8 S
1. If the test print image shows

distortion, correct the height of
the reader unit using the adjusting wrench that comes with
the machine.
2. Use the reader unit anti-condensation heater that comes
with the machine as needed.
[10]
2.5 Mounting the Fixing Assembly

Step
Work
1 Open the front cover.
2 Shift the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever in the direction of the arrow
(left) to free the transfer/separation
charging assembly.
Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly to
the front.
Checks/remarks
Fixing/feeding assembly
Releasing lever
Remove the separation claw releasing

member and the tag from the fixing/feeding assembly.
Separation claw
releasing member
Remove the tape and glue from

the feeding belt.
Tag
Remove the retaining tape of the tag, and

open the fixing/delivery assembly.
Fixing/
delivery assembly
Tags
3-9 S
Work
Step
5 Remove the two fixing nip releasing screws.
Checks/remarks
Screw (rear)
Screw (front)
Close the fixing/feeding assembly.
3-10 S

Work
Step
1 Remove the two screws, and detach the feeding assembly front cover (right).
Checks/remarks
Screws
Feeding assembly front cover
Remove the screw, and detach the metal fixing; then disconnect the connector.
While holding the front and the rear of the
transfer/separation charging assembly at the
same time, pull it to the front to detach in the
left upper direction.
Check the transfer/separation charging assembly; if dirt or paper lint is found, clean
with alcohol.
Mount the transfer/separation charging assembly.
Connect the connector, and fit the metal fixing.
Do not bring the transfer/separation
charging assembly into contact with the
transfer guide to avoid cutting the gut
wire. Further, be sure that the solvent has
evaporated completely.
Connector
Metal fixing Screw
Mount the feeding assembly front cover

(right) with two screws, and insert the fixing/
feeding assembly into the machine.
Remove the screw from the door tape (door
stopper) of the front panel. (This is to keep
the hopper open, which otherwise may close
when the hopper is opened.)
3-11 S
Work
Step
5 Open the hopper cover, and remove the three screws and connector cover; then disconnect the
connector.
Checks/remarks
Hopper assembly
Screw
Hopper cover
Connector cover
Slide out the hopper unit to the

front, and turn it to the front right
by 90.
Loosen the screw; then shift the

charging assembly fixing member in the direction of the arrow
(right upper), and secure it in
place with a screw.
Disconnect the connector, and
take out the primary charging assembly.
Check the primary charging assembly; if dirt or paper lint are
found, clean it with alcohol.
Disconnect the connector, and
remove the screw; then take out
the pre-transfer charging assembly.
Check the pre-transfer charging
assembly; if dirt or paper lint are
found, clean it with alcohol.
Connector Primary Screw

charging
assembly
Screw
Cleaner screw retainer
3-12 S
Connector
Step
Work
Checks/remarks
9 Insert the primary charging assembly and pre-transfer charging assembly; then secure them in place.
1. If solvent was used for cleaning, check to make sure that it has evaporated completely.
2. When inserting the pre-transfer charging assembly, be sure to push it in
horizontally in relation to the processing unit, thus avoiding damage to
the surface of the drum.
3. Check to make sure that the one-way arm of the pre-transfer charging assembly is on the eccentric cam.
10
Close the hopper, and connect the connector of the hopper.

Fit and tighten the three screws, and mount the connector cover; then fit and tighten
the screw of the door tape and close the front door.
Be sure to connect the connector of the hopper.
3-13 S
2.7 Mounting the Developing Assembly

Checks/remarks
Step
Work
1 Open the manual feed tray cover and remove the
screw from the door tape.
Screw
Remove the screw and slide the developing assembly locking unit in the direction of the arrow
(rear) to detach.
Screw
Take out the developing assembly from the card- Turn the developing cylinder
board box.
gear by hand and check to make
sure that the cylinder is free of
scratches.
Hold the developing assembly in the middle
Developing assembly
(pocket of the grip) and mount it to the machine.
Connect the connector.
When mounting the developing assembly, take care not to bring the developing
cylinder into contact with the metal plate of
the developing assembly base.
Connector
Insert the developing assembly locking unit from

the right side (rear) while making sure to hold it
horizontally.
Secure the developing assembly locking unit in
place with a screw.
Screw
Mount the door tape of the manual feed tray

cover with a screw.
3-14 S
2.8 Mounting the Pickup Assembly

Checks/remarks
Step
Work
1 Open the right upper cover and remove the
pickup roller releasing spacer.
Spacer
Slide the pickup roller releasing spacer to the

right; then pull it out to the front.
Spacer
Slide out the right deck and the cassette halfway and open the right upper cover and right
lower cover; then remove the pickup roller
releasing spacers of the right deck and cassette 3/4.
Tags
Spacers
It will be difficult to remove the

spacer if the deck/cassette is set; slide
them out halfway to unlock the spacers.
Memo
Spacer
After removing all spacers, close the right

upper cover and the right lower cover.
3-15 S
2.9 Mounting the Deck Locking Plate (left deck)

Step
Work
1 Push the releasing button of the left deck,
and slide out the left deck.
2 Mount the deck locking plate that comes
with the machine; then, close the left deck.
3-16 S
Checks/remarks
Deck locking plate

Screw
2.10
Supplying Toner
Work
Step
1 Rotate the toner bottom as shown ten times or
more.
Checks/remarks
Open the hopper cover and fit the boss on the tip Check to make sure that the toner
of the toner bottle in the groove of the toner sup- bottle is locked to the toner supply mouth.
ply mouth.
At this time, be sure to push it in until a click is
heard.
Pull the shutter (black) of the body (found on the
right of the toner supply mouth of the hopper) to
the right.
Keep pulling until the shutter stops.
Pull the shutter of the toner bottle to the right.

Toner will be supplied from the toner bottle to
the hopper. Tap on the bottom of the toner bottle
to make sure that all toner has moved to the hopper.
Push the shutter of the toner bottle to the left to
close.
Push the machines shutter to the left until it

stops.
Push the machines shutter farther to the marking
on the hopper, thus freeing the toner bottle.
Pull the toner bottle in left upper direction to detach; then close the hopper cover.
3-17 S
2.11
Setting the Cassette
Step
Work
1 Push the cassette releasing button, and slide
out each cassette to the front; then remove
the packing materials.
2 Set the side plate of each cassette to the hole
identified by the marking M (M4/A3).
Fit the Inch-preventing roll that comes with
the machine from inside the cassette so that it
covers the hole (STMT-R) identified by the
marking A and the one (LTR-R) identified by
the marking H.
Be sure there is no gap.
Perform this step only when the
use of Inch-configured paper is
not planned.
3
Checks/remarks
Marking A
Marking H
Set the cassettes to the appropriate sizes to

suit the users needs and attach the sticker
indicating the new sizes.
Slide the cassettes into the machine.
3-18 S
2.12
Changing the Paper Size for the Front Deck (right/left)
Step
Work
1 Press the release button and
slide out the deck.
2 Remove the screw from the
rear edge guide plate and the
left and right guide plates;
then secure each guide plate
to suit the size of the users
choice.
At time of shipment: A4
2.13
Checks/remarks
Rear end guide plate

Right guide plate
Screw
Left guide plate
Slide the deck into the maScrews

chine.
Attach the appropriate size
sticker to the paper size indicator plate of the deck.
Turn on the power and regis- Right deck: COPIER>OPTION>CST>P-SZ-C1
ter the front deck paper size Left deck: COPIER>OPTION>CST>P-SZ-C2
using service mode.
A4=6, B5=15, LTR=18
Installing the DADF-D1
3-19 S
2.14
Checking Images/Operations and User Mode

Be sure to remove all packaging material from the cassettes before turning
on the power switch.
Step
Work
Checks/remarks
1 Slide out the duplexing unit and check to make sure that there is no foreign matter
and each part is free of damage.
2 Connect the power plug to the power outlet and turn on the power switch.
3
4
Adjust the contrast of the control panel display using the Screen Contrast key;
then advise the user on how to make adjustments.
Check that the Add Paper indicator has turned on.
Press the keys of the keypad and the Clear key to make sure that the copy count
indication is correct.
Place paper in the cassettes and the deck. (If the paper size has been changed for the
deck, be sure to register the new paper size using service mode.)
When the wait period is over, start service mode and execute toner supply (thereby
supplying toner from the hopper to the developing assembly).
1. Press the following in sequence to start service mode: user mode, 2 and 8 at
the same time, and user mode.
2. Select COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>TONER-S.
3. Check that the following indication has appeared: CHECK THE DEVELOPER.
4. Check to make sure that the developing assembly has been mounted properly
and press the OK key.
5. See that toner is supplied from the hopper to the developing assembly (about 8
to 10 min).
6. Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.
Do not turn off the power while the machine is in operation.
3-20 S
Work
Checks/remarks
Step
5 When the developing assembly has been supplied with toner, check the operator and
copy images using the Test Sheet by making sure of the following:
Copying operation: All associated operations must be normal.
Double-sided copying: Paper must move properly in the duplexing unit.
Pickup operation: Paper must be picked up normally from each source of paper.
Operating noise: There must be no abnormal noise.
Default enlargement/reduction: The quality of images made at each ratio must be
good.
Multiple copies: As many copies as specified must be made normally.
If there is a difference in density between left and right, adjust the height of the primary charging wire at the rear to correct.
At times, toner may drop from the drum separation claw soiling about the
first ten or so copies. This problem will disappear on its own as more copies are
made.
6
Set the standard mode in user mode and service mode (press the Rest key twice to
end service mode).
3-21 S
2.15
Checking the Environment Switch
Work
Step
1 The environment of the site determines how the environment switch
must be used.
If the site requires that the drum/cassette heater remain on while the main
power switch is turned off, operate
the following two switches:
Environment Switch
It is designed for the drum heater
and all night heaters, and functions as follows:
ON: all night switch remains on;
the main power supply switch
may be off or on.
OFF: heater remains on only when
the main power switch is on.
3-22 S
Checks/remarks
Environment switch
2.16
Installing the Machine
Step
Work
1 Remove the two screws, and detach
the cover from the right rear bottom
of the machine; then, store the following parts:
Checks/remarks
Drum tool
1. drum protection sheet; keep it

near the waste toner case.
2. drum rotating tool; put it together
with the waste toner case cap and
store it in the grip found at the
top of the waste toner case.
3. grip; store it in the grip recess.
Grip recess
Do not roll the drum protection sheet.

2
3
4
5
6
7
2.17
Drum protection
sheet
Waste toner case
Mount the cover to the right rear bottom.

Fit the covers to the grip assemblies.
If installation of an accessory (sort, etc.) is planned, install it according to the Installation Procedure that comes with the accessory.
Clean up the area around the machine.
Move the machine to the site of installation and correct it so that it is level using the
two adjusters.
Fill out the Service Sheet.
Connecting to the Network
Step
Work
Checks/remarks
1 Turn off the man power switch of the host.
2 Connect the network cable to the machine, and turn on the main power switch.
Inform the system administrator that the installation work ended, and ask him/her to
3
make network settings of the machine.
3-23 S
2.18
Checking the Connection to the Network
If the user's network environment is TCP/IP-based, use the PING function to make sure
that the network PCB has been correctly installed and the network settings are correctly
made.
If the user's network environment is IPX/SPX- or AppleTalk-based, the following steps
may be skipped:
Step
Work
Checks/remarks
1 Using the PING Function
1) Select [PING] after making
the following selections in
service mode:
COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>
PING.
2) Enter the IP address using the
keypad in the control panel,
and press the OK key.
3) Press the Start key.
'OK'appears to indicate that
the PING check has been successful, while 'NG' appears if
the check has failed.protection
sheet.
2 You can check the connection to the network by PING using a remote host address*
(for testing).
*IP address of a PC terminal connected to and operating in the TCP/IP network to
which the machine will be connected.
1) Inform the user's administrator that a check will be made on the network connection using PING.
2) Find out the remote host address from the system administrator.
3) Enter the remote host address for PING.
4) If 'OK' is indicated, the connection to the network is correctly made.
5) If 'NG' is indicated, the connection to the network is not correctly made. Perform
the troubleshooting work that follows.
3-24 S
2.19
Troubleshooting the Network
If the connection to the network is not correct, suspect the following causes, and perform
the steps shown to correct the fault:
Step
1
Checks/remarks
Work
Checking the Connection of the Network Cable
1) Check to find out if the network cable is correctly connected to the network PCB.
If yes, go to 18.2.
If no, correct the connection, and make a check once again using the remote host
address.
Making a Check with a Loop-Back Address
A loop-back address returns before reaching the network PCB; executing PING using it will enable a check on the TCP/IP settings of the machine.
1) Enter the loop-back address (127.0.09.1) for PING.
If 'NG' is indicated, check the TCP/IP setting of the machine, and execute PING
once again.
If 'OK' is indicated, go to 18.3.
Making a Check Using the Local Address
The local host address is the address of the machine, and executing PING using it
will enable a check on the network PCB, since the address will return after reaching
the network PCB.
1) Enter the IP address of the machine for PING.
If 'NG' is indicated, make the following check/correction, and execute PING once
again.
a. If the IP address of the machine is faulty, check the setting of the IP address
of the machine and check with the system administrator to find out if the IP
address is a valid one.
b. If the connection of the network PCB is faulty, check the connection of the
connector of the network PCB.
c. If the network PCB is faulty, replace the network PCB.
If 'OK
is indicated, suspect a fault in the user's network environment. Report the circumstances to the system administrator for appropriate action.
3-25 S
3. Relocating the Machine

Be sure to observe the following if the machine needs to be moved by truck or other
means of transportation:
Work Procedure
1. Remove all paper from the left/right paper deck and the cassettes.
2. Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.
3. Secure the No. 1 mirror base in place from the side of the reader left cover using a fixing screw (check to make sure that the No. 1 mirror base will not move).
4. Take out the developing assembly. Be sure to move the developing assembly separately
from the machine.
5. Tape the following in place to avoid displacement by vibration: transfer charging assembly, fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever, duplexing unit.
6. Tape the covers, decks, and cassettes in place.
7. Place A3 paper on the copyboard glass, and tape the ADF in place.
1. Be sure to observe the following if flights of stairs are used when moving the machine into or out of the site of installation:
1.1 Take out the ADF, fixing/feeding assembly, and duplexing unit; they
must be moved separately from the machine.
1.2 When lifting the machine, avoid using the four grips (left, right);
instead, hold it by its bottom four corners.
1.3 The machine weighs about 210 kg. Be sure to work in a group of
four when lifting it.
2. Be sure to shift up the two adjusters (front) found on the machines bottom to make sure that they are released. The adjusters can slip off while
the machine is being moved. Take care not to lose them.
3. If a side paper deck/finisher (accessory) is installed, remove it before
moving the machine.
3-26 S
4. Mounting the Delivery Tray

The delivery roller must be equipped with a delivery roll in its middle before mounting
the delivery tray. The following steps, however, must not be performed if installation of
the shift tray or finisher is planned.
Step
Work
1 Open the front cover, and slide out the fixing/
feeding assembly; then remove the two screws
[1], and detach the delivery roller guide [2].
Checks/remarks
[1]
[1]
Mount the delivery roll [3] aligning it against the

pin [5] in the middle of the delivery roller [4];
then secure it in place with an E-ring [6].
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[3]
Mount the anti-wrap cover with two screws, and

push the fixing/feeding assembly into the machine; then close the front cover.
Remove the two screws [7], and detach the
reader left cover; then mount the magnet catcher
[8].
[7]
[8]
Mount the delivery tray.
3-27 S
5. Mounting the Original Holder

Work
Step
1 Mount the original holder [2] to the
machine (right) using the two
stepped screws [1] that come with the
machine.
If the original holder is not needed,
fit the two rubber caps that come
with the machine instead.
If it is difficult to mount the original
holder, try loosening the two mounting screws.
3-28 S
Checks/remarks
[1]
[2]
6. Installing the Card Reader-C1 (option)

Checks/remarks
Step
Work
1
Enter a card number (1 through 2001) in the
machines' service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD.
Enter the lowest number (of those to be
used by the user).
As many as 300 cards (starting with the
one whose number has been entered) may
be used.
2 Turn off the machine's main power switch.
3
4
5
Remove the three screws, and detach the upper cover.

Remove the screw, and detach the control
card base.
Mount that control card base with a screw
[2], shifting the screw hole position so that
the control card base will be to the outside of
the machine.
[2]
[1]
6
7
Using a screw [3], mount the card reader [4]

to the control card base.
Disconnect the shorting connector [6] from
the connector [5] of the machine, and connect it to the connector [7] of the card reader
[4].
[6]
[5]
Store away the removed shorting connector, as it may be needed when the
card reader must be removed (e.g., for
repairs).
8
[7]
[4]
[3]
Mount the upper cover.
3-29 S
7. Installing the NE Controller-A1

Installation herein is to the iR5000i/6000i. For how to make various settings and points to note and check (operations), see the Installation Procedure that comes with the machine.
7.1 Installation
Step
Work
1 Remove the upper cover of the controller. (See
the Installation Procedure.)
2 Connect the plug of the AC adapter to the controller. (See the Installation Procedure.)
3 Remove the four screws [1], and detach the face
plate [2] of the rear upper cover.
Checks/remarks
[2]
[1]
Remove the rear upper cover, and free the 8-pin

cable [3] used to connect the controller from the
cable clamp; then, let the cable hang as shown.
[3]
keep the cable out
Be sure not to route the cable in the area

indicated (by dashed line) of the DC controller PCB to avoid malfunction of the machine.
3-30 S
Work
Step
5 Mount the rear upper cover, and draw out the
controller cable [4] from where the controller is
mounted; then, connect it to the controller cable
[5].
Checks/remarks
[5]
Mount the controller [6] to the rear upper cover

using four screws [7]. (Use the screws that come
in the box.)
[4]
[6]
[7]
Make various settings and check the operations

as instructed in the NE Controller-A1 Installation
Procedure.
3-31 S
READER UNIT
CONTENTS
Contents
CHAPTER 1 BASIC OPERATION
1. Functional Construction ................ 1-1R
2. Outline of Electrical Circuitry ....... 1-2R
2.1 Outline .................................... 1-2R
2.2 Reader Controller PCB ........... 1-2R
3. Basic Sequence of Operations ....... 1-3R
3.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at
Power-On ................................ 1-3R
3.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in

Book Mode ............................. 1-3R
4. Inputs to and Outputs from the Major
PCBs .............................................. 1-4R
4.1 Wiring of Major PCBs ............ 1-4R
Reader Controller PCB ........... 1-5R
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

1. Outline of Operations .................... 2-1R
1.1 Outline .................................... 2-1R
1.2 Sequence of Operations (original
exposure) ................................. 2-3R
1.2.1 Book Mode, 1 Original,
Copyboard Closed ............ 2-3R
Copyboard Cover Open .... 2-4R
1.3 Enlargement/Reduction (zoom)
................................................ 2-5R
1.3.1 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction
.......................................... 2-5R
1.3.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction
.......................................... 2-5R
2. Scanner Drive System ................... 2-6R
2.1 Outline .................................... 2-6R
2.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor
................................................ 2-7R
2.2.1 Controlling the Motor When
Scanning an Image ........... 2-7R
2.2.2 Reversing the Scanner After
Scanning in Main Reading Direction ............................... 2-8R
3. Controlling the Scanning Lamp (LA2)
....................................................... 2-9R
3.1 Outline .................................... 2-9R
3.2 Scanning Lamp ....................... 2-9R

3.3 Turning On/Off the Lamp ....... 2-9R
3.4 Detecting an Error ................. 2-10R
4. Detecting the Size of Originals ... 2-11R
4.1 Outline .................................. 2-11R
4.2 Points of Detection ............... 2-11R
4.3 Outline of Detection ............. 2-11R
4.4 Outline of Detection Operation
.............................................. 2-12R
Copyboard Cover Open .. 2-12R
Copyboard Cover Close . 2-13R
5. Scanning Lamp ........................... 2-15R
5.1 Removing the Scanning Lamp
.............................................. 2-15R
5.2 Points to Note When Replacing the
Scanning Lamp ..................... 2-17R
5.3 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp
.............................................. 2-17R
6. Scanner Drive Block ................... 2-18R
6.1 Scanner Motor ...................... 2-18R
6.1.1 Removing the Scanner Motor
........................................ 2-18R
6.1.2 Mounting the Scanner Motor
........................................ 2-19R
6.2 Scanner System Drive Cable
.............................................. 2-20R
R1
CONTENTS
6.2.1
Removing the Scanner System

Drive Cable ..................... 2-20R
6.2.2 Routing the Scanner Drive
Cable ............................... 2-22R
6.2.3 Positioning the No. 1/2 Mirror
Base ................................ 2-23R
7. Others .......................................... 2-25R
7.1 Removing the Original Size Sensor

.............................................. 2-25R
7.2 Removing the HP Sensor ...... 2-26R
7.3 Removing the Copyboard Sensor
.............................................. 2-27R
8. PCBs ............................................ 2-28R
8.1 Removing the Fuse PCB ....... 2-28R
8.2 Removing the Inverter PCB .. 2-29R
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

1. Outline ........................................... 3-1R
2. Analog Image Processing .............. 3-2R
2.1 Outline .................................... 3-2R
2.2 Driving the CCD ..................... 3-2R
2.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction of the CCD Output .......... 3-3R
2.4 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output
................................................ 3-3R
3. Digital Image Processing .............. 3-4R
3.1 Outline .................................... 3-4R
3.2 Shading Correction ................. 3-4R
3.2.1 Outline .............................. 3-4R
3.2.2 Shading Adjustment ......... 3-5R
3.2.3 Shading Correction ........... 3-5R
3.2.4 Edge Gain Correction (ADF in
use) ................................... 3-6R
3.3 Auto Density Adjustment (AE)
................................................ 3-7R
3.3.1 Outline .............................. 3-7R
3.3.2 ABC Circuit ...................... 3-7R
R2
4. External Covers ............................. 3-9R

4.1 Removing the Reader Left Cover
................................................ 3-9R
4.2 Removing the Reader Right Cover
................................................ 3-9R
4.3 Removing the Rear Front Cover
.............................................. 3-10R
4.4 Removing the Reader Rear Cover
.............................................. 3-11R
5. CCD/AP PCB .............................. 3-12R
5.1 Removing the CCD Unit ...... 3-12R
5.2 When Replacing the CCD/AP PCB
.............................................. 3-13R
6. Reader Controller PCB ............... 3-14R
6.1 Removing the Reader Controller
PCB ....................................... 3-14R
6.2 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB ............................ 3-14R
6.3 Removing the Differential PCB
.............................................. 3-15R
CHAPTER 1
BASIC OPERATION
1. Functional Construction
The reader unit is divided into the following two functional blocks (shaded):
1. Original exposure block
2. Control block
Reader unit
Original
Optical path
[Control Block]
Controller unit
CCD/AP
PCB
Original
illumination
[Original
Exposure Block]
Printer unit
F01-100-01
1-1 R
2. Outline of Electrical Circuitry

2.1 Outline
The major mechanisms of the reader unit are controlled by the CPU on the reader controller PCB.
The functions of the major ICs are as indicated in the following table.
2.2 Reader Controller PCB

Name
CPU
Description
Controls the sequence of scanner
Controls the scanning lamp.
operations.
Controls shading correction.
Controls the original size detection Controls service mode.
mechanism.
Controls the communications with
Controls the CCD.
the main controller.
Controls the communications with
the ADF.
RAM
Stores service mode data.
Stores user mode data.
Stores control data.
EEP-ROM Backs up RAM data.
ROM
Stores control programs.
IC5025
(CPU)
Inverter
PCB
LA2
Controller unit
Printer unit
Differential
PCB
IC5016
(ROM)
IC5008
IC5009
(RAM)
M3
Scanner
motor
IC5027
CCD/AP
(EEPROM)
PCB
IC5021
ADF
F01-202-01 Major PCBs

1-2 R
3. Basic Sequence of Operations

3.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On
Power switch ON
STBY
SREADY
Scanner HP sensor (PS39)

Scanning lamp (LA2)
Scanner motor (M3)
*1
*2
Forward Reverse
*1: Shading correction (gain adjustment) is executed 1 sec after the scanning lamp turns on.
*2: Shading correction (CCD original size detection slash level adjustment) is executed 1
secs after the scanning lamp turns on.
F01-301-01
3.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Book Mode

Start key ON
SREADY
SCFW
SCRV
STBY
Scanner HP sensor (PS39)
*1
Scanning lamp (LA2)
Scanner motor (M3)
*2
Forward Reverse
Start position
Start position
*1: Shading correction (gain adjustment and CCD original size detection slash level adjustment) is executed for every job.
*2: Executed only at the end of a scan job.
F01-302-01
Name of period
Description
SREADY(scanner ready) From when the power switch is turned on to when shading correction ends.
Or, from when the Start key is turned on to when the scanner
reaches scanner start position.
SCFW(scanner forward) While the scanner is moving forward to scan the original.
SCRV(scanner reverse)
While the scanner is moving in reverse.
STBY(standby)
From when shading correction ends to when the Start key is
turned on or when the power switch is turned off.
T01-302-01
1-3 R
4. Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs

4.1 Wiring of Major PCBs
J5501 J5004
J1061
DC
controller
PCB
Controller
unit
Differential
PCB
J5502
J5503 J5008
Reader
controller
PCB
CCD/AP PCB
J5003
J6002
Scanner motor
J5011
M3
Inverter PCB
J5007
J5101
Note: The symbol
in the diagram indicates the major wiring route, NOT the flow of signals.
F01-401-01 Wiring of Major PCBs
1-4 R
4.2 Inputs to and Outputs from the Reader Controller PCB

Inputs to and Outputs from the Reader Controller PCB (1/2)
Scanner HP
sensor
Copyboard
cover sensor
Original sensor
PS39
J5057
-1
-2
-3
J5052
-3 -6
-2 -5
-1 -4
J5012 +5V
-3
-2 HPSENS
-1
PS40
J5056
-1
-2
-3
J5051
-6 -1
-5 -2
-4 -3
J5012 +5V
-6
-5 ADF_OPEN* When the copyboard
cover is closed, '1'.
-4
J5053
-1 -3
-2 -2
-3 -1
( only at time of detection )

J5006 +5V
-1
-2 D_SENS3* When paper is detected,
-3
PS43
'1'.
J5011
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
M3
Scanner motor
LA2
J5102
-1
Scanning
lamp
-4
Inverter
PCB
CCD/AP
PCB
CCD
H7
J6002
J5003
-2
J5603
-1
-1
-1
-3
J5001
-1
-2
-2
-2
-1
-3
J5602 Fuse PCB

-1
AC inlet
+24V
B*
B
A*
A
Rotates in response to
alternating '1' and '0'.
(pulse signal)
J5007
+24V
-5
-3 LAMP_ON
-2 INV_ERR
-4
J5002
-1
-2
-3
-4
-1
H6
J5062
-5 -1
-3 -3
-2 -4
-1 -5
J6001
-1
-2
-3
-4
J5100
Mirror heater
Lens heater
J5101
-1
-3
-4
-2
When the scanner is in

home position, '1'.
J5601
See Chapter 2
"Controlling the
Scanning Lamp."
A12V
GND
GND
A5V
See Chapter 3
"Controlling the CCD."
+24V
When the reader controller PCB is ON,

24: ON --> heater: OFF
When the reader controller PCB is OFF,
24V: OFF --> heater: ON
AC100V -2
J5101
100-V model only
F01-402-01
1-5 R
Inputs to and Outputs from the Reader Controller PCB (2/2)
J5010
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
To ADF
GND
+24V
GND
ADF_RX
ADF_TX
ADF_ITOP*
GND
See the ADF

Service Manual.
J5005
-1 +24V
-2 GND
+24V
GND
-3
-4
-1
-2
Printer unit
DC power
supply PCB
J8500
J5105
To ADF connector
F01-402-02
1-6 R
CHAPTER 2
ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM
1. Outline of Operations
1.1 Outline
The major functions of the original exposure system are as follows:
Item
Scanning lamp
Original Scanning
Scanner position detection

Reproduction ratio (zoom)
Scanner drive control

Lens
Scanning lamp activation
Original size detection
Description
Xenon lamp
In book mode: by moving the scanner.
With ADF in use: by stream reading while holding the No. 1
mirror base fixed in position.
By scanner HP sensor (PS39)
[1] Using the Copyboard: 25% to 400%
In main scanning direction, image processing is performed by the controller unit.
In sub scanning direction, the speed of the No. 1 mirror
base is changed (50% or higher), in addition, the image
data is processed by the controller unit (lower than
50%).
[2] Using the ADF: 25% to 200%
In main scanning direction, the image data is processed
by the controller unit.
In sub scanning direction, the speed at which the originals are moved is changed (50% or higher), in addition,
the image data is processed by the controller unit
(lower than 50%).
The No.1/No.2 mirror base is controlled by means of a stepping motor (M3).
Lens array (fixed in position)
[1] Turned on by an inverter circuit.
[2] Monitored for errors.
[1] In book mode, by a reflection type sensor in sub scanning direction; by a CCD in main scanning direction.
[2] With the ADF in use, by the ADF.
2-1 R
The major components of the original exposure system are as follows:
Image leading
Stream reading position
HP edge
(start position)
Original
Copyboard glass
No. 2 mirror
No. 1 mirror base
Lens
No. 1 mirror Scanning lamp
CCD
No. 2 mirror
No. 3 mirror
base
F02-101-01
Scanner motor (M3)

Scanner HP
sensor (PS39)
Scanning
lamp (LA2)
Light-blocking
plate
Copyboard cover
sensor (PS40)
(forward)
(reverse)
No. 1 mirror
base
No. 2 mirror
base
F02-101-02
Component
Scanning lamp
Scanner motor
Scanner HP sensor
Copyboard cover sensor
Notation
LA2
M3
PS39
PS40
Mirror
2-2 R
Description
Xenon lamp (intensity of 70,000 lx)
2-phase stepping motor (under pulse control)
Photointerrupter (detects scanner home position)
Photointerrupter (detects the state (open/closed) of
copyboard cover)
No. 1/No. 2/No. 3 mirror
1.2 Sequence of Operations (original exposure)

1.2.1 Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Closed
Copyboard cover opens

Copyboard cover closes
Start key ON
SCFW
SREADY
STBY
SCRV
STBY
Copyboard cover
sensor (PS40)
Scanner HP sensor
(PS39)
Scanning lamp (LA2)
Scanner motor (M3)
Forward Reverse
*1
Point of original size detection
*2
Start position
HP
Start position
*1: original size detection.*2: shading correction.

F02-102-01
Stream reading
Image leading Point of original Image Stop
position (start position) HP edge
size detection end
position
1. The copyboard cover is opened.
The scanner moves to the point of original
size detection.
2. The copyboard cover is closed.
When the original size has been detected, the
scanner moves to home position.
3. The Start key is pressed.
After shading correction, the scanner moves
to start position.
4. The scanner scans the original.
5. The scanner returns to start position
(at the speed used for 50% reduction).
6. The scanner moves to home position and
remains in wait.
: No. 1 mirror position.
F02-102-02
2-3 R
1.2.2 Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Cover Open
Copyboard cover open

Start key ON
SCFW
SREADY
STBY
STBY
SCRV
Copyboard cover
sensor (PS40)
Scanner HP sensor
(PS39)
Scanning lamp (LA2)
Forward
Scanner motor (M3)
Reverse
*1
*2
Start position
Point of original size detection
Point of original
size detection
Start position
*1: original size detection.*2: shading correction.

F02-102-03

(start position)
HP
Image leading
edge
Point of original
size detection
Image
end
Stop
position
1. The copyboard cover is opened.

The scanner moves to the point of original detection.
2. The Start key is pressed.
After the original size has been detected,
the scanner moves to home position.
3. After shading correction in home position,
the scanner moves to start position.
4. The scanner scans the original.
5. The scanner returns to start position
(at the speed used for 50% reduction).
6. The scanner moves to the point of original size detection.
: No. 1 mirror base
F02-102-04
2-4 R
1.3 Enlargement/Reduction (zoom)

[1] When the copyboard cover is used, the ratio may be between 25% and 400% and the
speed of the scanner is controlled.
[2] When the ADF is used, the ratio may be between 25% and 200% and the speed of
moving the originals is controlled.
1.3.1 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction

For main scanning direction, the original is read at 100% (for both copyboard and ADF);
the size is changed by processing data in the main controller unit.
[1] To reduce, data units are skipped when writing image data to the line memory.
[2] To enlarge, data units are read multiple times when reading image data from the line
memory.
1.3.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction

The reproduction ratio in sub scanning direction is changed by controlling the speed of
the scanner and the speed at which originals are moved. For a reduction between 25% and
49%, however, the main controller unit also functions to change the ratio by processing
data.
[1] To enlarge, the speeds at which the mirror base is moved and the originals are moved
are reduced (i.e., slower than in Direct).
For instance, to enlarge at 200%, the originals are read at 1/2 the speed used for Direct.
[2] To reduce to between 50% and 99%, the speeds at which the mirror base is moved and
the originals are moved are increased (i.e., faster than in Direct).
For instance, to reduce to 50%, the originals are read twice the speed used in Direct.
(speed ratio)
2
1
1/2
1/4
(image ratio)
50%
100%
200%
400%
F02-103-01
[3] To reduce to between 25% and 49%, the image data read at 50% and 98% is subjected
to skipping (1/2) in the main controller unit.
2-5 R
2. Scanner Drive System

2.1 Outline
The following parts are associated with the scanner drive system.
Scanner motor (M3)

[1]
Reader
controller
PCB
Drive signal
Scanner HP Light-blocking
plate
[2] sensor (PS39)
(forward)
[3]
(reverse)
No. 1 mirror base
Copyboard
cover sensor
(PS40)
No. 2 mirror base
F02-201-01
[1] Scanner Motor (M3) Control Signal

Used to turn on/off the motor and to control its direction and speed of rotation.
[2] Scanner HP Sensor (PS39) Detection Signal
Used to make sure that the No. 1 mirror base is at home position.
[3] Copyboard Cover Sensor (PS40) Detection Signal
Used to detect the state (open or close) of the copyboard cover.
2-6 R
2.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor

The system used to control the scanner motor is constructed as follows:
The motor driver turns on/off the scanner motor and controls its direction and speed of
rotation in keeping with the signals from the CPU, IPC, and speed control circuit.
+24V
A
CPU
J5011
Scanner motor
M3
Motor
driver
A*
3
6
IPC
B*
Speed control
circuit
F02-202-01
2.2.1 Controlling the Motor When Scanning an Image

When scanning an image, the motor is controlled as follows, thereby controlling the
movement of the No. 1 mirror base unit:
(start position)
HP
Image leading edge
Accelerate
Travel
speed
[1]
Image end Stop
Maintain
[2]
[3]
Decelerate
[4]
Travel distance
[1] Acceleration. Used to accelerate until the speed most appropriate to the read ratio is
attained.
[2] Approach run. Used to ensure that speed stabilizes.
[3] Image read. Used to read the image at a specific speed suited to the read ratio.
[4] Deceleration. Used to enable the scanner to speed down and stop promptly, starting at
the end of the image.
F02-202-02
2-7 R
2.2.2 Reversing the Scanner After Scanning in Main Reading Direction

When the image has been scanned, the No. 1 mirror base is moved in reverse to home position at the speed used for 50% reduction, regardless of the ratio being used.
E202 (HP detection error)

[1] The No. 1 mirror base does not reach the HP sensor within a specific
period of time.
[2] The HP sensor identifies the presence of the No. 1 mirror base when the
No. 1 mirror base should have been moved away.
E204 (image leading edge detection error)
[1] The image signal is not generated when the No. 1 mirror base is moving
forward.
[2] The ADF does not generate the image leading edge signal in stream
reading mode.
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X (scanner image leading edge

adjustment)
Enter an appropriate value to adjust the image leading edge position.
Range: 0 through 2970 (a change of 12 causes a shift of 1 mm)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ>XY>ADJ-S (scanner home position)
Not change.
Vertical size plate
Copyboard glass
Standard white plate
Decrease
Increase
F02-204-01
2-8 R
Vertical size plate
HP sensor
Copyboard glass

Decrease Increase
F02-204-02
3. Controlling the Scanning Lamp (LA2)

3.1 Outline
The system used to control the scanning lamp is constructed as follows and the items of
control include the following:
[1] Turning on and off the scanning lamp.
[2] Monitoring the scanning lamp for errors.
Inverter PCB
Xenon lamp
Activation
control
circuit
LA2
J5101 J5007 Reader controller

+24V
PCB
1 LAMP_ON 5
3
3
INV_ERR
4
2
2
4
CPU
F02-301-01
3.2 Scanning Lamp

The machines scanning lamp is a xenon lamp of a non-electrode discharge type, in which
xenon gas is sealed in a tube.
On the outside of the glass tube, two electrodes are arranged parallel to the tube axis, and
the inner side of the glass tube is coated with fluorescent material.
The internal gas discharges and, as a result, the fluorescent material glows when a highfrequency voltage is applied across the electrodes.
Electrode
Electrode
Fluorescent
material
Opening
Glass tube
Electrode
Electrode
F02-302-01
3.3 Turning On/Off the Lamp

The scanning lamp is turned on/off in response to the drive signal (LAMP_ON) from the
CPU on the reader controller PCB. When the signal is generated, the inverter generates a
high-frequency, and high-voltage using the drive voltage (+24 V) supplied by the reader
controller PCB to turn on the xenon tube.
2-9 R
3.4 Detecting an Error

The reader controller circuit generates the error signal (INV_ERR) in response to an error
(e.g., output open, short circuit, leak) in the inverter circuit. A fault in the lamp (low intensity, activation failure) will be identified as an activation error caused by lack of intensity
during initial activation (e.g., at time of shading correction).
E220
It is used to indicate a fault in the inverter PCB.
E225
It is used to indicate a fault in the scanning lamp (xenon tube).
2-10 R
4. Detecting the Size of Originals

4.1 Outline
The machine automatically identifies the size of originals based on the combination of intensities measured by reflection type sensors and CCD at specific points.
For main scanning direction, the CCD is used to take measurements (if AB, 4 points; if
Inch, 2 points).
For sub scanning direction, a reflection type photosensor is used (1 point).
4.2 Points of Detection

For main scanning direction, the No. 1 mirror base is moved to the following points in relation to the position of the original to measure the intensity at each point.
For sub scanning direction, on the other hand, measurements are taken while holding the
sensor in place at a specific point.
AB-Configuration
Inch-Configuration
Original sensor
Point of original
detection 1
Point of original
detection 2
Point of original
B5
detection 3
Point of original
detection 4
Original sensor
B5R
A4R
Point of original
detection 1
LTRR
LGL
B4
A4
Point of CCD original detection
A3
Point of original
detection 2
LTR
279.4431.8mm
(11"17")
Point of CCD original detection
F02-402-01
4.3 Outline of Detection

The machine identifies the size of originals in the following two steps:
[1] Detecting External Light (main scanning direction only)
While keeping the scanning lamp off, the CCD level at each point of detection in main
scanning direction is measured. A point at which external light is detected will be identified as indicating the absence of an original, enabling the identification of the width
of an original.
[2] Detecting the Sensor Output Level
The scanning lamp is turned on, and the CCD level at each point of detection in main
scanning direction is measured. In addition, the reflection type photosensor in sub
scanning direction is turned on to measure the sensor output.
The combination of these output measurements is used to identify the size of the original. For specific movements, see the pages that follow.
2-11 R
4.4 Outline of Detection Operation

4.4.1 Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Cover Open
Xenon lamp
Original sensor
Point of original detection 1

Copyboard glass
Copyboard cover
Reader unit
[1] The scanner remains in wait.

No. 1 mirror base: at HP
Xenon lamp: off
Original sensor: disabled
Point of original detection
[2] The copyboard is opened.

Detection starts of external light in main
scanning direction.
No. 1 mirror base: to point of original detection
Xenon lamp: off
(external light)
Original (A4R)
(external light)
F02-404-01
2-12 R
[3] An original is placed.

The width of the original is identified in
relation to the presence/absence of external
light; here, the absence of an original is
identified at points in question, eliminating
B5, B4, A4, and A3.
[4] The Start key is pressed.

In response, original detection is started.
For main scanning direction, the xenon
lamp is turned on to check for reflected
light by the CCD (4 points).
For sub scanning direction, the original
sensor starts detection.
The absence of external light is identified
as indicating the absence of an original.
The machine will identify the size of an
original based on the combination of the
results (T02-404-01)

AB-Configuration
Originals
size
Inch-Configuration
Point of CCD detection

1
2
3
4
Original
Originals Point of CCD detection
sensor
size
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5
B5R
None
Originals
sensor
11"17"
LGL
LTRR
LTR
None
: reflection present
: reflection absent
T02-404-01
4.4.2 Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Cover Close

Xenon lamp
Original sensor
Copyboard cover
Reader unit

Copyboard glass
[1] The scanner remains in wait.

No. 1 mirror base: HP
Xenon lamp: off
Point of original detection
[2] The copyboard cover is opened.

Detection starts of external light in main
scanning direction.
No. 1 mirror base: to point of original detection
Xenon lamp: off
(external light)
Original (A4R)
(external light)
[3] An original is set.

The width of an original is identified in
terms of the presence or absence of external light; here, the external light is blocked
and the absence of an original is identified,
excluding B5, B4, A4, and A3.
2-13 R
[4] The copyboard cover is closed.

When the copyboard cover is brought
down to 25, the Copyboard cover sensor
detects the closed state, and original size
detection starts.
For main scanning direction, the xenon
lamp is turned on, and the CCD checks for
reflected light (4 points).
For sub scanning direction, the original
sensor starts detection.
25
[5] The copyboard cover is fully closed.

The changes in the output level of each
sensor are monitored until the copyboard
cover is fully closed. The absence of a
change is identified as indicating the absence of paper, and the size of the original
is identified based on the combination of
changes in level at five points (T02-40402).
[6] The scanner remains in wait (for a press on
the Start key).
The No. 1 mirror base moves to home position, and the scanner waits for a press on
the Start key (wait state).
F02-404-02
AB-Configuration
Originals
size
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5
B5R
None
Inch-Configuration
Point of CCD detection

1
2
3
4
Original
Originals Point of CCD detection
sensor
size
Original
sensor
11"* 17"
LGL
LTRR
LTR
None
: Changes
: Does not changes
T02-404-02
2-14 R
5. Scanning Lamp
5.1 Removing the Scanning Lamp
1) Remove the copyboard glass.
2) Remove the right upper cover and the
right upper cover base.
3) Remove the reader left cover; then, detach the reader front cover.
4) Remove the reader controller PCB.
5) Move the No. 1 mirror base [1] as far as
the cut-in made in the frame.
6) Remove the three screws [2] from the
No. 1 mirror base, and detach the scanning lamp [3] together with the cable
fixing plate [4].
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F02-501-01
7) Remove the four screws [5], and detach

the blanking plate [6].
[6]
[5]
[5]
F02-501-02
2-15 R
8) Sticking a screwdriver through the hole

in the top of the frame, disconnect the
connector [8] from the inverter PCB [7],
and detach the cable fixing plate [10].
[8]
[7]
[9]
[10]
F02-501-03
When mounting the scanning

lamp, be sure to hook the cable
[11] on the pulley [13] of the
No. 2 mirror base [12] without
twisting it.
[13]
[11]
[12]
F02-501-04
2-16 R
5.2 Points to Note When Replacing the Scanning Lamp

Do not work while the scanning lamp is
hot.
Do not leave fingerprints on the surface
of the scanning lamp.
If the surface of the scanning lamp is
soiled, dry wipe it.
Do not touch the light window of the
scanning lamp, as when mounting it.
Do not subject the scanning lamp to impact.
If the lamp fell, do not mount it back
regardless of its condition (cracking can
occur).

Execute CCD auto adjustment in service mode, and record the updated CCD adjustment
data on the service label.
1. CCD Auto Adjustment
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>
CCD-ADJ
2. CCD Adjustment Data
all items under
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
2-17 R
6. Scanner Drive Block

6.1 Scanner Motor
6.1.1 Removing the Scanner Motor
[2]
1) Remove the reader rear cover.

2) Remove the reader controller.
(See F03-601-01)
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the
ADF base (right) [2].
4) Remove the five screws [3], and detach
the motor cover [4].
[1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
F02-601-01
5) Remove the two springs [5], and remove the three screws [6]; then, while
shifting the motor unit [7] in the direction of the arrow, detach the belt.
[5]
[6]
[6]
[5]
[7]
F02-601-02
6) Remove the two screws [8], and detach

the scanner motor [10] from the motor
base [9].
[10]
[9]
[8]
F02-601-03
2-18 R
6.1.2 Mounting the Scanner Motor

1) Attach the belt [3] to the pulley [2] of
the scanner motor [1].
2) Fit the motor base to its position, fit the
two springs to provide tension to the
belt; then, secure it in place with three
screws.(Use the springs and the screws
removed in step5))
[1]
[2]
[3]
F02-601-04
2-19 R
6.2 Scanner System Drive Cable

6.2.1 Removing the Scanner System Drive Cable
Obtain the following before starting to replace the scanner drive cable:
1)
2)
3)
mirror positioning tool (FY9-3009-000)

Remove the ADF.
Remove the copyboard glass.
Remove the reader left cover and the
reader front cover.
4) Remove the motor cover. (See steps 1)
through 4) used to the motor.)
the PCB base [2].
[2]
[1]
F02-602-01

ADF base (left) [4]; then, remove the
three screws [5], and detach the
copyboard sensor base [6].
[3]
[5]
[4]
[6]
F02-602-02
7) Remove the 15 screws [7], and remove

the two screws [8]; then, detach the
reader upper frame [9].
[7]
[8]
[7]
[9]
[7]
F02-602-03
2-20 R
8) Remove the two cable fixing screws

[11] of the No. 1 mirror base [10].
9) Remove the two springs [12] used to
secure the cable in place.
10) Remove the cable fixing plate [13] and
each pulley cable.
[11]
[10]
[11]
[13]
[12]
F02-602-04
2-21 R
6.2.2 Routing the Scanner Drive Cable

Route the scanner cable to each pulley and hook mirror base in the order indicated:
1) Loosen the screw on the cable fixing plate.
2) Fit the ball of the cable into the hole of the drive pulley, and wind the cable (4 times inward, 5 times outward); then, tape it in place. When winding, be sure that the cable
metal fixing is inside.
3) Hook the cable on each pulley, and temporarily fix one end to the cable fixing plate and
the other end to the hook of the reader frame.
4) Temporarily fix the cable metal fixing to the No. 1 mirror base. (Do not fully secure it.)
5) Mount the reader paper frame.
F02-602-05
2-22 R
When mounting the reader upper frame, be sure to go through

the following steps:
[2]
[1]
1) Fit the ten claws [1] of the reader frame

correctly into the cut-offs in the reader
upper frame.
2) Secure the positions [2] of the six left/
right claws using screws.
3) Fit the two screws [3] at the end.
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F02-602-06
6.2.3 Positioning the No. 1/2 Mirror Base

1) Set the pins of the mirror position tool
as indicated.
[C]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[B]
[A]
Initial FY9-3009 configuration

(for rear)
Configuration used for the machine

(for rear)
[C]
[A]
[B]
[A]
Initial FY9-3009 configuration

(for front)
[C]
[B]
Configuration used for the machine

(for front)
F02-602-07
2-23 R
2) Insert the pins of the mirror positioning

tool (front [2]/rear [3]) into each of the
holes [1]: No. 1 mirror base, No. 2 mirror base, and rail. The position of the
No. 2 mirror base is adjusted by sliding
the cable fixing plate to the front and
the rear.
[2]
[1]
F02-602-08
[3]
[1]
F02-602-09
3) Secure the end of the cable so far temporarily fixed to the hook of the reader
frame using a spring.
4) Fully tighten the screw on the cable fixing plate.
5) Fully tighten the cable metal fixing on
the No. 1 mirror base.
6) Detach the mirror positioning tool.
7) Reverse steps 1) through 6) for mounting.
2-24 R
7. Others
7.1 Removing the Original Size Sensor
2) Move the No. 1 mirror base to the left
end.
3) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect
the connector [2]; then, free the cable
from the cable clamp [3], and detach the
original sensor unit [4].
[4]
[1]
[5]
[3]
[2]
F02-701-01
When removing the original

sensor, take care not to damage
it against the cable [5].
2-25 R
7.2 Removing the HP Sensor

1) Remove the ADF unit from the reader
unit.
ADF base (left) [2].
4) Remove the three screws [3], and detach
the fuse base [4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
F02-702-01

sensor base [6]; then, disconnect the
connector [7], and detach the HP sensor
[8] from the base.
[7]
[5]
[8]
[6]
F02-702-02
2-26 R
7.3 Removing the Copyboard Sensor

the fuse PCB base [2].
[1]
[2]
F02-703-01
3) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the screw [4]; then, detach the
copyboard sensor cover [5] and the
copyboard sensor [6].
[5]
[3]
[4]
[6]
F02-703-02
2-27 R
8. PCBs
8.1 Removing the Fuse PCB
1) Remove the reader rear cover..
2) Remove the three screws [1], and free
the fuse PCB base [2] from the ADF
mounting plate.
[1]
[2]
F02-801-01
[4]
3) Disconnect the connector [3], and free

the harness from the edge saddle [4];
then, draw out the fuse PCB farther.
[2]
[3]
F02-801-02
the three connectors [6]; then, detach
the fuse PCB [7].
[6]
[6]
[7]
[5]
[6]
F02-801-03
2-28 R
8.2 Removing the Inverter PCB

2) Remove the reader controller PCB.
3) Remove the three screws [1], and detach the blanking plate [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
F02-802-01
4) Disconnect the two connectors from the
inverter PCB [1].
[3]
[4]
[4]
F02-802-02
5) Remove the two screws [5], and pull

out the inverter unit [6].
[6]
[5]
F02-802-03
2-29 R
6) Remove the two screws [7], and disconnect the connector [8]; then, detach the
inverter PCB [9].
[9]
[8]
[7]
F02-802-04
Points to Note When Mounting
the Inverter PCB
When fitting the inverter PCB
[1] into the reader frame, be
sure to fit the leading edge [2]
of the frame of the inverter PCB
into the mounting hole in the
reader frame.
[2]
[1]
F02-802-05
2-30 R
CHAPTER 3
IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
1. Outline
The major functions of the image processing system are as follows:
[1] CCD (image sensor)
Number of lines: 1
Number of pixels: 7450
Size of pixel: 4.7 x 4.7 m
[2] Shading Correction
Shading adjustment: executed in service mode
Shading correction: executed for each copy
[3] Auto Density Adjustment (AE)
Executed for each line in main scanning direction.
The image processing system consists of the following functional blocks:
Analog image processing block
CCD
Analog
image
processing
A/D
conversion
Digital image processing block

Shading processing
Controller unit
Auto density
correction (AE)
CCD/AP PCB
F03-100-01
Each of the PCBs used in the image processing system has the following functions:
[1] CCD/AP PCB. Drives the CCD, performs analog image processing, performs A/D
conversion.
[2] Reader controller PCB. Performs shading correction, performs auto density adjustment
(AE).
3-1 R
2. Analog Image Processing

2.1 Outline
Analog image processing is performed by the CCD/AP PCB, which has the following
major functions:
[1] Drives the CCD.
[2] Corrects the gain in the CCD output, corrects offset.
[3] Performs A/D conversion of CCD output.
CCD
A12V
J6001
J5002
J6002
J5003
A5V
Odd-number pixels Even-number pixels

Analog image
signal
CCD control signal
CCD drive
control
Gain/offset
correction data
Even-number
A/D
pixels
conversion
Odd-number
A/D
pixels
conversion
Analog signal
processing unit
Gain correction
Offset correction
Digital image signal
Reader
controller
PCB
Digital image signal

8
CCD/AP PCB
F03-201-01
2.2 Driving the CCD

The machines CCD sensor is a single-line linear image sensor, and is composed of 7450
pixel photo cells.
The signals subjected to phtoconversion in the light-receiving segment are sent out in two
types of analog signals: even-number (EVEN) pixels and odd-number (ODD) pixels.
Output buffer
Odd-number pixel data
Shift register
Gate
Light receiving
segment
(photodiode)
6 5
4 3
2 1
Gate
Shift register
Even-number pixel data

Output buffer
F03-202-01 CCD Block Diagram

3-2 R
2.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction of the CCD Output

To correct discrepancies in the efficiency of photoconversion among pixels, the analog
video signals from the CCD are corrected: in gain correction, the rates of amplification are
standardized; in offset correction, on the other hand, the output voltage in the absence of incoming light is set to a specific level.
2.4 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output

The analog video signals of odd-number and even-number pixels after correction are converted into 8-bit digital signals that correspond to specific pixel voltage levels by the A/D
converter.
COPIER/ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y (CCD read start position adjustment)

It is used to adjust the parameter used determining the read start position in
main scanning direction.
Range: 0 to 400
(A change by 12 results in a shift of 1 mm.)
Decrease
Increase
Read start position
Original
Vertical size plate
F03-205-01
3-3 R
3. Digital Image Processing

3.1 Outline
Digital image processing is performed by the reader controller PCB, which has the following major functions:
[1] Shading correction
[2] Auto density adjustment (AE)
J5003 Reader controller PCB
J6002
EEP-ROM
Gain/offset
correction data
CPU
Target
value
SRAM
CCD/AP
PCB
Even-number pixel
digital image signal
Even-number pixel
8
Shading correction
Auto density
correction (AE)
Odd-number pixel
J5004
Odd-number pixel 8
8
F03-301-01 Functional Blocks
3.2 Shading Correction

3.2.1 Outline
The output of the CCD will not necessarily be uniform because of the following factors
even if the density of the original in question is perfectly uniform:
1) The level of sensitivity of a CCD pixel differs from that of another.
2) The level of penetration of light differs between the center and the periphery of a lens.
3) The intensity of the scanning lamp differs between the middle and the ends of the
lamp.
4) The scanning lamp is subject to deterioration.
Shading correction is executed to correct discrepancies in the output of the CCD, and it
may be of either of the following two: shading adjustment used to determine a target level in
service mode and shading correction executed when scanning each original.
To make up for the fluctuations in the intensity of light occurring at short intervals, edge
area gain correction is also executed.(ADF in use)
3-4 R
3.2.2 Shading Adjustment

In this adjustment, the density of white paper and that of the standard white plate are measured, and the results are stored in memory.
The data is computed for use as the target level during shading correction. The adjustment
is designed for service mode and is used upon installation of the machine, after replacement
of the scanning lamp, or when correcting changes in the intensity of the scanning lamp occurring over time.
3.2.3 Shading Correction

This correction is executed each time an original is scanned. The density of the standard
white plate is measured and the result is compared against the target value stored in the
shading correction circuit. The difference is used as the shading correction value, which will
be used to correct the variation in CCD pixels, thereby ensuring a specific level of image
density.
CCD output
Characteristics
after correction
Characteristics
before correction
Target value
Results of
measurement
White
Original density
F03-302-01
3-5 R
3.2.4 Edge Gain Correction (ADF in use)

In stream reading with the ADF in use, the No. 1 mirror base is fixed in position. To
check for changes in the intensity of the scanning lamp, the edge gain correction plate (gray;
mounted at the edge of read position) is read, and a gain that enables the attainment of a
specific intensity is computed.
The result is used to correct the data which otherwise would be affected by changes in the
intensity of light.(Not executed if AE is selected.)
Edge gain correction plate
0 pixel
Copyboard glass
Main scanning
direction
Reading
glass
7450 pixels
Standard white plate (for shading)
F03-302-02
3-6 R
3.3 Auto Density Adjustment (AE)

3.3.1 Outline
As in the case of a newspaper, some originals have a dark background. Auto density correction is executed to reproduce the information (text, graphics) of such originals by removing the background.
This adjustment is enabled in density auto mode or when text mode is selected and data is
processed by the ABC circuit.
3.3.2 ABC Circuit

A colored background is identified as being white by changing the height of the dynamic
range according to the chromatic level of the background as shown in the following figure
for the CCD output level (8bit) of digital image signals (A/D converted).
Colored Original
White Background Original

Surface of original
FFh (white)
Output level
FFh (white)
A
B
00h (black)
00h (black)
A : dynamic range of white-background original.

B : dynamic range of colored-background original.
F03-303-01
3-7 R
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ (shading auto adjustment)

Execute the mode after replacing the CCD unit, scanning lamp, reader controller PCB, or standard white plate.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>PPR (density data of standard white paper)

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>PLT (density data of standard white plate)
COPIER>AJDUST>CCD>GAIN-E/O (gain adjustment input of CCD
output)
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>OFST-E/O (offset adjustment input of CCD
output)
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>SH_RATIO (white level ratio data of standard white plate and standard white paper during shading correction)
If a faulty image is generated after executing shading auto adjustment, enter
the parameter values indicated on the service label.
COPIER>ADJUST>AE>AE-TBL (text density adjustment for realtime AE mode)

Use it to change the parameter for adjustment of the density correction
curve (for real-time AE mode; 10 steps).
Range: 0 to 9 (default: 4)
Copy density
White
Lower setting
decreases text density
Higher setting
increases text density
White
Original density
F03-304-01
3-8 R
4. External Covers
4.1 Removing the Reader Left Cover
1) Remove the two removing screws [1],
and detach the reader left cover [2].
[1]
[2]
F03-401-01
4.2 Removing the Reader Right Cover

2) Remove the two mounting screws [1],
and detach the reader right cover [2].
[1]
[2]
F03-402-01
3-9 R
4.3 Removing the Rear Front Cover

2) Remove the reader left cover and the
reader right cover.
and detach the reader front cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F03-403-01
3-10 R
4.4 Removing the Reader Rear Cover

1) Remove the seven mounting screws [1],
and detach the reader rear cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F03-404-01
[3]
When mounting the reader rear

cover, be sure that the sheet attached to it is not bent. (Take
care so that it is under the
copyboard glass.)
F03-404-02
3-11 R
5. CCD/AP PCB
5.1 Removing the CCD Unit
1) Remove the reader unit.
3) Move the No. 1 mirror base to the left
end.
4) Remove the reader left cover and the
reader front cover.
5) Remove the eight screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach
tje CCD shielding plate [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]

the connector [5]; then, free the cable
from the cable clamp [6], and detach the
original sensor unit [7].
F03-501-01
[1]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
F03-501-02
7) Remove the four screws [8], and disconnect the connector [9]; then, free the
flat cable [10], and free the two fixing
claws [11]. Thereafter, detach the CCD
unit [12].
[8]
[8]
[10]
[11]
[9]
[12]
F03-501-03
3-12 R
5.2 When Replacing the CCD/AP PCB

Be sure to execute CCD auto adjustment in service mode, and record the updated CCD
adjustment data on the service label.
1. CCD Auto Adjustment
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD
>CCD-ADJ
2. CCD Adjustment data
all items under
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
3-13 R
6. Reader Controller PCB

6.1 Removing the Reader Controller PCB
2) Remove the differential PCB.
3) Disconnect the eight connectors [1], remove the seven screws [2], and remove
the flat cable [3]; then, detach the reader
controller PCB [4].
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F03-601-01
6.2 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB

Troubleshooting>Chapter 3 "Standards/Adjustments">7. "Electrical"
3-14 R
6.3 Removing the Differential PCB

and detach the differential PCB mounting plate [2].
[1]
[2]
F03-603-01
3) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the flat cable [4].
[3]
[4]
F03-603-02
4) Remove the two mounting screws [5]
and two hex screws [6]; then, detach the
Differential PCB [7].
[7]
[5]
[6]
F03-603-03
3-15 R
PRINTER UNIT
COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i/iR6000i REV.0 JUEN 2001
CONTENTS
Contents
1. Safety .............................................. 1-1P
1.1 Safety of Laser Light ............... 1-1P
1.2 Regulations Under the Center for
Devices and Radiological Health
................................................. 1-1P
1.3 Handling the Laser Unit ........... 1-3P

1.4 Safety of Toner ......................... 1-6P
2. Image Formation ............................ 1-7P
2.1 Outline ..................................... 1-7P
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

1. Basic Operations ............................ 2-1P
1.1 Functional Construction .......... 2-1P
1.2 Outline of Electrical Circuitry ... 2-2P
1.2.1 Outline ............................... 2-2P
1.2.2 DC Controller PCB ........... 2-2P
1.3 Sequence of Basic Operations ... 2-4P
1.3.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at
Power-On ........................... 2-4P
1.4 Controlling the Main Motor (M2)
................................................. 2-6P
1.4.1 Outline ............................... 2-6P

1.5 Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs ................................... 2-7P
1.5.1 Wiring Diagram of Major PCBs
........................................... 2-7P
1.5.2 Inputs to the DC Controller
PCB .................................... 2-8P
1.5.3 Inputs to the DC Controller
PCB .................................. 2-14P
CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

1. Outline of Operations ..................... 3-1P
1.1 Outline ..................................... 3-1P
1.2 Basic Sequence of Operations
(laser exposure system) ........... 3-3P
2. Generating Sync Signals ................ 3-4P
2.1 Outline ..................................... 3-4P
2.2 Flow of Sync Signals ............... 3-5P
3. Laser Driver Circuit ....................... 3-6P

3.1 Controlling the Laser ............... 3-6P
4. Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor
........................................................ 3-9P
4.1 Outline ..................................... 3-9P
5. Disassembly and Assembly .......... 3-10P
5.1 Scanner Unit .......................... 3-11P
P1
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

1. Outline of Processes ....................... 4-1P
1.1 Outline ..................................... 4-1P
1.2 Basic Sequence of Operations (image formation system) .............. 4-3P
2. Potential Control ............................ 4-5P
2.1 Outline ..................................... 4-5P
2.1.1 Controlling Potential for Printing/Copying ....................... 4-6P
2.2 Determining Primary Current
............................................... 4-11P
2.3 Determining the Laser Output
............................................... 4-12P
2.4 Determining the Developing Bias
............................................... 4-13P
2.5 APC Correction ..................... 4-14P
2.6 Density Adjustment in Each Mode
............................................... 4-16P
2.6.1 Density Adjustment During
Copying ........................... 4-16P
2.6.2 Density Adjustment During
Printing ............................ 4-17P
3. Controlling Charging ................... 4-18P
3.1 Controlling Pre-Exposure LED
............................................... 4-18P
3.1.1 Outline ............................. 4-18P
3.2 Controlling Primary Charging
............................................... 4-19P
3.2.1 Outline ............................. 4-19P
3.2.2 Primary Charging Assembly
Cleaning Mechanism ....... 4-20P
3.2.3 Others .............................. 4-21P
3.3 Dust-Collecting Roller Bias ... 4-22P
3.3.1 Outline ............................. 4-22P
3.4 Controlling the Pre-Transfer Charging .......................................... 4-23P
3.4.1 Outline ............................. 4-23P
3.4.2 Controlling the Output to Suit
the Environment (fuzzy control)
......................................... 4-24P
3.4.3 Cleaning Mechanism for the
Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly .................................... 4-25P
P2
3.4.4 Others .............................. 4-26P

3.5 Controlling Transfer Charging
............................................... 4-27P
3.5.1 Outline ............................. 4-27P
3.5.2 Controlling the Output to Suit
the Environment (fuzzy control)
......................................... 4-28P
3.5.3 Cleaning Mechanism for the
Transfer Charging Assembly
......................................... 4-29P
3.5.4 Others .............................. 4-30P
3.6 Controlling Separation Charging
............................................... 4-32P
3.6.1 Outline ............................. 4-32P
3.6.2 Correcting the Output to Suit the
Environment and the Density of
the Original Used ............. 4-34P
3.6.3 Others .............................. 4-35P
4. Hopper/Developing Assembly ..... 4-36P
4.1 Outline ................................... 4-36P
4.2 Controlling the Drive to the Hopper/Developing Assembly ...... 4-37P
4.3 Controlling the Developing Bias
............................................... 4-39P
4.4 Detecting the Level of Toner and
Controlling the Supply of Toner
............................................... 4-41P
4.4.1 Sequence of Operations (toner
supply) ............................. 4-42P
5. Drum Cleaner Unit ....................... 4-43P
5.1 Outline ................................... 4-43P
5.2 Detecting the Waste Toner ..... 4-44P
6. Controlling the Drum Heater ....... 4-46P
6.1 Outline ................................... 4-46P
7.1 Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit ....... 4-50P
7.1.1 Removing the Pre-Exposure
Lamp Unit ........................ 4-50P
7.2 Photosensitive Drum .............. 4-51P
7.2.1 Removing the Drum Unit
......................................... 4-51P
CONTENTS
7.2.2
Replacing the Drum Heater

......................................... 4-52P
7.2.3 Mounting the Photosensitive
Drum ................................ 4-53P
7.2.4 Setting the DIP Switch for the
Drum Heater Control PCB
......................................... 4-53P
7.3 Process Unit ........................... 4-54P
7.3.1 Removing the Process Unit
......................................... 4-54P
7.3.2 Mounting the Process Unit
......................................... 4-56P
7.4 Potential Sensor/Potential Control
PCB ........................................ 4-57P
7.4.1 Removing the Potential Sensor/
Potential Control PCB ..... 4-57P
7.4.2 Adjusting the Potential Sensor
......................................... 4-59P
7.5 Primary Charging Assembly .. 4-61P
7.5.1 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly ................... 4-61P
7.6 Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly
............................................... 4-62P
7.6.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer
Charging Assembly .......... 4-62P
7.7 Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly .................................... 4-63P
7.7.1 Removing the Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly .. 4-63P
7.7.2 Mounting the Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly .. 4-63P
7.8 Charging Wire ........................ 4-66P
7.8.1 Outline ............................. 4-66P
7.8.2 Removing the Wire Cleaner of
the Primary Charging Assembly
......................................... 4-66P
7.8.3
Routing the Charging Wire

......................................... 4-66P
7.8.4 Routing the Grid for the Primary
Charging Assembly .......... 4-69P
7.8.5 Adjusting the Height of the
Charging Wire .................. 4-71P
7.8.6 Cleaning the Primary Anti-Stray
Sheet ................................ 4-72P
7.9 Developing Assembly ............ 4-73P
7.9.1 Removing the Developing Assembly from the Machine
......................................... 4-73P
7.9.2 Removing the Blade Unit
......................................... 4-74P
7.9.3 Mounting the Blade ......... 4-75P
7.9.4 Removing the Developing Cylinder/Magnetic Seal ......... 4-75P
7.9.5 Cleaning the Developing AntiStray Sheet ....................... 4-77P
7.10 Hopper Assembly ................... 4-78P
7.10.1 Removing the Hopper Assembly
from the Machine ............ 4-78P
7.11 Drum Cleaner ......................... 4-79P
7.11.1 Construction .................... 4-79P
7.11.2 Removing the Cleaning Blade
......................................... 4-79P
7.11.3 Mounting the Cleaning Blade
......................................... 4-80P
7.11.4 Mounting the Side Seal ... 4-82P
7.11.5 Cleaning the Cleaner Side
Scraper ............................. 4-83P
7.12 Separation Claw/Separation Claw
Drive Assembly ...................... 4-84P
7.12.1 Removing from the Drum Unit
............................................... 4-84P
P3
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

1. Outline ............................................ 5-1P
1.1 Specifications and Construction
................................................. 5-1P
1.2 Arrangement of Roller and Sensors
................................................. 5-2P
2. Pickup Assembly ............................ 5-4P
2.1 Pickup Control System ............ 5-4P
2.1.1 Outline ............................... 5-6P
2.1.2 Sequence of Operations
(pickup) .............................. 5-7P
2.1.3 Pickup Retry Operation ..... 5-9P
2.2 Lifter Movement .................... 5-11P
2.2.1 Outline ............................. 5-11P
2.2.2 Lifter Limiter Control Circuit
(right/left deck) ................ 5-13P
2.2.3 Detecting the Presence/Absence
of Paper ............................ 5-14P
2.2.4 Detecting the Level of Paper
......................................... 5-14P
2.3 Identifying the Size of Paper in the
Cassette .................................. 5-17P
2.3.1 Right/Left Deck ............... 5-17P
2.3.2 Cassette 3/4 ...................... 5-17P
2.3.3 Markings on the Width Guide
Rail ................................... 5-19P
2.3.4 Paper Sizes ....................... 5-20P
2.4 Manual Feed Tray Pickup Assembly
............................................... 5-23P
2.4.1 Pickup Operation ............. 5-23P
2.4.2 Detecting the Size of Paper on
the Manual Feed Tray ...... 5-24P
3. Controlling the Registration Clutch
...................................................... 5-25P
3.1 Outline ................................... 5-25P
3.2 Control System ...................... 5-25P
4. Double-Sided Prints ..................... 5-26P
4.1 Control System ...................... 5-26P
4.1.1 Sending Paper to the Reversing
Assembly After Printing on the
First Side .......................... 5-26P
P4
4.1.2
Sending Paper from the Reversing Assembly to the Duplexing/

Feeding Assembly ........... 5-27P
4.1.3 Outline ............................. 5-28P
4.2 Sequence of Operations (printing)
............................................... 5-29P
4.3 Through-Path Operation ........ 5-30P
4.3.1 Outline ............................. 5-30P
4.3.2 Outline of Operations ...... 5-31P
4.4 Detecting Horizontal Registration
Position .................................. 5-35P
4.4.1 Outline ............................. 5-35P
4.4.2 Operation ......................... 5-36P
5. Controlling the Pickup Assembly 5-37P
5.1 Pickup Assembly Motors ....... 5-37P
6. Controlling the Delivery Assembly
...................................................... 5-38P
6.1 Reversal Delivery Operation ... 5-38P
7. Controlling the Cassette Heater ... 5-40P
8. Detecting Jams ............................. 5-42P
8.1 Outline ................................... 5-42P
8.1.1 Arrangement of Jam Sensors
......................................... 5-42P
8.1.2 Types of Jams .................. 5-43P
8.2 Sequence of Operations
(jam detection) ...................... 5-44P
8.2.1 Delay Jam ........................ 5-44P
8.2.2 Stationary Jams ................ 5-46P
8.2.3 Jam History ...................... 5-47P
9.1 Manual Feed Tray Assembly ... 5-49P
9.1.1 Removing the Right Upper
Cover ............................... 5-49P
9.1.2 Opening of the Right Upper
Cover ............................... 5-49P
9.1.3 Removing the Manual Feed
Pull-Out Roller Unit ........ 5-50P
9.1.4 Removing the Feeding Roller
......................................... 5-50P
9.1.5 Removing the Separation Roller
......................................... 5-50P
CONTENTS
9.1.6
Adjusting the Pressure of the

Separation Roller ............. 5-51P
9.1.7 Removing the Manual feed Tray
Paper Sensor .................... 5-52P
9.1.8 Attaching the Side Guide Timing Belt in the Manual Feed
Tray Assembly ................. 5-53P
9.1.9 Removing the Manual Feed
Pull-Out Roller ................ 5-53P
9.2 Deck Pickup Assembly .......... 5-54P
9.2.1 Removing the Right Deck
Pickup Assembly ............. 5-54P
9.2.2 Removing the Left Deck Pickup
Assembly ......................... 5-54P
9.2.3 Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup
Assembly ......................... 5-55P
9.2.4 Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup
Assembly ......................... 5-55P
9.2.5 Removing the Pickup Roller
......................................... 5-55P
......................................... 5-56P
9.2.7 Orientation of the Feeding
Roller of the Deck/Cassette
Pickup Assembly ............. 5-57P
......................................... 5-57P
9.2.9 Adjusting the Separation Roller
Pressure ............................ 5-59P
9.2.10 Orientation of the Separation
Roller ............................... 5-59P
9.2.11 Adjusting the Left/Right Registration for the Front Deck
......................................... 5-60P
9.2.12 Adjusting the Registration for
the Cassette 3/4 ................ 5-60P
9.2.13 Removing the Lifter Motor
M20 (M21) of the Cassette 3
(4) .................................... 5-61P
9.2.14 Adjusting the Position of the
Lifter Motor M20 (M21) of the
Cassette 3 (cassette 4) ...... 5-61P

Cassette 3/4 Pickup Solenoid
(SL3, 4) ............................ 5-63P
9.3 Vertical Path Roller Assembly
............................................... 5-64P
9.3.1 Removing the Vertical Path
Roller 1 ............................ 5-64P
Roller 2 ............................ 5-64P
Roller 3/4 ......................... 5-65P
9.4 Registration Feeding Assembly
............................................... 5-66P
9.4.1 Removing the Registration
Clutch .............................. 5-66P
9.4.2 Removing the Registration
Roller ............................... 5-66P
9.5 Feeding Assembly .................. 5-68P
9.5.1 Removing the Feeding Belt
......................................... 5-68P
9.5.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeding
Unit Releasing Lever Switch
......................................... 5-69P
9.6 Duplex Unit ............................ 5-70P
9.6.1 Removing the Duplex Unit
......................................... 5-70P
9.6.2 Removing the Reversing Flapper Solenoid ..................... 5-70P
9.6.3 Removing the Reversal Motor
......................................... 5-70P
9.6.4 Mounting the Reversal Motor
......................................... 5-71P
9.6.5 Removing the Duplexing Feeding Left Motor ................. 5-72P
9.6.6 Removing the Duplex Feeding
Right Motor ..................... 5-72P
9.6.7 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor .................... 5-73P
9.6.8 Removing the Duplex Pre-Registration Sensor ................ 5-73P
9.6.9 Removing the Duplex Paper
Sensor .............................. 5-74P
9.6.10 Removing the Reversal Sensor 1
......................................... 5-75P
P5
CONTENTS

......................................... 5-75P
9.6.12 Removing the Left Deck Feed
Paper Sensor .................... 5-76P
9.6.13 Removing the Horizontal Registration Sensor ................... 5-77P
9.6.14 Removing the Duplex Driver
PCB .................................. 5-77P
9.6.15 Removing the Horizontal Registration Unit ....................... 5-78P

9.6.16 Removing the Duplex Feeding
Fan ................................... 5-78P
9.6.17 Mounting the Reversing Flapper
Solenoid ........................... 5-79P
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

1. Outline of Operation ...................... 6-1P
1.1 Outline ..................................... 6-1P
1.2 Basic Sequence of Operations (fixing system) ............................... 6-4P
2. Fixing Drive System ...................... 6-5P
2.1 Outline ..................................... 6-5P
2.2 Controlling the Drive of the Fixing
Roller ....................................... 6-6P
2.3 Controlling the Drive of the Cleaning Web .................................... 6-7P
2.4 Controlling the Drive of the Fixing
Assembly Inlet Guide .............. 6-8P
2.5 Controlling the Reciprocating
Mechanisms of the Thermistor
................................................. 6-9P
2.6 Controlling the Reciprocating
Mechanism of the Upper Separation
Claw ....................................... 6-10P
3. Controlling the Fixing Temperature
...................................................... 6-11P
3.1 Outline ................................... 6-11P
3.2 Temperature Control .............. 6-12P
3.2.1 Normal Sequence ............. 6-13P
3.2.2 Temperature Control by Mode
......................................... 6-15P
3.3 Detecting Errors ..................... 6-18P
4.1 Fixing Assembly .................... 6-21P
4.1.1 Removing the Fixing/Feeding
Unit .................................. 6-21P
4.1.2 Removing the Fixing Assembly
......................................... 6-22P
P6
4.2 Fixing Roller Cleaning Assembly

............................................... 6-24P
4.2.1 Removing the Fixing Web
......................................... 6-24P
4.2.2 Mounting the Fixing Web
......................................... 6-25P
4.2.3 Adjusting the Fixing Web Solenoid (SL9) ........................ 6-26P
4.3 Fixing Heater and the Control Parts
............................................... 6-27P
4.3.1 Removing the Main/Sub Heater
......................................... 6-27P
4.3.2 Mounting the Main/Sub Heater
......................................... 6-28P
4.3.3 Removing the Thermal Switch
......................................... 6-28P
4.3.4 Removing the Main Thermistor
......................................... 6-29P
4.3.5 Removing the Sub Thermistor
......................................... 6-31P
4.4 Fixing Roller Assembly ......... 6-32P
4.4.1 Removing the Fixing Upper
Roller ............................... 6-32P
4.4.2 Mounting the Fixing Upper
Roller ............................... 6-33P
4.4.3 Removing the Fixing Lower
Roller ............................... 6-33P
4.4.4 Adjusting the Nip ............ 6-34P
4.5 Fixing Separation Assembly .. 6-35P
4.5.1 Removing the Upper Separation
Claw ................................. 6-35P
CONTENTS
4.5.2
Removing the Lower Separation

Claw ................................. 6-35P
4.6 Delivery Assembly ................. 6-36P
4.6.1 Removing the External Delivery
Roller ............................... 6-36P
4.6.2 Removing the Internal Delivery
Roller ............................... 6-37P
Delivery Flapper Solenoid
(SL5) ................................ 6-38P
4.7 Paper Sensor .......................... 6-39P
4.7.1 Removing the Claw Jam Sensor
......................................... 6-39P
4.7.2
Removing the Internal Delivery

Sensor .............................. 6-39P
4.7.3 Removing the Delivery Jam
Sensor .............................. 6-40P
4.7.4 Removing the External Delivery
Sensor .............................. 6-41P
4.8 Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide Assembly .................................... 6-42P
Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide
Solenoid (SL1) ................ 6-42P
Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide
......................................... 6-42P
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS

1. Control Panel .................................. 7-1P
1.1 Outline ..................................... 7-1P
2. Fans ................................................ 7-2P
2.1 Arrangement, Functions, and Error
Codes ....................................... 7-2P
2.2 Operation ................................. 7-4P
2.2.1 Controlling the Speed ........ 7-4P
2.2.2 Sequence of Operations ..... 7-4P
3. Power Supply ................................. 7-5P
3.1 Power Supply ........................... 7-5P
3.1.1 Outline ............................... 7-5P
3.1.2 Distribution of Power Among
Switches ............................. 7-6P
3.1.3 Output of Power Supplies ... 7-8P
3.2 Rated Outputs of the DC Power
Supply ...................................... 7-9P
3.3 Protection Mechanism ........... 7-10P
4. Others ........................................... 7-12P
4.1 Silent Mode ............................ 7-12P
5.1.1 External Covers ............... 7-14P
5.1.2 Removing the Front Cover
......................................... 7-15P
5.2 Arrangement of Electrical Parts
(rear of the machine) .............. 7-16P
5.3 Control Panel ......................... 7-18P
5.3.1
Removing the Control Panel

......................................... 7-18P
5.3.2 Removing the Control Panel
Control PCB and Keypad PCB
......................................... 7-18P
5.3.3 Removing the Touch Panel
......................................... 7-20P
5.4 PCBs ...................................... 7-21P
5.4.1 DC Controller PCB ......... 7-21P
5.4.2 Main Controller Box and the
Main Controller PCB ....... 7-22P
5.4.3 Power Supply PCB .......... 7-23P
5.4.4 High-Voltage Power Supply
PCB .................................. 7-24P
5.4.5 Accessories Power Supply PCB
......................................... 7-25P
5.4.6 AC Driver PCB ................ 7-25P
5.4.7 Motor Driver PCB ........... 7-26P
5.4.8 Anti-Rush Current PCB ... 7-26P
5.4.9 Serial Number PCB ......... 7-27P
5.5 Fans ........................................ 7-28P
5.5.1 Exhaust Fan ..................... 7-28P
5.5.2 Feeding Fan ..................... 7-28P
5.5.3 HDD Fan .......................... 7-29P
5.5.4 DC Power Supply Fan ..... 7-29P
5.6 Drive System .......................... 7-30P
P7
CONTENTS
5.6.1
Left Deck Drive Assembly

......................................... 7-30P
5.6.2 Vertical Path Duplex/Right
Deck Drive Assembly ...... 7-30P
5.6.3 Main Motor Drive Assembly
......................................... 7-31P
5.6.4 Manual Feed Pickup Drive Assembly .............................. 7-31P
5.6.5 Waste Toner Drive Assembly
......................................... 7-32P
5.6.6 Left Deck Pull-Out Roller Drive
Assembly ......................... 7-32P
5.6.7 Drum Drive Assembly ..... 7-32P
5.6.8 Waste Toner Bottle Assembly,
Lifter Drive Assembly, Vertical
Path Drive Assembly, and Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly
......................................... 7-33P
5.6.9 Left Deck Lifter Drive Assembly .................................... 7-35P
5.7 Motor ..................................... 7-36P
5.7.1 Vertical Path Lower Motor
(M27) ............................... 7-36P
5.7.2 Main Motor (M2) ............ 7-36P
5.7.3 Vertical Path Duplex Motor
(M25), Vertical Path Upper Motor (M26), Deck Right Motor
(M11), Lifter Right Motor
(M5), and Cassette Pickup Motor (M12) ......................... 7-37P
5.7.4
Pre-Registration Motor (M17)

and Drum Motor (M1) ..... 7-38P
5.8 Solenoid ................................. 7-40P
5.8.1 Right Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL6) .... 7-40P
Right Deck Pickup Solenoid
(SL6) ................................ 7-40P
5.8.3 Right Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL7) .... 7-41P
Left Deck Pickup Solenoid
(SL7) ................................ 7-41P
5.9 Clutches ................................. 7-42P
5.9.1 Manual Feed Pickup Clutch/
Developing Clutch ........... 7-42P
5.10 Sensors ................................... 7-43P
5.10.1 Cassette 3/4 Paper Size
(width/length) Sensor ...... 7-43P
5.11 HDD ....................................... 7-44P
5.12 Others ..................................... 7-46P
5.12.1 DC Controller PCB Base
......................................... 7-46P
5.12.2 Relay ................................ 7-46P
5.12.3 Power Supply Transformer
......................................... 7-47P
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK

1. Paper Deck ..................................... 8-1P
Deck Driver .............................. 8-1P
1.1.1 Inputs to the Driver (1/2) ... 8-1P
1.1.2 Outputs from the Deck Driver
(2/2) ................................... 8-2P
1.1.3 Outputs form the Deck Driver
(1/1) ................................... 8-3P
1.2 Pickup ...................................... 8-4P
1.2.1 Outline ............................... 8-4P
P8
1.2.2
1.2.3
Pickup Operation ............... 8-4P

Sequence of Operations
(pickup from the deck) ...... 8-6P
1.3 Detecting Paper in the Deck .... 8-7P
of Power ............................. 8-7P
1.3.2 Switching the Deck Paper Size
........................................... 8-7P
1.3.3 Detecting the Level of Paper in
the Deck ............................. 8-8P
CONTENTS
1.4 Deck Lifter ............................... 8-9P

of Paper .............................. 8-9P
1.4.2 Indicating the Level of Paper on
the Deck Front Cover ...... 8-11P
1.5 Opening/Closing the Compartment
............................................... 8-12P
1.5.1 Opening/Closing the Compartment ................................. 8-12P
1.5.2 Sequence of Operations (opening/closing the compartment)
......................................... 8-13P
1.6 Controlling the Deck .............. 8-14P
1.6.1 Controlling the Deck Main Motor (M101) ....................... 8-14P
1.6.2 Controlling the Deck Lifter Motor (M102) ....................... 8-15P
2. Detecting Jams ............................. 8-17P
2.1 Outline ................................... 8-17P
3.1 External Covers ...................... 8-20P
......................................... 8-20P
3.1.2 Removing the Rear Cover
......................................... 8-23P
3.1.3 Removing the Right Cover
......................................... 8-23P
3.1.4 Removing the Upper Cover
......................................... 8-24P
3.2 General Descriptions .............. 8-25P
3.2.1 Disconnecting the Deck from
the Host Machine ............. 8-25P
3.2.2 Removing the Compartment
......................................... 8-27P
3.2.3 Changing the Deck Paper Size
Configuration ................... 8-29P
3.2.4 Adjusting the Deck Registration
......................................... 8-30P
3.2.5
Adjusting the Roll Position

......................................... 8-30P
3.3 Drive Mechanisms ................. 8-31P
3.3.1 Removing the Deck Pickup
Clutch (CL102) ................ 8-31P
3.3.2 Removing the Deck Main Motor (M101) ....................... 8-31P
3.3.3 Removing the Deck Lifter Motor (M102) ....................... 8-32P
3.3.4 Removing the Lifter Cable
(front of the deck) ............ 8-33P
3.3.5 Removing the Lifter Cable
(rear of the deck) ............. 8-35P
3.3.6 Routing the Lifter Cable ... 8-37P
3.4 Feeding Mechanisms ............. 8-38P
Unit .................................. 8-38P
Roller ............................... 8-38P
3.4.3 Orientation of the Deck Pickup
Roller ............................... 8-39P
3.4.4 Removing the Deck Pickup/
Feed Roller ...................... 8-39P
3.4.5 Orientation of the Deck Pickup/
Feed Roller ...................... 8-40P
3.4.6 Removing the Deck Separation
Roller ............................... 8-40P
3.4.7 Adjusting the Pressure of the
Deck Separation Roller .... 8-41P
3.4.8 Position of the Deck Pickup
Roller Releasing Solenoid
(SL101) ............................ 8-42P
3.5 Electrical Mechanisms ........... 8-43P
3.5.1 Removing the Deck Driver PCB
......................................... 8-43P
3.5.2 Removing the Open Switch
PCB .................................. 8-43P
P9
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY

1. Specifications ................................. 9-1P
2. Names of Parts ............................... 9-2P
3. Outline of the Electrical Circuit ..... 9-3P
3.1 Shift Tray Driver PCB ............. 9-3P
3.2 Inputs to and Outputs from the Shift
Tray Driver PCB ...................... 9-4P
4. Outline of Operations ..................... 9-5P
4.1 Shifting .................................... 9-5P
4.2 Stacking ................................... 9-5P
4.3 Detecting paper ........................ 9-6P
4.4 Delivery .................................... 9-6P
P10
5. Maintenance and Inspection ........... 9-7P

5.1 Adjusting the Limit Sensor Position
................................................. 9-7P
5.1.1 Related Service Mode ........ 9-7P
5.1.2 Making Adjustments .......... 9-7P
6. Disassembly and Assembly ............ 9-9P
6.1 Removing the Shift Tray Driver
PCB ........................................ 9-10P
6.2 Removing the Tray Drive Unit
............................................... 9-12P
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. Safety
1.1 Safety of Laser Light
Laser light could prove to be harmful to the human body. To ensure safety, the machines
laser optical system is sealed inside a protective housing and by external covers, serving to
prevent leakage of the light. The user is safe from the hazards of laser light as long as he/she
uses the machine under normal operating conditions.
1.2 Regulations Under the Center for Devices and Radiological Health
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the Food and Drug Administration
(US government agency) put in force regulations governing laser products on August 2,
1976.
Under the regulations, laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, cannot
be sold in the United States without certification.
The following label represents certification under the CDRH regulations, and all laser
products sold in the United States are required to bear it.
1-1 P
F01-102-01 CDRH Label
The descriptions on the label may differ among different models of a product.
1-2 P
1.3 Handling the Laser Unit

It is important to avoid inserting a tool having a high reflectance (e.g., screwdriver) into
the path of laser light whenever servicing areas around the laser unit.
Further, it is also important to get into the habit of removing watches, rings, or the like,
which could reflect laser light to the eye.
The machines laser light is red in color. The covers used to block laser light are identified
by the following label, calling for special attention when servicing behind the covers.
The label is attached to covers used to block laser light inside the machine.
F01-103-01 Laser Caution Label (100/120-V model)
1-3 P
F01-103-02 Laser Caution Label (100/120-V model)
F01-103-03 Laser Caution Label (230-V model)

1-4 P
F01-103-04 Laser Caution Label (230-V model)
1-5 P
1.4 Safety of Toner

Toner is a non-toxic material consisting of plastic and iron matter with a small amount of
dye.
If your skin or clothes have come into contact with toner, remove as much of it as you can
with paper, and wash with water. Do not use hot water to avoid turning the toner into a gel.
(It will fuse with the fibers of cloth, making removal difficult).
Toner tends to react to vinyl and dissolve. Do not allow it to come into contact with vinyl
material.
Do not pour toner into fire. Such an act can lead to explosion.
1-6 P
2. Image Formation
2.1 Outline
The machine uses an indirect electrophotographic method to form images, and is constructed as follows:
Scanning lamp

Pre-exposure LED
Copyboard glass
Potential sensor
Dust-collecting roller
Pickup
(manual feed tray)
Fixing assembly
Pre-transfer
Separation
charging assembly
claw
Transfer
assembly
Cleaning assembly Separation
charging assembly
Pickup (deck/cassette)
F01-201-01 Construction of the Machine
1-7 P
The machines image formation process consists of the following eight steps:
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Pre-exposure
Primary charging (positive DC)
Laser exposure*
Development (AC + positive DC)
Transfer (negative DC)
Separation (AC + positive DC)
Fixing
Drum cleaning
*Deposits toner on the VD. Used also for blank exposure.
Static Image Formation Block
2. Primary charging
3. Laser exposure
1. Pre-exposure
4. Development
8. Drum cleaning
5. Transfer
Delivery
7. Fixing
6. Separation
flow of paper.
rotation of drum.
Manual feed tray

Registration
Deck/cassette
F01-201-02
1-8 P
CHAPTER 2
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
1. Basic Operations
The printer unit may be divided into the following four functional blocks (shaded):
Control block
Laser exposure block
Image formation block
Pickup/feeding block
Reader unit
Control panel
Controller unit
DC controller
PCB
DC power supply PCB
Laser driver PCB
Control
Block
Laser scanner
Laser Exposure Block
Charging
Cleaning
Photosensitive
drum
Development
Image Formation Block
Delivery
tray
Fixing
Feeding
Transfer
Separation
Pickup
control
Manual
feed tray
Lower feeding assembly

Paper deck
(accessory)
Left deck Right deck

Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Pickup/Feeding Block
F02-101-01
2-1 P

1.2.1 Outline
The major electric mechanisms of the printer unit are controlled by the CPU on the DC
controller PCB; the principal functions of the major elements are as follows:
1.2.2 DC Controller PCB

Name
CPU
RAM
DIMM ROM
EEP-ROM
ROM
Description
Controls jobs Controls state of operation
Controls fixing temperature Controls high voltage
Controls potential Controls toner supply Controls paper feeding
Controls printing sequence Controls output Controls motors
Controls finisher (accessory)
Controls communications with controller unit Controls service mode
Stores service mode data
Stores user mode data
Stores control data
Flash memory for storing control program
Backs up RAM data
Mask ROM for control program (for future use)
2-2 P
Reader unit
Control panel
Finisher
(accessory)
DC loads
clutch
solenoid
motor
sensor
fan
etc.
Cassette paper
level detection
PCB
IC120
(IPC
communication 2)
Controller unit
IC125
(CPU)
IC121
IC122
(RAM)
DIMM/ROM
(IC117)
IC104,105
IC109,110
IC127,130
(EEPROM)
DC controller PCB
BD
PCB
Laser
Duplexing AC driver Potential
control
driver M15 driver PCB PCB
PCB
PCB Laser
scanner
motor
HVT PCB
DC load
clutch
solenoid
motor
sensor etc.
F02-102-01 Construction of Major PCBs
2-3 P
1.3 Sequence of Basic Operations

1.3.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On
Power switch ON
195C
WMUP INTR
200C
CNTR1
CNTR2
LSTR
STBY
Controlled to 200C
Fixing main heater (H1)
Controlled to 200C
Fixing sub heater (H2)

Fixing motor (M19)
Main motor (M2)
Drum motor (M1)
Pre-exposure LED (LA1)
Primary charging
Grid bias
Developing bias (DC)
Developing bias (AC)
Bias roller
Pre-transfer charging (DC)
Pre-transfer charging (AC)
Transfer charging
Separation charging (DC)
Separation charging (AC)
VD/VL1/VL2 *1,*3 VD/VL1/VL2 *2,*3
Surface potential measurement

Primary, pre-transfer, transfer,
separation charging cleaning motor
*4
*1: For copying, potential control is executed as follows: VD, 8 times max.; VL1, 8 times
max.; and VL2, once.
*2: For printing, potential control is executed as follows: VD, 8 times max.; VL1, 8 times
max.; VL2, once.
*3: If the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 150C or higher when the power switch
is turned on, the machine will assume that potential control for power-on has been executed once, thus not executing it any more. (This, however, does not apply if potential
control ended in error or potential control is executed in service mode.)
*4: If the surface temperature of the fixing roller when the power is turned on is 100C or
lower, the primary/pre-transfer/transfer/separation charging wire will be cleaned.
(Cleaning is also executed each time 2000 copies have been made.)
F02-103-01 Basic Sequence of Operations
2-4 P
Period
WNUP
(warm-up)
INTR
(initial multiple rotation)
CNTR1
(control rotation 1)
CNTR2
(control rotation 2)
LSTR
(post rotation)
STBY
(standby)
Description
From when the power switch is turned on to when the surface temperature of the fixing assembly reaches 195C.
From when the surface temperature of the fixing assembly has
reached 195C to when it reaches 200C; this is to even out the
surface temperature of the fixing roller.
From when INTR ends to when the drum surface potential for
copying has been measured; this is to measure the drum surface
potential (VD, VL1, VL2) and to control it.
From when CNTR1 ends to when the drum surface potential for
printing has been measured; this is to measure the drum surface potential (VD, VL1, VL2) and to control it.
While the photosensitive drum makes a single rotation; this is to
clean the surface of the photosensitive drum as a post-process (removes charges).
From when LSTR ends to when the Start key is pressed or the
power switch is turned off.
T02-103-01
2-5 P
1.4 Controlling the Main Motor (M2)

1.4.1 Outline
The functions of the main motor control circuit are as shown in the following table, and
its block diagram is shown in the following figure:
Item
Power supply
drive signal
Operating/driving
Control
Error detection
Description
24V is supplied by the DC controller PCB
from the DC controller PCB (MMON)
Waste toner feedscrew
Cleaning assembly
Registration roller
Manual feed pickup assembly
Left deck feed roller 2
Developing assembly unit
Turning on/off the motor
Controlling the motor to a specific speed
code E010
T02-104-01
1. When the main motor drive signal (MMON) goes 1, the main motor starts to rotate.
2. When the main motor rotates, clock pulse signals (MMFG) are generated. If the DC
controller PCB detects an error in clock pulse signals, it will indicate E010 in the control panel.
J4005
1
DC power supply
2
PCB
DC controller
PCB
24V
GND
J631
1
2
J108
A8
A7
A6
0V
5V
MMON [1]
J632
1
2
3
A5
MMFG [2]
Drive circuit
Main motor
(M2)
Clock pulse
generation
circuit
Control circuit
Reference
signal
generation
circuit
F02-104-01 Control Block Diagram
2-6 P

1.5.1 Wiring Diagram of Major PCBs
J103
Potential control
PCB
J3
J107
Duplexing driver
PCB
J2302
Laser scanner
motor
J116
Control
panel
PCB
M15 J2511
J2502 J117
Laser driver
PCB
J2501 J121
J120
BD PCB
J2701
J6505
J6801
J1012
J1018
J101 DC
DC power
supply
controller
J4003
PCB
PCB
J102
HVT PCB
J4502
J113
Environment
sensor
J8492
PCB
J5501 J5004
J1061
J122
Differential
PCB
J5502
J5503 J5008
J1015
Controller unit
Reader
controller
PCB
J113
Cassette 3
paper level
detection PCB J806
J113
Cassette 4
paper level
detection PCB J810
J102
AC driver PCB
J2052
J104
Motor driver J2101
J105
PCB
J2108
Note: The symbol
in the diagram indicates major connections, and does NOT indicate the flow of signals.
F02-105-01 Wiring Diagram of Major PCBs

2-7 P
1.5.2 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB

Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (1/7)
DC controller PCB
Right lower cover

open/closed
sensor
Manual feed tray

open/closed
sensor
J801
-A15 -A1
-A14 -A2
-A13 -A3
J113 +5V
-A15
-A14 LODOP
-A13
When the right lower

cover is closed, '1'.
J103 +5V
-B15
-B14 MFDC
-B13
When the tray is

closed, '1'.
PS2
J8508
-1
-2
-3
PS3
J157
-1
-2
-3
PS4
J256
-1
-2
-3
PS5
J516
-1
-2
-3
J511
-B3 -B7
-B2 -B8
-B1 -B9
+5V
J112
-B3
-B2 RDEOP When the right deck is
closed, '1'.
-B1
PS6
J512
-1
-2
-3
J511
-A3 -A7
-A2 -A8
-A1 -A9
J112 +5V
-A3
-A2 RDLTP
-A1
When paper is detected,

'1'.
PS7
J513
-1
-2
-3
J511
-A6 -A4
-A5 -A5
-A4 -A6
J112 +5V
-A6
-A5 RDPD
-A4

'1'.
PS8
J518
-1
-2
-3
J511
-B9 -B1
-B8 -B2
-B7 -B3
J112 +5V
-B9
-B8 RDEL
-B7
When the lifter has

reached the upper limit,
'1'.
PS9
J569
-1
-2
-3
J561
-15 -1
-14 -2
-13 -3
J115 +5V
-A15
-A14 LDEOP When the left deck is
closed, '1'.
-A13
Claw jam sensor
J809
-4 -1
-3 -2
-2 -3
J154
-4 -1
-3 -2
-2 -3
J284
-3
-2
-1
J287
-2
J251
-B19
-B2
J106
-B19
CJAM
When paper is
detected, '0'.
Fixing/feeding relay PCB
Right deck open/

closed sensor
Right deck lifter

sensor
Right deck paper

sensor
Deck (right)
limit sensor
Deck (left)
open/closed
sensor
F02-105-02 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB

2-8 P

DC controller PCB
Left deck
lifter sensor
Left deck
paper sensor
Left deck
limit sensor
Cassette 3
paper sensor
Cassette 4
paper sensor
Cassette 3
open/closed
sensor
Cassette 4
open/closed
sensor
Cassette 3
lifter sensor
Cassette 4
lifter sensor
PS10
J565
-1
-2
-3
J561
-6 -10
-5 -11
-4 -12
J115 +5V
-A6
-A5 LDLTP
-A4

'1'.
PS11
J567
-1
-2
-3
J561
-9 -7
-8 -8
-7 -9
J115 +5V
-A9
-A8 LDPD
-A7

'1'.
PS12
J564
-1
-2
-3
J561
-3 -13
-2 -14
-1 -15
J115 +5V
-A3
-A2 LDEL
-A1
PS13
J533
-1
-2
-3
J531
-A6 -A4
-A5 -A5
-A4 -A6
J110 +5V
-A6
-A5 C3PD
-A4

'1'.
PS14
J543
-1
-2
-3
J541
-A6 -A4
-A5 -A5
-A4 -A6
J110 +5V
-B6
-B5 C4PD
-B4

'1'.
PS15
J535
-1
-2
-3
J531
-B3 -B7
-B2 -B8
-B1 -B9
J110 +5V
-A12
-A11 C3OP
-A10
When the cassette 3

is closed, '1'.
PS16
J545
-1
-2
-3
J541
-B3 -B7
-B2 -B8
-B1 -B9
J110 +5V
-B12
-B11 C4OP
-B10
When the cassette 4

is closed, '1'.
PS17
J532
-1
-2
-3
J531
-A3 -A7
-A2 -A8
-A1 -A9
J110 +5V
-A3
-A2 C3LTP
-A1

'1'.
PS18
J542
-1
-2
-3
J541
-A3 -A7
-A2 -A8
-A1 -A9
J110 +5V
-B3
-B2 C4LTP
-B1

'1'.
When the lifter has

reached the upper
limit, '1'.

2-9 P
Inputs to the DC Controller (3/7)

DC controller PCB
Right deck
retry sensor
Left deck
retry sensor
Cassette 3
retry sensor
Cassette 4
retry sensor
Multifeeder
paper sensor
Vertical path 1
paper sensor
Vertical path 2
paper sensor
Vertical path 3
paper sensor
Vertical path 4
paper sensor
PS19
J515
-1
-2
-3
J511
-A9 -A1
-A8 -A2
-A7 -A3
J112 +5V
-A9
-A8 RDRT
-A7

'1'.
PS20
J568
-1
-2
-3
J561
-12 -4
-11 -5
-10 -6
J115 +5V
-A12
-A11 LDRT
-A10

'1'.
PS21
J534
-1
-2
-3
J531
-A9 -A1
-A8 -A2
-A7 -A3
J110 +5V
-A9
-A8 C3RTD
-A7

'1'.
PS22
J544
-1
-2
-3
J541
-A9 -A1
-A8 -A2
-A7 -A3
J110 +5V
-B9
-B8 C4RTD
-B7

'1'.
PS23
J728
-1
-2
-3
J726
-6 -3
-5 -4
-4 -5
J108 +5V
-B10
-B9 MFDS
-B8

'1'.
PS24
J1523
-1
-2
-3
J803
-3 -1
-2 -2
-1 -3
J801
-A6 -A10
-A5 -A11
-A4 -A12
J113 +5V
-A6
-A5 VP1PD
-A4

'1'.
PS25
J1521
-1
-2
-3
J802
-3 -1
-2 -2
-1 -3
J801
-A3 -A13
-A2 -A14
-A1 -A15
J113 +5V
-A3
-A2 VP2PD
-A1

'1'.
PS26
J536
-1
-2
-3
J531
-B6 -B4
-B5 -B5
-B4 -B6
J110 +5V
-A15
-A14 VP3PD
-A13

'1'.
PS27
J546
-1
-2
-3
J541
-B6 -B4
-B5 -B5
-B4 -B6
J110 +5V
-B15
-B14 VP4PD
-B13

'1'.
2-10 P
Inputs to the DC Controller (4/7)

DC controller PCB
Laser write
start sensor
Registration
paper sensor
PS28
J1519
-1
-2
-3
PS29
J262
-1
-2
-3
PS30
J236
-1
-2
-3
PS31
J1518
-3
-2
-1
PS32
J517
-1
-2
-3
PS33
J227
-1
-2
-3
PS34
J235
-1
-2
-3
PS35
J257
-1
-2
-3
PS36
J259
-1
-2
-3
J252
J283
-5 -9
-5
-4 -10
-4
-3 -11
-3
J254
-7 -1
-6 -2
-5 -3
J113 +5V
-B3
-B2 LWRPD
-B1
J801
-B3 -B13
-B2 -B14
-B1 -B15
J807
-3 -1
-2 -2
-1 -3
J251
J281
-12 -A3
-A18

'1'.
J106
-A9 RGPD

'1'.
Duplexing
pre-registration
senor
Duplexing
horizontal
registration
sensor
Right deck
feed paper
sensor
Left deck feed

paper sensor
Duplexing paper
sensor
Internal delivery
sensor
External delivery
sensor
J234
-6 -1
-5 -2
-4 -3
J229
-3 -7
-2 -8
-1 -9
J2306
-B11
-B10
-B9
J2302 J222
J107
-B4 -B13
-B13 DGRFPD
'1'.
J2306
-A3
-A2
-A1
J2302 J222
J107
-B5 -B12
-B12 DSRGPD
'1'.
-B4
-B5
Duplexing driver PCB

J112 +5V
-B6
-B5 RDPFS
-B4
J511
-B6 -B4
-B5 -B5
-B4 -B6
J234
-3 -4
-2 -5
-1 -6
J107
J2306
-A12
-A11
-A10
J2302 J222
J2306
-B8
-B7
-B6
J2302 J222
J107
-B3 -B14
-B14 DPDS
-A1 -A16
-A1 -A16
-B3

'1'.
LDPFS

'1'.

'1'.
J274
-8 -1
-7 -2
-6 -3
J286
-3
-2
-1
J287
J282
-A13
-A12
-A11
J287
-20
-1
J251
-B1
-B20
J251
-B20
-B1
J106
-B1
IDS

'1'.
J106
-B20
EDS

'1'.
2-11 P
DC controller PCB
Reversal sensor 1
J226
-3 -2
-2 -3
-1 -4
J2305
-15
-14
-13
J2302
J107
PS37
J1513
-1
-2
-3
PS38
J1516
-3
-2
-1
PS45
J264
-1
-2
-3
J253 J282
-5 -6 -B5
-4 -7 -B4
-3 -8 -B3
PS46
J273
-1
-2
-3
J274
-5 -4 -A10
-4 -5 -A9
-3 -6 -A8
PS47
J571
-1
-2
-3
J5700
-3 -4
-2 -5
-1 -6
J115 +5V
-B3
-B2 RDPD1
-B1
When paper is detected

'1'.
PS48
J572
-1
-2
-3
J5700
-6 -1
-5 -2
-4 -3
J115 +5V
-B6
-B5 RDPD2
-B4

'1'.
PS49
J573
-1
-2
-3
J5701
-3 -4
-2 -5
-1 -6
J115 +5V
-B9
-B8 LDPD1
-B7

'1'.
PS50
J574
-1
-2
-3
J5701
-6 -1
-5 -2
-4 -3
J115 +5V
-B12
-B11 LDPD2
-B10

'1'.
-B2
J222
-B15
-B2
-B15 RVS1

'1'.
Reversal sensor 2
J225
-1 -1
-2 -2
-3 -3
J223
-3 -3
-2 -4
-1 -5
J2306
-B3
-B2
-B1
J2302 J222
J107
-B1 -B16
-B16 RVS2
-B1

'1'.
Fixing web length

sensor
Delivery jam
sensor
J287
J251
-16 -B5
-B16
J106
-B5 CBOP

'1'.
J106
-19
-B2 -B19
-B2 DSJAM

'1'.

Right deck paper
level sensor
(upper)
Right deck paper

level sensor
(lower)
Left deck paper

level sensor
(upper)
Left deck paper

level sensor
(lower)
2-12 P

DC controller PCB
J727
-3 -1
-2 -2
-1 -3
SVR1
Manual feed paper

width detection
SVR2
Cassette 3 paper
level detection
SVR3
Cassette 4 paper
level detection
Cassette 3 paper
width detection
SVR4
SVR5
Cassette 4 paper
width detection
(100-V model only)
J806
-1
-2
-3
J801
-B6 -B10
-B5 -B11
-B4 -B12
J113 +5V
-B6
-B5 C3PLV
-B4
J810
-1
-2
-3
J801
-B9 -B7
-B8 -B8
-B7 -B9
J113 +5V
-B9
-B8 C4PLV
-B7
J5500
-1
-2
-3
J111 +5V
-B3
-B2 C3PWD
-B1
J550
-1
-2
-3
J125 +5V
-5
-4 C4PWD
-3
SV1
Cassette 4 length
detection
(100-V model only)
SV2
Cassette 3 length
detection
Waste toner screw

lock detection
SW2
Front door switch
MSW2
N.O.
J323
-1 -2
-2 -1
The voltage changes

according to the number
of sheets.
The voltage changes

according to the number
of sheets.
The voltage changes

according to the width of
paper.
The voltage changes

according to the width of
paper.
J125
+5V
-9
-8 C4PL0
-6 C4PL1
-7
The signal changes

according to the length
of paper.
J5770
-4 -1
-3 -2
-1 -4
-2 -3
J111
+5V
-B7
-B6 C3PL0
-B4 C3PL1
-B5
The signal changes

according to the length
of paper.
J107
-A17 WTFL*
-A18
When the waste toner

feedscrew locks, '0'.
J103
-A10
FDOD
-A11
When the front cover is

open, '1'.
J160
-1 -2
-2 -1
J1405
-1 -1
-2 -2
The voltage changes

according to the width
of paper.
J577
-4 -1
-3 -2
-1 -4
-2 -3
J712
-1 -2
-2 -1
MSW1
N.O.
N.O.
Manual door
open/closed
detection
J108 +5V
-B7
-B6 MFPD
-B5
J726
-3 -6
-2 -7
-1 -8
J902
-1 Rush current
-3 prevention
PCB
To fixing/feeding unit,
duplexing unit,
HVT PCB
J903
J902
-4 Rush current -9 +24V
prevention
-8 +24V
-3
PCB
See II. "Power Supply" in

Chapter 7.
From DC power supply PCB

To HVT PCB

2-13 P
1.5.3 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB

DC controller PCB
MSW3
Fixing/feeding
lock sensor
N.O.
J252 J283
J271
-3 -11
-1
-3 -11
-1 -13
-3
-1 -13
J251
J281
-3 -A12
-A9
-14 -A1
-A20
J106 +12V
-A12
-A1 FFUS*
Developing
assembly
toner sensor
Hopper toner
sensor
TS1
TS2
Fixing sub
thermistor
J253
-6
-5
J103 +5V
-B9
-B10 TEP
-B11
J153
-5 -3
-6 -2
-7 -1
J156
-1 -3
-2 -2
-3 -1
J265
-1
-3
Fixing main
thermistor
J103 +5V
-A7
-A8 DTEP
-A9
J162
-1 -3
-2 -2
-3 -1
J251
J287
-14 -B7 -B14
J282
-B6
J106
-B7
-1
-8
-3
-B8
-13
-B8
-B13
-B8
J267
-1
-2
-9
-2
-B9
-12
-B9
-B12
J106
-B9
-3
-2
-1
-10
-1
-B10
-11 -B10
Potential
measurement
PCB
VS1
J8492
-1
-2
-3
Environment
sensor
BD PCB
TH2
TH2
-B11
-B10
Potential
sensor
TH1
TH1
HUM1
BD
-4
-5
J801
-A11 -A5
-A10 -A6
-A9 -A7
-A8
-A7
J2701
-4
-3
-2
-1
-A8
-A9
J401
-4
-1
-3
-2
-2
-3
-4
J103
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
When the fixing/feeding

unit is set, '0'.
When the toner drops

below a specific
volume, '0'.
When the toner drops

below a specific
volume, '0'.
When the temperature of

the fixing roller increases,
the voltage decreases.
(analog signal)
When the temperature of

the fixing roller increases,
the voltage decreases.
(analog signal)
+24V
POTON
POT
When potential control

is being executed, '1'.
Analog correction to
suit the drum surface
potential. (See p. 4-5P.)
J113 +5V
When the humidity
-A11
inside the machine
-A10
HUM OUT increases, the voltage
-A9
decreases. (analog signal)
-A8 TH
-A7
J120 +5V
-1
-2
BD*
-3
When the temperature

inside the machine
increases, the voltage
decreases. (analog signal)
When the laser beam
is detected, '0'.
2-14 P
Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (1/7)

DC Controller PCB
J715
-1 -2
Developing
clutch
Registration
roller clutch
CL1
CL2
-2
J261
-1 -2
J254
-3 -5
-2
-4
-1
-1
J283
-1
-4
J108
-B1
-2
+24V
-B2 DEVCD* When '0', ON.
J281
-10
J251
-A5 -A16
-9
-A6
-A15
J106
-A5
+24V
-A6 RGCD*
When '0', ON.

J725
-1 -2
Manual feed
roller clutch
Left deck
pull-off clutch
Fixing assembly inlet guide

drive solenoid
CL3
-2
CL4
SL1
J255
-1 -3
-2 -2
-3 -1
J252
-8 -6
-9 -5
-10 -4
J108
-B3
-1
+24V
-B4 MFPCD* When '0', ON.

+24V
J717
-1 -2
J115
-B13
-2
-B14 LDCLD* When '0', ON.
-1
J251
J281
-6
-A9 -A12
-5 -A10 -A11
-4 -A11 -A10
J283
-8
-9
-10
+24V
J106
-A9
-A10 SL1P*
-A11 SL1R*

Manual feed
releasing
solenoid
Cassette 3
pickup
solenoid
Cassette 4
pickup
solenoid
Delivery
flapper
solenoid
SL2
SL3
SL4
SL5
+24V
J729
-1 -2
J726
-7 -2
J108
-B11
-2
-8
-B12 MFLSD* When '0', ON.
-1
-1
+24V
J537
-1 -2
J531
-B7 -B3
J110
-A16
-2
-B8
-A17 C3PUSD* When '0', ON.
-1
-B2
+24V
J547
-1 -2
J541
-B7 -B3
J110
-B16
-2
-B8
-B17 C4PUSD* When '0', ON.
-1
-B2
J258
-2 -1
J274 J282
-1 -8 -A6
J281 J251
-2 -A13 -A8
J106
-A13
-1
-2
-1 -A14
-A14
-2
When '0', the plunger is drawn.

When '0', the plunger is pushed
(i.e., the inlet guide lowers).
-7
-A7
-A7
+24V
RVFSD1* When '0', ON.
F02-105-09 Outputs from the DC Controller PCB

2-15 P
Output from the DC Controller PCB (2/7)

Right deck
pickup
solenoid
Left deck
pickup
solenoid
Reversing
flapper
solenoid
Fixing web
solenoid
J421 J2105
-1 -2
-1
SL6
-2
-1
DC controller PCB
J105
-3
J2108-11
-2
Motor driver PCB

J566
-1 -2
SL7
SL8
-2
J224
-1 -2
J223 J2306
-4 -2
-B4
-2
-5
-1
-1
J102
-B5
-1
RDPUSD* When '0', ON.

+24V
-B6 LDPUSD* When '0', ON.

J222
J2302
-B11
-B6
-B5
J107
-B6 -B11
RVFSD2* When '0', ON.
SL9
J263
-1 -2
J253 J282
-1 -10 -B1
-2
-2
-1
J287 J251
-18 -B3 -B18
-B2
-9
-17 -B4
-B17
J106
-B3
+24V
-B4 FCBSD*When '0', ON.
FM1
J109
While the fan is rotating, '1'.
-1 FM1ON (24 V for full speed; 12 V for
-3 FM1CLK half speed)
While in constant speed
-2
rotation, returns the CLK
signal to the PCB.
J103
-A14 FM2ON (24 V for full speed; 12 V for
half speed)
-A12 FM2CLK
-A13
signal to the PCB.
Feeding fan
FM2
J161
-3 -1
-1 -3
-2 -2
Primary
charging
cooling fan
FM3 J8505
-1
-3
-2
Delivery fan
FM4
Controller
cooling fan
FM5
De-curling fan
J270
-3 -1
-1 -3
-2 -2
J718
-3 -1
-1 -3
-2 -2

J111
(24 V for full speed; 12 V for
-A10 FM3ON half seed)
-A8 FM3CLK
-A9
signal to the PCB.
J713
-1 -3
-3 -1
-2 -2

J108
-A2 FM4ON (24 V for full speed; 12 V for
half speed)
-A4 FM4CLK
While in constant rotation,
-A3
returns the CLK signal to
the PCB.
J251
J287
-B13 -B8
-8
-10 -B11 -B10
-B12 -B9
-9
J282
-B13
-B11
-B12
FM6
DC power
supply fan
(built-in type)
Hard disk fan
J102
When the fan is rotating, '1'.
-3 FM6ON (24 V for full speed; 12 V for
half speed)
-2
FM6CLK While in constant rotation,
-1
the PCB.
J4002
-1
-2
-3
DC power supply PCB
FM7
J1542
-1 -3
-2 -2
-3 -1
J106
While the fan is rotating, ' 1'.
-B13 FM5ON (24 V for full speed; 12 V for
half speed)
-B11 FM5CLK
-B12
the PCB.
J1541
-3 -3
-4 -2
-5 -1
J124
-3 FM7ON (24 V for full speed; 12 v for
half speed)
-4
FM7CLK While in constant rotation,
-5
the PCB.

2-16 P
Outputs from the DC Controller PC (3/7)

DC controller PCB
FM8
Duplexing
feeding fan
J232
-1 -3
-2 -2
-3 -1
J222
J2302
-A6 -A11 -A6
-A5
-A12
-A12
J2303
-1
-2
-3
Drum motor
Main motor
M1
M2
J602
-2
-3
-4
-1
J601
-1
-2
Right deck lifter

motor
M4
J632
-2
-3
-4
-1
J631
-1
-2
+5V
J108
-A7
-A6
DMON
-A5
DMFG
-A8
J6320
-3 -2
-2 -3
-1 -4
-4 -1
J6310
-1 -1
-2 -2
-1
J418
-2
M5
Pre-transfer
charging wire
charging motor
Transfer/separation
charging wire
cleaning motor
When '1', ON.

returns clock signals to
the PCB.
-1
M6
M7
When '1', ON.

Rotation in constant
rotation, returns clock
signals to the PCB.
+24V
To DC power supply PCB
0V
J2105
-3
J2108-2
-4
J2109-3
J2108-1
-6
J2109-3
J193
-1 -2
J163
-3 -2
-2
-4
-1
J105-13 RDLM
When '1', ON.
J151
-1 -2
-2
-2
When '1', ON.
From DC power supply

PCB
J103
-A5 PCLM1
-1
J191
-1 -2
-1
J105-12 LDLM
From DC power supply

PCB
J2105
-5
Motor driver PCB
Primary
charging wire
cleaning motor
+5V
J108
-A11
-A10 MMON
-A9 MMFG
-A12

(24 V for full speed; 12 V for
half speed)
When in constant rotation,
the PCB.
+24V
To DC power supply PCB
0V
J419
-2
Left deck lifter

motor
J107
-A11 FM8ON
-A5 FM8CLK
-A6
PCLM2
When '1', CW rotation.

(forward)
When '1', CCW rotation.
(reverse)
J103
-A1 PTRCLM1 When '1', CW rotation.
(forward)
-A2 PTRCLM2 When '1', CCW rotation.
-1
(reverse)
M8
J260
-2 -1
J252
-7 -7
-1
-6
-2
-8
J283
-7
-6
J281 J251
-A8 -A13
-7
-8
-A7
-A14
J106
-A8
-A7
TSCLM1
When '1', CW rotation.

(forward)
TSRCLM2 When '1', CCW rotation.

(reverse)

2-17 P
Outputs from the DC Controller PC (4/7)

DC controller PCB
Hopper stirring
motor
Hopper supply
motor
Right deck
pickup motor
M9
M10
J158
-1 -2
J153
-3 -5
-2
-4
-1
J153
-1 -7
-2
-2
J411
-2 -5
-5 -2
-1 -6
-3 -4
-6 -1
-4 -3
M11
-4
J155
-1 -2
-1
J103
-B7
-B8 M9ON* When '0', ON.
J103
-B5
-6
J2102
-2
-5
-1
-3
-6
-4
+24V
+24V
-B6 M10ON* When '0', ON.
J2101
-A15
-A16
-A17
-A18
-A19
-A20
J104
-A6
-A5
-A4
-A3
-A2
-A1
+24V
M11_B*
M11_B
M11_A*
M11_A
While in rotation,
alternates between
'1' and '0'.
(pulse signal)
Motor driver PCB
Cassette 3/4
pickup motor
J2104
-2
-5
-1
-3
-6
-4
M12
J2101
-A9
-A10
-A11
-A12
-A13
-A14
J104
-A12
-A11
-A10
-A9
-A8
-A7
+24V
M12_B*
M12_B
M12_A*
M12_A
While in rotation,
alternates between
'1' and '0'.
(pulse signal)
Motor driver PCB
Delivery motor
Reversal motor
M13
M14
J251
-A19 -A2
-A16 -A5
-A15 -A6
-A17 -A4
-A20 -A1
-A18 -A3
J268
-5 -2
-2 -5
-1 -6
-3 -4
-6 -1
-4 -3
J228
-2 -5
-5 -2
-1 -6
-3 -4
-6 -1
-4 -3
J2305
-8
-11
-7
-9
-12
-10
J2302
-B10
-B11
-B12
-B13
-B14
-B15
J106
-A19
-A16
-A15
-A17
-A20
-A18
J222
-B7 -B10
-B6 -B11
-B5 -B12
-B4 -B13
-B3 -B14
-B2 -B15
J107
-B7
-B6
-B5
-B4
-B3
-B2
+24V
M13_B*
M13_B
M13_A*
M13_A
While in rotation,
alternates between
'1' and '0'.
(pulse signal)
+24V
M14_B*
M14_B
M14_A*
M14_A
While in rotation,
alternates between
'1' and '0'.
(pulse signals)

2-18 P

DC controller PCB
Laser scanner
motor
Duplexing
horizontal
registration
motor
Pre-registration
motor
M15
M16
J2511
-2
-3
-4
-5
-1
J116 +24V
-4
-3 LMON
-2 LMRDY*
-1 LMSPSEL
-5
J201
-4 -2
-3 -3
-2 -4
-1 -5
-5 -1
J230
-1 -6
-2 -5
-3 -4
-4 -3
-5 -2
-6 -1
J229 J2306
-4 -6
-A4
-5 -5
-A5
-6 -4
-A6
-7 -3
-A7
-8 -2
-A8
-9 -1
-A9
J2302
J222
See descriptions on
laser exposure in
Chapter 3.
J107
+24V
-B7
-B9
-A16
-B8
-B16
-B10
-B8
-A1
-B9
-B1
-B7 -B10
-B9 -B8
-A16 -A1
-B8 -B9
-B16 -B1
M16_A
M16_A*
M16_B
M16_B*
While in rotation,
alternates between
'1' and '0'.
(pulse signal)
M17
J414
-2 -5
-5 -2
-1 -1
-4 -3
-1 -6
-3 -4
+24V
J2102
-14
-17
-18
-16
-13
-15
J105-1
J105-2
J104-B18
J104-B17
J104-B20
J104-B19
J2108-A13
J2108-A12
J2101-B3
J2101-B4
J2101-B1
J2101-B2
M17_A*
M17_A
M17_B*
M17_B
While in rotation,
alternates between
'1' and '0'.
(pulse signal)
Motor driver PCB
Duplexing
feeding
right motor
M18
J231
-2 -5
-5 -2
-1 -6
-3 -4
-4 -3
-6 -1
J2305
-2
-5
-1
-3
-6
-4
J222
-A7 -A10
-A6 -A11
-A5 -A12
-A4 -A13
-A3 -A14
-A2 -A15
J2302
-A10
-A11
-A12
-A13
-A14
-A15
J107
-A7
-A6
-A5
-A4
-A3
-A2
+24V
M18_B*
M18_B
M18_A*
M18_A
While in rotation,
alternates between
'1' and '0'.
(pulse signal)
Fixing motor
M19
J612
-2
-3
-4
J282
-A4
-A3
-A2
J287
-4
-5
-6
J251
-B17 -B4
-B16 -B5
-B15 -B6
-1
J611
-1
-2
-A5
J289
-1
-2
-3
J288
-1
-2
-B18
J251
-1
-2
Cassette 3 lifter
motor
M20
J804
-1 -2
J801 J2106
-B10 -B6
-1
-2
-B11
-1
-B5
J106 +5V
-B17
-B16 M19ON
-B15 M19LD
-B3
-B18
J251
-1
+24V
-2
0V
From DC power
supply PCB
J2108
-3
J105
-11 C3MLD
See descriptions on
fixing system in
Chapter 6.
When '1', ON.
-2
0V
Motor driver PCB
2-19 P

DC controller PCB
Cassette 4 lifter
motor
M21
J805
-1 -2
J801 J2106
-B12 -B4
-3
-2
-B13
-1
-B3
J2108
-4
-4
J105
-10 C4MLD
When '1', ON.
0V
Motor driver PCB
Left deck pickup

motor
M24
J417
-2 -5
-5 -2
-1 -6
-3 -4
-6 -1
-4 -3
J2103
-2
-5
-1
-3
-6
-4
+24V
J104
-B4
-B3
-B2
M24_B*
-B1
M24_B
-A20
M24_A*
-A19
M24_A
J2101
-B17
-B18
-B19
-B20
-A1
-A2
While in rotation,
alternates between '1'
and '0'.
(pulse signal)
Motor driver PCB
Vertical path
duplexing feeding
motor
Vertical path
upper motor
M25
M26
J413
-2 -2
-5 -5
-1 -1
-3 -3
-6 -6
-4 -4
J2108
J2112
-13
-2
-12
-5
J2101-B1
-1
J2101-B2
-3
J2101-B3
-6
J2101-B4
-4
Motor driver PCB
J412
-2 -5
-5 -2
-1 -6
-3 -4
-6 -1
-4 -3
J2102
-8
-11
-7
-9
-12
-10
+24V
J105-1
-2
J104-B20
M25_B*
-B19
M25_B
-B18
M25_A*
-B17
M25_A
+24V
J104
-B16
-B15
-B14
M26_B*
-B13
M26_B
-B12
M26_A*
-B11
M26_A
J2101
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
While in rotation,
and '0'.
(pulse signal)
While in rotation,
and '0'.
(pulse signal)
Motor driver PCB
Vertical path
lower motor
M27
J2110
-2
-5
-1
-3
-6
-4
+24V
J104
-B10
-B9
-B8
M27_B*
-B7
M27_B
-B6
M27_A*
-B5
M27_A
J2101
-B11
-B12
-B13
-B14
-B15
-B16
While in rotating,
and '0'.
(pulse signal)
Motor driver PCB
Duplexing
feeding left
motor
M29
J233 J2307
-2
-2 -5
-5
-5 -2
-1
-1 -6
-3
-3 -4
-6
-6 -1
-4
-4 -3
J2302
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
J222
-A13 -A4
-A12 -A5
-A11 -A6
-A10 -A7
-A9 -A8
-A8 -A9
J107 +24V
-A13
-A12
-A11
M29_B*
-A10
M29_B
-A9
M29_A*
-A8
M29_A
While in rotation,
and '0'.
(pulse signal)

2-20 P

DC controller PCB
LA1
J192
-1 -3
J163
-1 -4
-3
-2
J103
-A3
+24V
Pre-exposure LED
-1
-A4
-3
PEXP* When '0', ON.
(grid wire)
Primary
charging
(primary charging wire)
Transfer
charging
Dust-collecting
roller
J4502
Developing
assembly
Pre-transfer
charging
Separation
charging
J102
Highvoltage
PCB
J7371
See descriptions
on charging control
in Chapter 4.
J4503
High-voltage
transformer
J1015
J122
See descriptions on the
controller unit.
Controller unit
J03
Paper deck
(accessory)
J719
J111
paper deck in Chapter 8.
J751
J123
Shift tray
(accessory)

shift tray in Chapter 9.
2-21 P
CHAPTER 3
LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM
1.1 Outline
The laser exposure system consists of a laser unit and a laser scanner: the laser unit is the
source of laser light, while the laser scanner serves to generate a scanning laser beam by
means of a polygon mirror.
The video signals from the controller unit are converted into laser drive signals by the DC
controller PCB; they are then turned into laser intensity signals by the laser driver PCB,
used to direct the laser beam from the laser unit.
The collimator lens turns the laser beam into a parallel beam possessing an oval cross section; the cylindrical lens then changes it to a flat, band-like parallel beam.
The resulting laser beam is directed through an imaging lens and is reflected by a polygon
mirror, which is rotating at a high and by, upon by which the beam is turned into a scanning
beam possessing a specific direction.
The laser beam is then led through an imaging lens for removal of distortion, and is directed to the positively charged photosensitive drum (areas representing white) for the formation of a static image.
The laser beam is also used to blank out the non-image area.
Item
Laser intensity control
Laser scanning
Laser scanner motor control
Description
1. Executes laser power auto control (APC control)
2. Executes optimum intensity control to suit the surface
potential of the drum
By semiconductor laser
Main scanning direction: control by BD signal
Sub scanning direction: control by laser write start signal
1. Executes constant speed rotation control
2. Switches between full-speed rotation and in-wait rotation
T03-101-01
3-1 P
The laser exposure system consists of the following major components:

The machine uses a small-diameter, 12-facet polygon mirror, a lens construction
possesing a large angle of radiation, and a single-beam laser, all with considerations to high
speed, low power, and low noise operation.
Collimator lens
Cylindrical lens
Laser unit
12-facet
polygon mirror
Imaging lens 3
BD mirror
Imaging lens 1
Imaging lens 2
Laser mirror 4
Laser mirror 2
Laser mirror 3
Laser mirror 1
Photosensitive drum
BD PCB
F03-101-01 External View
Components
Laser semiconductor
Laser scanner motor (M15)
Polygon mirror
BD mirror/BD PCB
Laser driver PCB
DC controller PCB
Description
Visible laser light (aboxut 660 nm), 1 beam
DC motor, 2-speed control
12-faceted
Detects a laser beam.
Controls laser activation.
Controls laser scanner motor rotation.
T03-101-02 List of Components
3-2 P
1.2 Basic Sequence of Operations (laser exposure system)

Main power switch ON
195C
WMUP INTR CNTR LSTR
Laser scanner motor

(M15)*
Image leading edge
signal (PTOP)
STBY
Original set/ADF opened

Start key ON
INTR
PRINT
In-wait
rotation
STBY
LSTR
In-wait
rotation
Laser
BD signal (BD)
*:If silence mode has been selected in user mode, a switch-over to half-speed
rotation is made after a specific period of time during in-wait rotation.
F03-102-01 Basic Sequence of Operations
3-3 P
2. Generating Sync Signals

2.1 Outline
The BD signal used to synchronize video signals for laser scanning direction is generated
by the BD PCB with reference to the laser beam reflected by the BD mirror, mounted along
the path of the laser beam.
The CCD/AP PCB reads image signals from the CCD, and sends them to the controller
unit. The controller unit performs image processing, and the signals are sent to the laser
driver PCB as video signals through the DC controller PCB; they are then sent to the laser
unit as laser intensity control signals in sequence.
Laser unit
12-facet polygon
mirror
BD mirror
Photosensitive drum
BD PCB
F03-201-01 Construction of the Control System
3-4 P
2.2 Flow of Sync Signals

[1] The BD signal goes 0 when laser light is detected.
[2] A phase matching is conducted with reference to the printer, and sync signals are generated.
[3] Using the printer sync signal, image data is read from the image memory.
[4] Video signals are generated.
[5] The 2-pixel parallel signal is converted into a 1-pixel serial signal.
[6] The laser drive signal drives the laser in response to the video signals.
J2701
1
BD PCB
Laser
driver
PCB
2
3
4
J120
4
GND
BD* [1]
5V
3
2
1
J117
J2502
LD [6]
Sync
signal
generation
[2]
Serial/
parallel
conversion
[5]
J1015
J122
PSYNC[3]
A21
A20
Memory
control
J122
J1015
VIDEO [4]
DC controller
PCB
Control unit
F03-202-01 Flow of Signals
E100
It is indicated if the BD signal is not detected within a specific period of
time after the laser has been turned on.
3-5 P
3. Laser Driver Circuit

3.1 Controlling the Laser
The laser driver circuit serves to drive the semiconductor laser in response to the laser
drive signal (LD) from the DC controller PCB.
The following are control items associated with the laser driver circuit:
1. Turning on/off laser light.
2. Controlling the intensity of laser light (ACP control).
3. Controlling the intensity of laser light to suit the surface potential of the drum.
The following signals are used:
[1] Laser drive signal.
[2] Sample laser activation signal. Used to turn on laser light for an intensity sample (for
each scan).
[3] Laser enable signal. Goes 0 when the laser becomes ready after the Start key has been
pressed.
[4] Laser write start signal. Used to start a laser write when paper reaches the laser write
start sensor (PS28), mounted in front of the registration roller.
[5] The intensity of laser light is monitored while it is turned on to collect a sample; an appropriate value is fed back to the laser drive circuit.
[6] The output is controlled so that the reference value from the DC controller (EEPROM)
and the value returned as feedback will be identical.
[7] Laser intensity reference signal. Used as the laser activation reference value, and is determined by potential control (EEPROM).
3-6 P
Laser assembly
J117
J2502
1
LD(+) [1]
2
3
4
LD(-) [1]
GND
J121
Laser
Laser
drive
circuit
Intensity
monitor [5]
J2501
1
2
20
19
GND
3
4
EEPROM
[6]
3
2
1
5V
5
6
7
9
GND
LD-DT [7]
GND
10
11
LD-EN [3]
13
14
LSH [2]
18
19
20
GND
3.3V
GND
18
17
16
15
14
12
11
10
8
7
3
2
1
Laser driver PCB

DC controller
PCB
J113
B5
Laser unit
LWRPD [4]
Laser write start

sensor (PS28)
F03-301-01
REF.
1. The laser power is automatically adjusted whenever the laser unit has
been replaced.
2. The laser starts writing when pickup is from the manual feed tray in response to the detection of paper by the registration paper sensor (PS29).
3-7 P
DISPLAY>DPOT>LLMT-P
Indicates the laser power voltage control mechanism for printer (PDL) images.
DISPLAY>DPOT>LLMT
Indicates the laser power voltage control mechanism for copying.
DISPLAY>DPOT>LPOWER-P
Indicates the result of potential control mechanism for the laser intensity
during output of printer (PDL) images.
DISPLAY>DPOT>LPOWER-C
Indicates the result of the potential control mechanism for the laser intensity
during output of copy images.
DISPLAY>MISC>LPOWER
Indicates the laser intensity on a real-time basis.
ADJUST>LASER>PVE-OFST
Use it to adjust the point of laser exposure.
FUNCTION>LASER>POWER
Use it to turn on laser light.
3-8 P
4. Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor

4.1 Outline
The following signals are used to control the laser scanner motor:
[1] Laser scanner motor drive signal. When 1, the laser scanner motor is turned on (i.e.,
turning on/off the motor).
[2] Laser scanner motor speed switch signal. When 0, the motor is rotated at full speed;
when 1, in-wait rotation (i.e., switching the speed).
[3] Laser scanner motor ready signal. When 0, the laser scanner motor is rotated at a constant speed (constant speed rotation control).
J116
1
2
DC controller 3
PCB
4
5
LMSPSEL [2]
LMRDY* [3]
LMON [1]
+24V
GND
J2511 (J1)
5
4
3
2
1
Speed
control
circuit
Motor
driver
Reference
pulse generation
circuit
M15
Laser scanner
motor
F03-401-01 Functional Block Diagram
E110
It is indicated under the following conditions:
[1] If the laser scanner motor ready signal (LMRDY*) goes 1 when the
motor is rotating.
[2] If the laser scanner motor ready signal (LMRDY*) does not go 0
within a specific period of time.
3-9 P
5. Disassembly and Assembly

The machines mechanical characteristics and features are as described herein, and the
machine may be disassembled or assembled as instructed while keeping the following in
mind:
1.
The power plug must be disconnected for the work.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used
to disassemble it.
3. The screws must be identified by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. The mounting screw of the grounding wire and the varistors is equipped with a toothed
washer to ensure electrical continuity. They must not be left out when fitting the screws.
5. As a rule, the machine must not be operated with any of its parts removed.
6. The front cover switch or the main power switch must be turned off before sliding out
the duplex unit or the fixing/feeding unit.
7.
3-10 P
Toner must not be thrown away into fire to avoid explosion.
5.1 Scanner Unit

1) Open the front cover.
2) Open the hopper cover [1]; then, remove the three screws [2], remove the
connector cover [3], and disconnect the
connector[4].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
F03-501-01
3) Slide out the hopper unit [5].
[5]
F03-501-02
the toner dish [7].
[6]
[7]
F03-501-03
3-11 P
5) Remove the tape fixing screw of the

right cover.
6) Remove the screw [8], and detach tje
developing assembly locking unit [9].
Remove the four screws [10], and detach the scanner cover [11].
[10]
[11]
[8]
[10]
[9]
F03-501-04
7) Disconnect the connector [12], and slide
out the developing assembly [13]; then,
detach the hopper slot [14].
Disconnect the four connectors [15],
and remove the four screws [16]; then,
slide out the scanner unit [17].
[15] [16]
[17]
[15]
[15]
[12]
[13] [16]
F03-501-05
When replacing the scanner

unit, be sure to execute the following in service mode if the
fixing assembly is 150C or
higher; otherwise, potential control will not be executed:
COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC.
3-12 P
CHAPTER 4
IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
1. Outline of Processes
1.1 Outline
The functions and methods used in the machine's image formation system are as follows:
Item
Photosensitive drum
Function/method
Amorphous silicon (80-mm dia.)
Cleaning method: blade
Developing assembly
Developing cylinder (24.5-mm dia.)
Developing method: dry, 1-component, toner projection
Toner: magnetic, negative
Pre-exposure
Array of 63 LEDs
Turning on/off the Pre-exposure LED Array.
Potential sensor
Potential Control
[1] Setting the primary current
[2] Setting the laser output
[3] Setting the developing bias (DC)
Wire auto cleaning
[1] Primary charging wire
[2] Pre-transfer charging wire
[3] Transfer charging wire
[4] Separation charging wire
Primary charging control
DC constant current control: set by potential control
Grid bias control
DC constant voltage control: fixed by varistor
Control value: 850 V (approx.)
Developing bias control
AC constant voltage control: on/off control only
Voltage: 1500 Vp-p (approx.)
Frequency: 2.7 kHz (approx.)
DC constant voltage control: set by potential control
Control value: 0 to 600 V (approx.)
Dust-collecting roller bias
DC non-control
control
Voltage: -1000 V (approx.)
Pre-transfer charging con- AC constant voltage control: fuzzy by environment sensor
trol
DC constant current control: on/off control only
Transfer charging control
DC current control: fuzzy control by environment sensor
Separation charging control AC constant voltage control
DC constant current control: fuzzy control by environment
sensor and to suit density of original (drum surface potential)
T04-101-01
4-1 P
The image formation system is constructed as follows:
Primary charging
assembly
Pre-exposure
Potential sensor
Cleaner unit
Developing assembly
Pre-transfer charging
assembly
Separation charging assembly
Transfer guide
Transfer charging
assembly
F04-101-01
4-2 P
1.2 Basic Sequence of Operations (image formation system)

at power-on, 1 original, 2 prints
Main power Control panel

switch ON power switch ON
SLEEP
Fixing assembly
temperature 195C
WMUP
200C Start key ON

WMUPR
[1]
STBY
INTR
[2]
Main motor (M2)

Drum motor (M1)
Laser activation
Pre-exposure LED
Primary charging
Grid bias
Developing clutch
(CL4)
Developing bias
(AC)
Developing bias
(DC)
bias (DC)
bias (AC)
bias (DC)
Transfer charging
Separation charging
bias (AC)
Separation charging
bias (DC)
F04-102-01
Note the following about the sequence:
[1] potential control for copying
[2] potential control for printing
4-3 P
during printing, 1 original, 2 prints

Start key ON
STBY
INRT
PRINT
[1]
[2]
LSTR
STBY
[3]
Main motor (M2)

Drum motor (M1)
Laser activation
Pre-exposure
LED
Primary charging
Grid bias
Developing
clutch (CL4)
Developing bias
(AC)
Developing bias
(DC)
Dust-collecting
roller bias (DC)
Pre-transfer
charging bias (AC)
Pre-transfer
charging bias (DC)
Transfer charging
Separation
charging bias (AC)
Separation
charging bias (DC)
F04-102-02
[1] executes a series of charging operations before the formation of images, thereby stabilizing the drum potential.
[2] executes image formation 1.
[3] executes image formation 2.
4-4 P
2. Potential Control
2.1 Outline
Laser driver PCB
The functions and control mechanisms related to the potential control system are as follows:
1.
Controlling potential for the copier/printer
2.
Correcting power (APC, i.e., Auto Power Control)
3.
Determining primary current (VD control)
4.
Determining laser output (VL control)
5.
Determining developing bias (DC; VDC control)
The control system related to potential control is designed as follows:
Control signal
Laser light
Determining laser output
Primary charging wire
J103
B4
B3
B2
B1
Developing
cylinder
Determining developing bias(DC)
0V
POT-DT
POT-ON
[1]
[2]
24V
tion
signa
Determining primary current
J3
1
2
3
4
Dete
n
Control signal
Potential control PCB
High-voltage PCB
DC controller PCB
Potential sensor
F04-201-01 Block Diagram of the Control System

The signals used are as follows:
[1] POT-DT: drum surface potential measurement value.
[2] POT -ON: when 1, the potential sensor turns on.
4-5 P
2.1.1 Controlling Potential for Printing/Copying

The machine's potential control consists of potential control for printing and level of potential control for copying.
The mechanism used to control potential for printing uses a standard target potential (VD)
of 420 V to ensure the reproduction of line widths.
Its mechanism used to control potential for copying uses a standard target level of potential (VD) of 370 V to help limit the consumption of toner.
The potential is controlled at such times as shown below and is of the nature described:
Warm-up
To control potential for copier/printer
mode.
To set coefficient between copier and
printer modes
Conditions If the fixing temperature is 150C or lower
when the main power switch is on.
Duration
About 10 sec during warm-up
Service
May be turned on/off:
Mode
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT
Default
ON (potential control for both copier and
printer modes)
Purpose
T04-201-01
As part of making service mode settings, potential control may be enabled or disabled; it
may be set for execution 10 min and 60 min after the main power switch is turned on to the
following specifics:
10 and 60 min after main power switch is turned on
Sensitivity potential control in keeping with
changes in drum temperature.
To suit changes in the efficiency of charging.
Conditions At the start of the first job 10 and 60 min
after the main power switch is turned on.
Duration
OFF: not executed (default)
Reduced mode: 5 sec (approx.)
Standard mode: 10 sec (approx.)
Service
May be turned off or set to reduced or
Mode
standard:COPIER>OPTION>BODY>POCNTMD
Default
OFF
Purpose
T04-201-02
4-6 P
The sequence of operations is as follows during warm-up.

Fixing assembly temperature 195C
200C
WMUPR
WMUP
STBY
Potential control for copying [1] Potential control for printing [2]
Drum motor (M1)

Primary charging
Laser
Potential sensor
VD VD VD VL1 VL1 VL2
VDVD VD VL1 VL1 VL2
F04-201-02
[1] Potential control for copying; potential is measured as follows: of VD, 8 times max; of
VL1, 8 times max; of VL2, once.
[2] Potential control for printing; potential is measured as follows: of VD, 8 times max; of
VL1, 8 times max; of VL2, once.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT (turning on/off potential control)

0: potential control OFF
1: potential control ON
4-7 P
Any of the following three may be selected for potential control executed 10 and 60 min
after the main power switch is turned on (COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNTMD):
[1] OFF (default); no potential control is executed.
[2] Reduced mode; reduces the duration by assuming the potential of the other mode after
potential control.
[3] Standard mode; executes potential control for both copying and printing in succession.
Reduced Mode (selected in service mode)

One of the two types of potential control is selected, while assuming the control value of
the other mode.
During warm-up after power-on, the primary current, laser output, and developing bias
DC value are determined for copying and printing, and the ratio is stored in memory.
When potential is controlled again after power-on, potential control for the preceding
mode used is executed; for the other, the ratio obtained at power-on is used.
The following shows the sequence of operations for reduced mode:
10 min later to
before 60 min
Numeric constant set for control
value (for copying and printing)
Potential Potential
control for control for
copying printing
Start key
ON
Assumes the control

value of the other
from potential control
used for copying or
printing
Potential control
60 min and later

Assumes the control
value of the other from
potential control used for
copying or printing
Potential control
Fixing assembly temperature

(end of fixing assembly warm-up)
Control panel power switch ON
Start key ON
F04-201-03
4-8 P
Standard Mode (selected in service mode)

The two types of potential control (for copying and printing) are executed in succession:
10 min later to
before 60 min
Potential
control
for copying
Potential
control
for printing
Start key
ON
Potential control
for copying and
printing during
the first job
Potential control
60 min and later

Potential control
for copying and
printing during
the first job
Potential control
Fixing assembly temperature195C

Start key ON
F04-201-04
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT (turning on/off potential control)
0: potential control OFF
1: potential control ON (default)
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNTMD (selecting potential control
mode)
0: 10 min, 60 min potential control OFF (default)
1: 10 min, 60 min reduced mode
2: 10 min, 60 min normal mode
COPIER>OPTION>TEMPO>F-POT-SW
If transfer separation faults occur because of a fault (error) in the potential
sensor, enter 1.
Use it as an emergency remedy until the potential sensor is replaced.
COPIER>OPTION>TEMPO>F-POT-D
It becomes valid when 1 is set to COPIER>OPTION>TEMPO>F-POTSW.
0: for text-oriented users (originals with low image ratio; default)
1: for photo-oriented users (originals with high image ratio)
2: to prevent re-transfer (white spots near 50 mm of leading edge)
COPIER>OPTION>TEMPO>F-HUM-SW
Enter 1 if the environment sensor is faulty (out of order).
Use it as an emergency remedy until the environment sensor is replaced.
COPIER>OPTION>TEMPO>F-HUM-D
It becomes valid when 1 is set to COPIER>OPTION>TEMPO>F-HUMSW.
Enter the humidity reading of the site of installation. (adjustment range:
30% to 99%; default: 35%)
4-9 P
COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC (forced execution of potential control)

ON: executes potential control
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>EPOTOFST (entering offset value for
potential sensor)
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>DE-OFST (adjusting Vdc for copying)
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VD-OFST (entering offset value for VD
target potential for copying)
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>DE-OFS-P (adjusting Vdc for printing)
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VD-OFS-P (entering offset value for
VD target potential for printing)
COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>OFST (adjusting potential sensor offset)
Enter the value indicated on the service label if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been replaced.
For adjustment, see Standards and Adjustments in Chapter 2 of
Troubleshooting
4-10 P
2.2 Determining Primary Current

To measure the dark area potential (VD) for the first time after the power switch is turned
on, the current used during previous measurement is let to flow, and the potential sensor is
used to measure the surface potential of the drum.
The DC controller PCB compares the surface potential of the drum against the target potential; if the measured potential is 6 V or higher than the target value, the primary current
is corrected, and the potential is measured once again. The potential is measured as many as
eight times, and the primary charging current is corrected as many as eight times.
VD
Target +6V
-6V
VD
VD
VD
Previous
potential
Fixing assembly temperature195C
WMUP
Potential sensor
200C
STBY
WMUPR
VD
VD
VD
VD
VD
Target VD
Grid bias
Primary charging
Vpc
Vpc Vpc
Vpc
Correction
Potential
control
control
sequence start sequence start
F04--202-01
4-11 P
2.3 Determining the Laser Output

To measure the light area potential (VL1) after the power switch is turned on, the potential based on the previous laser output (LP0) is let to flow, and the surface potential of the
drum is measured by the potential sensor.
The DC controller PCB compares the surface potential of the drum against the target potential; if the measured potential is 6 V or higher, the potential of the laser output is corrected, and the potential is corrected once again.
The potential is measured as many as eight times, and the laser output is corrected as
many as eight times. In addition, the developing bias for light area (VL2) is measured under
the corrective conditions used to determine the laser output (LP) needed for target potential.
VL1
Target VL1
+6V
-6V
VL1
VL1 VL1
Previous potential
Fixing assembly
temperature 195C
200C
WMUP
Potential sensor
STBY
WMUPR
VL1 VL1
VL1
VL1 VL1
TargetVL1 VL2
Developing bias
(DC)
Laser
LP0
Potential control
sequence start
LP0 LP0 LP0
LP0
LP
Correction control
sequence start
F04-203-01
4-12 P
2.4 Determining the Developing Bias

The developing bias (Vdc) is determined as follows based on the drum surface potential
(VL2):
Vdc = VL2 + Vdc
In terms of copying potential, Vdc = 110 V
In terms of printing potential, Vdc = 85 to 110 V
(The potential for printing varies in keeping with the reading of the environment sensor to
ensure the reproduction of appropriate line widths.)
Potential sensor
Vpc
VD
Photosensitive drum
Vdc
Developing
cylinder
Fixing assembly temperature 195C

WMUP
Potential sensor
200C
WMUPR
VD
STBY
VL1
VL2
Primary current Laser output

level determined determined
Laser
Primary charging
Selected potential
Vpc Vpc
LP0
LP
Vdc
Potential control sequence start
F04-204-01
4-13 P
2.5 APC Correction

The surface potential fluctuates in keeping with the increase/decrease in the laser output
caused by changes in laser temperature. To maintain the surface potential to a specific level,
the control value of the laser output is corrected.
The following shows the types of correction used for the laser output:
[1] Sheet-to-Sheet APC Control
Purpose: To maintain a specific level of surface potential without lowering productivity
when executing jobs in succession, the potential after laser output is measured between
sheets, ultimately correcting the control value of the laser output.
Timing: The control is executed during the first sheet-to-sheet interval each minute from the
start of continuous printing.
Potential measurement: The drum potential shows a discrepancy around the drum periphery
so that the average of potential levels is obtained. Based on the result, an appropriate corrective value is obtained for the laser output. If measurement is not possible for some difficulty
(as in measuring between sheets), the attempt at measurement is continued for a further 1
min.
Continuous printing
Main power
switch ON
Potential Potential
control for control for
copying printing
1 min later
1 min later
Start key
ON
Fixing assembly temperature

Correction of
laser output
Correction of
laser output
F04-205-01
[2] Initial Rotation APC Control
Purpose: To make up for the change in VL potential in the laser output caused by changes in
temperature after a while, the surface potential of the drum is measured, and the control
value of the laser output is corrected.
Timing: The control is executed during initial rotation for the first job 60 min after the end
of jobs.
so that the average of potential levels is obtained. Based on the result, an appropriate corrective value is obtained for the laser output.
4-14 P
[3] Last Rotation APC Control

Purpose: If intermittent printing is repeated in a short period of time, the absence of potential control will change the VL potential of the laser output. To make up for the change, an
appropriate correction value is obtained for the laser output control value, and the updated
value is used for the next job.
Timing: During last rotation for the first job 30 min after the laser output correction.
so that the average of potential levels is obtained. Based on the result, an appropriate corrective value is obtained for the laser output.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>LAPC-SW (switching laser APC correction)
0: ON (executes initial rotation APC if left alone for 10 min)
1: ON (default; executes initial rotation APC if left alone for 60 min.)
2: ON (executes initial rotation APC if left alone for 120 min.)
3: ON (turns off initial rotation APC only)
4: OFF
4-15 P
2.6 Density Adjustment in Each Mode

For the following operation modes, the developing bias determined during potential control is corrected, and the result is used as the target value in each specific mode for density
adjustment.
[1] Density Adjustment in Copying
Purpose: Density adjustment is executed to obtain a level of density suited to the needs of
the user.
Correction: The developing bias is corrected in keeping with the F value setting, and it is
also performed as part of image processing.
[2] Density Adjustment During Printing
Purpose: Density adjustment is executed to obtain a level of density suited to the needs of
the user.
Correction: The developing bias is corrected in keeping with the F value setting, and it is
also performed as part of image processing.
2.6.1 Density Adjustment During Copying

The developing bias is raised to decrease the copy density. Too high a developing bias
will result in hazy images, while too low a bias will result in foggy images.
To avoid these problems, the changes in the developing bias are corrected and correction
is also executed as part of image processing (binary density processing) near the upper and
lower limits of the bias.
F value
1
2
3
4
5
Developing DC bias
standard value (V)
240
220
180
140
120
Shift
(V)
60
40
0
-40
-60
Image processing
Image density
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Lighter
Darker
T04-206-01
4-16 P
2.6.2 Density Adjustment During Printing

The developing bias is raised to decrease the print density. Too high a developing bias,
however, will result in hazy images. Near the lower limit of the developing bias, the changes
in the developing bias are corrected and correction is also executed as part of image processing (thickening).
F value
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*1:
Developing DC bias
standard value (V)
203
190
179
167
155
138
122
105
105
Shift
(V)
48
35
24
12
0
-17
-33
-50
-50
Thickening*1
Image density
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Lighter
Darker
All may be set to yes using fine line correction in user mode.
T04-206-02
COPIER>OPTION-BODY>CNT-W/PR (turning on/off variable density

mode during printing)
1: corrects target value to enable changing of density during printing
(default).
0: disables changing of density during printing.
4-17 P
3. Controlling Charging
3.1 Controlling Pre-Exposure LED
3.1.1 Outline
The machine is equipped with a pre-exposure LED array to prevent adhesion of excess
toner to the photosensitive drum because of residual charge, and its system of control serves
the following functions:
1. Turning On/Off the Pre-Exposure LED Array
J103A
1
2
DC controller PCB
24V
Pre-exposure lamp
PEXP* [1]
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
F04-301-01
The system uses the following signals:
[1] pre-exposure LED control signal: when 0, LED turns on.
4-18 P
3.2 Controlling Primary Charging

3.2.1 Outline
The primary charging control system serves the following functions:
1. Turning on/off the primary corona current.
2. Controlling the primary corona current to a specific level.
3. Controlling the grid bias to a specific level (fixed to 850 V by varistor).
The system used to control primary charging is constructed as follows:
J102A
J4502
DC controller PCB
6
7
8
14
PR-LEAK-DETECT [1] 13
12
11
10
9
9
10
11
8
7
PR-CNT [2]
12
13
4
3
2
1
14
15
PR/TR-REMOTE [3]
16
High-voltage PCB
16
15
2
4
5
Primary corona
charging
The primary charging bias

changes as follows in keeping
with the potential of HV-PR.
T4506
1400A
600A
3V
11V12V
HV-PR
Primary charging wire

Grid wire
J4507
F04-302-01
[1] primary charging leakage detection signal; 0 upon detection of an excessively high or
low level of current.
[2] primary corona current control signal; the output of the primary corona current turns
ON when the voltage is about 3 V or higher or lower than 11 V; it turns OFF when the
level is about 12 V or higher.
[3] high-voltage remote signal; turns on/off the output of primary corona current.
4-19 P
3.2.2 Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism

The system used to clean the primary charging wire is turned on at such times as follows,
and the system is constructed as shown in the following figure:
Timing of Cleaning
1. If the temperature of the fixing roller is 100C or lower at power-on.
2. If wire cleaning is executed in user mode.
3. At the end of making 2000 prints*1 after the end of cleaning.
*1: Default; may be changed in service mode: COPIER>OPTION> BODY>W-CLN-P.
J103A
9
5
6
PCLM1 [1]
PCLM2 [2]
DC controller PCB
15
Wires
Re
ar
Fro
n
Primary
charging
wire cleaning
motor (M6)
Wire cleaners
F04-302-02
[1] primary charging wire cleaning motor CCW drive signal 1; when 1, the wire cleaner
moves to the rear.
[2] primary charging wire cleaning motor CW drive signal 2; when 1, the wire cleaner
moves to the front.
4-20 P
3.2.3 Others
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI-GRID (entering output adjustment value
for grid bias)
Enter the value indicated on the service label if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been replaced.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-CLN
Execute auto cleaning if (five round trips) the primary charging wire or the
transfer charging wire has been replaced.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>W-CLN-P
Set the intervals at which auto cleaning of the primary charging wire is executed in terms of the number of prints.
4-21 P
3.3 Dust-Collecting Roller Bias

3.3.1 Outline
The machine is equipped with a dust-collecting roller for collection of stray toner occurring after development. The toner found on the surface of the dust-collecting roller is removed by a scraper.
The dust-collecting roller bias is controlled for the following:
1. Turning on/off the dust-collecting roller bias.
The system used to control the dust-collecting roller is constructed as follows:
J4502
16
15
14
4
5
13
6
HV-CR-REMOTE [1]
7
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
4
3
2
1
14
15
16
J4506
High-voltage PCB
DC controller PCB
J102A
DC -1000V
Dust-collecting
roller
Scraper
F04-303-01
The following signal is used for the system:
[1] dust-collecting roller bias remote signal; if 1, the dust-collecting roller bias turns on.
4-22 P
3.4 Controlling the Pre-Transfer Charging

3.4.1 Outline
The system used for pre-transfer charging serves the following functions:
1. Controlling the DC bias to a specific level of current.
2. Controlling the AC bias to a specific level of voltage.
3. Controlling the output to suit the environment (fuzzy control).
The system used to control the pre-transfer charging is constructed as follows:
The level of current of the
pre-transfer bias varies as follows
in keeping with the potential of
PT-SP-CNT.
-300A
J4502
2
3
14
13
12
PT/SP-LEAK-DETECT [1]
11
6
7
10
8
9
9
8
7
10
11
6
4
5
12
13
PT/SP-CNT [2]
14
PT/SP-REMOTE [3]
15
16
Pre-transfer charging wire
J4505
4
3
2
1
11V12V
PT/SP-CNT
3
2
1
High-voltage AC
transformer
DC controller PCB
3V
16
15
High-voltage PCB
J510A
1
AC+DC
T4501
F04-304-01
[1] pre-transfer/separation charging leakage detection signal: 0 when an excessively high
or low level of current is detected.
[2] pre-transfer charging control signal; the output of pre-transfer current turns ON when
the voltage is about 3 V or more and less than 11 V; it turns OFF when the voltage is
about 12 V or more.
[3] pre-transfer/separating charging remote signal; turns on/off the output of the pre-transfer/separation current.
4-23 P
3.4.2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment (fuzzy control)

The pre-transfer charging current is optimized in relation to the site conditions (i.e., base
on the data from the environment sensor).
Pre-transfer
current
-260
-10
Low humidity
High humidity
F04-304-02
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FUZZY (turning on/off fuzzy control)
0: fuzzy control ON (default)
1: low humidity mode (uses a lower-than-standard pre-transfer charging
current)
2: normal humidity mode
3: high humidity mode (use higher-than-standard pre-transfer charging
current)
Setting it to 1 through 3 will make the control independent of the reading from the environment sensor.
4-24 P
3.4.3 Cleaning Mechanism for the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly

The pre-transfer charging wire is cleaned at such times as shown below, and its cleaning
mechanism is constructed as follows:
Timing of Cleaning
1. If the temperature of the fixing roller is 100C or lower at power-on.
2. When wire cleaning is executed in user mode.
3. At the end of last rotation for printing of each 2000 prints*1.
*1: Default; may be changed in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>W-CLN-P.
1
2
1
PTRCLM1 [1]
PTRCLM2 [2]
DC controller PCB
J103A
Re
ar
Fro
n
15
Wire
Wire cleaner
Pre-transfer
charging
wire cleaning
motor (M7)
F04-304-03
[1] pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor CW drive signal; when 1, the wire cleaner
moves to the rear.
[2] pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor CCW drive signal; when 1, the wire moves
to the front.
4-25 P
3.4.4 Others
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>PRE-TR (entering the output adjustment
value of pre-transfer charging wire current)
Enter the value indicated on the service label if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared.
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>H-PRE-TR (entering the offset value of
pre-transfer high-voltage output for high-voltage unit)
Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new high-voltage unit
if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared or the high-voltage
unit has been replaced.
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>D-PRE-TR (entering offset value of pretransfer high-voltage output of DC controller PCB)
Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new DC controller
PCB if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared or the DC
controller PCB has been replaced.
Set the intervals at which auto cleaning of the primary charging wire is executed in terms of the number of prints.
4-26 P
3.5 Controlling Transfer Charging

3.5.1 Outline
The system used to control transfer charging serves the following functions:
2. Controlling the output to suit the environment (fuzzy control).
The following shows the construction of the control system related to the transfer charging control system.
The transfer current varies

as follows in keeping with
the potential of TR-CNT.
400A
J102A
J4502
100A
16
15
14
4
5
13
TR-LEAK-DETECT [1]
6
7
12
11
10
10
11
12
6
TR-CNT [2]
13
14
15
16
PR/TR-REMOTE [3]
3V
11V 12V
TR -CNT
High-voltage PCB
DC controller PCB
5
4
3
2
1
T4505
Transfer
charging wire
F04-305-01
[1] transfer charging leakage detection signal; 0 when an excessively high or low current
is detected.
[2] transfer charging current control signal; when about 3 V or higher and lower than 11 V,
the output of the transfer current turns ON; when about 12 V or higher, it turns OFF.
[3] high-voltage remote signal; turns on/off the transfer current output.
4-27 P
3.5.2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment (fuzzy control)

The output of the transfer current is optimized to suit the environment (identified using
data from the environment sensor).
Transfer
current (A)
380
240
Low humidity
High humidity
F04-305-02
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FUZZY (turning on/off; fuzzy control)

1: low humidity environment mode (pre-transfer charging current lower
than standard)
2: normal humidity environment mode
3: high humidity environment mode (pre-transfer charging current higher
than standard)
Setting it to 1 through 1 will make control independent of the environment sensor.
4-28 P
3.5.3 Cleaning Mechanism for the Transfer Charging Assembly

The transfer charging wire is cleaned at such times as follows, and its control mechanism
is constructed as follows:
Timing of Cleaning
1.
If the temperature of the fixing roller is 100C or lower at power-on.
2.
When cleaning is executed in user mode.
3.
At the end of making 2,000 prints*1 after cleaning
*1: Default; may be changed in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>W-CLN-P.
Wires
Wire cleaner
DC controller PCB
Separation
charging
assembly
Transfer/separation charging
wire cleaning motor (M8)
Re
ar
Fro
nt
20 J106A
T/SCLM1 [1]
8
T/SCLM2 [2]
7
F04-305-03
[1] transfer charging wire cleaning motor CW drive signal; when 1, the wire cleaner
moves to the rear.
[2] transfer charging wire cleaning motor CCW drive signal; when 1, the wire cleaner
moves to the front.
4-29 P
3.5.4 Others
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>TR-N1
(Use it to adjust the output of the transfer charging current for the first side
of a double-sided print or for a single-sided print of plain paper.)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>TR-N2
(Use it to adjust the output of the transfer charging current for the second
side of a duplexing print of plain paper.)
Enter the value indicated on the service label if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared.
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>HVT-TR
(Use it to enter the offset value for the transfer high-voltage output of the
high-voltage unit.)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>D-HV-TR
(Use it to enter the offset value for the thermistor high-voltage output of the
DC controller PCB.)
Enter the value on the label attached to the DC controller PCB if the RAM
on the DC controller PCB has been cleared or the DC controller PCB has
been replaced.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-CLN
Execute auto cleaning of the charging wire (five round trips) if the primary
charging wire or the transfer charging wire has been replaced.
Set the interval at which auto cleaning of the charging wire is executed in
terms of the number of prints.
4-30 P
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TR-SP-C1
(Use it to switch the transfer/separation output value for pickup from the
right deck.)
(Use it to switch the transfer/separation output for pickup from the left
deck.)
cassette 3.)
cassette 4.)
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TR-SP-MF
(Use it to switch the transfer/separation output for pickup from the manual
feed tray.)
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TR-SP-DK
(Use it to switch the transfer/separation output for pickup from the side paper deck.)
The transfer/separation output value is switched for pick up from each respective source of paper with the aim of responding to various problems:
0: normal (default)
1: prevents double transfer
2: prevents separation faults
3: prevents transfer faults
4-31 P
3.6 Controlling Separation Charging

3.6.1 Outline
The system used to control separation charging serves the following functions:
2. Controlling the AC bias to a specific level of voltage.
3. Corrects the output to suit the environment and the density of the original used (surface potential of the drum; fuzzy control).
The system used to control separation charging is constructed as follows:
The level of current of the DC bias
varies as follows in keeping with
the potential of SP-CNT.
100A
-500A
3V
11V 12V
SP-CNT
J4502
16
15
14
4
5
13
12
6
7
PT/SP-LEAK-DETECT [1]
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
5
PT/SP-REMOTE [2]
SP-CNT [3]
Separation
charging wire
J4505
3
2
1
2
3
High-voltage
AC transformer
DC controller PCB
High-voltage PCB
J102A
1
T4501
AC+DC
The level of voltage of the

AC bias varies as follows
in keeping with the potential
of SP-CNT.
12KVPP
8KVPP
3V
11V 12V
HV-CNT
F04-306-01
4-32 P

[1] separation charging leakage detection signal; 0 when an excessively high or low level
of current is detected.
[2] separation charging current control signal; when about 3 V or higher and lower than 11
V, the output of the separation current turns ON; when about 12 V or higher, it turns
OFF.
[3] separation charging remote signal; turns on/off the output of the separation current.
4-33 P
3.6.2 Correcting the Output to Suit the Environment and the Density of the
Original Used
The output of separation current is optimized to suit the environment (identified by data
from the environment sensor) and the density of the original used (surface potential of the
drum); the control is in the three levels of High, Medium, and Low.
[2]
Separation current (A)
(-)
[1]
Drum surface potential: high

Drum surface potential: medium
Drum surface potential: low
[3]
Low humidity
High humidity
F04-306-02
[1] In a low humidity environment, paper becomes dry, tending to become charged (high
resistance); the output is decreased to make up for this.
[2] If the potential of the drum is low, increase the output to prevent separation faults.
[3] If the potential of the drum is high, decrease the level of current to prevent double transfer.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FUZZY (turning on/off fuzzy control)
1: low humidity mode (uses a lower-than-standard level of pre-transfer
charging current)
2: normal humidity environment mode
3: high humidity environment mode (uses a higher-than-standard level of
transfer charging current)
Setting to 1 through 3 makes the mechanism independent of the environment sensor.
4-34 P
3.6.3 Others
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-SP>SP-N1 (Use it to adjust the output for the
first side of a double-side print or for a single-sided print of plain paper.)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-SP>SP-N2 (Use it to adjust the output of the
second side of a double-sided print of plain paper.)
If the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared, enter the value indicated on the service label.
COPIER>AJDUST>HV-SP>HVT-SP (Enter the offset value for the separation high-voltage output of the high-voltage unit.)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-SP>D-HV-SP (Use it to enter the offset for the
separation high-voltage of the DC controller PCB.)
Enter the value indicated on the new DC controller PCB if the RAM on the
DC controller PCB has been cleared or the DC controller PCB has been replaced.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TR-SP-C1 (Use it to switch the transfer/
separation output value for pickup from the right deck.)
separation output value for pickup from the left deck.)
COPIER>OPTON>BODY>TR-SP-C3 (Use it to switch the transfer/separation output value for pickup from the cassette 3.)
separation output for pickup from the cassette 4.)
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TR-SP-MF (Use it to switch the transfer/
separation output for pickup from the manual feed tray.)
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TR-SP-DK (Use it to switch the transfer/
separation output for pickup from the side paper deck.)
The transfer/separation output value is switched for each source of paper to
prevent various problems:
0: normal (default)
1: prevents double transfer
2: prevents separation faults
3: prevents transfer faults
4-35 P
4. Hopper/Developing Assembly
4.1 Outline
The following component parts are associated with the hopper/developing assembly:
Hopper stirring motor
M9
Hopper supply motor
M10
Angled feed screw
Toner feed screw
Toner supply
Feed screw
Hopper toner
sensor (TS2)
Toner feed screw
Developing assembly toner sensor (TS1)
Stirring rod
Developing cylinder
M1
Main motor
CL1
Developing assembly clutch
F04-401-01
4-36 P
4.2 Controlling the Drive to the Hopper/Developing Assembly

The system used to control the drive of the developing assembly is constructed as follows:
J103B
DC controller PCB
24V
5
6
7
8
M10ON*[1]
24V
M9
1
2
Hopper supply motor
M9ON* [2]
M10
J108B
24V
DEVCD* [3]
J108A
1
9
10
11
12
M1_LCK
M1_ON
5V
0V
M1
CL1
Developing assembly clutch
F04-402-01
4-37 P

[1] hopper stirring motor drive signal; when 0, the motor rotates to stir the toner.
[2] hopper supply motor drive signal; when 0, the motor rotates to supply toner.
[3] developing assembly clutch drive signal; when 0, the developing assembly clutch turns
on.
4-38 P
4.3 Controlling the Developing Bias

The system used to control the developing bias serves the following functions:
[1] Controlling the DC bias to a specific level of voltage.
[2] Controlling the AC bias to a specific level of voltage.
AC output 1500Vpp
J102A
J4502
DEV-DC-CNT [1]
9 DEV-AC-REMOTE [2]
12
11
10
9
8
10
11
12
13
4
3
2
1
14
15
16
Developing cylinder
The developing DC bias varies as

follows in keeping with the potential
of DEV-DC-CNT.
Developing DC bias
14
13
High-voltage PCB
DC controller PCB
3
4
5
6
7
J4504
16
15
600V
Image area
Non-image area
3V
11V 12V
DEV-DC-CNT
F04-403-01

[1] developing DC bias current control signal; if about 3 V or higher and lower than 11 V,
the output of developing DC bias current turns ON; if about 12 V or higher, it turns
OFF.
[2] developing DC bias remote signal; turns on/off the output of developing DC bias current.
4-39 P
COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>BIAS
(Use it to enter the adjustment value for developing bias.)
Enter the value indicated on the service lable if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared (from 0 to obtain darker images to 600 to obtain lighter image).
COPIER>ADJUST>DEVLEOP>HVT-DE
(Use it to enter the offset value for the output of developing high voltage
for the high-voltage unit.)
if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared or the DC controller
PCB has been replaced (from 100 to obtain lighter images to +100 to obtain
darker images).
COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>D-HV-DE
(Use it to enter the offset value for the output of developing high voltage of
the DC controller PCB.)
Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the DC controller PCB if
the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared or the DC controller
PCB has been replaced. (from -100 to obtain lighter images to +100 to obtain darker images).
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>DE-OFST
(adjusting Vdc for copying)
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>DE-OFST-P
(adjusting Vdc for printing)
Enter the value indicated on the service label if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleaned.
4-40 P
4.4 Detecting the Level of Toner and Controlling the Supply of

Toner
The following component parts are associated with the toner supply system:
J103A
DC controller PCB
7
8
5V
DTEP [1]
0V
9
TS2
J103B
5V
TEP [2]
10
0V
11
1
TS
F04-404-01
[1] developing assembly toner level detection signal; when the absence of toner is detected,
0.
[2] hopper toner level detection signal; when the absence of toner is detected, 0.
4-41 P
4.4.1 Sequence of Operations (toner supply)

The toner inside the developing assembly is monitored by the developing assembly toner
sensor (TS1); when it drops below a specific level, the developing assembly toner level signal goes 0 and is sent to the DC controller PCB.
When the DC controller PCB detects the developing assembly toner level signal for 0.3
sec or more, the hopper motor drive signal will be issued so that the hopper will start to supply toner.
The supply of toner stops when the toner inside the developing assembly reaches a specific level and, as a result, the developing assembly toner level signal 1 is detected for 0.7
sec or more.
The level of toner inside the hopper is monitored by the hopper toner sensor while toner
is supplied by the hopper motor or toner is being stirred.
When the toner inside the hopper drops below a specific level, the hopper toner level detection signal goes 0. When the DC controller PCB detects the signal for 1.9 sec or more,
the machine will indicate the Add Toner message on its control panel.
The following shows the sequence of operations used by the hopper to supply the developing assembly with toner.
Toner supply sequence start

Toner supply
Developing
assembly toner
sensor (TS1)
Hopper supply motor
(M10)
Hopper
toner sensor
(TS2)
STBY
In 120sec or more, 020 indicated
2 sec
Supply
1 sec
Supply
Supply
In1.9sec or more, Add Toner indicated
F04-404-02
E020 (toner supply error)

It is indicated when the toner sensor (TS1) inside the developing assembly
detects the absence of toner for 120 sec or more.
4-42 P
5. Drum Cleaner Unit

5.1 Outline
The following component parts are associated with the drum cleaner unit:
Pre-exposure lamp (LED)
Cleaning blade
Auxiliary roller
Waste toner
feedscrew
Separation claw
Magnet roller
F04-501-01
4-43 P
5.2 Detecting the Waste Toner

The system used to detect waste toner (full condition) is constructed as follows:
1 J108A
M1_LCK
9 M1_ON
10 5V
11 0V
12
M1 Main motor
(front)
J107
1
DC controller PCB
Waste toner feedscrew

lock detection
(MSW1)
17
18
WT-RCK
0V
To MSW1
Waste toner bottle
F04-502-01
4-44 P
E013 (waste toner lock)

It is indicated when the waste toner lock sensor (MSW2) remains on for 4
sec or more.
The waste toner bottle is capable of holding as much toner as may be used
for a maximum of about 500,000 prints.
Memo
4-45 P
6. Controlling the Drum Heater

6.1 Outline
The system used to control the drum heater is constructed as follows:
Environment switch
(SW3)
J2053
3
J2052
0V
1
DRUM HT ON [1]
8
2
10
11
12
13
14
W1
AC driver PCB
DC controller PCB
J2053
AC
15
16
W2
Drum heater control PCB
J102B
1
J2002
HT-TEMP [2]
1
2
3
Thermistor
4
5
6
Drum heater
(H3)
Controlled
to 43C
F04-601-01
[1] drum heater drive control signal; when 1, AC power is supplied to the drum heater
control PCB.
[2] thermistor temperature detection signal; feeds voltage of a level suited to the detected
temperature.
4-46 P
Turning On/Off the Drum Heater
Power OFF
Main motor (M2) OFF
Wait
Main motor (M2) ON
Printing
Standby, Jam, Front cover open
Power save mode
Environment sensor (SW3)

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Drum heater (H3)

Half wave
OFF
Full wave
Full wave
Half wave (full wave if 120/230 V)
Full wave
Full wave
Full wave
Full wave
T04-601-01
4-47 P
The drum heater is controlled to 43C by the drum heater control PCB.
When wear of the drum or parts associated with charging assemblies advances, halftone
images can become distorted if printed in a high temperature/humidity environment (much
moisture in the air).
To prevent distortion, SW2001-1 on the drum heater control PCB may be turned on to
change from 43C to 47C (default: OFF, control at 43C).
If the switch is turned on (controlled to 47C) in a low temperature/humidity environment
(little moisture in the air), however, printing of halftone images can cause fusion, requiring
the operation of the switch to suit the environment as follows:
1. Remove the drum heater control PCB. (See p. 4-51P.)
2. Shift SW2001-1 on the drum heater control PCB to ON (controlled to 47C).
J2001
ON
SW2001
12
F04-601-02
SW2001-1
ON (controlled to 47C)
OFF (default: controlled
to 43C)
SW2001-2
Not used
T04-601-02
4-48 P

mind:
1.
to disassemble it.
7.
4-49 P
7.1 Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit

7.1.1 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit
1) Open the front cover, and slide out the
hopper unit to draw out the fixing/feeding unit.
2) Take out the process unit. (See p. 454P.)
3) Remove the primary charging assembly.
4) Remove the potential sensor unit.
and remove the potential sensor rail stay
[2].
6) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the two mounting screws [4];
then, detach the pre-exposure lamp unit
[5].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F04-701-01
[3]
[4]
[5]
F04-701-02
4-50 P
7.2 Photosensitive Drum

Points to Note When Handling the Photosensitive Drum
The machines photosensitive drum is made of high-sensitivity amorphous
silicon, and its sensitivity can start to deteriorate depending on how and
where it is placed, requiring the following:
1. Whenever the process unit is removed from the machine or the photosensitive drum is removed from the process unit, be sure to protect the
photosensitive drum against light. Use the photosensitive drum protective sheet or wrap six or more sheets of A3 or larger paper.
2. Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum in an area subject to the direct rays of the sun.
3. Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum in an area subject to high or low temperature or humidity or where temperature or humidity tend to fluctuate rapidly.
4. Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum in an area subject to dust, ammonium gas, or organic solvent/gas.
The foregoing requirements commonly apply to all photosensitive
drums.
7.2.1 Removing the Drum Unit

hopper unit.
2) Remove the process unit. (See p. 454P.)
3) Remove the primary charging assembly
and the pre-transfer charging assembly.
4) Remove the potential sensor assembly.
5) Remove the potential sensor rail stay.
6) Remove the three mounting screws [1],
and detach the gear plate [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F04-702-01
4-51 P

and detach the front side stay [4].
[3]
[4]
[3]
F04-702-02
8) Holding it as indicated, detach the photosensitive drum [5].
Take care not to damage the
photosensitive drum when removing it. The bearing at the
rear and the gear at the front of
the drum need not be removed.
[5]
F04-702-03
If the temperature of the fixing
assembly is 150C or higher
when replacing the drum unit,
be sure to execute the following
in service mode; otherwise, potential control will not be executed:
7.2.2 Replacing the Drum Heater

1) Remove the photosensitive drum from
the process unit.
and detach the flange [2] from the front.
[2]
[1]
F04-702-04
4-52 P
Protect the removed photosensitive drum against dirt and

scratches with five to six sheets
of paper or with the drum protective sheet stored near the
waste toner case.
3) Remove it from the rear together with
the drum heater control PCB [3].
4) Disconnect the connector [4], and detach the drum heater [5] from the photosensitive drum.
[4]
[5]
[3]
F04-702-05
7.2.3 Mounting the Photosensitive Drum

Mount the photosensitive drum by reversing the steps used to remove it; however, be sure
not to soil or scratche the drum and not to trap the cable of the drum heater.
7.2.4 Setting the DIP Switch for the Drum Heater Control PCB
1) Remove the drum heater assembly. (See
p. 4-52P.)
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the drum heater assembly [2].
3) Set the DIP switch (SW2001-1) [3] on
the drum heater control PCB.
SW2001
ON 1 2
[3]
[1]
[2]
F04-702-06
4-53 P
7.3 Process Unit

7.3.1 Removing the Process Unit
2) Remove the developing assembly. (See
p. 4-73P.)
3) Remove the hopper assembly. (See p. 478P.)
4) Remove the primary charging cooling
fan. (See p.7-30P)
5) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly,
and place the drum protective sheet [1]
on the registration roller assembly.
6) Disconnect the four connectors [2], and
remove the two mounting screws [3].
[2]
[3]
[3]
[1]
F04-703-01
4-54 P
7) Insert the drum rotating tool [4] that

comes with the unit into the slit [5] in
the drum shaft. While keeping the drum
in place so that it will not rotate counterclockwise, insert a screwdriver into
the center opening [6] in the drum rotating tool to remove the drum fixing
screw.
[5] Drum shaft
If the drum is let to rotate counterclockwise, the cleaning blade

will not come into contact with
the drum correctly, leading to
cleaning faults. Be sure to fix
the drum in place first before
removing the drum fixing screw
to avoid the problem.
[4]
[6]
F04-703-02
REF.
If the hopper assembly is released but not removed, be sure

to open the right upper cover
and the right lower cover so that
there will be space.
8) Slide out the process unit [7] until it

stops.
[7]
F04-703-03
4-55 P
9) Holding the grip [8] of the process unit

as indicated, take it out.
[8]
F04-703-04
7.3.2 Mounting the Process Unit

Mount the process unit by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in
mind:
[1]
[2]
1) On the left rail, place the process rail
along the guide plate [1] at the front/
rear of the rail. (See p.7-30P)
On the right rail [2], place the process
unit on the L-shaped stay.
F04-703-05
2) After sliding the process unit into the
machine, match the slot in the drum
shaft and the slot in the drum using the
drum rotating tool [3]. Then, insert the
drum fixing tool [4], and fit the mounting screw [5] into the center opening of
the drum rotating tool; then, tighten the
mounting screw.
[5]
[3]
[4]
F04-703-06
4-56 P
7.4 Potential Sensor/Potential Control PCB

7.4.1 Removing the Potential Sensor/Potential Control PCB
Be sure to replace the potential
sensor and the potential control
PCB at the same time.
hopper unit.
2) Remove the developing assembly and
the primary cooling fan.
(See p.7-30P)
3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the potential sensor assembly [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
F04-704-01
the front door switch cover [5].
[5]
[4]
F04-704-02
5) Free the cable [6] from the cable guide.
6) Remove the six screws [7], and detach
the door switch assembly [8].
[7]
[6]
[8]
[7]
F04-704-03
4-57 P

the potential control PCB together with
the mounting base [10].
[10]
[9]
F04-704-04
8) Remove the four screws [11] and three

connectors [12], and detach the potential control PCB [13].
[11]
[12]
[13]
F04-704-05
4-58 P
7.4.2 Adjusting the Potential Sensor

The potential sensor and the potential control PCB are adjusted
in a pair, requiring simultaneous
replacement.
[2]
1) Start service mode, and set 0 to the

following to disable potential control:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT.
2) Replace the potential control PCB.
3) Connect the connector of the potential
sensor to the connector of the machine.
4) Fit the potential checking electrode
(FY9-3012) [2] to the potential sensor
[1].
[1]
F04-704-06
When fitting the checking electrode to the potential sensor [1],
be sure that the magnet of the
checking electrode does not
come into contact with the potential sensor cover.
5) Connect the clip [3] of the checking
electrode to the frame of the machine
(GND).
[3]
Be sure to keep the clip [3] fully

away from the sensor and not to
bring it in contact with the cover
of the sensor.
F04-704-07
4-59 P
6) Insert the door switch actuator into the

door switch assembly.
7) Connect the power plug to the power
outlet, and turn on the main power
switch.
8) Execute the following in service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>OFST.
9) Record the setting of <OFST> on the
service label.
10) Start service mode, and set 1 to the
following to enable potential control:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT.
11) Check to make sure that the data lamp
in the control panel is off; then, turn off
the main power switch.
12) Disconnect the power plug from the
power outlet.
13) Remove the checking electrode from
the potential sensor.
14) Mount the potential sensor.
4-60 P
7.5 Primary Charging Assembly

7.5.1 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly
hopper assembly.
2) Loosen the mounting screw [1], and
slide up the fixing member [2] to secure
the fixing member in place.
3) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the primary charging assembly
[4].
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
F04-705-01
If you have replaced the primary
charging wire or the primary
charging assembly, be sure to
execute the following in service
mode to clean the wire:
COPIER>FUNCTION>
CLEANING>WIRE-CLN.
Further, be user to use a
strengthened polishing pad
(blue holder) as the cleaning
pad.
4-61 P
7.6 Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly

7.6.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly
hopper assembly.
2) Remove the mounting screw [1], and
disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the pre-transfer assembly [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
F04-706-01
When you have mounted the
pre-transfer charging assembly,
be sure to execute wire cleaning in user mode. (If the surface temperature of the fixing
upper roller is 100C or lower,
you need not execute this, as the
wire will be cleaned automatically.
4-62 P
7.7 Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly

7.7.1 Removing the Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly
fixing/feeding unit.
2) Remove the two removing screws [1],
and detach the feeder right front cover
[2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
F04-707-01
detach the fixing guide [4].
[3]
[4]
F04-707-02
4) Disconnect the connector [5], and slide
out the transfer/separation charging assembly [6] to the front; then, detach it
by pulling it up at an angle.
[6]
[5]
F04-707-03
4-63 P
7.7.2 Mounting the Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly

Mount the transfer/separation charging assembly by reversing the steps used to remove it
while keeping the following in mind.
1) Make sure that the four protrusions [1]
[1]
[1]
on the transfer/separation charging assembly are correctly fitted into the cutoffs [2] in the fixing/feeding unit.
[1]
[1]
F04-707-04
2) Make sure that the leaf spring [3] of the
fixing/feeding unit comes in contact
with the frame of the transfer/separation
charging assembly (slide from the
front).
[2]
[3]
F04-707-05
[2]
[2]
F04-707-06
3) Mount the fixing guide plate [4] with a
mounting screw [5].
[5]
[4]
F04-707-07
4-64 P
4) If you have replaced the transfer charging wire or the transfer/separation

charging assembly be sure to execute
the following in service mode to clean
the wire:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>
WIRE-CLN.
If you have replaced the separation
charging wire or the separation charging
assembly, be sure to execute wire
cleaning in user mode. (If the surface
temperature of the fixing upper roller is
100C or lower, you need not execute
this mode, as the wire will be cleaned
automatically.)
Further, be sure to use a
strengthened polishing pad
(blue holder) as the cleaning
pad.
4-65 P
7.8 Charging Wire

7.8.1 Outline
The photosensitive drum is surrounded by three charging wires (for primary charging,
pre-transfer, and transfer/separation).
These charging wires are newly adopted brown wires (0.06 mm in diameter). Do not use a
gold-plated wire, which has been used in the past; otherwise, image faults may occur.
Further, be sure to use a strengthened polishing pad (in a blue holder) as the cleaning pad
for the primary charging assembly and the transfer charging assembly.
7.8.2 Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Primary Charging Assembly

1) Pick the wire cleaner, and disengage the
hook with a flat-blade screwdriver.
F04-708-01
7.8.3 Routing the Charging Wire

All charging wires (except the grid wire) are routed more or less in the same way; the following cites the primary charging assembly:
1) Remove the shielding plate (left, right)
of the charging assembly. To prevent
deformation (slack) in the primary
charging assembly, be sure to work
separately for the left shielding plate
and the right shielding plate (i.e., do not
loosen the mounting screws [1] of both
shielding plates at the same time).
2) Remove the wire cleaner.
[1]
F04-708-02
For other charging assemblies,
remove the two lids.
4-66 P
3) Free a length of about 5 cm of charging

wire from the charging wire reel (0.06
mm in diameter), and form a loop at its
end with a diameter of about 2 mm.
REF.
To form a loop, wind the charging wire around a hex key once,
and turn the hex key three to
four times; then, twist the charging wire.
4) Cut the end (excess) of the twisted

charging wire.
5) Hook the loop on the stud.
Stud
Reel
Charging electrode
(front) Charging wire (rear)
F04-708-03
6) At the rear, hook the charging wire on
the charging wire positioner; then, hook
the charging wire tension spring on the
charging wire where indicated to F04708-04.
F04-708-04
4-67 P
7) Cut off the excess of the charging wire

with nippers.
8) Pick the end of the charging wire tension spring with tweezers, and hook it
on the charging power supply electrode.
In the case of the pre-transfer charging
assembly, hook the spring on the pin at
the front.
F04-708-05
Make sure of the following:
The charging wire must not
be bent or twisted.
The charging wire must be
fitted in the V-groove of the
charging wire positioner.
Correct
Wrong
Grid side
Correct
Wrong
F04-708-06
9) Attach a cushoin in front of the charging wire. (This does not apply to the
primary charging assembly.)
10) Mount the shielding plate (left, right).
For other charging assemblies,
mount the two lids.
11) Mount the wire cleaner. At this time,

pay attention to make sure that the wire
cleaner is oriented correctly.
12) Wipe the charging wire with lint-free
paper moistened with alcohol.
4-68 P
7.8.4 Routing the Grid for the Primary Charging Assembly

1) Loosen the two mounting screws used
to secure the left and right shielding
plates in place.
2) Loosen the three mounting screws used
to secure the motor unit in place at the
front.
Screws
F04-708-07
3) Loosen the mounting screw, and move
it in the direction indicated; then, fix it
in place temporarily.
4) Free a length of about 5 cm of charging
wire from the charging wire reel (0.1
mm in diameter), and form a loop at its
end with a diameter of about 2 mm.
Screw
F04-708-08
REF.
To form a loop, wind the charging wire around a hex key once,
and turn the hex key three to
four times; then, twist the charging wire.
5) Cut the twisted charging wire (excess)

with nippers.
6) Hook the loop on stud A.
7) After routing the wire for 31 runs, lead
it through section B, and give it a half
turn; then, put it between the washer
and the motor unit, and wind it once
around the mounting screw (clockwise),
and secure it in place with a mounting
screw.
Stud A
Screw
F04-708-09
4-69 P
8) Cut the excess of the charging wire with

nippers.
9) Tighten the mounting screw loosened in
step 3).
Keep tightening until the tension of the
grid wire is even.
Be sure to pay attention to avoid deformation (slack) of the charging assembly
(as by tightening the mounting screw
found on the front of the left/right
shielding plate early).
10) Tighten the mounting screws loosened
in steps 1) and 2).
11) Wipe the grid wire with lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol.
1. Check to make sure that the
grid wire is free of bending
and twisting.
2. Be sure that the runs are laid
at equal intervals (i.e., the
wire is in the groove of the
block).
4-70 P
7.8.5 Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire

Charging assembly
Height of charging wire
Tolerance
Primary
1mm
7.5 +1.5
- 0 mm
7.5 +1.5
- 0 mm
Pre-transfer
No height adjusting
mechanism
10.060.3 mm
Transfer
9.50.5mm
2mm
C
Separation
16.00.5mm
14.90.5mm
2mm
D
T-04-708-01
REF.
The height (position) of the primary charging wire and the

transfer charging wire may be
adjusted by turning the screw
found at the back of the charging assembly; a single turn
changes the position of the
charging wire by about 0.7 mm.
4-71 P
7.8.6 Cleaning the Primary Anti-Stray Sheet

1)
2)
3)
4)
Open the front cover.

Remove the developing assembly.
Remove the hopper assembly.
Remove the process unit. (See p. 454P.)
5) Remove the two screws [1], and remove
the potential sensor rail stay [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F04-708-10
6) Clean the primary anti-stray sheet [3].
[3]
F04-708-11
4-72 P
7.9 Developing Assembly

The machines developing assembly is not equipped with a
cover to protect the developing
cylinder.
If you must remove the developing assembly, be sure to exercise care not to damage the developing cylinder.
When the developing assembly
is outside the machine, be sure
not to mount the developing assembly locking assembly. The
toner collecting in the path from
the hopper to the developing assembly can start to move astray
because of the vibration occurring during inspection or repair
work.
7.9.1 Removing the Developing Assembly from the Machine

1) Open the right upper cover, and remove
the mounting screw; then, detach the
door stopper tape.
push the developing locking assembly
[2] in the direction of the arrow to detach.
[1]
[2]
F04-709-01
3) Disconnect the connector [3], and take

the developing assembly [4] out of the
machine slowly.
[4]
[3]
F04-709-02
4-73 P
7.9.2 Removing the Blade Unit

1) Remove the developing assembly from
the machine.
and detach the developing assembly
cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F04-709-03
3) Place a newspaper on the floor or a
desk, and pour out the toner onto the
newspaper from the developing assembly.
and detach the blade unit [4] together
with its mounting base.
[3]
[4]
[3]
F04-709-04
The blade must be mounted
with a high accuracy. Do not
remove it on its own in the field
(i.e., be sure to remove it intact
with its mounting base).
4-74 P
7.9.3 Mounting the Blade

Mount the blade by reversing the steps used to remove it.
1) Push the blade mounting base against
the developing assembly, and tighten
the two mounting screws.
When mounting the blade, place paper
on the developing cylinder first to protect the developing cylinder.
7.9.4 Removing the Developing Cylinder/Magnetic Seal

1) Remove the developing assembly from
the machine.
2) Remove the blade unit.
and detach the gear unit [2] together
with the gear.
[2]
[1]
[1]
F04-709-05
When removing the gear unit,
be sure to take care, as the gear
attached to the screw will become free.
4) Remove the grip ring [3] mounted to
the cylinder shaft at the rear; then, remove the gear [4], parallel pin [5], and
push-on roll [6].
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
F04-709-06
4-75 P

and detach the electrode plate [8].
[7]
[8]
F04-709-07
detach the magnetic positioning plate
[10].
[9]
[10]
F04-709-08
7) Remove the grip ring [11] mounted to
the cylinder shaft at the front, and detach the push-on roll [12].
[11]
[12]
F04-709-09
4-76 P

and detach the blade [14] together with
its mounting plate.
[13]
[14]
[13]
F04-709-10
9) Remove the bearing [15] at the front
and the rear, and detach the developing
cylinder [16].
[15]
[16]
[15]
F04-709-11
Do not leave fingerprints or oils
on the surface of the developing
cylinder. Otherwise, dry wipe it
with lint-free paper. (Do not use
solvent.)
7.9.5 Cleaning the Developing Anti-Stray Sheet

1) Remove the developing assembly, and
clean the developing anti-stray sheet
[1].
[1]
F04-709-12
4-77 P
7.10 Hopper Assembly

7.10.1 Removing the Hopper Assembly from the Machine
1) Slide out the hopper assembly to the
front. (See p. 3-11P.)
detach the hopper assembly [2].
[1]
[2]
F04-710-01
The screw [1] is used to prevent
the hopper assembly [2] from
dropping; when removing it, be
sure to support the hoper assembly with your hand.
4-78 P
7.11 Drum Cleaner

7.11.1Construction
Cleaning blade
Separation claw
F04-711-01
7.11.2 Removing the Cleaning Blade

1) Slide out the process unit from the machine. (See p. 4-54P.)
2) Remove the primary charging assembly.
3) Disconnect the connector [1] of the AC
line of the drum heater.
4) Remove the four mounting screws [2],
and detach the cleaning blade assembly
[3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
F04-711-02
5) Remove the E-ring [4] from under the

cleaning blade assembly, and detach the
pressure spring [5].
[5]
[4]
F04-711-03
4-79 P
6) Disconnect the connector [6], and remove the two screws [7]; then, detach
the pre-exposure LED assembly [8].
[8]
[7]
[6]
F04-711-04
7) Loosen the five mounting screws [9],

and detach the blade support plate from
the cleaning blade.
[9]
F04-711-05
7.11.3 Mounting the Cleaning Blade

When mounting the cleaning blade, be sure that the side with the marking [1] will be the
face.
1) Push in the cleaning blade [2] until it
No gap Blade retaining
butts slightly again the rear.
[2]
plate
[1]
F04-711-06
4-80 P
2) Tighten the five mounting screws [3]

lightly, stopping to turn them when resistance is felt.
3) Turn the screws tightened lightly in step
2) about 20 to 30 in the order indicated, tightening them fully.
[3]
order of tightening
F04-711-07
After mounting the cleaning

blade, check to make sure that
the edge of the blade is not appreciably bent.
Further, be sure to clean the
groove in the blade support
plate before mounting the blade,
as toner or the like in the groove
can start to bend the blade.
4-81 P
7.11.4 Mounting the Side Seal

1) Mount the side seal [1] to the cleaner
housing where indicated (both ends).
AT this time, be sure that the edge of
the side seal is positioned as follows:
When replacing the side seal [1] at
the front, push the magnet roller [2]
toward the rear and then make sure
that the inner end of the side seal is
within the area [3] of the washer.
When replacing the side seal [1] at
the rear, push the magnet roller [2]
toward the front and then make sure
that the inner end of the side seal is
within the area [3] of the washer.
2) The bottom end of each side seal [1]
must be 0 to 0.5 mm from the corner of
the cleaner hosing; i.e., point of reference [4].
3) Attach the side seal [1] at the front and
the rear to the cleaner housing while
making sure its position is as indicated.
[3] [2]
[1]
[4] :0 to 0.5mm
[1]
F04-711-08
4-82 P
7.11.5 Cleaning the Cleaner Side Scraper

Perform the following when replacing the cleaning blade (every 1,000,000 sheets).
1) Remove the cleaning blade.
2) Remove any paper lint collecting at the tip of the side scarper (A, i.e., between magnet
roller and toner guide roller) using tweezers or the like.
3) Remove the toner from the surface of the magnet roller. (Roll paper into a U to scoop it
up.)
Side scraper (rear)
Magnet roller
Toner guide roller
Remove waste toner
(front)
30 to 40mm
30 to 40mm
4 to 8mm
(rear)
4 to 8mm
Toner guide roller

Side scraper (front)
F04-711-09
Remove waste toner
F04-711-10
4) Turn the magnet roller clockwise (viewing from the front).

5) Repeat steps 3) through 5) until the area from which toner was removed in step 3) is
once again coated with an even layer of toner.
4-83 P
7.12 Separation Claw/Separation Claw Drive Assembly

7.12.1 Removing from the Drum Unit
1) Remove the process unit from the machine. (See p. 4-54P.)
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
F04-712-01
1.Take care not to break the
separation claw.
2.Take care not to damage the
photosensitive drum.
cover [2].
the claw holder [4].
4-84 P
CHAPTER 5
PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
1. Outline
1.1 Specifications and Construction
The pickup/feeding system has the following main functions, and is constructed as shown
in the following figure:
Item
Paper feed reference
Paper stacking
Description
Center
Paper deck (right, left):
1500 sheets each (of 80 g/m2)
Front cassette (3/4):
550 sheets each (of 80/m2)
Manual feed tray:
50 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper size configura- Paper deck (left/right):
By service person
tion
Front cassette 3:
By user
Front cassette 4 (100-V model):
By user
Front cassette 4 (120/230-V
By service person
model):
Manual feed tray:
By user
Double-sided
Through path
copying
Related user mode
Cassette auto selection on/off
Paper icon selection
Related mechanical
Deck horizontal registration
adjustment
Cassette horizontal registration
Manual tray horizontal registration
T05-101-01
5-1 P
1.2 Arrangement of Roller and Sensors
External
delivery roller Internal delivery roller
PS36
Delivery
auxiliary roller
PS46
PS35 PS4
Registration roller
Multifeeder pull-out roller
Fixing upper roller
Fixing
lower roller
PS38
Duplexing
feed left roller
PS31 PS34
PS30
Duplexing feed
right roller
PS33
PS20
Separation roller
Duplexing
Curling roller assembly
outlet roller
PS28
Pre-registration roller
PS24
PS37
Reversal roller
Feed roller
PS23
PS29
Pull-out roller
PS32
PS19
Pickup vertical path
1 roller
PS25
2 roller
PS26
PS21
PS27
PS22

3 roller

4 roller
F05-102-01
5-2 P
The following sensors are used to monitor the movement of paper:

Notation
PS4
PS19
PS20
PS21
PS22
PS23
PS24
PS25
PS26
PS27
PS28
PS29
PS30
PS31
PS32
PS33
PS34
PS35
PS36
PS37
PS38
PS46
Name
Claw jam sensor
Right deck retry sensor
Left deck retry sensor
Cassette 3 retry sensor
Manual feed paper sensor
Vertical path 1 paper sensor
Laser write start sensor
Registration paper sensor
Duplexing pre-registration sensor
Duplexing horizontal registration sensor
Right deck feed paper sensor
Left deck feed paper sensor
Duplexing paper sensor
Internal delivery sensor
External delivery sensor
Reversal sensor 1
Reversal sensor 2
Delivery assembly jam sensor
T05-102-01
5-3 P
2. Pickup Assembly
2.1 Pickup Control System
The following figure shows the system used to control deck pickup operations:
F05-201-01
J113-A5 Vertical path paper detection signal (VP1PD)
J104B Pre-registration motor drive signal
J113-B2 Laser write start detection signal (LWRPD)
J106-A9 Registration paper detection signal (RGPD)
M2
J108A Main motor drive signal
M17
J106-A6 Registration roller clutch drive signal (RGCD*)

CL2
J115-B13 Left deck pull-out clutch signal (LDCLD*)

CL4
J104-B Vertical path duplexing motor drive signal
PS29
PS28
M25
J107-A16 Left deck feed paper detection signal (LDPFS)
PS24
J102-B6 Left deck pickup solenoid drive signal

(LDPUSD*)
M12
SL7
DC controller PCB
J104A Left deck pickup motor
J115-11A Left deck retry signal (LDRT)

J115-A5 Left deck lifter detection signal
(LDLTP)
J115-A8 Left deck paper detection signal
(LDPD)
J105-12 Left deck lifter drive signal (LDLM)
PS33
PS20
PS32
M11
PS19
SL6
PS10
PS11
PS6
PS7
M4
J104A Right deck pickup motor drive signal
M5
J105-3 Right deck pickup solenoid drive signal (RDPUSD*)

J112-A2 Right deck lifter detection signal (RDLTP)
J112-A5 Right deck paper detection signal (RDPD)
J105-13 Right deck lifter motor drive signal (RDLM)
J112-A8 Right deck retry signal (RDRT)
J112-B5 Right deck feed paper detection signal (RDPFS)
F05-201-01
5-4 P
The following figure shows the system used to control cassette pickup operations:
F05-201-02
J110-A8 Cassette 3 retry signal (C3RTD)
J110-A14 Vertical path 3 paper detection signal (VP3PD)
J104B Vertical path upper motor drive signal
M26
J113-A2 Vertical path 2 paper detection signal (VP2PD)
DC controller PCB
J104B Vertical path lower motor drive signal
M27
PS25
J104A Cassette 3/4 pickup motor drive signal

M12
J110-A17 Cassette 3 pickup solenoid

drive signal (C3PUSD*)
PS26
Cassette 3 lifter detection signal

(C3LTP)
PS21
SL3
J110-A5 Cassette 3 paper detection

signal (C3PD)
PS17
J110-B14 Vertical path 4 paper detection

signal (VP4PD)
PS13
J110-B8 Cassette 4 retry signal

(C4RTD)
PS27
J110-B17 Cassette 4 pickup solenoid drive

signal (C4PUSD*)
J110-B2 Cassette 4 lifter detection signal (C4LTP)
PS22
SL4
PS18
PS14
J110-B5 Cassette 4 paper detection signal (C4PD)
F05-201-02
5-5 P
2.1.1 Outline
The paper inside the deck/cassette is held up by a lifter so that it remains in contact with
the pickup roller, which is driven by the pickup motor (M11, M12, M24).
The pickup motor (M11, M12, M24) turns on, and the pickup roller rotates to feed paper.
The pickup solenoid (SL3, SL4, SL6, SL7) turns, and the pickup roller moves away from
the paper.
The feed roller and the separation roller make sure that only one sheet of paper is moved
farther to the paper path.
The sheet of paper moves through the vertical path assembly, and reaches the registration
roller.
The pickup motor (M11, M12, M24) is a stepping motor, adopted to ensure good separation and high durability.
5-6 P
2.1.2 Sequence of Operations (pickup)

a. Right Deck
A4, 2 Sheets, Continuous
Start key ON
or print command
1st sheet pickup
received
STBY
2nd sheet pickup

PRINT
INTR
LSTR
STBY
Main motor (M2)

Right deck pickup
motor (M11)
Right deck pickup
solenoid (SL6)
Right deck retry
sensor (PS19)
Vertical path duplexing
feeding motor (M25)
[1]
[1]
Vertical path roller 1

paper sensor (PS24)
Pre-registration motor
(M17)
Laser write start
sensor (PS28)
Registration paper
sensor (PS29)
Registration roller
clutch (CL2)
[1] : Rests to arch against the registration roller.
F05-201-03
5-7 P
b. Cassette 3
A4, 2 Sheets, Continuous
Start key ON or
PRINT command received
1st sheet pickup

2nd sheet pickup
STBY
PRINT
INTR
LSTR
STBY
Main motor (M2)

[2]
Cassette 3/4 pickup

motor (M12)
Cassette 4 pickup
solenoid (SL3)
(PS21)
Vertical path lower
motor (M27)
Vertical path 3 paper
sensor (PS6)
Vertical path upper
motor (M26)
sensor (PS25)
feeding motor (M25)
[1]

sensor (PS24)
(M17)
(PS28)
Registration roller
clutch (CL2)
Registration paper
sensor (PS29)
[1] : Rests to arch against the registration roller.
[2] : Rests to adjust the sheet-to-sheet interval 20 mm from the vertical path 3 roller.
F05-201-04
5-8 P
2.1.3 Pickup Retry Operation

If the retry sensor (PS19, PS20, PS21, PS22) detects a delay (as caused by wear on the
pickup roller), the machine executes pickup retry operation.
If a delay is detected once again after a retry, the machine will indicate the Jam message
in its control panel.
The following is the sequence of retry operations:
Pickup motor
M
SL
Pickup roller
Retry sensor
F05-201-05
Start key ON
Delay detected
Retry started
Pickup roller
Pickup roller
DOWN solenoid
Retry sensor
*1
Thereafter, same as normal

pickup sequence.
Vertical path
sensor
*1 : Period of detection, determined by the clock pulses from the motor.
F05-201-06
5-9 P
The following is used to switch the temperature control mechanism for the
fixing heater to use thick paper sequence when a specific source is selected:
COPIER>OPTION>CST>C1-DWSW
C1: front deck (right)
COPIER>OPTION>CST>C2-DWSW
C2: front deck (left)
5-10 P
2.2 Lifter Movement

2.2.1 Outline
When the deck or the cassette is pushed in, the cassette open/closed sensor turns on and,
at the same time, the pickup roller moves down. The condition causes the light-blocking
plate to move away from the lifter sensor, consequently turning on the cassette lifter motor
to move up the lifter.
The lifter keeps moving up unitil the lifter sensor detects the surface of paper. In the case
of the right/left deck, a limiter is mounted to prevent the lifter from moving farther up than
the lifter sensor.
When the open button of the deck or the cassette is pressed, the drive transmission gear of
the lifter becomes free, allowing the lifter to move down on its own weight.
Right deck
Cassette open/ Right deck
closed detection open/closed
sensor (PS5)
Lifter position Right deck lifter
sensor (PS6)
detection
Paper detection Right deck paper sensor
(PS7)
Paper level de- Right deck patection
per level upper
sensor (PS47)
Right deck paper level lower
sensor (PS48)
Lifter UP limRight deck limit
iter
sensor (PS8)
Drive motor
Right deck lifter
motor (M5)
Left deck
Left deck open/
closed sensor
(PS9)
Left deck lifter
sensor (PS10)
Left deck paper
sensor (PS11)
Cassette 3
Cassette 3 open/
closed sensor
(PS15)
Cassette 3 lifter
sensor (PS17)
Cassette 3 paper
sensor (PS13)
Cassette 4
Cassette 4 open/
closed sensor
(PS16)
Cassette 4 lifter
sensor (PS18)
Cassette 4 paper
sensor (PS14)
Left deck paper

level upper sensor (PS49)
Left deck paper
level lower sensor (PS50)
Left deck limit
sensor (PS9)
Left deck lifter
motor (M4)
Cassette 3 paper
level detection
PCB (variable resistor)
Cassette 4 paper
level detection
PCB (variable
resistor)
------
------
Cassette 3 lifter
motor (M20)
Cassette 4 lifter
motor (M21)
T05-202-01
5-11 P
The following figures show the components of the deck and the cassette:
Deck
retry sensor
Paper
Feed rollers
Pickup roller
Separation rollers
Limit
sensor
Pickup roller
Lifter sensor
Lifter position Paper
lever
detecting lever
Paper sensor
Deck open/
closed sensor
Lifter
F05-202-01
Cassette
retry sensor
Pickup roller
Feed rollers
Paper
Separation roller
Pickup roller
Lifter sensor
Lifter
Paper sensor
Cassette open/
closed sensor
F05-202-02
5-12 P
2.2.2 Lifter Limiter Control Circuit (right/left deck)

When the CPU on the DC controller PCB generates the motor drive signal, the lifter motor turns on to move up the lifter. When the deck reaches the lifter sensor, the deck lifter detection signal is sent to the CPU, which in response will stop the deck lifter drive motor.
The deck lift sensor is mounted in consideration of the motor failing to stop. When the
surface of paper reaches the deck limiter, the limit signal will be sent to the DC controller
PCB to cut the drive signal, thereby stopping the lifter motor.
The following is a block diagram of the control circuit:
DC controller PCB
J112
Right deck lifter detection signal
A2 (RDLTP)
Motor drive
signal
CPU
Right deck
lifter sensor
J2105
J105 J2108
Limit
detection
circuit
PS6
5
13
Motor
driver
PCB
M5
Right deck
lifter drive
motor
PS8
Right deck
limit sensor
PS10
Left deck
lifter sensor
M4
Left deck
lifter drive
motor
J112
B8 Right deck lifter limit signal
(RDEL)
DC controller PCB
J115
A5
Motor drive
signal
CPU
Left deck lifter detection signal

(LDLTP)
J2105
J105 J2108
Limit
detection
circuit
12
Motor
driver
PCB
A2
J115
Left deck lifter limit signal
(LDEL)
PS12
Left deck
limit sensor
F05-202-03
5-13 P
2.2.3 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper

The presence/absence of paper in the deck or the cassette is detected by the cassette paper
sensor.
Paper Is Present
Paper sensor
Paper Is Absent
Paper detecting lever
Paper sensor
Paper
Lifter
Lifter
F05-202-04
F05-202-05
2.2.4 Detecting the Level of Paper

a. Outline
The machine indicates the level of paper in the deck or the cassette on the control panel in
four levels (including absence):
3 bars
2 bars
1 bar
No bar
F05-202-06
5-14 P
100% to about 50% of capacity

50% to about 10% of capacity
10% or less of capacity
Absence of paper
T05-202-02
b. Operation
In the case of the right/left deck, two sensors are used to detect the position of the deck
base plate, and the level of paper is identified with reference to the state of the sensors (on/
off).
The absence of paper is detected by an exclusive sensor (See 2.2.3 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper).
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
Paper level Paper level Paper level

(100% to (about 50% (about 10%
about 50%) to about 10%) or less)
F05-202-07
Paper level
100% to about 50%
about 50% to about 10%
about 10% or less
absent
[1]
Sensor
(PS47)
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Right deck
[2]
Sensor
Sensor
(PS48)
(PS7)
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
[1]
Sensor
(PS49)
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Left deck
[2]
Sensor
(PS50)
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Sensor
(PS11)
ON
ON
ON
OFF
T05-202-03
5-15 P
In the case of the cassette 3/4, the level of paper is identified with reference to the resistance read of the variable resistor operating in conjunction with the movement of the lifter
drive shaft.
Variable
resistor
Paper level (high)
Variable
Paper level (low) resistor
F05-202-08
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C3-LVOL
when 50 sheets exist in the cassette 3
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C3-HVOL
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C4-LVOL
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C4-HVOL
5-16 P
2.3 Identifying the Size of Paper in the Cassette

2.3.1 Right/Left Deck
The right/left deck does not possess a paper size detection mechanism, and its size configuration is changed as follows (A4, B5, LTR):
[1] Changing the position of the paper size guide plate of the cassette.
[2] Registering the new paper size in service mode.
COPIER>OPTION>CST>P-SZ-C1
right deck paper size
Settings:
6: A4; 15: B5; 18: LTR
left deck paper size
Settings:
6: A4; 15: B5; 18: LTR
2.3.2 Cassette 3/4

a. Outline
The size of paper inside the cassette is identified by the paper size sensor mounted to the
rear of the cassette holder.
When the cassette is slid into the cassette holder, the paper size sensor is activated by the
boss on the cassette, enabling the identification of paper width and length. Based on the
width and the length, the DC controller identifies the size of the paper, and sends the result
to the controller unit and the reader unit.
The boss used to press the paper size sensor operates in conjunction with the guide plate
inside the plate, i.e., its position is determined when the guide plate is set to suit a particular
paper size.
The cassette 4 of the 120/230V model, however, is not equipped with a paper size detection mechanism, requiring switching of the paper size.
b. Identifying the Size of Paper
The paper length sensor consists of two photointerrupters, and the combination of outputs
from these two photointerrupters is used to find out the length of paper.
The paper width sensor, on the other hand, is a variable resistor, and the resistance it reads
is used to find out the width of paper.
5-17 P
Paper width detecting VR Width guide (rear)

Width guide (front)
Paper length sensor unit
Length guide
Cassette
F05-203-01
Paper length detection

Paper width detection
Cassette 3
SV2 (2 photointerrupters)
SVR4
Cassette 4*1
SV1 (2 photointerrupters)
SVR5
*1 Not standard with the 120/230V model

T05-203-01
c. Changing the Paper Size Configuration of the Cassette 4 (120/230-V model only)
The paper size configuration of the cassette 4 can be configured as follows:
[1] Changing the position of the paper size guide plate inside the cassette.
[2] Registering the new paper size in service mode.
cassette 4 paper size
5-18 P
2.3.3 Markings on the Width Guide Rail

The width guide rail found inside the cassette is provided with paper size positioning
holes, given markings from A through M as shown below.
These markings can help determine whether the correct paper width is selected, as when
the user reports skew movement of paper (Note that this information is not disclosed to the
user).
Marking
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Paper name
STMT-R
A5-R
B5-R
KLGL-R
GLTR-R
G-LGL
A4-R
LGL/LTR-R
FLSC
B4/B5
G-LTR
279.4431.8mm
(11"17") / LTR
A3/A4
Remarks
U3
U2
U1
U4
T05-203-02
5-19 P
2.3.4 Paper Sizes

The DC controller PCB identifies the size of paper based on inputs of paper width and
length as shown in the following table, and sends the result of identification to the controller
unit.
The paper sizes in the following table are selected from specific groups.
The asterisk (*) indicates a factory setting.
Paper length
PS102/
PS101/
PS102/
PS101/
PS102/
PS101/
PS102/
PS101/
sensor
PS104
SZ 2
PS103
SZ 1
PS104
SZ 2
PS103
SZ 1
PS104
SZ 2
PS103
SZ 1
PS104
SZ 2
PS103
SZ 1
Paper
width sensor
(slice level)
Unit: mm
288.5
273.7
261.8
238.0
212.9
206.6
196.6
186.0
165.2
144.1
Signal
ON/
OFF
A4
A3
279.4
(U4)
(U1)
431.8mm
(1117)
-
B5
STMT
A5
LTRR
A4R
B4
LGL
-
(U2)
G-LTRR
K-LGLR
B5R
A5R
STMTR
(U3)
-
T05-203-03
Group
U1
U2
U3
Size
G-LTR
K-LGL
FOOLSCAP
OFFICIO
E-OFFI
A-OFFI
M-OFI
G-LGL
FOLIO
AUS-FLS
LTR
A-LTR
T05-203-04
5-20 P
COPIER>OPTION>CST>CST-U1
31: G-LTR*; 22: K LGL
COPIER>OTPION>CST>CST-U2
24: FLSC*; 26: OFI; 27: E-OFI; 36: A-OFI; 37: M-OFI
34: G-LGL*; 35: FOLI; 25: A-FLS
18: LTR*; 29: A-LTR
*Factory setting.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C3-STMTR
Used to adjust the paper width basic value for STMTR in the cassette 3.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C3-A4R
Used to adjust the paper width basic value for A4R in the cassette 3.
COPIER>CST-ADJ>C4-STMTR
Used to adjust the paper width basic value for STMTR in the cassette 4.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C4-A4R
Used to adjust the paper width basic value for A4 in the cassette 4.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>C1-DWSW
Used to switch the fixing temperature control mechanism for pickup for the
right deck.
COPIER>OTPON>BODY>C2-DWSW
Used to switch the fixing temperature control mechanism for pickup for the
left deck.
5-21 P
Paper Types Supported by the Machine

Paper name
A3
A4R
A4
A5
A5R
B4
B5R
B5
1117
LTRR
LTR
STMT
STMR
LEGAL
Korean Government
Korean Government R
FOOLSCAP
Australian Foolscap
OFICIO
Ecuadorian Officio
Bolivian Officio
Argentine LTR
Argentine LTRR
Government LTR
Government LTRR
Argentine LGL
Government LGL
FOLIO
Argentine Officio
Mexico Officio
Notation
A3
A4R
A4
A5
A5R
B4
B5R
B5
1117
LTRR
LTR
STMT
STMTR
LGL
K-LGL
K-LGLR
FLSC
A-FLS
OFI
E-OFI
B-OFI
A-LTR
A-LTRR
G-LTR
G-LTRR
A-LGL
G-LGL
FOLI
A-OFI
M-OFI
Size (vertical x horizontal; mm)

(2971)(4201)
(2101)(2971)
(2971)(2101)
(2101)(148.51)
(148.51)(2101)
(2571)(3641)
(1821)(2571)
(2571)(1821)
(2791)(4321)
(2161)(2791)
(2791)(2161)
(2161)(139.51)
(139.51)(2161)
(2161)(3561)
(2651)(1901)
(1901)(2651)
(2161)(3301)
(2061)(3371)
(2161)(3171)
(2201)(3201)
(2161)(3551)
(2801)(2201)
(2201)(2801)
(2671)(2031)
(2031)(2671)
(2201)(3401)
(2031)(3301)
(2101)(3301)
(2201)(3401)
(2101)(3411)
T05-203-05
5-22 P
2.4 Manual Feed Tray Pickup Assembly

2.4.1 Pickup Operation
The presence/absence of paper on the manual feed tray is detected by the manual feed paper sensor (PS23). The manual feed pull-out roller is driven by the main motor by way of
the manual feed pickup clutch (CL3). When the clutch is engaged, the manual feed holding
plate solenoid turns on to shift up the manual feed holding tray. This condition allows the
gear of the feed roller to receive the drive of the main motor so that the feed roller makes a
single rotation to move paper. (The paper is moved as far as the registration roller by the
work of the manual feed pull-off roller while the feed roller rotates.)
SL2
Manual feed pickup detection

signal (MFDS)
J108-B9
Manual feed releasing

solenoid drive signal (MFLSD*)
J108-B12
Manual feed pickup clutch drive signal

(MFPCD*)
J108-B4
Main motor drive signal

CL3
M1
CL2
Registration roller clutch drive signal

(RGCD*)
J106-A6
DC controller PCB
A
Paper
A
Feed roller
Registration roller
Manual feed
pull-out roller
PS23
Manual feed
holding plate
Tray
Separation roller
F05-204-01
5-23 P
2.4.2 Detecting the Size of Paper on the Manual Feed Tray

The side guide on the manual feed tray is set by the user to suit the width of paper. The
resistance of the variable resistor changes in keeping with the movement of the side guide,
and the reading is sent to the DC controller PCB for identification of the width of paper. The
machine is not equipped with a mechanism to detect the length of paper, requiring the user
to select a specific size.
The detected width of paper is for control of the laser, and the length of paper is detected
when the manual feed tray is used with reference to the period of time during which the preregistration paper sensor (PS23) remains on.
The paper width basic value must always be entered newly whenever the variable resistor
has been replaced.
Side guide
(rear)
(MFPD)J108-B6
Manual feed tray paper

width detection signal
Manual feed tray
Variable
resistor (SVR1)
Side guide (front)
DC controller PCB
F05-204-02
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4R
Used to enter the paper width basic value for A4R for the manual feed tray.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A6R
Used to enter the paper width basic value for A6R for the manual feed tray.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4
Used to enter the paper width basic value for A4 paper for the manual feed
tray.
5-24 P
3. Controlling the Registration Clutch

3.1 Outline
The registration clutch is controlled so that print paper and the image on the drum match
at a specific point, and the timing at which it is turned on may be adjusted in service mode
(ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST).
3.2 Control System
Registration rollers
Main motor
M2
CL2
Registration drive signal

(RGCD*)
J106-A6
DC controller
PCB
F05-302-01
5-25 P
5-26 P
Reversing flapper solenoid drive signal
(RVFSD2*)
J107-B11
PS46
PS36
Reversal detection signal 2(RVS2)

J107-B16
Claw jam detection signal (CJAM)

J106-B19
Internal delivery sensor drive signal (IDS)

J106-B1
Delivery flapper solenoid drive signal

(RIVFS-D1*)
J106-A14
J107B
Reversal motor drive signal
Registration paper detection signal (RGPD)

J106-A9
SL5
Delivery assembly jam detection signal (DSJAM)

J106-B2
SL8
4. Double-Sided Prints
4.1 Control System
4.1.1 Sending Paper to the Reversing Assembly After Printing on the First
Side
DC controller PCB
PS35PS4
Delivery flapper
PS38
PS29
PS37
Reversing flapper
M14
F05-401-01
M14
M29
M18
Duplexing
Duplexing
feeding left roller feeding right roller
Curling roller
PS37
PS30
J104B Vertical path duplexing feeding

motor drive signal
J107-B13 Duplexing pre-registration paper

detection signal (DGRFPD)
J107A Duplexing/feeding right

motor drive signal
PS31PS34
J107-B14 Duplexing feeding right

motor drive signal (DPDS)
J107-B12 Duplexing horizontal

registration signal (DSRGPD)
PS38
J107A Duplexing/feeding left

motor drive signal
J107-B16 Reversal detection signal 2 (RVS2)
SL8
PS46
J107B Reversal motor drive signal
J107-B15 Reversal detection signal 1 (RVS1)
J107-B11 Reversing flapper solenoid drive signal

(RVFSD2*)
4.1.2 Sending Paper from the Reversing Assembly to the Duplexing/Feeding Assembly
Reversal roller
PS29
PS35
PS28
Duplexing
assembly
outlet roller
PS24
M25
DC controller PCB
F05-401-02
5-27 P
4.1.3 Outline
The feeding path for the first side of a double-sided print is formed when the delivery
flapper solenoid (SL5) tuns off and the reversing flapper solenoid (SL8) turns on, thereby
shifting up the delivery flapper and the reversing flapper.
When the leading edge of a sheet after printing on its first side reaches the delivery assembly jam sensor (PS48), the reversing flapper solenoid turns on. After the delivery assembly jam sensor (PS48) turns on and when the paper reaches a specific point, the reversal motor (M14) starts to rotate to move the paper to the duplexing reversing assembly.
When the paper moves past the reversal sensor 2 (PS38) and reaches a specific point, the
reversal motor (M19) stops to rotate, holding the paper in wait in the reversing assembly.
When the reversal motor (M14) starts to rotate once again (in reverse this time), the paper
in the reversing assembly is moved to the duplexing wait position by the work of the
duplexing feed left/right roller, which is driven by the duplexing feeding left/right motor
(M29, M18).
The duplexing feed right roller also causes the paper to arch while moving it, thereby removing the skew. The horizontal registration operation is executed in 100 msec after the paper is made to arch.
Thereafter, the duplexing feed left/right motor (M29, M18) turns on once again to feed
the paper to the duplexing wait position.
In thick paper mode, the paper is not arched.
Memo
5-28 P
4.2 Sequence of Operations (printing)
A4, 4SheetsDouble-Sided Prints

Originals set in ADF
Start key ON or print count set
Printing on face of
1st sheet
Printing on face of
2nd sheet
Printing on back of
1st sheet
Printing on back of
2nd sheet
Pickup motor (M2)

Claw jam sensor (PS4)
(PS35)
Delivery flapper
solenoid (SL5)
Reversal motor (M14)
Reversal sensor 2
(PS38)
Reversal flapper
solenoid (SL8)
Reversal sensor 1
(S37)
Duplexing feed left
motor (M29)
Duplexing feed right
motor (M18)
Duplexing paper
sensor (PS34)
Duplexing pre-registration
sensor (PS30)
feed motor (M25)
Horizontal registration
sensor (PS31)
Pull in
Discharge
yyyy
;;;;
;;;;
yyyy
[1]
Pull in
Discharge
yyyy
;;;;
;;;;
yyyy
[2] [1]
[2]
[1]:stops to arch against the duplexing feed right roller.

[2]:stops for control of the sheet-to-sheet distance in duplexing wait
F05-402-01
5-29 P
4.3 Through-Path Operation

4.3.1 Outline
The term through-path is used to refer to the moving of paper to the duplexing feed assembly after it has been moved to the reversing assembly by the work of the delivery flapper
and the reversing flapper.
The machine is capable of reordering page images in its memory, eliminating the need to
print according to the order of originals; as a result, it need not hold paper as long as other
models would, speeding up double-sided printing. As many as two sheets of paper may exist
between the registration sensor and the duplexing paper sensor at a time.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE
Use it to adjust image write start position in main scanning direction for repickup.
(-100 to 100 mm)
5-30 P
4.3.2 Outline of Operations

The following shows through-path operation when printing one set of duplexing prints of
10 originals.
1) The 1st sheet is picked from the deck.
2) The 1st side is printed on the 1st sheet.

The 2nd sheet is picked up.
3) The 3rd side is printed on the 2nd

sheet.
The 1st sheet is moved to the
reversing assembly.
The 3rd sheet is picked up.
4) The 1st sheet is moved to the duplexing

feeding assembly.
F05-403-01
5-31 P
5) The 1st sheet is moved to duplexing

wait position.
The 2nd sheet is moved to the
reversing assembly.
The 5th side is printed on the 3rd
sheet.
6) The 1st sheet is repicked from

duplexing wait position.
The 2nd sheet is moved to the
duplexing feeding assembly.
7) The 2nd side is printed on the 1st

sheet.
The 2nd sheet is moved to duplexing
wait position.
The 4th sheet is picked up.
8) The 7th side is printed on the 4th sheet,

and the 1st sheet is delivered.
2
1
1
5
F05-403-02
5-32 P
9) The 4th side is printed on the 2nd

sheet, and the 3rd sheet is held in
wait in duplexing wait position.
The 5th sheet is picked up.
10) The 2nd sheet is delivered.

The 9th side is printed on the 5th
sheet.
5
2
11) The 6th side is printed on the 3rd

sheet.
The 4th sheet is held in wait in
duplexing wait position.
12) The 3rd sheet is delivered.
7
4
3
9
3
F05-403-03
5-33 P
13) The 8th side is printed on the 4th

sheet.
14) The 4th sheet is delivered, and the

10th side is printed on the 5th side.
8
7
7
9
5
3
1
6
4
6
4
15) The 5th sheet is delivered.
10
9
8
7
3
6
4
F05-403-04
5-34 P
4.4 Detecting Horizontal Registration Position

4.4.1 Outline
Paper position:
Detection:
Drive:
Position:
detected by the duplexing horizontal registration sensor (PS31).

started when the duplexing paper sensor (PS34) turns on.
from the duplexing horizontal registration motor (M16).
measured with reference to pulses from the duplexing horizontal
registration motor (1 pulse = 0.16 mm, approx.).
Related service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE
T05-404-01
PS31
Detection start position
M16
10mm
Home position
Edge of paper
F05-404-01
Paper
5-35 P
4.4.2 Operation
The home position of the duplexing horizontal registration sensor is detected each time
the main power switch is turned on, jam recovery is made, or front cover is closed; and the
sensor moves to the start position (for A4) when the registration sensor turns on.
When paper moved to the duplexing feeding assembly reaches the duplexing paper sensor
(PS34), the horizontal registration motor (M16) turns on, and the duplexing horizontal registration sensor (PS31) starts detection of the edge of the paper; this is done during the 100msec period in which the duplexing feed right motor (M19) remains at rest, and each time a
double-sided print is made.
The start position for detection is set to about 10 mm from the edge of paper, determined
in reference to an ideal position of paper obtained based on the position of the slide guide of
the manual feed tray and the size of the cassette being used when the registration sensor
turns on.
The detection of paper is done with reference to the start position, and the discrepancy between the start position and the actual position of the paper is identified with reference to
the number of pulses (a signal pulse being about 0.16 mm) generated by the motor.
Main power switch ON
INTR/STBY
PRINT
Duplexing feeding right

motor (M18)
100 msec (approx.)
Registration sensor
(PS29)
Duplexing paper
sensor (PS34)
Duplexing horizontal
registration motor (M16)
Reverse
Forward
Position of
horizontal
registration
sensor (PS31)
Forward
Reverse
Duplexing horizontal
registration sensor (PS31)
H.P
S.P
*1
10 mm (approx.)
Edge of paper
*1: While the light-blocking plate is absent, the edge of paper and butting against the
sensor are detected.
*2: Different paper sizes result in different paper edge positions, thus different S.P.
H.P: Start position of the duplexing horizontal sensor.
S.P: Start position of detection by the duplexing registration sensor.
F05-404-02
5-36 P
5. Controlling the Pickup Assembly

5.1 Pickup Assembly Motors
The pickup assembly possesses as many as 12 2-phase stepping motors of magnetic excitation type. Each motor is supplied with 24V power from the motor driver PCB, and is
turned on/off and its direction of rotation is controlled by pulse signals from the DC controller PCB.
The following table shows each motor used in the pickup assembly, and the figure that
follows it is a block diagram of the pickup motor control circuit for the cassette 3/4 by way
of providing an example of the pickup motor control circuit:
Zone
Pickup
Motor name
Right deck pickup motor
Notation
Unit
Error detection
(M11) See F05-201-01 Motor error
Jam
Left deck pickup motor
(M24) See F05-201-01 Same as above.
Cassette 3/4 pickup motor
Vertical path Vertical path upper motor
Vertical path lower motor
Vertical path duplexing feed (M25) See F05-401-02 Same as above.
motor
Reversal/
Reversal motor
duplexing
Duplexing feed left motor
Duplexing feed right motor
Duplexing horizontal regis(M16) See F05-404-01 Error code inditration motor
cation 'E051'
Other
(M17) See F05-201-01 Motor error
Jam
Delivery motor
(M13)
Same as above.
T05-501-01
DC controller
PCB
Motor driver
+24V
CPU
(IC5025)
J104
J2101
J2104
A7
A14
A10
+24V
A8
A13
A*
A9
A12
A9
A11
3
2
1
B
+24V
B*
A10
M12
F05-501-01
5-37 P
6. Controlling the Delivery Assembly

6.1 Reversal Delivery Operation
The machine delivers its output using a face-up or face down method.
Method of delivery
Face-up
Face-down
Mode of operation
Prints multiple copies of a single original
In manual feed mode, when a default size is selected while
the selected paper type is not plain paper
Other than above
T05-601-01
The following takes place when the output is delivered face-down:

1) The paper is moved to the duplexing
feeding assembly.
Internal
delivery roller
PS35 PS4
Point of reversal
PS37
Reversing flapper
M14
F05-601-01
2) The internal delivery sensor (PS35)
turns on, and the paper is moved over a
specific distance; then, the reversal motor (M14) turns on to stop the paper
when its trailing edge turns on the reversal sensor 1 (PS37).
PS35 PS4
Point of reversal
PS37
PS37
Reversing flapper
M14
F05-601-02
5-38 P
3) The reversal motor (M14) rotates once

again to move the paper in the direction
of delivery with the trailing edge of the
paper leading the way.
Point of reversal
PS46
PS37
PS37
Reversing flapper
M14
F05-601-03
4) The reversal motor (M14) stops when

the external sensor (PS36) turns on and
the trailing edge of the paper moves
past the reversing roller. The fixing motor (M19) rotates, and the paper is delivered by the work of the external delivery roller.
M19
External
delivery roller
PS36
Point of
reversal
PS37
Reversing flapper
M14
F05-601-04
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TPR-DECL (switching delivery path to

improve stacking for delivering thick paper in face-down mode)
0: normal (default)
1: causes paper to pass over the reversing roller for delivery (face-down)
after de-curling
In thick paper mode, the paper is moved over the reversing roller to remove
its curl.
Memo
5-39 P
7. Controlling the Cassette Heater

The system used to control the cassette heater is constructed as follow:
DC controller
PCB
J119
J102B
4 3
7 1214
Cassette
heater switch
SW4
4 32 1
Cassette heater
H4
J2053
J2052
Main
power
switch
0V
CASSETTE_HEATER_ON [1]
12V
DC power
supply PCB
J4001
2 1
1
2
8
AC driver PCB
SW1
J2051
Power supply
3 2 1
RL1
SW3
Environment switch
F05-700-01
The following signal has the function indicated:
[1] Cassette Heater Drive Control Signal:
When '1', supplies the AC driver PCB with AC power.
The cassette heater switch (SW4) serves to supply power to the heater
through the AC line or to deprive it of power.
If the environment switch (SW3) is off, the heater will not be supplied with
power through the AC line even if the cassette heater switch (SW4) remains
on.
5-40 P
The cassette heater (H4) used for the 100-V model operates as follows, assuming that
the environment switch (SW3) remains on:
Main power
switch (SW1)
ON
OFF
Cassette heater
switch (SW4)
Cassette heater (H4) ON
Standby/front
cover open
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
During printing In power save

mode
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
T05-700-01
The cassette heater (H4) used for the 230-V model operates as follows, assuming that
the environment switch (SW3) remains on:
Main power switch
(SW1) OFF
ON
OFF
Cassette heater
switch (SW4)
Cassette heater (H4) ON
OFF
Standby/front
cover open
ON
OFF
During printing In power save

mode
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
T05-700-02
5-41 P
8. Detecting Jams
8.1 Outline
8.1.1 Arrangement of Jam Sensors
PS36 PS35 PS4
PS29
PS28
PS46
PS38
PS31PS34
PS30
PS37
PS33
PS20
PS24
PS32
PS19
PS25
PS26
PS21
PS27
PS22
F05-801-01
5-42 P
8.1.2 Types of Jams

Sensor
Right deck retry sensor
Left deck retry sensor
Claw jam sensor
Reversal sensor 1
Reversal sensor 2
Delivery assembly jam sensor
Delay jam
PS19
PS20
PS21
PS22
PS32
PS33
PS24
PS25
PS26
PS27
PS28
PS29
PS4
PS35
PS36
PS37
PS38
PS34
PS30
PS46
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Stationary
jam
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Power-on stationary jam

No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
T05-801-01
5-43 P
8.2 Sequence of Operations (jam detection)

8.2.1 Delay Jam
a. Pickup from the Cassette (right deck, left deck, cassette 3/4)
The leading edge of paper does not reach the sensor within a specific period of time after the motor turns on.
Start key ON
or PRINT set
INTR
PRINT
[1]
[1]
Motor N-1
Jam check
Sensor N
Error
Normal
[1]: specific feed period.
F05-802-01
Pickup assembly
Right deck
Left deck
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Motor N-1
Right deck pickup motor (M11)
Left deck pickup motor (M24)
Cassette 3/4 pickup motor (M12)
Cassette 3/4 pickup motor (M12)
DelSzzay sensor N
Right deck retry sensor (PS19)
Left deck retry sensor (PS20)
Cassette 3 retry sensor (PS21)
T05-802-01
5-44 P
b. Other Delay Jams

With the exception of the pickup sensor delay jam, the following timing of detection applies:
The feed time between the sensor N-1 and the delay jam sensor N is under control with
reference to the clock pulses from the main motor, and a delay jam will be identified if the
leading edge of paper does not reach the delay jam sensor N within a specific feed period.
Start key ON
or PRINT set
INTR
Sensor N-1
[1]
PRINT
[1]
Jam check
Sensor N
Error
Normal
[1]: specific feed period
F05-802-02
Delay jam sensor N

Right deck feed paper sensor (PS32)
Left deck feed paper sensor (PS33)
Vertical path 1 paper sensor (PS24)
Laser write start sensor (PS28)
Registration paper sensor (PS29)
External delivery sensor (PS36)
External delivery sensor (PS36)
Reversal sensor 1 (PS37)
Duplexing paper sensor (PS34)
Duplexing pre-registration sensor (PS30)
Sensor N-1
Left deck retry sensor (PS20)
Left deck feed paper sensor (PS33)
Duplexing pre-registration sensor (PS30)
Claw jam sensor (PS4)
Delivery assembly jam sensor (PS46)
Duplexing paper sensor (PS34)
T05-802-02
5-45 P
8.2.2 Stationary Jams

a. Ordinary Stationary Jam
Start key ON or
PRINT set
INTR
Jam check
Sensor N
PRINT
L+A
L+A
Normal
L = paper length.
Error
A = specific feed distance.
F05-802-03
Stationary jam sensor N

Claw jam sensor
Reversal sensor 1
Reversal sensor 2
T05-802-03
b. Stationary Jam at Power-On

A stationary jam at power-on is identified in reference to the presence/absence of paper
over a specific sensor about 1 sec after the control panel power switch is turned on.
5-46 P
8.2.3 Jam History

The machine keeps a record of jams that occur inside it, and allows a check in service
mode.
COPIER>DISPALY>JAM
Use it to display jam data.
COPIER>FUNCTION>JAM-HIST
Use it to clear the jam history.
The machine remembers the following in the event of a jam, and will resume operation
using the data after removal of the jam:
Remaining number of copies
Copying mode
5-47 P
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

mind:
1.
to disassemble it.
7.
5-48 P
9.1 Manual Feed Tray Assembly
[2]
[1]
9.1.1 Removing the Right Upper Cover

the cover [2].
F05-901-01
2) Disconnect the connector [3], and detach the right upper cover [4].
[3]
[4]
F05-901-02
9.1.2 Opening of the Right Upper Cover

1) Open the right upper cover, and remove
the mounting screw [1].
[1]
F05-901-03
5-49 P
9.1.3 Removing the Manual Feed Pull-Out Roller Unit

1) Open the right upper cover. (See p. 549P.)
2) Remove the two stop rings [1] (left,
right), and shift the two bushings [2];
then, detach the manual feed pull-out
roller unit.
[1]
[2]
F05-901-04
[2]
[1]

2) Remove the manual feed pull-out roller
unit. (See p. 5-50P.)
3) Remove the stop print [1], and detach
the pickup roller [2].
F05-901-05
[1]
[2]
[1]

unit. (see p. 5-50P.)
2) Remove the two stop rings [1] (left,
right), and remove the two bushings [2];
then, detach the separation roller assembly [3].
[3]
F05-901-06
5-50 P
3) Disengage the hook [4] of the separation roller assembly, and detach the
separation roller [5].
[4]
[5]
F05-901-07
9.1.6 Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller

1) Remove the right upper cover.
2) Remove the upper guide [1].
3) If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup, adjust the position
of the pressure spring of the separation
roller.
[1]
F05-901-08
If double feeding occurs, remove the

mounting screw [2], and shift down the
mounting base [3]; then, fix it in hole A
using a mounting screw [2].
If pickup failure occurs, remove the
mounting screw [2], and shift the
mounting base [3] up; then, fix it in
hole B using a mounting screw [2].
Hole A
Hole B
[2]
[3]
F05-901-09
5-51 P
9.1.7 Removing the Manual feed Tray Paper Sensor

detach the cover [2].
[1]
[2]
F05-901-10
detach the sensor unit [4].
[3]
[4]
F05-901-11
4) Free the harness [5] from the harness
guide [6], and disconnect the connector
[7].
5) Remove the sensor [8].
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
F05-901-12
5-52 P
9.1.8 Attaching the Side Guide Timing Belt in the Manual Feed Tray
Assembly
1) Butt the rack plate [1] of the manual
feed tray against section A (open state).
2) Move the slide volume in the direction
of B, and attach the timing belt [2] onto
the pulley [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
F05-901-13
9.1.9 Removing the Manual Feed Pull-Out Roller

unit. (See p. 5-50P.)
3) Remove the two E-rings [1] (left, right).
4) Remove the stopper [2], two gears [3],
and two bushings [4].
5) Remove the two E-rings [5] and two
bushings [6]; then, detach the manual
feed pull-out roller.
[6]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[3]
[7]
When removing the stopper [2]

and the gear [3], take care not to
lose the three parallel pins [7];
they will slip off.
[2]
[1]
(rear)
[1]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
(front)
F05-901-14
5-53 P
9.2 Deck Pickup Assembly

9.2.1 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Assembly
1) Slide out the right deck.
2) Open the right upper cover and the right
lower cover.
An attempt to remove the
pickup assembly without removing the deck will cause the
lifter to get trapped, not holding
the pickup assembly from sliding out.
[4]
[2]
[3]
[4]

detach the connector cover [2]; then,
disconnect the connector [3].
and detach the pickup assembly [5].
[1]
[5]
F05-902-01
9.2.2 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Assembly

1) Slide out the left/right deck.
2) Remove the two stoppers [2] found on
the left and right sides of the left deck
[1]; then, detach the left deck [1].
[2]
[1]
F05-902-02
5-54 P
3) Disconnect the connector [3] from inside the machine, and remove the locking support [4].
[3]
[4]
F05-902-03
the two pickup fixing plates [6]; then,
detach the cassette 2 pickup assembly
[7].
[7]
[6] [5]
[5]
[6]
Keep supporting the pickup assembly; otherwise, the pickup

assembly could drop when the
fixing plate is removed.
F05-902-04
9.2.3 Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup Assembly

Use the steps used to remove the right
deck pickup assembly.
9.2.4 Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup Assembly

Use the steps used to remove the right
deck pickup assembly.
9.2.5 Removing the Pickup Roller
[1]
1) Remove the pickup assembly from the

machine.
2) Remove the two resin E-rings [1] on the
outside, and detach the pickup roller [2]
in the direction of the arrow.
[2]
F05-902-05
5-55 P
Orientation of the Pickup Roller

The pickup roller may be mounted by
reversing the steps used to remove it
while keeping the following in mind:
The pickup rollers used at the front and
the rear are not interchangeable.
The pickup roller for the front has a
gold-colored collar.
When mounting the pickup roller [1] to
the pickup assembly, be sure that the
round marking [2] on the side of the
roller and the round marking [3] on the
collar (gold-colored) are toward the
front of the machine.
[2]
Direction of
rotation
[1]
[3]
(front of machine)
Collar
(gold-colored)
F05-902-06
The collar of the pickup roller of the

rear of the machine is silver-colored.
When mounting the pickup roller [4] to
the pickup assembly, be sure that the
marking [5] on the color (silver-colored) is toward the rear of the machine.
Direction of
rotation
[4]
[5]
(rear of machine)
Collar
(silver-colored)
F05-902-07

1) Remove the pickup assembly form the
machine.
feeding roller cover [1]. (For the left
deck pickup assembly, skip this step.)
3) Remove the resin E-ring [3] found at
the front of the feeding roller.
4) Remove the resin E-ring [4] found at
the front and the pickup roller [5]; then,
detach the feeding roller [7] together
with the timing belt [6].
Cassette 3/4
Right deck pickup assembly
[1][2] [4][5] [3] [7] [6]
Left deck pickup assembly

[4] [5] [3] [7] [6]
F05-902-08
5-56 P
9.2.7 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Deck/Cassette Pickup Assembly

When mounting the feeding roller assembly [1] to the cassette pickup assembly, be
sure that the belt pulley [2] is at the front of
the machine.
(front)
[2]
Check to make sure that the

protrusion in the roller plate and
the roller are engaged securely.
[1]
(rear)
F05-902-09

and detach the feed guide plate [2];
then, detach the open/close guide [3].
(Skip this step for the left deck pickup
assembly.)
[2]
[1]
[3] [1]
F05-902-10
and detach the separation roller assembly [5] form the joint.
(For the left deck pickup assembly, remove one screw [6].)
Cassette 3/4
[4]
[5]
[4]
[5]
[6]
F05-902-11
5-57 P
3) Detach the separation roller [7] from the

separation roller shaft support.
Cassette 3/4
[7]

[7]
F05-902-12
The urethane sponge used in the

part is pink at the beginning,
and changes to yellow over time
(accelerated if exposed to light;
it may appear to change to orange before turning pink). This
is a common characteristic of
urethane sponge, and does not
indicate physical deterioration
(performance). In addition, note
that the part is not classified by
color.
Urethane sponge
F05-902-13
5-58 P
9.2.9 Adjusting the Separation Roller Pressure

If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup, change the position
for the pressure spring of the separation
roller.
If double feeing occurs, move the
spring in the direction of arrow B.
If pickup failure occurs, change the
spring in the direction of arrow A.
[1] Feeding roller
[2] Separation roller
[3] Pressure lever
[4] Pressure spring
[1]
[2]
A
[3]
B
[4]
F05-902-14
9.2.10 Orientation of the Separation Roller

Keep the following in mind when replacing the separation roller.
Mounting the separation roller
in the wrong orientation will
lead to interference against
crimping washer. Make sure it is
mounted in the correct orientation.
Cassette 3/4
Wider groove
Narrower groove
(rear of machine)
(front of machine)

Narrow groove
Wider groove
F05-902-15
5-59 P
9.2.11 Adjusting the Left/Right Registration for the Front Deck

1) Loosen the four screws [2] and the two
fixing screws [3] on the deck front
cover [1].
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F05-902-16
[4]
2) Move the cassette guide assembly

(front) [4] to the front or the rear to
make adjustments.
F05-902-17
9.2.12 Adjusting the Registration for the Cassette 3/4

1) Loosen the two fixing screws [1] found
on the left and right of the cassette.
[1]
F05-902-18
5-60 P
2) Remove the paper size plate [2], and

make adjustments using the adjusting
screw [3] found at the rear of the widow
of the paper size plate [2]; thereafter,
tighten the two fixing screws [1].
Then, be sure to execute the following
in service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CST>C3STMTR/A4R or C4-STMTR/A4R.
[2]
[3]
F05-902-19
9.2.13 Removing the Lifter Motor M20 (M21) of the Cassette 3 (4)
1) Slide out the right deck and the cassette
3/4.
2) Take out the cassette right cover. (See
Roller 2.)
3) Remove the two fixing screws [1] of the
lifter motor M20 (M21), and disconnect
the connector [2]; then, detach the lifter
motor [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F05-902-20
9.2.14 Adjusting the Position of the Lifter Motor M20 (M21) of the Cassette
3 (cassette 4)
1) Remove the guide plate [1] of the vertical path roller 2. (See 9.3.2 Removing
the Vertical Path Roller 2.)
(In the case of the lifter motor M21, remove the cassette 3 pickup assembly
[2]; for instructions, see 9.2.1 Removing the Right Deck.)
[1]
[2]
F05-902-21
5-61 P
2) While keeping the lifter motor M20

(M21) [3] to the right, tighten the screw
[4] temporarily.
[3]
[4]
F05-902-22
3) Set the cassette 3 (cassette 4) in the machine without paper.
4) Check to make sure that the lifter drive
gear [5] is engaged with the lifter motor
gear [6] from the right side of the machine; then, check also to make sure
that the lifter drive gear is fully away
from the lifter gear when the release
button [7] of the cassette 3 (cassette 4)
is pressed halfway.
The expression pressing the
release button halfway means
the following:
The separation roller moves
down.
The cassette is about to slide
out.
[5]
[7]
[6]
F05-902-23
5) If the filter drive gear is not fully away
from the lifter motor gear, move the left
motor M20 (M21) [3] to the left, and
press the release button halfway once
again to make a check.
[3]
F05-902-24
5-62 P
6) Fully tighten the two screws of the lifter

motor M20 (M21).
7) Mount back the removed parts, and turn
on the machine.
8) Press the cassette release button under
the following conditions, and turn on
the machine:
the cassette contains no paper.
the cassette contains about 550 sheets of
paper.
9.2.15 Adjusting the Position of the Cassette 3/4 Pickup Solenoid (SL3, 4)
Adjust the position of the solenoid using the two screws [3] so that the distance from the
bottom of the pickup assembly to section A of the roller arm is 360.5 mm when [1] and [2]
are operated as shown.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
360.5mm
Viewed from A
F05-902-25
5-63 P
9.3 Vertical Path Roller Assembly

9.3.1 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 1
1) Remove the right deck pickup assembly.
2) Remove the following from the front:
E-ring [1], 1 pc.
bearing [2], 1 pc.
3) Remove the following from the rear:
E-ring [3], 1 pc.
bushing [4], 2 pc.
roller base [5]
blue gear [6]
parallel pin [7]
[6]
[3]
[7] [4]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
F05-903-01
4) Remove the guide plate [8], and detach
the vertical path roller 1 [9].
[9]
[8]
F05-903-02
9.3.2 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2
[1]
1) Slide out the right deck and the cassette

3/4.
the cassette holder right cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
F05-903-03
5-64 P
3) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the screw [4]; then, detach the
guide plate [5].
[4]
[5]
[3]
F05-903-04
4) Remove the E-ring [6] from the front of
the roller shaft, and move the bearing
[7] toward the inside; then, detach the
vertical path roller 2 [8].
[7]
[8]
[6]
F05-903-05
9.3.3 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 3/4

1) Remove the cassette pickup assembly.
E-ring [1], 1 pc.
spacer [2], 1 pc.
bearing [3], 1 pc.
3) Remove the following from the rear:
E-ring [4], 3 pc.
bushing [5], 2 pc.
roller mount [6]
blue gear [7]
parallel pin [8]
4) Remove the vertical path roller 2/3 [9].
[7]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[6]
[9]
F05-903-06
5-65 P
9.4 Registration Feeding Assembly

9.4.1 Removing the Registration Clutch
[1]
1) Remove the fixing/feeding unit from the

machine.
2) Loosen the two sems screws [1], and
detach the stopper [2].
3) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the registration clutch [4].
[4]
[3]
[2]
F05-904-01
9.4.2 Removing the Registration Roller

machine.
2) Remove the feeding right cover of the
fixing/feeding unit.(See p.4-63P)
3) Remove the transfer separation charging
assembly.
4) Remove the registration clutch.
and detach the protection cover [2].
[2]
[1]
F05-904-02
5-66 P
6) Remove the following from the back:

spring [3]
E-ring [4]
spacer [5]
bearing [6]
stopper [7]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[5]
[4]
F05-904-03
screw [8]
spring [9]
E-ring [10]
spacer [11]
bearing [12]
stopper [13]
break [14]
8) Remove the registration roller [15].
[13] [9] [15]

[12]
[10]
[11]
[8]
[14]
F05-904-04
5-67 P

[1]
[3]
9.5 Feeding Assembly

9.5.1 Removing the Feeding Belt
1) Slide the fixing/feeding unit from the
machine.
2) Remove the fixing front cover, feeding
right cover, and feeing left cover.
3) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and
remove the screw [2]; then, detach the
harness guide [3].
[2]
[1]
F05-905-01
and detach the fixing/feeding unit releasing lever support [5].
[5]
[4]
[4]
F05-905-02
5) Remove the E-ring [6], bearing [7], and
two screws [8] from the front.
[7]
[6]
[8]
F05-905-03
6) Remove the E-ring [9], pulley [10], pin
[11], three screws [12], E-ring [13], and
bearing [14]; then, detach the feeding
belt unit [15].
[15]
[14]
[12] [13]
[11][10]
[9]
F05-905-04
5-68 P

8) Detach the feeding belt [18] and the
postcard belt [19].
[18]
[16]
[19]
[17]
F05-905-05
9.5.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit Releasing Lever Switch

1) Slide the fixing/feeding unit out of the
machine.
2) Remove the feeding right cover and the
feeding left cover.
remove the screw [2]; then, detach the
harness guide [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F05-905-06
and detach the fixing/feeding unit releasing lever support [5].
[4]
[5]
[4]
F05-905-07
and detach the releasing lever switch
[7].
[7]
[6]
F05-905-08
5-69 P
9.6 Duplex Unit

9.6.1 Removing the Duplex Unit
1) Slide the duplex unit out of the machine.
2) Remove the three screws [1] and two
knobs [2]; then, detach the front cover
[3].
3) Holding the left and right grips [4] of
the duplex unit, take it out of the machine.
[2]
[4]
[4]
Take care not to trap your hand

between the grip and the rail.
Further, do not place the duplex
unit where it may suffer damage.
[3]
[1]
F05-906-01
9.6.2 Removing the Reversing Flapper Solenoid

1) Remove the duplex unit from the machine.
the harness [3] from the guide [2].
and detach the reversing flapper solenoid [5].
(The steps of installation refer to 9.6.17
Mounting the Reversing Flapper
solenoid.)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[5]
F05-906-02
9.6.3 Removing the Reversal Motor
[2] [1]
1) Remove the front cover of the duplex

unit.
2) Disconnect the connector [1].
and detach the reversal motor [3] together with its support plate.
[2]
[3]
[2]
F05-906-03
5-70 P

and detach the reversal motor [5] from
the support plate.
[4]
[5]
[4]
F05-906-04
9.6.4 Mounting the Reversal Motor

1) While the spring [1] has most tension,
tighten the two mounting screws [2]
temporarily.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F05-906-05
2) Mount the support plate [4] (2 pc.) and
the motor [5] using three mounting
screws [3]; then, attach the timing belt
[6].
[3]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
F05-906-06
5-71 P
3) Loosen the two screws [2] that have

been tightened temporarily, and check
to make sure that the spring provides
tension; then, tighten the screws [2].
[2]
F05-906-07
At the end, be sure the timing
belt has tension.
9.6.5 Removing the Duplexing Feeding Left Motor

unit.
the duplex feeding left motor [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
F05-906-08
9.6.6 Removing the Duplex Feeding Right Motor

unit.
the duplex feeding right motor [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
F05-906-09
5-72 P
9.6.7 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor

2) Remove the horizontal registration unit.
the harness [2] from the harness guide
[3].
and detach the horizontal registration
motor [5].
[4]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F05-906-10
9.6.8 Removing the Duplex Pre-Registration Sensor

1) Slide the duplex unit out the machine.
and detach the cover [2].
[1]
[2]
F05-906-11
and detach the sensor together with its
base [4].
[3]
[4]
[3]
F05-906-12
5-73 P
4) Disconnect the connector [5], and remove the sensor [6].
[5]
[6]
F05-906-13
[1]
9.6.9 Removing the Duplex Paper Sensor

1) Slide the duplex unit out of the duplex
unit.
and detach the cover [2].
[2]
F05-906-14
base [4].
[3]
[4]
[3]
F05-906-15
[5]
[6]
F05-906-16
5-74 P

base [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F05-906-17
3) Disconnect the connector [3], and detach the sensor [4].
[3]
[4]
F05-906-18

base [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F05-906-19
5-75 P
[3]
[4]
F05-906-20
9.6.12 Removing the Left Deck Feed Paper Sensor

1) Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the two mounting screws [2] from
the bottom of the duplex unit; then, detach the sensor together with its base
[3].
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F05-906-21
2) Remove the left deck feed paper sensor
[4].
[4]
F05-906-22
5-76 P
9.6.13 Removing the Horizontal Registration Sensor

2) Remove the horizontal registration unit.
3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the horizontal registration sensor
[2].
[1]
[2]
F05-906-23
9.6.14 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB

1) Slide the duplex driver out of the machine.
driver.
3) Disconnect all connectors from the duplex driver PCB.
and detach the duplex driver PCB [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F05-906-24
5-77 P
9.6.15 Removing the Horizontal Registration Unit

unit.
3) Turn over the duplex unit.
4) Remove the mounting screw [1] from
the front.
5) Remove the mounting screw [2] and
disconnect the connector [3] from the
rear; then, detach the horizontal registration unit [4].
(front)
[1]
(rear)
[4]
[3]
[2]
F05-906-25
9.6.16 Removing the Duplex Feeding Fan

1) Slide out the duplex unit, and detach the
front cover of the duplex unit.
and disconnect the connector [2]; then,
detach the fan together with its base [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
F05-906-26
5-78 P

and detach the duplex feeding fan [5].
[5]
Be sure that the arrow indicating the direction of air is as indicated when mounting the duplex feeldng fan.
[4]
F05-906-27
9.6.17 Mounting the Reversing Flapper Solenoid

1) Adjust the position of the solenoid using two screws [2] so that the drive lever [1] is fully pushed when the solenoid turns on (i.e., the plunger is
drawn).
[1]
[2]
F05-906-28
5-79 P
CHAPTER 6
FIXING SYSTEM
1. Outline of Operation
1.1 Outline
The fixing system has the following major functions:
Item
Fixing method
Fixing heater
100-Vmodel
Descriptions
Heat roller
Main heater: controlling temperature mainly during printing

Sub heater: controlling temperature during standby
120/230-V model
Main heater/Sub heater: controlling temperature during printing
Control temperature
200C (in STBY)
Temperature detection
[1] Main thermistor (temperature control, error detection)
[2] Sub thermistor (error detection)
[3] Thermal switch (error detection)
Fixing temperature control [1] Power-on sequence
[2] Model-specific sequence
[3] Ambient temperature sequence
Cleaning method
Web roller (driven by solenoid and one-way clutch)
Error detection
[1] By thermistor (temperature error)
[2] By thermal switch (overheating)
Other
[1] Control of fixing assembly inlet guide drive (about 1 mm
up/down)
High if original is B5R or longer
Low if original is shorter than B5R
[2] Control of reciprocating movement of thermistor (about
12 mm)
[3] Control of reciprocating movement of upper separation
claw (about 3 mm)
T06-101-01
6-1 P
The fixing system is constructed of the following components:
Cleaning web unit
Cleaning web
Sub heater (H2)

Fixing upper roller
Main thermistor (TH1)

Sub thermistor (TH2)
Main heater (H1)
Upper
separation claw
Lower
separation claw
Thermal switch (TP1)

Fixing assembly inlet guide
Fixing lower roller
F06-101-01
Fixing upper roller
F06-101-02
6-2 P
Component
Fixing upper roller
Fixing lower roller
Fixing motor
Fixing assembly inlet
guide drive solenoid
Main heater
Sub heater
Main thermistor
Sub thermistor
Thermal switch
Cleaning web
Upper separation claw
Notation
M19
SL1
H1
H2
TH1
TH2
TP1
Description
Heat roller (50-mm dia.)
Pressure roller (38-mm dia.)
24VDC
24VDC
120/230V model: 600 W
100-V model: 700 W
120/230V model: 600 W
100-model: 470 W
Used for temperature control, error detection
Used for error detection
Operates at 240 10C
Driven by web drive solenoid (SL2)
For large-size paper (B4 or larger), turns on twice
for the 1st sheet, and then once for the 2nd and 3rd
sheets; repeats the sequence thereafter
For small-size paper (smaller than B4), turns on
once for the 1st and 2nd sheets, and remains off for
the 3rd sheet; repeats the sequence thereafter
Moves in reciprocating motions (about 3 mm)
Moves up/down (about 1.8 mm)
T06-101-02
6-3 P
1.2 Basic Sequence of Operations (fixing system)

Fixing temperature
switch ON power switch ON 195C
SLEEP
Wait indicator
WMUP
Red
200C
WMUPR
Start key
ON
STBY
Green
INTR
PSTBY PRINT
LSTR
STBY
Red
Fixing motor
(M3)
Main heater
(H1)
100V
Sub heater (H2)
120/230V
Sub heater (H2)
210C
205C
200C
195C
190C
F06-102-01
6-4 P
2. Fixing Drive System

2.1 Outline
The following are control times associated with the fixing drive system:
Fixing roller drive
Cleaning web drive
Fixing assembly inlet guide drive
Thermistor reciprocating mechanism drive
Upper separation claw reciprocating mechanism
J106B
J106B
Drive signal
SL9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drive signal
PS45
Fixing web length sensor
DC controller PCB
Fixing web drive solenoid
J106B
Drive signal
Thermistor
(TH1)
M19
Fixing drive
motor
Upper separation claw
Drive signal
SL1
J106A
Fixing inlet guide drive solenoid
F06-201-01
6-5 P
2.2 Controlling the Drive of the Fixing Roller

The system used to control the fixing roller is constructed as follows:
DC controller PCB
Fixing upper roller
J106
-A15
-A16
-A17
-A18
M19LD [2]
M19ON [1]
5V
GND
J4005-1
-2
M19
24V
GND
Fixing motor
DC power supply PCB
The system makes use of the following signals:

[1] Fixing motor drive signal; when 1, the motor turns on.
[2] Fixing motor drive lock signal; when the speed of rotation of the fixing motor reaches
a specific level, 0.
F06-202-01
E014 (fixing motor speed error)

It is indicated when the drive lock signal is absent for 2 sec or more 2 sec
after the fixing motor drive signal (M19ON) is generated.
6-6 P
2.3 Controlling the Drive of the Cleaning Web

The cleaning web used to clean the fixing upper roller is advanced by the fixing web solenoid (SL9; one-way clutch).
The length of the cleaning web is detected by any of the following two ways:
1. When the web detecting lever drops through the cut-out, it blocks the fixing web
length sensor (PS45), causing the message Web Running Out to appear in the control panel; E005 will appear when the web has been drawn for 2000 times
(COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB; 3,000 A4 prints) without replacement.
2. The soft counter continues to keep track of the number of times the web is drawn
(COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FIX-WEB), and the message Web Running Out
will appear when the count reaches 300,000.
See F06-203-01 for the construction of the control mechanisms used for the cleaning
web.
Web level detecting lever
(front)
Fixing web length
sensor (PS45)
5V
0V
17
18
DC controller PCB
Feed web roller
... ...
J106B
CBOP [1]
Cut-off
F06-203-01
The system makes use of the following signal:
[1] Fixing web length detection signal; when the fixing web runs out, 1.
COPIER>OPTOIN>USER>WEB-DISP
Use it to enable/disable the Replace Web message.
Be sure to reset the following to 0 in service mode whenever you have replaced the fixing web:
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB and
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FIX-WEB.
6-7 P
2.4 Controlling the Drive of the Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide

The machine changes the height of the fixing assembly inlet guide to suit specific paper
sizes, thereby ensuring correct movement of paper. The height is controlled by the fixing assembly inlet solenoid operated by the following control system:
(rear)
Fixing inlet guide

solenoid (SL1)
Fixing upper roller

(front)
J106A
DC controller PCB
Inlet guide
9
10
11
24V
SL1P* [1]
SL1R* [2]
F06-204-01

[1] Fixing assembly inlet guide drive signal; when 0, the fixing assembly inlet guide
moves up.
[2] Fixing inlet guide drive signal; when 0, the fixing assembly inlet guide moves down.
6-8 P
2.5 Controlling the Reciprocating Mechanisms of the Thermistor

To prevent damage to the fixing upper roller by the main thermistor (TH1), the main thermistor is moved back and forth over a distance of about 12 mm in the axial direction of the
fixing upper roller.
The drive comes from the web drive solenoid (SL9), and is sent to the reciprocating cam
by way of a one-way arm.
The control system of the thermistor reciprocating mechanism is constructed as follows:
Cam
(front)
Length of travel: 12 mm (approx.)
One-way clutch
Fixing upper roller
Web drive solenoid (SL2)

(rear)
Main thermistor
F06-205-01
6-9 P
2.6 Controlling the Reciprocating Mechanism of the Upper

Separation Claw
To prevent damage to the fixing upper roller by the upper separation claw, the upper separation claw is moved back and forth in the axial direction of the fixing upper roller.
The system used to control the reciprocating mechanism of the upper separation claw is
constructed as follows:
Distance of travel: 3 mm (approx.)
(rear)
Upper separation claw unit
(front)
One-way clutch
Cam
Eccentric cam
M19
Fixing motor
F06-206-01
6-10 P
3. Controlling the Fixing Temperature

3.1 Outline
The following are control items associated with the fixing temperature control system:
1. Fixing heater temperature control
2. Thermistor error detection
Main thermistor signal

(TH1) J108-B7
Main heater detection signal
(MHRD) J102-B12
Main heater drive signal
(MHRD*) J102-B11
Sub heater detection signal
(SHRD) J102-B10
Sub heater drive signal
(SHRD*) J102-B9
Sub thermistor signal

(TH2) J106-B9
Web length
detection signal
(CBOP) J106-B5
Claw jam detection signal

(CJAM)J106-B19
Internal paper detection signal

(IDS) J106-B1
DC controller PCB
PS45
Web guide plate
Fixing upper roller
AC driver PCB
Thermal switch AC power
(TP1)
supply
PS35 PS4
Fixing
lower roller
F06-301-01
6-11 P
3.2 Temperature Control

The machine uses the following methods to control the fixing temperature:
State
Item
Description
Power-on sequence Used if the fixing roller is 75C or lower at poweron.
[2] Model-specific se- Used to suit the rated voltage of the model (100 V
quence
or 120/230 V).
[3] Ambient tempera- Used as follows depending on the machine inside
ture sequence
temperature detected by the environment sensor: if
18C or more, H mode; if between 12C and 18C,
M mode; if less than 12C, L mode.
[4] Down sequence
Used to prevent faulty fixing in continuous printing
(text mode)
mode.
[5] Down sequence
Used to prevent faulty fixing of halftone images in
halftone mode (other continuous printing mode.
than text mode)
[6] Edge overheating Used to prevent overheating of the edges of the fixprevention mode
ing roller when small-size paper is used.
[7] Jam recovery mode Used if transfer paper is in the fixing/feeding unit
in the presence of a jam.
[8] Power save mode
Used to decrease the control temperature, thus saving on power consumption.
[9] Wait time reduction Used to decrease the print start temperature by
mode
15C to reduce print time; for iR5000, 4 min or
less; for iR6000, 1 min or less.
[10] Priority on fixing
Used to switch the down sequence temperature; inmode
creases the fixing temperature by 10C.
[11] Priority on produc- Used to switch the down sequence temperature; detivity mode
creases the fixing temperature by 10C.
[12] Thick paper mode Used to increase the fixing temperature at the start
(120/230V model
of printing to 203C or higher to improve fixing
only)
(after power-on, 212C in M/L mode).
[13] Special paper mode Used to hold printing unit if the fixing temperature
reaches 180C for special paper.
[1]
Normal
Setting in
service
mode
T06-302-01
6-12 P
3.2.1 Normal Sequence

In normal sequence, the control will be as follows:
If the surface of the fixing upper roller is 75C or lower (60 min from power-on).
Main power
switch ON
SLEEP
Wait indicator
Start key
ON
Control panel
power switch ON
WMUP
Red
WMUPR*1
STBY
INTR
PSTBY PRINT
Green
LSTR
STBY
Red
Fixing motor
(M3)
Main heater
(H1)
100V
Sub heater (H2)
120/230V
Sub heater (H2)
M/L mode
215C
210C
205C
200C
195C
H mode
*1:For the iR6000i (100V model), the WMUPR period in H mode is increased by 1 min.
F06-302-01
Control
temperature
Ambient temperature
Initial multiple rotation
Standby
Start of printing
During printing
H mode
195C
200C
200C
203C
M/L mode
205C
210C
210C
212C
T06-302-02
6-13 P
60 min or more from power-on

switch ON power switch ON
SLEEP
Wait indicator
WMUP
Red
Fixing
assembly
195C
200C
WMUPR
Start key
ON
STBY
INTR
PSTBY PRINT
Green
LSTR
STBY
Red
Fixing motor
(M3)
Main heater
(H1)
100V
Sub heater (H2)
120/130V
Sub heater (H2)
215C
210C
205C
200C
195C
F06-302-02
Control temperature
Initial multiple rotation
Standby
Start of printing
During printing
195C
200C
200C
203C
T06-302-03
6-14 P
3.2.2 Temperature Control by Mode

a. Down Sequence (text mode)
If the main thermistor (TH1) of the fixing upper roller detects any of the following levels
of temperature, the machine increases the sheet-to-sheet interval to maintain a specific fixing
temperature so as to prevent faulty fixing in continuous printing mode.
Model
Control
temperature
iR5000i Down Sequence

100-V
50 cpm return mode
170C
165C
40 cpm mode
35 cpm mode
160C
print stop
155C
120/230-V
175C
170C
165C
160C
T06-302-04
Control
temperature

60 cpm return mode
50 cpm mode
40 cpm mode
print stop
175C
170C
165C
160C
T06-302-05
6-15 P
b. Halftone Mode (other than text mode)

The machine uses a higher down sequence temperature for modes other than text mode to
prevent faulty fixing of halftone images.
If text mode is used in combination with a non-text mode, the machine will use non-text
mode down sequence throughout the job by placing priority on fixing.
Model
Control
temperature

100-V
50 cpm return mode
180C
175C
40 cpm mode
35 cpm mode
170C
print stop
165C
120/230-V
185C
180C
175C
170C
T06-302-06
Control
temperature

60 cpm return mode
50 cpm mode
40 cpm mode
print stop
185C
180C
175C
170C
T06-302-07
6-16 P
c. Overheating of the Ends

In a low-temperature environment (machine temperature of lower than 12C), an error can
occur as a result of overheating of the edges (as when small-size paper is used) while copying temperature is controlled to 212C and the temperature of the fixing upper roller is 75C
for a period of 60 min from power-on.
If continuous printing is performed for 3 min or more, printing temperature is switched
from 212C to 205C to prevent overheating.
d. Jam Recovery Mode
The sequence used after jam removal differs depending on the following conditions:
1. If paper exists in the fixing/feeding assembly,
The fixing heater will be turned off in response to a jam, and post-jam removal initial
multiple rotation will be excluded.
2. If no paper exists in the fixing/feeding assembly,
The temperature control mechanism is turned on without turning off the fixing heater,
and the machine will be ready for printing immediately after jam removal.
e. Power Save Mode
A press on the Power Save key on the control panel causes the machine to decrease the
control temperature used in standby, thus reducing power consumption. The mode may be
changed as follows in user mode:
Rate of saving
Control temperature
-10%
-25%
-50%
Low power mode
180C
155C
110C
140C
Recovery time*
100V
120/230V
50 sec
0 sec
90 sec
55 sec
180 sec
140 sec
-
*Period of time before the machine starts standby state in response to a second press on
the Power Save key.
T06-302-08
6-17 P
3.3 Detecting Errors

The system used to control the fixing temperature checks for the following errors:
1. Temperature error by the main thermistor (TH1)
2. Sensor error by the sub thermistor (TH2)
3. Overheating error by the thermal switch (TP1)
DC controller PCB
J106B
1
M-TEMP [1]
7
0V
8
S-TEMP [2]
9
0V
10
20
Fixing upper roller
Sub thermistor
Main
heater
J102B
1
0V
7
Main thermistor
Sub heater
8 SUB_HT_ON [3]
9
SUB_DETECT [4]
10
MAIN_HT_ON [5]
11
MAIN_DETECT [6]
12
Thermal switch
AC line off at 240C
RLY
Relay
AC driver
Front cover
13
14
12V
J119
1
2
24V
3
0V
4
F06-303-01
6-18 P
The control system makes use of the following signals:

[1] Fixing roller temperature detection signal 1; generates a voltage suited to the temperature detected by the main thermistor.
[2] Fixing roller temperature detection signal 2; generates a voltage suited to the temperature detected by the sub thermistor.
[3] Sub heater drive signal; when 1, the sub heater turns on.
[4] Sub heater temperature detection signal; when the sub heater is supplied with power,
0.
[5] Main heater drive signal; when 1, the main heater turns on.
[6] Main heater temperature detection signal; when the main heater is supplied with
power, 0.
E000
The main thermistor (TH1) has poor contact or an open circuit. The thermal
switch (TP1) has an open circuit. The fixing heater has an open circuit. The
AC driver PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
E001
The main thermistor (TH1) has a short circuit. The sub thermistor (TH2)
has detected overheating. The AC driver PCB is faulty. The DC controller
PCB is faulty.
E002
AC driver PCB is faulty. The DC controlled PCB is faulty.
E003
AC driver PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
E004
The AC driver PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
E005
The fixing web has been taken up. The fixing web length sensor (PS45) is
faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
If 'E000' through 'E004' is indicated, the error code indication will not be
reset even when the main power switch is turned off and then on, requiring
resetting in service mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR).
6-19 P

mind:
1.
to disassemble it.
7.
6-20 P
4.1 Fixing Assembly

4.1.1 Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit
1) Slide the duplex feeding unit out of the
machine.
2) Remove the three screws [1], and two
knobs [2], and detach the duplex feeding unit front cover [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F06-401-01
machine.
4) While pressing the stoppers [5] on both
ends of the fixing/feeding unit slide rail
[4], pull the fixing/feeding unit farther
toward the front.
5) With the fixing/feeding unit fully out,
insert a think screwdriver into the hole
[6] of the rails on both sides; then,
while releasing the stoppers, pull the
fixing/feeding unit [7] to the front to
detach.
[6]
[5]
To slide in the unit, fit the part

of the slide rails into the rails of
the machine, and push the unit
straight inside.
[4]
[7]
[4] [6]
[5]
F06-401-02
6-21 P
4.1.2 Removing the Fixing Assembly
[2]
[3]
1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit.

2) Remove the three screws [1] and the
knob [2]; then, detach the fixing/feeding
left cover [3].
[1]
F06-401-03
remove the three screws [5]; then, detach the fixing drive assembly [6].
[5]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[5]
[4]
F06-401-04
4) Disconnect the three connectors [7], and
free the harness from the harness guide.
[7]
[7]
F06-401-05
6-22 P

[9]
[8]
F06-401-06
6) Open the fixing delivery assembly, and
remove the two screws [10]; then, holding the front [12] and the rear [13] of
the fixing assembly [11], remove the
fixing assembly from the machine.
[10]
[13]
[11]
[12]
F06-401-07
6-23 P
4.2 Fixing Roller Cleaning Assembly

4.2.1 Removing the Fixing Web
1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit.
fixing assembly upper cover [2].
[1]
[2]
F06-402-01
3) Remove the two screws [3] used to hold
the fixing web assembly in place, and
open the fixing web upper assembly.
[3]
F06-402-02
4) While pushing the web feed roller [4]
and the web take-up roller [5] toward
the rear, remove the web [6].
[6]
[4]
[5]
F06-402-03
6-24 P
Cleaning the Silicone Oil Pan

Be sure to remove the silicone
oil collecting in the oil pan [7]
(found under the web feed
roller).
Further, if silicone oil should
drip, be sure to wipe it clean.
[7]
F06-402-04
4.2.2 Mounting the Fixing Web

Mount the fixing web by reversing the steps used to remove it.
1) Wind the web [2] around the web takeup roller [1] two or three times while
making sure that the arm guide plate [3]
will be outside the take-up roller (when
attaching to the front).
At this time, check to make sure that the
area of contact with the roller is impregnated with oil.
[3]
[1]
[2]
F06-402-05
Check to make sure that the fixing web is not askew and it is
not slack or wrinkled. In addition, be sure that the web is
wound and attached as shown.
Take-up roller
Feed roller
F06-402-06
6-25 P
2) After attaching the fixing web, move

the plunger [4] of the web feed solenoid
in the direction of the arrow until the
fixing belt is taut.
Whenever you have replaced the
fixing web, be sure to set 0 to
the following in service mode:
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>
FIX-WEB
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL1>FIX-WEB.
[4]
F06-402-07
4.2.3 Adjusting the Fixing Web Solenoid (SL9)

a. If the fixing web is new,
Adjust the position of the solenoid using the screw [2] so that the distance of
travel of the drive lever [1] is 8.6 mm.
[1]
[2]
8.6mm
F06-402-08
b. If the fixing web has been used,
Before removing the solenoid, find out
the position [A] of the drive lever when
the solenoid turns on; then, after replacing the solenoid, make adjustments using the screw [2] so that the position of
the drive lever [1] is as it was before replacement.
[1]
[2]
A
F06-402-09
6-26 P
4.3 Fixing Heater and the Control Parts

4.3.1 Removing the Main/Sub Heater
[2]
1) Remove the fixing assembly from the

machine.
2) Remove the two fastons [1] and the two
screws [2] at the rear; then, detach the
heater positioning plate (rear) [3].
[1]
[3]
[1]
F06-403-01
3) Remove the screw [4] and the faston [5]
at the front, and detach the harness
cover [6].
[4]
The harness is equipped with a

tie-wrap. Be sure to use a new
tie-wrap if you have cut the tiewrap.
[6]
[5]
F06-403-02
heater positioning plate (front) [8].
5) Remove the main heater and the sub
heater.
[7]
[8]
F06-403-03
6-27 P
4.3.2 Mounting the Main/Sub Heater

Mount the fixing heater by reversing the
steps used to remove it while keeping the
following in mind:
a. Do not touch the surface of the heater.
b. Orient both heaters so that the side with
the longer harness is toward the front.
c. Mount the main heater [1] to the right
and the sub heater [2] to the left (viewing from the front of the fixing assembly).
d. Stagger the heater so that its protrusion
will not interfere.
e. When mounting the faston of the fixing
heater at the rear, be sure that the faston
terminals (A, B) do not face the outside;
rather, they must be parallel with the
holder.
[2]
[1]
F06-403-04
A
F06-403-05
4.3.3 Removing the Thermal Switch

1) Remove the fixing assembly form the
machine.
2) After detaching the fixing web, remove
the two screws [1], and detach the oil
pan [2] and the fixing harness cover [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F06-403-06
6-28 P
3) Remove the two fastons [4] and the

screw [5]; then, detach the thermal
switch holder [6].
the thermal switch assembly [8].
[4]
[6]
[4]
[7]
[8]
[5]
[7]
F06-403-07
the thermal switch [10].
[9]
[9]
[10]
F06-403-08
4.3.4 Removing the Main Thermistor

machine.
2) Remove the fixing web and the oil pan.
3) Remove the fixing harness cover.
the insulating plate [2].
[2]
[1]
F06-403-09
6-29 P
5) Free the harness [3] of the thermistor

from the harness guide.
6) Remove the screw [4], and shift the
thermistor assembly [5] to detach.
When shifting the thermistor
assembly to the rear, take care
not to damage the fixing roller
by the thermistor assembly.
When mounting the thermistor,
be sure that the harness [3] is on
the inner side of the harness
guide [6] of the mounting plate.
Further, take care not to deform
section A when detaching and
attaching the thermistor.
[6] [5]
[4]
[3]
F06-403-10
7) Remove the two thermistor retaining
springs [7], and detach the main thermistor [8].
[7]
[8]
F06-403-11
6-30 P
4.3.5 Removing the Sub Thermistor
[3]
[1]
1) Slide out the fixing assembly from the

machine.
2) Remove the fixing web and the oil pan.
3) Remove the fixing harness cover.
4) Free the harness [1] of the sub thermistor from the harness guide.
sub thermistor assembly [3].
[2]
F06-403-12
sub thermistor [5].
[4]
[5]
F06-403-13
6-31 P
4.4 Fixing Roller Assembly

4.4.1 Removing the Fixing Upper Roller
[1]
1) Remove the fixing assembly form the

machine.
2) Remove the fixing web, and clean the
oil pan.
3) Remove the two fixing heaters.
4) Remove the stopper [1], one each from
the front and the rear.
5) While paying attention to the thermal
switch and the thermistor, detach the
upper roller assembly.
(front)
[1]
(rear)
F06-404-01
6) Remove the C-ring [2] at the front, and
remove the gear [3], bushing [4], and
bearing [5].
7) Remove the C-ring [6] at the rear, and
remove the gear [7], bearing [8], and
bushing [9].
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
(front)
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
(rear)
F06-404-02
6-32 P
4.4.2 Mounting the Fixing Upper Roller

Mount the upper roller by reversing the steps used to remove it.
a. To avoid soiling or scratching
the surface of the roller, wrap
the upper roller with paper
after removal.
b. Mount it so that cut-off A is
toward the rear as shown.
c. Before mounting it, clean the
electrode plate and the electrode terminals.
F06-404-03
4.4.3 Removing the Fixing Lower Roller

machine.
2) Remove the fixing web, and clean and
remove the oil pan.
3) Open the fixing upper unit.
the lower separation claw support plate
[2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
F06-404-04
5) Remove the lower roller [3] from the
fixing assembly; then, remove the Ering [4] and the bearing [5] from both
front and rear.
[4]
[3]
[5]
F06-404-05
6-33 P
;;
;;
4.4.4 Adjusting the Nip
a. Taking Measurements
Wait for 15 min after the machine completes warm-up, and make 20 A4 copies before
starting to measure the nip:
c
1) Place A4/LTR paper, and select A4/LTR
on the control panel.
2) Make the following selections in service
mode to discharge the paper:
Feeding
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIPb
direction
Center of
CHK.
paper
b. Standard
1) Measure the points indicated.
a and c are prints 10 mm from
both edges of the sheet.
F06-404-06
2) Check to make sure the measurements

are as indicated; if not, go to c to make
adjustments.
Be sure that both upper and
lower rollers are sufficiently
heated when taking measurements.
Dimension
b
a-c
When both upper and lower

rollers are sufficiently heated.
7.8mm 0.5mm
0.5mm or less
T06-404-01
c. Making Adjustments
1) Take the fixing assembly out of the machine.
2) Open the delivery assembly.
3) Adjust the nip using the adjusting screw
[1] at the front and the rear.
[1]
F06-404-07
6-34 P
4.5 Fixing Separation Assembly

4.5.1 Removing the Upper Separation Claw
machine.
2) Open the tixing / delivery assembly.
3) Release the spring [1], and remove the
upper separation claw [2].
[2]
[1]
When mounting it, take care not

to chip the tip of the upper separation claw [2].
F06-405-01
4.5.2 Removing the Lower Separation Claw

machine.
2) Remove the two screws, and detach the
lower separation claw assembly.
3) Remove the spring [1] of the lower
separation claw.
[1]
F06-405-02
the lower separation claw support plate
[3] and the separation claw.
[2]
[3]
[2]
F06-405-03
6-35 P
4.6 Delivery Assembly

4.6.1 Removing the External Delivery Roller
1) Remove the fixing/feeding unit out of
the machine.
the delivery roller guide [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F06-406-01
3) Remove the screw [3] and the bushing
[4]; then, detach the delivery unit [5].
4) Remove the E-ring [6] at the front, and
detach the bearing [7].
[7]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[3]
F06-406-02
5) Slide the external delivery roller assembly [8] toward the rear to detach.
[8]
F06-406-03
6-36 P
6) Remove the six E-rings [9] of the rollers, and detach the six rollers [11].
[10]
[9]
Each roller is equipped with a

parallel pin [10]. Take care not
to drop it.
[11]
F06-406-04
4.6.2 Removing the Internal Delivery Roller

machine.
2) Remove the lower separation claw plate.
3) Remove the two E-rings [1] at the front,
and remove the gear [2] and the bearing
[3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F06-406-05
4) Remove the E-ring [4] at the rear, and
remove the bearing [5] and the internal
delivery roller [6].
[6]
[5]
[4]
F06-406-06
6-37 P
4.6.3 Adjusting the Position of the Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL5)

Adjust the position of the solenoid using
the screw [2] so that the drive lever [1] is
fully pushed when the solenoid turns on
(i.e., the plunger is drawn).
[1]
[2]
F06-406-07
6-38 P
4.7 Paper Sensor

4.7.1 Removing the Claw Jam Sensor
machine.
2) Remove the two screws from the lower
separation claw assembly.
3) Remove the internal delivery roller.
detach the sensor together with its support plate [2].
[1]
[2]
F06-407-01
5) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the snap-on assembly; then, detach the claw jam sensor [4].
[3]
[4]
F06-407-02
4.7.2 Removing the Internal Delivery Sensor

machine.
2) Remove the two screws, and detach the
lower separation claw assembly.
3) Remove the internal delivery roller.
detach the sensor together with its sensor support plate [2].
[2]
[1]
F06-407-03
6-39 P
5) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the snap-on assembly; then, detach the internal delivery sensor [4].
[3]
[4]
F06-407-04
4.7.3 Removing the Delivery Jam Sensor

machine.
2) Remove the external delivery roller.
the sensor support plate [2].
[1]
[2]
F06-407-05
4) Disconnect the connector [3], and detach the delivery jam sensor [4].
[4]
[3]
F06-407-06
6-40 P
4.7.4 Removing the External Delivery Sensor

machine.
2) Remove the external delivery roller.
3) Remove the two sensors [1], and detach
the sensor support plate [2].
[1]
[2]
F06-407-07
4) Disconnect the connector [3], and detach the external delivery sensor [4].
[4]
[3]
F06-407-08
6-41 P
4.8 Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide Assembly

4.8.1 Adjusting the Position of the Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide Solenoid
(SL1)
Adjust the position of the solenoid using the two screws [1] so that the guide is as indicated when the solenoid turns on.
9.5mm
12.7mm
Upper roller
3.2mm
[1]
Lower roller
Inlet guide
Solenoid
F06-408-01
4.8.2 Adjusting the Position of the Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide
1.
2.
3.
Points to Note When Making Adjustments in the Field

The inlet guide must be positioned as indicated.
The inlet guide must shift down when the solenoid (SL1) turns on .
The height of the inlet guide must be such that the difference between front and rear is
0.5 mm or less.
4. The height of the inlet guide must be adjusted by loosening the fixing screw on the
height adjusting support plate.
If the inlet guide base is removed, the position of the inlet guide will have
to be adjusted. Do not loosen the mounting screw on the inlet guide base in
the field. Otherwise, be sure to adjust it with reference to the index on the
fixing assembly base.
6-42 P
CHAPTER 7
EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS
1. Control Panel
1.1 Outline
The machines control panel consists of the following PCBs and a touch panel (LCD) capable of display at a resolution of 640480 dots:
Control panel
Control
panel
inverter PCB
LCD PCB
Control panel
PCB (key)
Control panel CPU PCB

Key input monitor: keypad,
function key
Buzzer control
Control panel LED activation
CPU
Main controller unit

Adjusts the contrast of the
LCD.
F07-101-01
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>LCD-CHK
Used to check missing dots in the LCD display.
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>LED-CHK
Used to start a check on the activation of LEDs in the control panel.
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>LED-OFF
Used to end a check on the activation of LEDs in the control panel.
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>KEY-CHK
Used to start a check on key inputs.
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>TOUCHCHK
Used to adjust the coordinates in the touch panel.
7-1 P
2. Fans
2.1 Arrangement, Functions, and Error Codes
The names, functions, and associated error codes of the fans used in the machine are as
follows:
Notation
Name
Function
FM1
FM2

FM3

FM4

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

2-speed control
(voltage)
Draws print paper to the feed belt. Yes (24/12 V)
Cools the primary charging assem- Yes (24/12V)
bly and cleaner.
Error
code
E805
E824
Discharges exhaust of each fan to

the outside of the machine.
Cools the laser unit, drive unit, and
controller.
Removes curling of print paper after fixing.
Cools the power supply PCB.
Yes (24/12V)
E805
Yes (24/12V)
E121
Yes (24/12V)
Yes (24/12V)
E804
Cools the hard disk.
Yes (24/12V)
E607
Cools the duplexing feeding motor.
Yes (24V)
T07-201-01
7-2 P
The arrangement of the fans and the direction of air are as follows:
FM7
FM2
FM5
FM8
FM6
FM4
FM1
FM3
F07-201-01
7-3 P
2.2 Operation
2.2.1 Controlling the Speed
Some of the fans used in the machine are controlled to two different speeds (F07-202-01),
switched over by changing the voltage by the work of the voltage switching circuit of each
fan.
DC controller PCB
CPU
24V
12V
Full speed
signal
24V or 12V
Voltage switching
Half speed
circuit
signal
Clock signal
Fan
F07-202-01
2.2.2 Sequence of Operations

Main
power switch ON
Control panel switch ON
Printer unit
Feed fan
(FM1)
Primary charging
cooling fan (FM2)
Heat discharge fan
(FM3)
Controller cooling fan
(FM4)
De-curling fan (FM5)
DC power supply
(FM6)
Hard disk fan (FM7)
Duplexing feeding fan
(FM8)
Control panel
switch OFF
Initial
After
Warm-up multiple Standby Printing printing
rotation
15 min
yyy
;;;
;;;
yyy
15 min
;;;
yyy
;;;
yyy
15 min
;;;
yyy
;;;
yyy
15 min
;;;
yyy
;;;;;;
;;;yyyyyy
yyy
;;;;;;
yyyyyy
15 min
yyy
;;;
;;;
yyy
15 min
;;;
yyy
;;;;;;
;;;yyyyyy
yyy
;;;;;;
yyyyyy
yyyyy
;;;;;
;;;;;
yyyyy
Low
power
mode
Jam
Door open
yyyyy
;;;;;
;;;;;
yyyyy
;;;;;
yyyyy
;;;;;
yyyyy
15 min
yyy
;;;
yyyyy
;;; ;;;;;
yyy
;;;;;
yyyyy
15 min
;;;;;
yyyyy
;;;;;
yyyyy
15 min
;;;
yyy
;;;;;
yyyyy
;;;
yyy
;;;;;
yyyyy
15 min
;;;
yyy
;;;;;
;;; yyyyy
yyy
;;;;;
yyyyy
15 min
yyyyyy
;;;;;;
;;;
yyy
;;;;;;
yyyyyy
;;;
yyy
15 min
;;;
yyy
;;;
yyy
15 min
;;;;;;
yyyyyy
;;;
yyy
;;;;;;
yyyyyy
;;;
yyy
15 min
;;;;;;
yyyyyy
;;;
yyy
;;;;;;
yyyyyy
;;;
yyy
yyyyy
;;;;;
;;;;;
yyyyy
15 min
yyy
;;;
;;;;;
;;; yyyyy
yyy
;;;;;
yyyyy
15 min
yyyyyy
;;;;;;
;;;
yyy
;;;;;;
yyyyyy
;;;
yyy
: full speed.
F07-202-02
7-4 P
yyy
;;;
;;;: half speed.
yyy
3. Power Supply
3.1 Power Supply
3.1.1 Outline
The machines DC power supply is controlled by the DC power supply PCB; the associated PCBs, parts, functions, and arrangement of distribution are as follows:
Name
DC power supply PCB
Rush current prevention
PCB
Fuse PCB
Main power switch
(SW1)
Environment switch
(SW3)
(SW4)
Main relay (RL1)
Description
Generates DC power from AC power.
Protects against overcurrent.
Limits rush current to the fixing/feeding assembly, duplexing
unit, and high-voltage PCB.
Protects the lens heater (H6) and mirror heater (H7) against
overcurrent.
Serves as the power switch of a load other than the drum
heater (H3), cassette heater (H4), and deck heater (H5).
When off, the drum heater (H3) operates in conjunction with
the turning on/off of the main power switch; if on, the drum
heater (H3) will remain powered at all times.
Serves as the switch to turn on/off the cassette heater (H4)
and deck heater (H5).
Cuts off the AC line to the fixing heater and AC driver.
T07-301-01
7-5 P
3.1.2 Distribution of Power Among Switches

The machines power is supplied to each load in conjunction with its respective switch:
OFF OFF ON
ON
Control panel switch ON

%
ON ON ON ON ON ON
OFF ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
Control panel switch OFF

Control
side
Load
side

!"#
$%

!&#

!'#
&#

'#(
)#
* +#(

,#

Main relay (RL1)
ON
OFF ON
ON
ON
OFF ON
ON
ON
OFF ON
OFF Half Half Half Full Full Half Half Full Full
wave wave wave wave wave wave wave*1 wave wave
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF OFF ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF OFF ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
*1: If underlined, applies to the 100V model; the 120/230V model is subjected to full-wave
control.
T07-301-02
The following are the default settings of the cassette heater switch (SW4) and the environment switch (SW3):
Default setting
Cassette heater switch (SW4)
Environment switch (SW3)
100V model
OFF
ON
120V model
Not provided
OFF
230V model
OFF
OFF
T07-301-03
7-6 P
The following shows arrangement of the machines power supplies:

100V model accessory
120V model Not used
230V model accessory
AC line
Drum heater (H3)
Environment switch (SW3)

AC
driver
PCB
Main relay (RL1)
Front
cover
switch
(SW2)
Main heater (H1)
A
12V
Laser
driver
PCB
Laser
scanner
motor
3.3VA1
3.3VA2
3.3VB/5V
24V
24V
CCD/AP
PCB
Inverter
PCB
Controller unit
5V
24VU2
Fixing/
feeding
relay
PCB
BD PCB
5V
12V
24VU
5V
12VU
Hard disk
Accessory
power supply
DC controller PCB
3.3VA
24V
24VU
Paper deck 24VU3

DC power
(accessory)
supply
PCB
5V
Motor driver
24VU2
PCB
Clutch
solenoid
24V
3.3VA/5V
12VU/24VU
Finisher
(accessory)
NE data
controller
(accessory)
Potential
control
PCB
24VU
ADF
Mirror heater (H7)
24VU1
Drum
motor
(M1)
Lens heater (H6)

Fuse
PCB
24VU
5V
24V
24V
5V
24V
Duplexing
driver
PCB
Sub heater (H2)

C
Rush current prevention PCB
Deck heater (H5)
12V
Main power
switch (SW1)
Manual feed
door switch High(MSW2) voltage
PCB
Cassette
heater
switch
(SW4)
5V
LF1
Accessories
power supply
PCB
Main
motor
(M2)
Cassette heater (H4)
A
Thermal
switch
(TP1)
5V
Leakage Line noise

breaker filter
ELCB
AC input
Drum
temperature
control
PCB
Control
Control
Inverter 5V panel
Card IV
PCB
CPU
(accessory)
PCB
ON signal
Control panel
switch
F07-301-01
7-7 P
3.1.3 Output of Power Supplies

The outputs of the machines power supplies are controlled by the main power switch,
control panel power switch, or signal from the printer board.
The output is controlled by the DC power supply PCB as follows based on the combination of the signal from the printer board and the state of the power switch and the control
panel switch:
Main power
switch (SW1)
OFF
ON
ON
Control panel Power output

Remarks
switch or print from DC power
board signal
supply PCB
If the environment switch (SW3) is
OFF
None
ON, the drum heater will be supplied
with power (AC). In addition, if the
heater switch (SW4) is ON, the cassette
heater is supplied with power (AC).
*Supply is sent to the following:
OFF
3.3VB*
3.3 VB:controller unit
ON
All
T07-301-04
7-8 P
3.2 Rated Outputs of the DC Power Supply

Output
Connector
3VA1
J4014-1
J4014-2
J4014-3
J4014-4
J4014-5
Output voltage
tolerance
Rated output
voltage
Rated output
current
Level of activation
(overcurrent
protection)
3VA2
J4017-1
J4017-2
J4017-3
J4017-4
J4017-5
3VA3
J4003-7
3%
3VB
J4015-1
J4015-2
J4015-3
3.4V
+2%
-2.5%
3.5V
9.0A
2.5A
5.5 to 8.0A
5V
J4003-5
J4004-1
J4008-1
J4009-1
J4016-1
J4016-2
3%
12VU
J4003-3
J4003-4
5.1V
12.0V
4.5A
1.0A
5%
4.0 to 8.0A 1.0 to 5.0A 2.5 to 5.0A
T07-302-01
Output
Connector
Output voltage
tolerance
Rated output
voltage
Rated output
current
Level of activation
(overcurrent
protection)
24VU1
J4005-1
24VU2
J4004-3
J4009-3
24VU3
J4003-1
J4006-1
24VU4
J4007-1
J4003-1
J4010-1
J4011-1
24VA
J4013-2
5%
24.0V
+7%
-5%
24.0V
15.0A
4.0A
5.5 to 8.0A
5.0 to 8.0A
T07-302-02
* However, the AC input must be 85 to 135 V for the 100-V model, and 187 to 264 V for
the 230-V model.
7-9 P
3.3 Protection Mechanism

The machine is designed to automatically turn off the output of DC power as soon as the
over-current protection circuit of the DC power supply PCB turns on.
When the over-current detection circuits a high level of current, the machine will stop outputs [1], [2], and [3]; in other words, the over-current detection circuit 1 is arranged at an
upper level of detective circuitry, and its activation will turn off all outputs located under it.
When the over-current detection circuit 2 detects over-current, the machine will stop outputs [2] and [3]. Likewise, when the over-current circuit 3 detects a high level of current, the
machine will stop output [3].
The machine is also equipped with a fuse to cut off outputs in the event any of the elements in circuits fails.
DC power supply PCB

Converter
circuit 1
Overcurrent
detection
circuit 1
3VB
Overcurrent
protection
circuit 1
PCBs
Output[1]
3VB
Output[2]
3VA1
Converter
circuit 2
Overcurrent
detection
circuit 2
Overcurrent
3VA1/3VA2/ protection
circuit 2
3VA3/5V/
12VU
3VA2
3VA3
5V
12VU
Output[3]
24VU1
Output stop signal
Converter
circuit 3
Over-current detection signal
Overcurrent
detection
circuit 3
24VU2
Over-
24VU1/24VU2/ current
24VU3/24VU4/ protection
24VA
circuit 3
24VU3
24VU4
24VA
Sequence
control
circuit
Fuse
(F4001)
F07-303-01
7-10 P
Detection by
Overcurrent detection
circuit 1
circuit 2
circuit 3
Machine operation
Resetting
Stops outputs [1], [2], and [3] Turn off the main power switch,
of the DC power supply
and remove the cause; then,
PCB.
leave the machine alone for
about 3 min, and turn on the
main power switch.
Stops outputs [1] and [2] of Remove the cause, and turn off
the DC power supply PCB.
and then on the control panel
power switch.
Stops output [3] of the DC
Remove the cause; then, turn
power supply PCB.
off and then on the control
panel power switch.
T07-303-01
7-11 P
4. Others
4.1 Silent Mode
In silent mode, the revolution of the laser scanner motor is reduced (1/2) to lower the
machines operating noise when it is in standby state. (The time interval used by the machine to shift to silent mode is set in user mode.)
The machine has to wait until the revolution of the laser scanner motor returns from silent
mode to normal, taking a while longer than otherwise before it starts printing.
7-12 P

mind:
1.
to disassemble it.
7.
7-13 P
5.1.1 External Covers

Remove the external covers for cleaning,
inspecting, and repairing the inside of the
machine. Those covers that may be detached without difficult are omitted from
the discussions; the number in parentheses
indicates the number of mounting screws
used.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[6]
Front cover (1)

Upper cover (3)
Upper cover base (4)
Right rear paper cover (3)
Right rear lower cover (2)
Reader right cover (2)
Reader front cover
(right upper cover, right upper cover
base, reader right/left cover; 2 screws)
[2]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[5]
Externals 1
F07-501-01
[18]
[8] Rear upper cover (4)

[9] PCB cover (4)
[10] Rear lower cover (7)
[11] Filter cover (1)
[12] Left lower cover (5; 2 grip covers)
[13] Left upper cover (7; delivery assembly
cover)
[14] Delivery assembly cover (3)
[15] Reader rear cover (5; ADF connector)
[16] Reader left cover (2)
[17] Hard disk cover (2)
[18] Top panel (4)
[17]
[15]
[16]
[8]
[14]
[9]
[13]
[10]
[12]
[11]
Externals 2
F07-501-02
7-14 P

1) Open the front cover [1], and remove
the screw [3] of the door tape [2].
2) Remove the stopper [4], and detach the
hinge shaft [5] by pulling it up.
3) Pull the front cover up at an angle to
detach.
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F07-501-03
5.1.3 Removing the Top Plate
[1]

2) Remove the fixing plates (2 pc. each at
front and rear) of the reader unit.
4) Open the manual feed cover.
5) Remove the four mounting screws, and
detach the top plate [2].
[2]
[1]
F07-501-04
7-15 P
5.2 Arrangement of Electrical Parts (rear of the machine)

The following shows the arrangement of the electrical parts found on the back of the machine (after removing the following four parts):
main controller box assembly (p. 7-22P)

DC controller PCB (p. 7-46P)
waste toner bottle (p. 7-33P)
high-voltage PCB (p. 7-24P)
[1][2]
[3]
[4] [5]
[6]
[23]
[7]
[22]
[8]
[21]
[9]
[20]
[19]
[10]
[11]
[18]
[12]
[13]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[14]
F07-502-01
7-16 P
[1] Manual feed pickup drive clutch (CL3)

[2] Main motor (M2)
[3] Developing clutch (CL1)
[4] Drum motor (M1)
[5] Waste toner drive assembly
[6] HDD
[7] Left deck pull-out drive assembly
Left deck pull-out clutch (CL4)
[8] Feeding fan (FM1)
[9] Left deck pickup motor (M24)
[10] Left deck pickup releasing solenoid
(SL7)
[11] Left deck lifter drive assembly
Left deck lifter motor (M4)
Left deck level sensor upper/lower
(PS49, PS50)
[12] Power supply transformer
[13] Cassette 3 length detection
cassette 3 level detection (SVR2)
cassette 3 paper width detection
(SVR4)
[14] Cassette 4 length detection

cassette 4 level detection (SVR3)
cassette 4 paper width detection
(SVR5)
[15] Right deck pickup releasing solenoid
(SL7)
[16] Vertical path lower motor (M27)
[17] Right deck pickup motor (M11)
[18] Right deck lifter drive assembly
right deck lifter motor (M5)
right deck level sensor upper/lower
(PS47, PS48)
[19] Right deck pickup motor (M11)
[20] Vertical path upper motor (M26)
[21] Vertical path duplex feeding motor
(M25)
[22] Pre-registration motor (M17)
[23] Controller cooling fan (FM4)
7-17 P
5.3 Control Panel

5.3.1 Removing the Control Panel
pickup feeding unit to the front.
the front door switch cover [2].
[2]
[1]
F07-503-01
4) Remove the six screws [3], and disconnect the connector [4]; then, detach the
control panel [5].
[5]
[3]
[3]
[4]
F07-503-02
7-18 P
5.3.2 Removing the LCD Panel

1) Remove the control panel.
2) Turn over the control paper, and remove
the mounting screw [1] to detach control panel mounting plate [2]; then, remove the four screws [3], and detach
the control panel bottom cover [4].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
F07-503-03
3) Remove the two flat cables [5], and disconnect the five connectors [6], and remove the four mounting screws [7];
then, detach the control panel CPU PCB
[8].
[7]
[6]
[7] [5]
[8]
[6]
[7]
[5]
F07-503-04
4) Remove the ten mounting screws [9],
and detach the shielding plate [10].
[9]
[10]
[9]
[9]
[9]
F07-503-05
7-19 P
5) Disconnect the two connectors [12] of

the control panel inverter PCB [11];
then, remove the four mounting screws
[13], and detach the LCD panel [14].
[12]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[13]
F07-503-06
5.3.3 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB

remove the four mounting screws [2];
then, detach there control panel inverter
PCB [3].
[1] [3] [2]
[2]
[1]
F07-503-07
7-20 P
5.3.4 Removing the Control Panel Family PCB

2) Remove the shielding plate.
3) Remove the mounting screw, and detach
the control panel family PCB [4].
[1]
[1]
F07-503-08
7-21 P
5.4 PCBs
1) Remove the rear upper cover.
2) Disconnect the 26 connectors, and remove the seven screws [1]; then, detach
the DC controller PCB [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F07-504-01
Keep the following three points in mind when replacing the PCBs:
Be sure to transfer the six EEP-ROMs from the old to new PCBs; at
that time, be sure to refer to the color of each round label attached to the
EEP-ROM for correct transfer.
Be sure to enter the values indicated on the label [3] on the new PCB in
service mode by making the following selections:
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>D-PRE-TR
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-SP>D-HV-SP
Be sure to transfer the shorting connector [4] of J303 on the PCB from
the old to new PCB. (Keep in mind that failure to do so will disable the
control panel indication.)
Brown
Blue Yellow (IC104)
Red (IC105)
(IC127) (IC109)
Green (IC110)
[4]
J303
[3]
White (IC130)
F07-504-02
7-22 P
5.4.2 Removing the Main Controller Box

2) Remove the right rear lower cover, and
detach the right rear upper cover.
and detach the controller cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F07-504-03
4) Remove the six mounting screws [3],
and detach the differential PCB [4].
[3]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[3]
F07-504-04
7-23 P

and disconnect the connector [6]; then,
detach the LIPS board [7] and the
RISER board [8] together with the
mounting plate [90].
[5]
[7]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[8]
[6]
[9]
F07-504-05
6) Disconnect the three connectors [10],
and detach the differential PCB [4].
[10]
[10]
[4]
F07-504-06
7-24 P
7) Remove the three mounting screws

[11], and detach the hard disk cable
mounting plate [12].
[12]
[11]
F07-504-07
8) Disconnect the eight connectors [13],
and disconnect the hard disk cable [14]
and the flat cable [15]; then, remove the
five mounting screws [16], and open the
main controller box [17] to detach it upward.
[16] [13] [14]
[16]
[13]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[16]
[13]
[13]
F07-504-08
7-25 P
5.4.3 Removing the Ethernet PCB

1) Remove the LIPS board, RISER board,
and differential PCB.
and detach the Ethernet PCB [2].
[1]
[2]
F07-504-09
5.4.4 Removing the Main Controller PCB
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
1) Open the main controller box.

2) Remove the Ethernet PCB.
detach the PCB guide [2]. ((1 pc. each;
upper, lower)
F07-504-10
7-26 P

and detach the main controller PCB [4].
[3]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[5]
[6]
F07-504-11
To replace the main controller
PCB, be sure to transfer the
counter memory PCB [6] to the
new PCB by removing the
screw [5].
5.4.5 Remove the Differential PCB

See steps 1) through 4) used to remove the main controller box.
5.4.6 Removing the LIPS PCB

1) Remove the differential PCB.
2) Remove the LIPS PCB and the RISER
PCB together with the mounting plate.
and detach the LIPS PCB [2].
[2]
[1]
F07-504-12
7-27 P
5.4.7 Removing the RISER PCB

1) Remove the Differential PCB.
2) Detach the LIPS PCB and the RISER
PCB together with the mounting plate.
and detach the RISER PCB [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F07-504-13
7-28 P
5.4.8 Power Supply PCB

[1]
1) Remove the left lower cover.

(When doing so, be sure to slide out the
right deck and the cassettes in advance.)
2) Remove the seven screws [1], and detach the shielding plate [2].
[1]
[2]
F07-504-14
3) Remove the 11 screws [3], and detach

the power supply cover [4].
[3]
[3]
[4]
[3]
F07-504-15
4) Disconnect the 15 connectors, and remove the two screws [5]; then, detach
the power supply PCB [6].
[5]
[6]
F07-504-16
7-29 P
5.4.9 High-Voltage Power Supply PCB

1) Remove the rear lower cover.
2) Remove the five screws [1], and disconnect the nine connectors; then, detach
the high-voltage power supply PCB [2].
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F07-504-17
When replacing the PCBs, keep the following mind:
Be sure to enter the values indicated on the label attached to the new
PCB (indicated by an arrow [3]) in service mode by making the following selections:
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>H-PRE-TR
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-SP>HVT-SP
COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>HVT-DE
7-30 P
5.4.10Accessories Power Supply PCB

1) Remove the rear lower cover and the
left lower cover.
2) Remove the six screws [1], and disconnect the six connectors [2]; then, detach
the power cord base [3].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
F07-504-18
3) Remove the three screws [4], and disconnect the two connectors [5]; then,
detach the accessories power supply
PCB [6].
[5]
[4]
[6]
[4]
F07-504-19
5.4.11AC Driver PCB
[1]
1) Remove the rear upper/lower cover and

the left upper/lower cover.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the three connectors [2]; then, detach the AC driver PCB [3].
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F07-504-20
7-31 P
5.4.12Motor Driver PCB

[2]
1) Remove the right rear lower cover/rear

lower cover, and detach the waste toner
bottle.
the PCB cover [2].
[1]
F07-504-21
3) Remove the six screws [3], and disconnect the 11 connectors; detach the motor driver PCB [4].
[4]
[3]
[3]
F07-504-22
5.4.13Anti-Rush Current PCB

1) Remove the DC controller PCB.
the three connectors [2]; then, detach
the anti-rush current PCB [3] from the
DC controller mounting base.
[1]
[2]
[3]
F07-504-23
7-32 P
5.4.14Serial Number PCB
[5]

fixing assembly terminal base [3].
3) Remove the four screws [4], and disconnect the connector [5]; then, detach
the serial number PCB [6].
[6]
F07-504-24
7-33 P
5.5 Fans
5.5.1 Exhaust Fan
1) Remove the rear lower cover.
2) Remove the three screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach
the exhaust fan duct [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
F07-505-01
fan grille [6] to detach the exhaust fan
[7].
[4]
[6]
[7]
[5]
F07-505-02
5.5.2 Feeding Fan

the primary fan cover [2].
the primary fan [4].
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
F07-505-03
7-34 P
5.5.3 HDD Fan

2) Remove the HDD unit. (See p. 7-44P.)
the connector [2]; then, detach the HDD
fan unit [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
F07-505-04

the HDD fan [6] from the duct [5].
[4]
[5]
[6]
F07-505-05
5.5.4 DC Power Supply Fan

1) Remove the power supply PCB.
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the three screws [2]; then, detach
the DC power supply fan [3].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
F07-505-06
7-35 P
5.5.5 Primary Charging Cooling Fan

2) Take out the hopper assembly.
3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the two mounting screws [2];
then, detach the primary charging cooling fan assembly [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F07-505-07
4) Remove the four muting screws [4], and
detach the filter mounting plate [5].
[5]
[4]
F07-505-08
and detach the primary charging cooling fan [7].
[7]
[6]
[6]
F07-505-09
7-36 P
5.6 Drive System

5.6.1 Left Deck Drive Assembly
1) Remove the high-voltage power supply
PCB.
2) Remove the four screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach
the left deck drive assembly [3].
[2] [1] [3] [1]
[1]
F07-506-01
5.6.2 Vertical Path Duplex/Right Deck Drive Assembly

1) Remove the waste toner bottle holder.
2) Remove the the five screws [1], and detach the grip base [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F07-506-02
3) Remove the four screws [3], and disconnect the five connectors [4]; then,
release the four cable clamps [5], and
detach the vertical path duplex/right
deck drive assembly [6].
[3]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
F07-506-03
7-37 P
5.6.3 Main Motor Drive Assembly

1) Loosen the belt tensioner [1], and detach the main motor belt [2].
2) Loosen the screw [3] to release the belt
tensioner [4]; then, detach the belt [5].
fixing member [7].
4) Remove the five screws [8], and disconnect the connector [9]; then, detach the
main motor drive assembly [10].
[9]
[8]
[2] [1]
[8]
[5]
[8]
[4] [3] [10] [8] [6]
[7]
F07-506-04
5.6.4 Manual Feed Pickup Drive Assembly

1) Remove the main controller box.
the scanner fan duct [2].
3) Loosen the screw [3] to release the belt
tensioner [4], and detach the belt [5].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[5]
F07-506-05
4) Remove the four screws [6], and disconnect the three connectors [7]; then,
detach the manual feed pickup drive assembly [8].
[6]
[7]
[8]
[6]
[7]
F07-506-06
7-38 P
5.6.5 Waste Toner Drive Assembly

1) Remove the DC controller base.
2) Remove the flywheel, and loosen the
belt tensioner to detach the main motor
belt.
the waste toner drive assembly [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F07-506-07
5.6.6 Left Deck Pull-Out Roller Drive Assembly

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Remove the DC controller base.

Remove the feeding fan. (See p. 7-28P.)
Remove the waste toner bottle holder.
Remove the waste toner drive assembly.
Remove the main motor.
Remove the four screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach
the left deck pull-out roller drive assembly [3].
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F07-506-08
5.6.7 Drum Drive Assembly

1) Slide out the hopper assembly.
2) Remove the drum fixing member, and
slide out the process unit.
3) Remove the feeding fan assembly.
4) Remove the main motor drive assembly.
5) Remove the high-voltage PCB.
6) Remove the five screws [1], and disconnect the four connectors [2]; then, pull
out the drum drive assembly [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
To transformer
F07-506-09
7-39 P
5.6.8 Waste Toner Bottle Assembly, Lifter Drive Assembly, Vertical Path
Drive Assembly, and Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly
2) Remove the right rear lower cover, rear
lower cover, and waste toner bottle.
3) By referring to step 3) for the main motor, remove the main power switch base
out of the way.
4) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the two connectors [2]; then, detach the connector base [3].
[2]
[3 ]
[1]
F07-506-10

the waste toner holder [5].
[4]
Take care not to let the waste

toner go astray.
[5]
[4]
F07-506-11
6) Remove the four screws [6], and disconnect the 11 connectors; then, detach
the motor driver PCB [7] together with
its base.
[6]
[7]
[6]
F07-506-12
7-40 P

the cassette pickup motor [9].
[8]
[9]
[8]
F07-506-13
remove the lifter drive assembly [12].
[10]
[11]
[12]
[10]
F07-506-14
9) Remove the three screws [13], and detach the vertical path drive assembly
[14].
10) Remove the cassette 3/4 pickup assembly. (See p. 5-55P.)
11) Remove the three screws [15], and detach the cassette pickup drive assembly
[16].
[13]
[15]
[14]
[16]
[15]
[13]
F07-506-15
7-41 P
5.6.9 Left Deck Lifter Drive Assembly

PCB.
detach the left deck lifter drive assembly [3].
[2] [1] [3] [1]
[1]
F07-506-16
7-42 P
5.7 Motor
5.7.1 Vertical Path Lower Motor (M27)
1) Remove the right lower cover/rear lower
cover.
2) Remove the waste toner box.
3) Remove the four screws [1], and disconnect the connector; then, detach the
vertical path lower motor [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
F07-507-01
5.7.2 Main Motor (M2)

2) Remove the right rear lower cover.
3) Remove the three screws [1], and release the two clamps [2]; then, remove
the main power switch base [3] out of
the way.
[2]
[1]
[3] [1]
F07-507-02
the main motor [6].
[4]
[6]
[4]
[5]
F07-507-03
7-43 P
5.7.3 Vertical Path Duplex Motor (M25), Vertical Path Upper Motor (M26),
Deck Right Motor (M11), Lifter Right Motor (M5), and Cassette
Pickup Motor (M12)
2) Remove the right rear lower cover, rear
lower cover, an waste toner bottle.
3) By referring to step 3) for the main motor, remove the main power switch base
out of the way.
4) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the two connectors [2]; then, detach the connector base [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
F07-507-04

the waste toner bottle holder [5].
[4]
Take care not to let the waste

toner go astray.
[5]
[4]
F07-507-05
the vertical path duplex motor [8].
7) Remove the two screws [9], an disconnect the connector [10]; then, detach the
vertical path upper motor [11].
8) Remove the two screws [12], and disconnect the connector [13]; then, detach
the deck right motor [14].
[8]
[6]
[6]
[7]
[12]
[9]
[11][10][12] [14] [13]
F07-507-06
7-44 P
9) Remove the four screws [15], and disconnect the 11 connectors; then, detach
the motor driver PCB [16] together with
its base.
[15]
[16]
[15]
F07-507-07

the cassette pickup motor [18].
[17]
[18]
[17]
F07-507-08
5.7.4 Pre-Registration Motor (M17) and Drum Motor (M1)

1) Remove the reader rear cover, rear upper cover, and right rear upper cover.
3) Remove the E-ring [1] and bushing [2].
the pre-registration motor (M17) [5].
the flywheel [7].
[3] [6]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[7]
F07-507-09
7-45 P

remove the four screws [9]; then, detach
the drum motor [10].
[8]
[10]
[9]
[9]
F07-507-10
7-46 P
5.8 Solenoid
5.8.1 Right Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL6)
1) Remove the left deck drive assembly.
the cable support base [2].
[1]
[2]
F07-508-01

the right deck pickup roller releasing
solenoid [4].
[4]
[3]
F07-508-02
5.8.2 Adjusting the Position of the Right Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL6)
Adjust the position of the solenoid so that
the left edge of the arm 2 is 57.2 0.5 mm
from the center of the hole A in the solenoid
mounting base.
[A]
57.2 0.5mm
F07-508-03
7-47 P
5.8.3 Right Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL7)

PCB.
the connector [2]; then, detach the
pickup roller releasing solenoid [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
F07-508-04
5.8.4 Adjusting the Position of the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL7)
When replacing the solenoid on its own,
be sure to mount it in its initial position.
(Take note of the position of the fixing
screw [2] before detaching the left deck
pickup solenoid from the support plate [1].
Or, mark the position of the solenoid on the
support plate with a scriber.)
[1]
[2]
F07-508-05
7-48 P
5.9 Clutches
5.9.1 Manual Feed Pickup Clutch/Developing Clutch
1) Remove the reader rear cover/rear upper
cover/right rear upper cover.
3) Remove the grip ring [1] and bushing
[2]; then, disconnect the connector [3],
and remove the two screws [4], and detach the manual feed pickup clutch
(CL4) [5].
the flywheel [7].
[3] [6]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[7]
F07-509-01
the developing clutch (CL1) [10].
[9]
[10]
[8]
F07-509-02
7-49 P
5.10 Sensors
5.10.1 Cassette 3/4 Paper Size (width/length) Sensor
1) Remove the exhaust fan duct.
2) If the cassette 4 sensor is to be removed,
remove the two screws [1], disconnect
the two connectors [2], and detach the
connector base [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
F07-510-01
3) Remove the two screws [4] each, and

disconnect the connector [5]:
cassette 3 paper size width sensor [6]
cassette 3 paper side length sensor [7]
cassette 4 paper size width sensor [8]
cassette 4 paper side length sensor [9]
[4] [4]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[8] [4]
[9]
[4]
F07-510-02
7-50 P
5.11
HDD
Prints to Note When Replacing
the HDD Unit
1. Take care to avoid static damage that can occur when replacing the HDD unit.
2. Take care not to subject the
HDD unit to impact.

2) Remove the reader unit fixing plate
(rear).
3) Remove the rear upper cover. (Keep the
hard disk cover intact when doing so.)
4) Remove the main controller cover.
(F07-504-03)
and remove the hard disk cable retaining plate [2].
[2]
[1]
F07-511-01
6) Remove the two mounting screws [3].
[3]
F07-511-02
7-51 P
7) Fit the handle of the screwdriver between the reader unit and the printer
unit; then, lift the reader unit, and take
out the hard disk unit [4].
[4]
F07-511-01
8) Disconnect the connector [5] and the
flat cable [7]; then, detach the hard disk
unit [4].
[6]
[5]
[4]
F07-511-04
7-52 P

and detach the hard disk cover [8].
[8]
[7]
F07-511-05
[9]

and detach the hard disk [10].
[10]
[9]
F07-511-06
When mounting the HDD unit,
be sure that the flat cable is below the film sheet of the HDD
case.
7-53 P
5.12 Others
5.12.1 DC Controller PCB Base
1) Remove the HDD unit. (See p. 7-44P.)
[1]
[1]
When mounting the HDD unit,

be sure that the flat cable is under the plastic sheet of the HDD
upper case.
[1]
2) Remove the nine screws [1], and disconnect the 26 connectors; then, detach
the DC controller PCB base.
[1]
[1]
[1]
F07-512-01
5.12.2 Relay
1) Remove the rear upper/lower cover and
left upper/lower cover.
2) Disconnect the cable connected to the
relay, and remove the two screws [1];
then, detach the relay [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F07-512-02
7-54 P
5.12.3 Power Supply Transformer

PCB.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the two connectors [2]; then, slide
the transfer unit [3] to the left to detach.
[2]
[3]
[1]
F07-512-03
transformer [6].
[4]
[6]
[4]
[5]
F07-512-04
7-55 P
CHAPTER 8
PAPER DECK
1. Paper Deck
1.1 Inputs to and Outputs from the Deck Driver
1.1.1 Inputs to the Driver (1/2)
Deck driver PCB
+5VR
Deck pickup sensor PS101
J10-1
-2
-3
J8-5
-4
-3
J05-5
-4
-3
J5-1
-2
-3
J4-4
-3
-2
J04-7
-6
-5
J6-1
-2
-3
J4-7
-6
-5
J04-10
-9
-8
J7-1
-2
-3
J4-10
-9
-8
J04-13
-12
-11
DPPD
When paper is detected, '1'.
+5VR
Deck paper sensor

PS102
DPE*
When paper is absent in the

deck, '1'.
+5VR
Deck lifter upper

limit sensor
PS103
DLUL
When the deck lifter is at the

upper limit, '1'.
+5VR
Deck lifter position

sensor
PS104
DLPD
When the lifter is in pick

position, '1'.
+5VR
Deck SET sensor
PS105
J24-1
-2
-3
J09-5
-4
-3
DSET
When the deck is set to the

copier, '1'.
+5VR
PS106
J12-1
-2
-3
J8-10
-9
-8
J05-10
-9
-8
Deck paper supply

position sensor
PS107
J18-1
-2
-3
J17-3
-2
-1
J08-3
-2
-1
Deck paper level

sensor
J19-1
-2
-3
J17-6
-5
-4
J08-6
-5
-4
Deck feed sensor
DPFD
When paper is detected, '1'.
+5VR
DPSP
When the deck lifter is in paper

supply position, '1'.
+5VR
PS108
DPL
When the absence of paper

(1/2 level) is detected, '1'.
+5VR
Deck OPEN sensor PS109
J25-1
-2
-3
J09-8
-7
-6
DOPND*
When the compartment is set

to the deck, '1'.
F08-101-01
8-1 P
1.1.2 Outputs from the Deck Driver (2/2)

Deck driver PCB
SW100
Deck open switch
LED100
Deck open indicator
J3-1
J04-4
-2
-3
-3
-2
-4
-1
DOPN*
DOLON*
Open switch PCB

+24VU
SW101
Deck open
detecting switch
J26-3
J10-1
-2
-3
NO
J21-2
J08-8
-1
-7
NO
When the deck is

opening/closing, '0'. (LED
turns on or flashes while the
deck lifter is rotating.)
DOPD
When the deck is open, '1'.

(SW101 is not pushed.)
DLLD
When the deck lifter is at the

lower limit, '1'.
(SW102 is not pushed.)
SW102
Deck lifter lower limit
detecting switch
When SW100 is pushed

to open the deck, '0'.
+5VR
+24VU.
J02-3
Power supply
-2
0VU
J719
J03
Host machine
F08-101-02
8-2 P
1.1.3 Outputs form the Deck Driver (1/1)

Deck driver PCB
J01-1
Deck main motor
M101
+24V
-3
DMMB*
DMMA
-4
-5
-6
Deck lifter motor
J22-1
J17-9
J08-9
-2
-10
-10
J13-2
J8-11
J05-11
CL102
-1
-12
-12
SL101
J9-2
-1
J8-1
-2
J05-1
-2
M102
DMMB
-2
See p. 8-14P.
+24V
DMMA*
See p. 8-15P.
24VU
Deck pickup clutch
DPUCD*
When '0', ON.
24VU
Deck pickup roller

releasing solenoid
DPRSD* When '0', ON.

24VU
Deck open solenoid SL102
J23-2
-1
J09-1
-2
DOPSD* When '0', ON.
F08-101-03
8-3 P
1.2 Pickup
1.2.1 Outline
The paper deck (hereafter deck) is capable of accommodating as many as 3500 sheets of
paper (A/LTR/B5; of 80 g/m), and is designed to feed paper in response to control signals
from the DC controller of its host machine.
The lifter of the deck is driven by the deck lifter motor (M102), and paper is picked up
and fed using the drive from the deck main motor (M101).
1.2.2 Pickup Operation

The paper inside the deck is held up by the lifter, and is kept in position at a specific point
of pickup.
When the Start key is pressed and, as a result, the deck pickup clutch (CL102) turns on,
the drive of the deck main motor (M101) rotates the pickup roller to pickup paper. At this
time, the pickup/feed roller and the separation roller serve to make sure that only one sheet
of paper is moved forward; then, when the deck pickup sensor (PS101) detects the paper,
the deck pickup roller releasing solenoid (SL101) turns on to move the pickup roller away
from the surface of the paper.
The paper is moved to the registration roller of the host machine, and is made to arch for
removal of the skew.
The registration roller controls the paper so that its leading edge will match the image on
the photosensitive drum.
8-4 P
DC controller PCB
Deck pickup roller releasing

solenoid drive signal (DPRSD*)
Deck main motor drive signal
Deck pickup clutch drive signal

(DPUCD*)
Deck pickup detection signal

(DPPD)
Deck feed detection signal

(DPFD)
(host machine)
Deck driver PCB
PS106
PS101
M101
CL102
SL101
F08-102-01
8-5 P
1.2.3 Sequence of Operations (pickup from the deck)

Start key
ON
INTR
SCAN
PRINT LSTR
STBY
Deck main motor

(M101)
Deck pickup clutch
(CL102)
Deck pickup roller
releasing solenoid (SL101)
Deck pickup sensor
(PS101)
Deck feed sensor
(PS106)
F08-102-02
8-6 P
1.3 Detecting Paper in the Deck

1.3.1 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Power
The presence/absence of paper inside the deck is detected by the deck paper sensor
(PS102). When paper runs out and, as a result, the paper detecting lever of the pickup roller
assembly moves past the deck paper sensor, the Add Paper message will be indicates in the
control panel of the host machine.
Paper detecting lever Deck paper sensor
Paper
Lifter
F08-103-01
Deck paper sensor
Lifter
F08-103-02
1.3.2 Switching the Deck Paper Size

The paper size of the deck may be switched by relocating the guide plate inside the deck
to suit the needs of the user; the new paper size must then be entered in service mode
(COPIER>OPTION>ACC>DK-P).
8-7 P
1.3.3 Detecting the Level of Paper in the Deck

The machine uses the deck paper supply position sensor (PS107), deck paper level sensor
(PS108), and deck paper sensor (PS102) to check the level of paper inside its compartment;
it can also indicate the detected level in the control panel of its host machine.
The following shows how the level is determined with reference to the combination of the
states of sensors and how each level is indicated:
Level of paper
PS102
PS107
PS108
100% to about 50%

about 50% to about 10%
less than 10%
No paper
1: light-blocking plate over
the sensor.
0: light-blocking plate not
over the sensor.
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
Indication in
control panel
T08-103-01
8-8 P
1.4 Deck Lifter

1.4.1 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper
The lifter of the deck is connected to a reel by means of a cable, and is driven by the drive
of the deck lifter motor (M102). The lifter is moved up or down by changing the direction of
motor rotation.
When the compartment is slid into the deck, the deck OPEN detecting switch is pushed;
then, the lifter moves up as soon as the deck OPEN sensor (PS109) detects the light-blocking plate. The deck keeps moving up, and stops when the deck lifter position sensor
(PS104) detects the top surface of the stack of paper on the lifter.
If the lifter fails to stop moving up after the sensor lever blocks the deck lifter position
sensor for some reason, the deck lifter upper limit sensor (PS103) will turn on to prevent
damage otherwise caused by the deck.
The lifter, on the other hand, starts to move down when the deck open switch (SW100) is
pushed; it continues to move down unit it moves past the sensor lever of the deck paper supply position sensor (PS107), i.e., the falling edge of the sensor output.
When paper is supplied in this condition, it will push down the lever of the deck paper
supply position sensor, and the lifter in response will move farther down until the stack of
paper moves past the sensor lever.
The lifter repeats the descent each time paper is supplied until the deck lifter lower limit
detecting switch (SW102) is pushed.
8-9 P
Deck OPEN
detecting switch
sensor (PS104)
(SW101)
Deck paper supply
Deck open switch
Deck liter upper
Deck main
position sensor (PS107)
(SW100)
M101
limit
sensor
motor
Deck pickup roller
(PS103)
Deck paper
level sensor
(PS108)
Deck pickup
/feed roller
M102
Deck separation roller
Deck lifter
motor
Deck lifter cable

Deck lifter lower
limit detecting switch
(SW102)
Lifter
Paper
F08-104-01
8-10 P
1.4.2 Indicating the Level of Paper on the Deck Front Cover

The drive of the deck lifter motor (M102) is received by a coupling, and is then transmitted to the rack through a drive belt. The rack is equipped with a black belt, moving up and
down within the display window in the deck front cover in keeping with the movement of
the rack.
When the level of paper decreases and, as a result, the lifter moves to pickup position, the
area of the black belt within the display window increases, while the area of white (indicating the amount of paper) decreases, enabling a check on the level of paper.
Rack
Black belt
Display window
Deck front cover
The lifter moves down,
and the level of paper
(white area) increases.
Drive belt
Deck lifter motor
Coupling
M102
F08-104-02
8-11 P
1.5 Opening/Closing the Compartment

1.5.1 Opening/Closing the Compartment
When the deck open switch (SW100) is pushed, the deck open solenoid (SL102) turns on
to release the compartment, which is then pushed forward several centimeters to the front by
the force of a spring. At the same time, the deck lifter motor (M102) starts to rotate, and the
lifter inside the deck starts to move down.
When the compartment is slid inside the deck by hand, on the other hand, the deck open
sensor (PS109) detects the light-blocking plate of the compartment, and the lifter is let to
move up to pickup position.
When the deck lifter motor rotates for opening or closing the deck, the deck open indicator (LED100) located on the open switch PCB remains on or flashes.
J3
SW100 -1
-4
LED100
Deck open signal(DOPN*)

Deck open indicator LED signal(DOLON*)
J04
-4
J04
-1
Open switch PCB

PS103
Deck lifter upper limit detection

signal(DLUL)
PS109
Deck open detection

signal(DOPND*)
SW101
Deck open detection

signal(DOPD)
J04
-9
(compartment)
J09
-7
J10
-3
Deck lifter
Deck open solenoid drive

signal(DOPSD*)
Deck
driver
PCB
DC
controller
PCB
J09
-2
SL102
SW102
Open
M102
Deck lifter lower limit detection

signal (DLLD)
Deck lifter motor drive signal
J08-8
J08
(host
machine)
F08-105-01
8-12 P
1.5.2 Sequence of Operations (opening/closing the compartment)

Deck open
switch ON
Compartment set
ON
Flashing
OFF
Deck open indicator

(LED100)
Deck lifter motor
(M102)
Deck paper supply position
sensor (PS107)
detecting switch (SW102)
Deck open solenoid

(SL1020)
Compartment open
Deck open detecting switch

(SW101)
Deck open sensor (PS109)
Deck lifter position sensor

(PS104)
Deck lifter DOWN
Deck lifter UP
* : Varies depending on the size of the stack.
F08-105-02
8-13 P
1.6 Controlling the Deck

1.6.1 Controlling the Deck Main Motor (M101)
The deck main motor is a stepping motor controlled by the DC controller of the host machine. The following figure shows the circuit used to drive the deck main motor, and has the
following functions:
[1] Turing on and off the deck main motor.
[2] Changing the speed of rotation of the deck main motor
a. Turning On and Off the Motor
The deck main motor is turned on or off by controlling the output of the pulse signals
from the host machine. (DMMA, DMMA*, DMMB, DMMB*).
b. Changing the Speed of Rotation of the Motor
The deck is designed to automatically change the speed at which paper is moved in consideration of future models of its host machine. As such, its speed is changed by the motor
clock signals (M-CLK) arriving at the deck driver PCB from the DC controller of its host
machine.
Deck driver PCB
+24V
+5V
Motor switching
current switching
circuit
DPUMA*
DC controller
PCB
DPUMA
Motor rotation
control circuit
DPUMB
M101
DPUMB*
Deck main motor
F08-106-01
8-14 P
1.6.2 Controlling the Deck Lifter Motor (M102)

The deck lifter motor control circuit is located on the deck driver PCB. (See F08-106-02
for its block diagram.)
The combination circuit shown in the figure consists of various logic circuits, and serves
to drive the deck lifter motor clockwise or counterclockwise based on the combination of
the output signals form the various sensors, deck lifter motor drive signal (DLMON*) from
the DC controller of the host machine, and deck lifter UP signal (DLUP*).
If the deck lifter position sensor (PS104) does not detect the lifter within a specific period
of time in the presence of the deck lifter UP signal, the machine will indicate an error code
('05'; may be checked in service mode COPIER>DISPLAY>ALARM1>BODY).
[1]
Conditions for Moving Up the Lifter

The lifter is connected to its host machine; i.e., the deck set signal (DSET) is 1.
The compartment is closed; i.e., the deck open detection signal (DOPND*) is 1.
The compartment is closed; i.e., the deck open detecting switch is ON.
The deck lifter upper limit detection signal (DLUL) is 0 and, in addition, the deck
lifter position detection signal (DLPD) is 0.
The deck lifter motor drive signal (DLMON*) is 0.
The deck lifter UP signal (DLUP*) is 0.
The above conditions will cause the lifter to move up.
[2] Conditions for Moving Down the Lifter
The lifter is open; i.e., the deck open detection signal (DOPND*) is 0.
The deck lifter lower limit detection signal (DLLD) is 0 and, in addition, the deck lifter
position detection signal (DLPD) is 0.
The deck lifter motor drive signal (DLMON*) is 0.
The deck UP signal (DLUP*) is 1.
The above conditions cause the lifter to move down.
8-15 P
Deck open detection

signal (DOPD)
Communication
conversion IC
(Q16)
24V
Deck open detecting

switch (SW101)
M102
Deck lifter motor DOWN drive signal
Deck lifter motor UP drive signal
DC
controller
PCB
24V
24V
Deck lifter motor

Motor drive circuit
Deck open signal
(DOPN*)
Deck lifter upper limit

detection signal (DLUL)
Deck open detection

signal (DOPND*)
Combination Deck lifter position

circuit detection signal (DLPD)
Deck lifter motor drive
signal (DLMON*)
Deck lifter UP signal
(DLUP*)
Deck open switch

(SW100)
PS103
Deck lifter upper
limit sensor
PS109
Deck open sensor
PS104
sensor
Deck set signal (DSET)

PS105
Deck set sensor
detection signal (DLLD)
detecting switch (SW102)
Deck paper supply position detection signal (DPSP)

Host
machine
Deck driver PCB
PS107
Deck paper supply
position sensor
Note: The communication conversion IC (Q16) in the diagram performs serial

conversion.
parallel signal
F08-106-02
8-16 P
2. Detecting Jams
2.1 Outline
The paper deck is equipped with two sensors used to see if paper is moving properly. A
jam is identified in relation to the output of the sensors at such times as programmed in the
DC controller of the host machine.
When the DC controller of the host machine identifies a jam, the machine will discharge
all sheets moving ahead of the jam and then stop operation, at which time it will show instructions on jam removal in the control panel of its host machine.
PS106
PS101
F08-201-01
Notation
PS106
PS101
Name
Deck feed sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Function
Detects delay.
Detects delay.
T08-201-01
8-17 P
The DC controller of the host machine identifies a jam under the following conditions:
1. When the host machine is turned on, or at the end of wait-up or in standby, paper exits
over the deck feed sensor (PS106).
Deck Pickup/Vertical Path Delay Jam

Start key
ON
INTR
Jam indicator ON
SCAN
PRINT
Deck pickup clutch

(CL102)
Jam check
Deck pickup sensor
(PS101)
Deck feed sensor
(PS106)
Deck main motor
(M101)
Normal
Error
F08-201-02
8-18 P

Be sure to observe the following when disassembling or assembling the machine:
1.
Disconnect the power plug of the host machine before starting the work.
2. Unless otherwise noted, assemble the machine by reversing the steps used to disassemble it.
3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. Some mounting screws are equipped with a toothed washer to protect against static electricity. Be sure to use each washer.
5. As a rule, do not operate the machine while any of its parts are removed.
6.
If the deck is equipped with a drier heater, be sure to disconnect the power plug of
the heater before starting the work.
8-19 P
3.1 External Covers

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Deck releasing grip

Front upper cover
Compartment open/close switch
Front cover
Right cover
Upper cover
Rear cover
[7]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
F08-301-01
[2]

1) Disconnect the deck from its host machine; then, push down the latch plate
[2] of the compartment [1] with your
finger to open the compartment [1].
(rear)
[1]
F08-301-02
8-20 P
2) Loosen the four screws [3], and detach

the front cover [4] to the front.
[3]
[4]
F08-301-03
When mounting the front cover

to the deck, be sure to match it
against the coupling for the paper level indicator.
Match.
F08-301-04
8-21 P
When mounting the front cover,

be sure that the gap between the
front cover and the front upper
cover is 31 mm.
Front upper cover
Front cover
1m
F08-301-05
If you inadvertently moved the

paper level indicator belt behind
the front cover when removing
the front cover, or moved the
deck lifter, move the deck lifter
to its lower limit, and then move
the drive belt in the direction of
the arrow (shown in the figure
to the right) until it stops so that
the area of white increase; then,
mount the front cover.
(If the deck is operated without
matching the paper level indicator and the deck lifter position,
the drive mechanisms of the paper level indicator can suffer
damage.)
8-22 P
Deck front cover

The paper level
(white area)
increases.
Display
window
Drive belt
F08-301-06 Front View
[1]
3.1.2 Removing the Rear Cover

1) Disconnect the deck from the host machine, and remove the six screws [1];
then, detach the rear cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F08-301-07
3.1.3 Removing the Right Cover
[2]
1) Remove the three screws [1]; then, shift

the right cover [2] to the front, and detach it to the rear.
[1]
F08-301-08
8-23 P
3.1.4 Removing the Upper Cover
[2]
1) Remove the rear cover. (See p. 8-23P.)

2) Push down the latch plate [2] of the
compartment [1] with your finger to
open the compartment [1].
(rear)
[1]
F08-301-09
3) Remove the three screws [3], and disconnect the connector [4]; then, remove
the front upper cover [5].
[3]
[4]
[5]
F08-301-10
4) Close the deck vertical path assembly,
and remove the two screws [6]; then,
detach the upper cover [7].
[6]
[7]
F08-301-11
8-24 P
3.2 General Descriptions

3.2.1 Disconnecting the Deck from the Host Machine
[2]
about 8 cm
1) Place a stack of paper [3] (about 8 cm

in height) on the floor for the deck [2]
to prevent deforming the roll support
plate [1].
[3]
[3]
[1]
F08-302-01
2) Remove the right cover. (See p. 8-23P.)
8-25 P

the deck [6] from the deck base [7].
(left)
[5]
[7]
[6]
(right)
[5]
F08-302-02
4) Holding the deck [8] as shown, place it

on the stack of paper prepared in step 1.
[8]
F08-302-03
8-26 P
3.2.2 Removing the Compartment
[2]
about 8 cm
1) Place a stack of paper [3] (about 8 cm

in height) on the floor for the deck [2]
to prevent deforming the roll support
plate [1].
[3]
[1]
[3]
F08-302-04
2) Disconnect the deck from the host machine, and push down the latch plate [5]
of the compartment [4] to open the
compartment [4].
[5]
(rear)
[4]
F08-302-05
8-27 P
3) Remove the screw [6] and the stopper

plate [7], and pull out the compartment
[8] to the front.
[7]
(left rear of the
compartment)
[6]
[8]
F08-302-06
4) Remove the right cover. (See p. 8-23P.)

5) Remove the screw [9] of the harness
guide, and disconnect the connector
[10]; then, remove the three screws [12]
each (left, right) of the compartment
rails [11]. Then, while lifting the compartment [8] slightly, detach it to the
front.
6) Place the compartment [8] on the stack
of paper prepared in step 1.
[9]
[12]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[8]
F08-302-07
8-28 P
3.2.3 Changing the Deck Paper Size Configuration

If the deck paper size configuration must
be changed to suit the needs of the user,
perform the following:
1) Open the compartment of the deck, and
remove all paper.
2) If the lifter of the deck is up, turn on the
host machine; then, push down the sensor lever [2] of the paper supply position sensor located inside the compartment [1] to move the lifter to its lower
limit.
[1]
[2]
F08-302-08
3) Remove the screw [3], and mount the

paper rear end guide plate [4] to suit the
new paper size.
4) Remove the front cover.
5) Remove the screw [5], and mount the
left/right guide plate [6] to suit the new
paper size.
6) Enter the new paper size using the service mode of the host machine
(COPIER>OPTION>ACC>DK-P; 0:
A4, 1: B5, 2: LTR).
[4]
[3]
[5]
[6]
F08-302-09
8-29 P
[1]
3.2.4 Adjusting the Deck Registration
[3]
[2]
If the left/right registration (01.5 mm)

must be adjusted, perform the following:
1) Slide out the compartment, and adjust
the position of the latch plate [1] of the
deck open solenoid (SL102) using the
two screws [2]. (At this time, use the
index [3] on the latch plate as a reference.)
(left rear of the compartment)
F08-302-10
3.2.5 Adjusting the Roll Position
[4]
If the compartment cannot be opened/

closed smoothly, requiring adjustment of
the roll located at the front of the deck, perform the following:
1) Remove the front cover. (See p. 8-20P.)
2) While keeping the compartment fully
slid out, adjust the four mounting
screws [4] on the roll support plate [3]
so that the roll [1] is about 3 mm from
the floor [2].
about 3 mm
[5]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F08-302-11
8-30 P
3.3 Drive Mechanisms

3.3.1 Removing the Deck Pickup Clutch (CL102)
1) Remove the deck pickup unit. (See p. 838P.)
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the E-ring [2]; then, remove the
deck pickup clutch [3].
[1]
When mounting the pickup

clutch, be sure to engage the
clutch with the stop ring [4]. In
addition, be sure to hook the
harness on the U-groove [5] of
the guide.
[3]
[4]
[2]
[5]
F08-303-01
3.3.2 Removing the Deck Main Motor (M101)

1) Disconnect the deck from its host machine, and remove the six screws; then,
detach the rear cover.
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the two screws [2]; then, remove
the deck main motor. At this time, take
care not to damage the gear found at the
tip of the motor spindle.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F08-303-02
8-31 P
3.3.3 Removing the Deck Lifter Motor (M102)

remove all paper.
2) Turn on the host machine; if the lifter of
the deck is up, push the sensor lever [1]
of the paper supply position sensor
found inside the compartment with your
finger to move the lifter [2] about 7 cm
from the base plate of the compartment.
Then, insert a hex wrench into the hole
of the lifter drive shaft [3] to hold the
shaft in place.
[1]
[2]
F08-303-03
[4]
abo
ut 7
cm
[3]
[2]
F08-303-04
8-32 P
3) Disconnect the compartment from the

deck. (See p. 8-27P.)
4) Disconnect the connector [5], and remove the five screws [6]; then, detach
the deck lifter motor unit [7].
[5]
[6]
[7]
[6]
F08-303-05
3.3.4 Removing the Lifter Cable (front of the deck)

remove all paper.
2) Remove the screw, and detach the paper
rear end guide plate from inside the
compartment.
3) Push down the sensor lever [1] of the
paper supply position sensor inside the
compartment to move down the lifter
until the left/right hole in the compartment side plate and the left/right hole in
the lifter match; then, insert two long
screwdrivers to hold the lifter in position.
[1]
[2]
F08-303-06
8-33 P
4) Remove the front cover of the deck.

(See p. 8-20P.)
the roll support plate [4].
[3]
[4]
F08-303-07
6) Remove the coupling shaft [5] and the
E-ring [6], and detach the pulley cover
[7].
7) Remove the two screws [8], and remove
the cable fixing plate [9] on the left;
then, detach the lifter cable [10].
8) Remove the two screws [11] and the
cable fixing plate [12] on the right;
then, detach the lifter cable [13].
9) If you are removing the lifter cable [13]
found inside from the pulley [14] also
found inside, remove the two set screws
[16] of the pulley [15] found on the outside, and detach the pulley [15] also
found on the outside.
[16]
[8] [9]
[10] [13]
[14][15]
[12][11]
[7]
[6]
[5]
F08-303-08
8-34 P
3.3.5 Removing the Lifter Cable (rear of the deck)

remove all paper.
2) Remove the screw, and detach the paper
rear guide plate from inside the compartment.
3) Push the paper supply position sensor
[1] found inside the compartment with
your finger to move down the lifter until
the left/right hole in the compartment
side plate and the left/right hole in the
lifer match; then, insert two long screwdrivers [2]. At this time, try matching
the top surface of the lifter with the
marking on the left side plate of the
compartment to facilitate the work.
4) Remove the compartment. (See p. 827P.)
sensor plate [4].
upper/lower sensor cover [6].
7) Disconnect the five connectors [7], and
remove the five screws [8]; then, detach
the metal plate [9].
[1]
[2]
F08-303-09
[8]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[9]
[8]
[7]
F08-303-10
[5]
[6]
F08-303-11
8-35 P
8) Insert a hex wrench [11] into the home

in the lifter drive shaft [10] to hold it in
place.
[10]
[11]
If you failed to hold the lifter

drive shaft as shown, the lifter
cable will become slack when
you move the lifter motor unit.
F08-303-12

the lifter motor unit [13].
[12]
[12]
[13]
F08-303-13
8-36 P
3.3.6 Routing the Lifter Cable

1) Check to make sure that the lifter drive shaft and the lifter are held in place with a hex
wrench [1] and long screwdrivers [2].
2) Secure the cable fixing plate [3] to the lifter with two screws.
3) Hook the lifter cable on the pulley [4].
4) Hook the ball of the lifter cable on the pulley [5] of the lifter drive shaft; then, wind the
cable along the groove of the pulley about 1.5 times by hand. At this time, try to keep
the lifter cable taut, i.e., the long screwdrivers used to hold the lifter in position are lifted
slightly by the lifter cable.
5) Secure the pulley to the lifter drive shaft with two set screws [6].
6) Secure all pulleys you have removed to the lifter drive shaft; then, measure the distance
from the base plate of the compartment to the top surface of the lifter, thereby making
sure that the lifter is level.
[4]
[3]
[4]
(rear)
[5]
[6]
[3]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F08-303-14
8-37 P
3.4 Feeding Mechanisms

3.4.1 Removing the Deck Pickup Unit
[1]
1) Remove the upper cover. (see p. 8-24P.)

remove the five screws [2].
3) Remove the deck pickup unit [3].
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
F08-304-01
When mounting the deck

pickup unit [3], be sure to secure the three screws shown.
[3]
Screws
F08-304-02
3.4.2 Removing the Deck Pickup Roller
[2]

2) Turn over the deck pickup unit, and remove the two resin rings [1]; then, detach the deck pickup rollers [2].
[1]
F08-304-03
8-38 P
3.4.3 Orientation of the Deck Pickup Roller

When mounting the deck pickup roller
[1] at the front of the machine, be sure that
the marking [2] on the collar (silver) is toward the front and the marking [3] on the
side of the roller is toward the rear of the
machine.
[3]
[2]
(direction of
rotation)
[1]
(front of machine)
Collar (silver)
F08-304-04
When mounting the deck pickup roller

[4] at the rear of the machine, be sure that
the marking [5] found on the side of the
roller and the marking [6] found on the collar (silver) are toward the rear of the machine.
[5]
(direction
of rotation)
[4]
[6]
Collar (silver)
(front of machine)
F08-304-05
3.4.4 Removing the Deck Pickup/Feed Roller

2) Turn over the deck pickup unit.
3) Remove the resin ring [1], and detach
the deck pickup/feed roller [2] and the
drive belt [3] toward the front.
[2]
[3]
[1]
F08-304-06
8-39 P
3.4.5 Orientation of the Deck Pickup/Feed Roller

When mounting the deck pickup/feeding
roller [1], be sure that the belt pulley [2] is
toward the front of the machine. The
pickup/feed roller rubber may be attached
to the pickup/feed roller shaft in any orientation.
[2]
[1]
F08-304-07
3.4.6 Removing the Deck Separation Roller

1) Disconnect the deck from the host machine; then, remove the two screws [1],
and detach the separation roller support
plate [2].
2) Remove the joint, and detach the deck
separation roller [3].
[1]
[2]
F08-304-08
[3]
F08-304-09
8-40 P
The urethane sponge used on

the deck separation roller is
pink when new, and changes to
orange and yellow as time goes
by. The change is accelerated
particularly when it is exposed
to light, and all this is a general
characteristic of urethane
sponge, not affecting its quality.
Multiple parts do not exist distinguished by color.
3.4.7 Adjusting the Pressure of the Deck Separation Roller

If pickup failure or double feeding occurs
when the deck is used, adjust the position of
the pressure sponge of the deck separation
roller:
If pickup failure occurs, move the
spring in the direction of arrow A.
If double feeding occurs, move the
spring in the direction of arrow B.
A
B
F08-304-10
8-41 P
3.4.8 Position of the Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL101)

Take note of the positions of the two fixing screws [2] of the solenoid with reference to the index on the support plate before removing the deck pickup roller releasing solenoid [1] from the support plate; or,
mark the position of the solenoid on the
support plate with a scriber.
If the solenoid is to be mounted on its
own, be sure to locate it in its initial position.
[2]
[1]
F08-304-11
8-42 P
3.5 Electrical Mechanisms

3.5.1 Removing the Deck Driver PCB
1) Disconnect the deck from its host machine; then, remove the six screws, and
detach the rear cover.
2) Disconnect the eight connectors [1], and
remove the four screws [2]; then, detach
the deck driver PCB [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F08-305-01
3.5.2 Removing the Open Switch PCB
[2]
1) Disconnect the deck from the host machine, and push the latch plate [2] of the
compartment [1] with your finger to
open the compartment.
(rear)
[1]
F08-305-02
8-43 P
the front upper cover [5].
[3]
[4]
[5]
F08-305-03

the open switch PCB [7].
[7]
[6]
When mounting the upper front

cover, be sure to avoid biting
the harness by the open switch
PCB or forgetting to connect the
connectors.
F08-305-04
8-44 P
CHAPTER 9
SHIFT TRAY
1. Specifications

-
!
"
# $$# %
&

'
(

)*' (

( ' & " &
%

' &
+# ,# ,-# .-# !,# !.# !.
//0/1# 23-# 23-*-# 242# 33*
#
& $
5, 677 (6
!
..
'
.77 $ "
5, (6%
)*' 6.7 $ "
5, (6%
'
.7 "
%
67 "

#
** %
* . "

#
%
)*'/77

# & 6

6,89(. 8 " & %
6

$
+5.$+ "% .,1$7 "% 6..$1 ":%

,$6

T09-101-01
9-1 P
2. Names of Parts
[10]
[1]
[5]
[7]
[3]
[8]
[2]
[4]
[9]
[6]
F09-201-01
;/<
;6<
;+<
;,<
;.<
3
2 "
%
2 "%
3

9!
9-2 P
;5< : "
%
;1< : "%
;=< 2*&
;>< 3
;/7<
3. Outline of the Electrical Circuit

3.1 Shift Tray Driver PCB
The shift tray driver PCB drives the shift motor in response to the shift control signal
from the host machine, and provides the host machine with various sensor signals for control of shifting operations.
Shift tray driver PCB

A24V
Shift motor
M
J101
J201
J102
J202
To host machine
A5V
Motor drive
circuit
Motor control signal
To host machine
Sensor signal
Various sensors
F09-301-01
9-3 P
3.2 Inputs to and Outputs from the Shift Tray Driver PCB
Shift tray driver PCB
HP sensor
(front)
HP sensor
(rear)
Tray paper
sensor
PS101
J203
-1
-2
-3
+5V
J103
-6
-5
STHPR
-4
PS102
J204
-1
-2
-3
+5V
J103
-3
-2
STHPL
-1
PS103
J206
-1
-2
-3
N.C.
J205
-4 -1
-3 -2
-2 -3
-1 -4
+5V
J104
-6
-5
SPEXIST*
-4
When the tray is in HP at front, '1'.
When the tray is in HP at rear, '1'.
When paper is put on tray, '0'
N.C.
PS104
J207
-1
-2
-3
+5V
J104
-3
When paper exceeds limit, '0'.
-2
SPCFULL*
-1
Limit sensor
(front)
PS105
J208
-1
-2
-3
+5V
J106
-3
When paper exceeds limit, '0'.
-2
D_SENS3*
-1
Limit
sensor
(rear)
Shift motor
M101
J105
-1
SDCM1
-2
SDCM2
+24 V on SDCM1 moves tray to front

+24 V on SDCM2 moves tray to rear
F09-302-01
9-4 P
4.1 Shifting
The machine shifts the tray to the front and the rear (over a distance of 55 mm) to sort
(offset) sheets into groups. The tray is driven by a DC motor, and the rotation of the motor is
converted into shifting motions by means of a rack and pinion gears.
The stop position of the tray at the front and the rear is controlled by the HP sensors
mounted to the front and the rear.
Light-blocking plate
Tray drive unit

HP sensor (PS102; rear)
HP sensor (PS101; front)
F09-401-01
4.2 Stacking
The machines tray is supported by coil springs, and the tray moves down under the
weight of the paper deposited on it. The stack is monitored by limit sensors (reflecting type
photosensors); when the stack reaches a specific height, the shift tray driver PCB sends the
FULL signal to the host machine.
Limit sensor (PS104; rear)
Tray
Stacking enabled
Limit sensor (PS105; front)
Stacking enabled
Shaft
Stacking disabled
Shaft
F09-402-01
9-5 P
4.3 Detecting paper

The presence/absence of paper on the tray is detected by the tray paper sensor mounted
on the tray.
Tray paper sensor (PS103)
F09-403-01
4.4 Delivery
The sheets delivered by the host machine is moved through the delivery unit and then deposited on the tray. The delivery unit assembly is driven by the delivery motor through gears
of the host machines delivery assembly.
F09-404-01
9-6 P
5. Maintenance and Inspection

5.1 Adjusting the Limit Sensor Position
Be sure to perform the following work if you have disassembled or replaced the limit sensor (front, rear).
5.1.1 Related Service Mode

COPIER>FUNCTION>SNES-ADJ>STCK-LIMIT
Use it to adjust the position of the limit sensor (PS104, PS105) of the shift tray.
ON is indicated if either of the limit sensors (or both sensors) detects paper.
OFF is indicated if neither of the limit sensors detects paper.
5.1.2 Making Adjustments

1) Turn off the host machines main power switch.
2) Remove the delivery unit from the main machine. (Keep the tray connected to the host
machine.)
3) Temporarily fix the limit sensor (font, rear) at the point farthest from the paper.
4) Place a stack of 60 mm in height on the shift tray (where either of the limit sensors can
detect it).
5) Turn off the host machines main power switch; then, select STCK-LIMIT, and press
the OK key.
6) While referring to the indication, move the sensor toward the paper until ON is indicated; and secure the sensor in place.
7) Move the paper where it is detected by the paper.
8) Repeat steps 4) through 6) for the sensor.
9) After making the adjustments, turn off the host machines main power switch.
10) Mount the delivery unit.
Screw
Limit sensor
F09-501-01
9-7 P
1)
When adjusting the position of the limit senor (front, rear), be sure to
start at the point farthest from the paper, moving closer to the sensor.
2) The grounding wire terminal of the limit sensor (front, rear) must be
level in relation to the sensor as shown; in addition, make sure that the
bend of the terminal must face downward.
Grounding wire terminal
F09-501-02
9-8 P

mind:
1.
to disassemble it.
6. The front door switch or the main power switch must be turned off before sliding out
7.
9-9 P
6.1 Removing the Shift Tray Driver PCB

1) Remove the shift tray from the machine.
2) Release the two retaining claws [1], and
detach the cable retaining plate [2].
[2]
[1]
F09-601-01

the two limit sensors [4] and the two
grounding wires.
4) Free the cable of the limit sensor from
the cable clamp [5], and disconnect the
connector [6].
[4]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
F09-601-02
9-10 P
5) Remove the four screws [7] from the

back of the shift tray, and remove the
four shaft retainers [8]; then, detach the
tray drive assembly [9].
[7]
[8]
[9]
[8]
F09-601-03
6) Pull off the shaft [10] from the tray
drive assembly, and remove the three
screws [11]; then, detach the shielding
cover [12].
[11]
[10]
[12]
F09-601-04
7) Remove the four screws [13], and detach the shift tray driver PCB [14].
[13]

Be sure to adjust the position of
the limit sensor (front, rear; see
5.1 Adjusting the Limit sensor
Position.)
[14]
F09-601-05
9-11 P
6.2 Removing the Tray Drive Unit

1) Perform steps 1) through 6) to detach
the shift tray driver PCB.
2) Remove the two screws [15], and disconnect the connector [16]; then, detach
the tray drive unit [17].
[15]
[16]

Be sure to adjust the position of
the limit sensor (front, rear; see
5.1 Adjusting the Limit sensor
Position.)
[17]
F09-602-01
9-12 P
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTENTS
Contents
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
1. Periodically Replaced Parts ........... 1-1T
1.1 Guide to Timing of Replacement
................................................ 1-1T
1.2 Reader Unit ............................. 1-1T
1.3 Printer Unit ............................. 1-2T
2. Consumables and Durables ........... 1-3T
................................................ 1-3T
2.2 Reader Unit ............................. 1-3T
2.3 Printer Unit ............................. 1-4T
2.4 Side Paper Deck ...................... 1-5T

3. Periodical Servicing ...................... 1-6T
4. Periodical Servicing Chart ............ 1-9T
4.1 Reader Unit ............................. 1-9T
4.2 Printer Unit ............................. 1-9T
5. Points to Note for Periodical Servicing
..................................................... 1-12T
6. Cleaning the photosensitive drum
..................................................... 1-13T
CHAPTER 2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT BASIC PROCEDURE

1. Making Pre-Checks ....................... 2-1T
2. Making Checks on the Printer Unit
(1/2) .............................................. 2-2T
3. Making Checks on the Printer Unit (2/2)

....................................................... 2-3T
4. Making Checks on the Reader Unit
....................................................... 2-4T
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS

1. Image Adjustments ........................ 3-1T
1.1 Standards of Image Position ... 3-1T
1.2 Checking the Image Position .. 3-2T
1.3 Adjusting the Left/Right Image
Margin ..................................... 3-2T
1.3.1 Cassette 3/4 ....................... 3-2T
1.3.2 Left/Right Front Deck ...... 3-3T
1.3.3 Manual Feed Tray ............. 3-3T
1.3.4 Duplex Feeding Unit ........ 3-4T
1.3.5 Side Paper Deck ................ 3-4T
1.4 Adjusting the Image Leading Edge
Margin ..................................... 3-5T
1.5 Adjusting the Left/Right
Non-Image Width ................... 3-5T
1.6 Adjusting the Leading Edge NonImage Width ............................ 3-6T

2. Scanning System ........................... 3-7T
2.1 Replacing the Scanner Drive Cable
................................................ 3-7T
2.2 Adjusting the Position of the Scanner Mirror Base ....................... 3-7T
................................................ 3-7T
3. Image Formation System .............. 3-8T
3.1 Routing the Grid Wire of the Primary Charging Assembly ........ 3-8T
3.2 Routing the Charging Wire of
Charging Assemblies .............. 3-8T
T1
CONTENTS
3.3 Mounting the Drum Cleaning Blade

................................................ 3-8T
3.4 Mounting the Developing Blade
................................................ 3-8T
3.5 Replacing the Potential Sensor/Potential Control PCB ................. 3-8T
4. Pickup/Feeding System ................. 3-9T
4.1 Orientation of the Deck/Cassette
Pickup Roller .......................... 3-9T
4.2 Orientation of the Deck/Cassette
Separation Roller .................. 3-10T
4.3 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of
the Deck/Cassette Pickup Assembly
.............................................. 3-10T
4.4 Orientation of the Pickup Roller of
the Side Paper Deck .............. 3-11T
4.5 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of
the Side Paper Deck .............. 3-12T
4.6 Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller of the Deck/Cassette
.............................................. 3-13T
4.7 Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller of the Manual Feed
Tray ....................................... 3-14T
4.8 Adjusting the Fixing Inlet Guide
Solenoid (SL1) ...................... 3-15T
4.9 Adjusting the Position of the Pickup
Solenoid (SL3, SL4) of the Cassette
3/4 ......................................... 3-16T
4.10 Adjusting the Position of the Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL5) .. 3-17T
4.11 Adjusting the Position of the Right
Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL6)
.............................................. 3-17T
4.12 Adjusting the Position of the Left
Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL7)
.............................................. 3-18T
4.13 Adjusting the Position of the Reversing Flapper Solenoid (SL8)
.............................................. 3-18T
4.14 Adjusting the Position of the Fixing
Web Solenoid (SL9) .............. 3-19T
4.14.1 New Fixing Web ............... 3-19T
4.14.2 Existing Fixing Web ......... 3-19T
T2
4.15 Position of the Side Paper Deck

Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid
.............................................. 3-20T
4.16 Attaching the Timing Belt of the
Manual Feed Tray Assembly
.............................................. 3-20T
4.17 Attaching the Drive Belt ....... 3-21T
5. Fixing System ............................. 3-22T
5.1 Points to Note When Mounting the
Fixing Heater ........................ 3-22T
5.2 Position of the Fixing Inlet Guide
.............................................. 3-22T
5.3 Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip) ............................... 3-23T
5.3.1 Taking Measurements ..... 3-23T
5.3.2 Standards ........................ 3-23T
5.3.3 Making Adjustments ....... 3-23T
6. Laser Exposure System ............... 3-24T
6.1 When Replacing the Scanner Unit
.............................................. 3-24T
7. Electrical Parts ............................. 3-25T
7.1 When Replacing the CCD Unit
.............................................. 3-25T
7.2 When Replacing the Reader controller PCB ............................ 3-25T
7.3 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB .................................. 3-26T
7.4 When Replacing the HDD Unit
.............................................. 3-26T
7.5 When Replacing the DC Controller
PCB ....................................... 3-27T
7.6 When Replacing the High-Voltage
PCB ....................................... 3-28T
8. Checking the Surface Potential Control
System ......................................... 3-29T
8.1 Outline .................................. 3-29T
8.2 Disabling the Auto Control Mechanism ....................................... 3-29T
8.3 Zero Level Check .................. 3-30T
8.3.1 Method 1 ......................... 3-30T
8.3.2 Method 2 ......................... 3-32T
8.4 Checking the Potential System
.............................................. 3-35T
CONTENTS
8.5 Conversion Table for the Potential

Control System ..................... 3-37T
8.6 Emergency Measures for a Fault in
the Potential Sensor .............. 3-41T
9. Checking the Environment Sensor
..................................................... 3-42T
9.1 Procedure .............................. 3-42T
9.2 Emergency Measure for a Fault in

the Environment Sensor ........ 3-42T
10. Checking the Photointerrupters ... 3-43T
10.1 Using a Meter ........................ 3-43T
10.2 Using Service Mode ............. 3-43T
10.3 Check List ............................. 3-43T
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/

MALFUNCTIONS
1. Making Initial Checks in the Event of
an Image Fault ............................... 4-1T
1.1 Site Environment .................... 4-1T
1.2 Checking the Originals for Symptoms ......................................... 4-1T
1.3 Copyboard Cover, Copyboard
Glass, and Standard White Plate
................................................ 4-1T
................................................ 4-1T
1.5 Checking the Developing Assembly
................................................ 4-2T
1.6 Checking the Paper ................. 4-2T
1.7 Checking the Periodically Replaced
Parts ......................................... 4-2T
1.8 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure
................................................ 4-2T
1.9 Others ...................................... 4-2T
2. Samples of Image Faults ............... 4-4T
3. Troubleshooting Image Faults ....... 4-5T
3.1 The image is too light (halftone)
................................................ 4-5T
3.2 The print is too light (including
solid black area) ...................... 4-6T
3.3 The print is too light (overall, appreciably) ................................ 4-6T
3.4 The print has uneven density
(darker at front) ....................... 4-7T
3.5 The print has uneven density
(lighter at front) ....................... 4-7T
3.6 The print is foggy (overall) ..... 4-8T
3.7 The print if foggy vertically .... 4-9T

3.8 The print has black lines (vertical,
blurred, thick) ......................... 4-9T
3.9 The print has black lines (vertical,
fine) ....................................... 4-10T
3.10 The print has white spots (vertical)
.............................................. 4-11T
3.11 The print has white lines (vertical)
.............................................. 4-11T
3.12 The print has white spots (horizontal) ......................................... 4-12T
3.13 The back of the print is soiled
.............................................. 4-13T
3.14 The print has fixing faults ..... 4-14T
3.15 The print has a displaced leading
edge (appreciably large margin)
.............................................. 4-15T
edge (large margin) ............... 4-15T
edge (no margin) ................... 4-15T
3.18 The print has a blurred image
.............................................. 4-16T
3.19 The print is foggy (horizontally)
.............................................. 4-17T
3.20 The print has poor sharpness
.............................................. 4-17T
3.21 The print is blank .................. 4-18T
3.22 The print is solid black ......... 4-19T
4. Troubleshooting Malfunctions .... 4-20T
T3
CONTENTS
4.1 Troubleshooting by Malfunction

.............................................. 4-20T
4.1.1 E000 ................................ 4-20T
4.1.2 E001 ................................ 4-20T
4.1.3 E002 ................................ 4-21T
4.1.4 E003 ................................ 4-21T
4.1.5 E004 ................................ 4-21T
4.1.6 E005 ................................ 4-21T
4.1.7 E010 ................................ 4-22T
4.1.8 E012 ................................ 4-22T
4.1.9 E013 ................................ 4-23T
4.1.10 E014 ................................ 4-23T
4.1.11 E020 ................................ 4-24T
4.1.12 E032 ................................ 4-24T
4.1.13 E061 ................................ 4-24T
4.1.14 E100 ................................ 4-25T
4.1.15 E110 ................................ 4-25T
4.1.16 E121 ................................ 4-25T
4.1.17 E196 ................................ 4-26T
4.1.18 E202 ................................ 4-26T
4.1.19 E204 ................................ 4-27T
4.1.20 E220 ................................ 4-27T
4.1.21 E225 ................................ 4-27T
4.1.22 E240 ................................ 4-28T
4.1.23 E243 ................................ 4-28T
4.1.24 E248 ................................ 4-28T
4.1.25 E302 ................................ 4-29T
4.1.26 E601 ................................ 4-29T
4.1.27 E602 ................................ 4-30T
4.1.28 E607 ................................ 4-30T
4.1.29 E677 ................................ 4-30T
4.1.30 E710 ................................ 4-31T
4.1.31 E711 ................................ 4-31T
4.1.32 E712 ................................ 4-32T
4.1.33 E713 ................................ 4-32T
4.1.34 E717 ................................ 4-33T
4.1.35 E719 ................................ 4-33T
4.1.36 E732 ................................ 4-33T
4.1.37 E733 ................................ 4-33T
4.1.38 E740 ................................ 4-34T
4.1.39 E741 ................................ 4-34T
4.1.40 E742 ................................ 4-35T
4.1.41 E743 ................................ 4-35T
4.1.42 E804 ................................ 4-35T
T4
4.1.43
4.1.44
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
E805 ................................ 4-36T

E824 ................................ 4-36T
AC power is absent ......... 4-38T
DC power is absent ......... 4-38T
Pickup fails ..................... 4-39T
The lifter fails to move up
(pickup from front deck)
........................................ 4-41T
4.2.5 The lifter fails to move up
(pickup from cassette) .... 4-41T
4.2.6 Pickup fails (manual feed)
........................................ 4-42T
4.2.7 The vertical path roller fails to
rotate ............................... 4-43T
4.2.8 The registration roller fails to
operate ............................ 4-44T
4.2.9 The No. 1 mirror mount fails to
operate ............................ 4-44T
4.2.10 The pre-exposure LED fails to
turn on ............................. 4-45T
4.2.11 The scanning lamp fails to turn
on .................................... 4-45T
4.2.12 The hopper stirring motor (M9)
fails to operate ................ 4-46T
4.2.13 The hopper supply motor (M10)
fails to operate ................ 4-46T
4.2.14 The drum heater fails to operate
........................................ 4-47T
4.2.15 The Add Toner message fails to
turn on ............................. 4-47T
4.2.16 The Add Toner message fails to
turn off ............................ 4-47T
4.2.17 The Set Control Card message
fails to turn on ................. 4-48T
4.2.18 The Set Control Card message
fails to turn off ................ 4-48T
4.2.19 The Add Paper message fails to
turn on (front deck) ......... 4-48T
4.2.20 The Add Paper message fails to
turn off (cassette 3/4) ...... 4-48T
4.2.21 The fixing heater fails turn on
........................................ 4-49T
4.2.22 Pickup fails (paper deck)
........................................ 4-49T
CONTENTS
4.2.23 The deck lifter fails to move up

(side paper deck) ............. 4-50T
5. Troubleshooting Feeding Faults .. 4-52T
5.1 Paper Jams ............................ 4-52T
5.1.1 Pickup assembly ............. 4-53T
5.1.2 Separation/Feeding assembly
........................................ 4-53T
5.1.3 Fixing/Delivery assembly
........................................ 4-54T
5.1.4 Fixing/Delivery assembly (facedown delivery assembly)
........................................ 4-55T
5.1.5 Cleaning Assembly ......... 4-56T
5.1.6 Feeding Assembly .......... 4-56T
5.2 Feeding Faults ....................... 4-58T
5.2.1 Double Feeding .............. 4-58T
5.2.2 Wrinkles ......................... 4-58T
6. Arrangement and Functions of Electrical Parts ....................................... 4-59T
6.1 Clutches ................................ 4-59T
6.1.1 Reader Unit ..................... 4-59T
6.1.2 Printer Unit ..................... 4-59T
6.2 Solenoids and Switches ........ 4-60T
6.2.1 Reader Unit ..................... 4-61T
6.2.2 Printer Unit ..................... 4-61T
6.3 Motors ................................... 4-62T

6.3.1 Reader Unit ..................... 4-63T
6.3.2 Printer Unit ..................... 4-63T
6.4 Fans ....................................... 4-64T
6.4.1 Reader Unit ..................... 4-65T
6.4.2 Printer unit ...................... 4-65T
6.5 Sensors .................................. 4-66T
6.5.1 Reader Unit ..................... 4-68T
6.5.2 Printer Unit ..................... 4-68T
6.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others .. 4-70T
6.6.1 Reader Unit ..................... 4-71T
6.6.2 Printer Unit ..................... 4-71T
6.7 PCBs ..................................... 4-72T
6.7.1 Reader Unit ..................... 4-73T
6.7.2 Printer unit ...................... 4-73T
6.8 Variable Resistors (VR), LightEmitting Diodes (LED), and Check
Pins by PCB .......................... 4-74T
6.8.1 Main Controller PCB ...... 4-74T
6.8.2 DC Controller PCB ........ 4-75T
6.8.3 Reader Controller PCB ... 4-76T
6.8.4 Power Supply PCB ......... 4-76T
6.8.5 HVT PCB ....................... 4-77T
6.8.6 Drum Heater Control PCB
........................................ 4-77T
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE

1. Organization of Service Mode ...... 5-1T
1.1 Outline .................................... 5-1T
1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making
Selections ................................ 5-2T
1.3 Ending Service Mode ............. 5-3T
1.4 Backing Up Service Mode ...... 5-3T
1.5 Basic Operations ..................... 5-4T
1.5.1 Initial Screen ..................... 5-4T
1.5.2 Level 1/Level 2 Screen ..... 5-4T
1.5.3 Level 3 Screen .................. 5-5T
2. DISPLAY (control/display mode)
....................................................... 5-6T
2.1 COPIER .................................. 5-6T
2.2 FEEDER ............................... 5-19T
3. I/O (I/O display mode) ................ 5-20T
3.1 DC-CON ............................... 5-21T

3.2 R-CON .................................. 5-29T
3.3 MN-CON .............................. 5-31T
3.4 FEEDER ............................... 5-33T
3.5 SORTER ............................... 5-36T
3.5.1 Finisher Block ................ 5-36T
3.5.2 Saddle Stitcher Unit ........ 5-41T
4. ADJUST (adjustment mode) ....... 5-44T
4.1 COPIER ................................ 5-44T
4.2 FEEDER ............................... 5-57T
4.3 SORTER ............................... 5-58T
5. FUNCTION (operation/inspection
mode) ........................................... 5-59T
5.1 COPIER ................................ 5-59T
5.2 FEEDER ............................... 5-75T
T5
CONTENTS
6. OPTION (settings mode) ............

6.1 COPIER ................................
6.2 FEEDER ...............................
6.3 SORTER ...............................
5-76T
5-76T
5-92T
5-92T
6.4 BOARD ................................. 5-93T

7. TEST (test print mode) ............... 5-94T
8. COUNTER (counter mode) ........ 5-98T
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS

1. Error Codes ................................... 6-1T
1.1 List of Error Codes ................. 6-1T
1.2 Self Diagnosis of the ADF .... 6-13T
1.3 Self Diagnosis of the Finisher

.............................................. 6-14T
1.4 Self Diagnosis of the Saddle
Stitcher .................................. 6-18T
APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ........ A-1
B. LIST OF SIGNALS/ABBREVIATIONS ............................................. A-3
C. General Circuit Diagram ................. A-9
D. PAPER DECK -G1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ......................... A-11
T6
E. SHIFT TRAY GENERAL CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM .................................... A-12
F. List of Special Tools ...................... A-13
G. List of Solvents/Oils ...................... A-15
CHAPTER 1
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
1. Periodically Replaced Parts

Some parts of the machine must be replaced on a periodical basis to ensure a specific
level of machine performance. (Once they fail, the consequences are likely to be considerable.)
Whenever possible, schedule the replacement to coincide with a scheduled visit to the
users.

You can check the timing of replacement for periodically replaced parts in service mode:
COPIER>COUNTER>PRDC-1.
1.2 Reader Unit

The reader unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
1-1 T
1.3 Printer Unit

No.
Part name
1 Primary, pre-transfer, transfer,
separation charging wire
2 Primary grid wire
3 Primary charging wire
cleaner 1
4 Primary charging wire
cleaner 2
5 Transfer charging wire
cleaner 1
6 Transfer charging wire
cleaner 2
7 Separation charging wire
cleaner
8 Pre-transfer charging wire
cleaner
9 Main thermistor
10 Sub thermistor
11 Ozone filter
12 Thermal switch
Part No.
FB4-3687
Qty
AR
Life
500,000*
FY1-0883
FF5-6883
AR
2
500,000
500,000
FF2-6884
500,000
FF5-6883
500,000
FF5-6884
500,000
FF5-3090
500,000
FF5-3090
500,000
FH7-7529
FG5-8812
FB5-5570
FH7-7154
1
1
1
1
500,000
500,000
500,000
1,000,000
As of May 2001
Remarks
Strengthened
type (blue)
Strengthened
type (blue)
Strengthened
type (blue)
Strengthened
type (blue)
polish
polish
polish
polish
*Do not use the old type (gold plated). After replacement of the charge wire, be sure to
execute wire cleaning in service mode. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRECLN)
T01-103-01
Memo
1-2 T
The indicated life of each part is for reference only, and is subject to the site
environment and the conditions of use.
2. Consumables and Durables

Some parts of the machine are likely to require replacement because of wear or damage
once or more over the period of machine warranty. Replace them when they fail.

You can check the timing of replacement for durables in service mode:
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1.
2.2 Reader Unit

The reader unit does not have parts that are classified as consumables or durables.
1-3 T
2.3 Printer Unit

No.
Part name
1 Pickup/feeding roller
(manual feed roller)
2 Separation roller
(manual feed tray)
3 Pickup roller
4 Pickup/feeding roller
(deck, cassette)
5 Separation roller
(deck, cassette)
6 Cleaner separation claw
7 Pre-separation charging
assembly scraper
8 Fixing upper roller
9 Fixing lower roller
10 Fixing web
11 Insulating bush (front/rear)
12
13
14
15
16
Delivery upper separation claw

Delivery lower separation claw
Developing cylinder
Developing assembly roll
Cleaning blade
17 Primary corona assembly

18 Transfer/separation corona
assembly
19 Pre-transfer corona assembly
Part No. Qty Life

FB1-8581 1
120,000
As of May 2001
Remarks
FB5-0873
120,000
FF5-1220
FF5-9779
8
8
250,000
250,000
FB2-7777
250,000
FB2-6899
FA4-1867
3
1
500,000
500,000
FB4-3690
FB5-3619
FY1-1157
FB5-3613
1
1
1
2
500,000
500,000
500,000
500,000
FB5-3625
FA2-9037
FG5-8235
FB2-6933
FA4-1827
6
2
1
2
1
FG6-5927
FG6-5911
1
1
500,000
1,000,000
1,000,000
1,000,000
1,000,000 Both edges are used;
each for 500,000; apply
toner upon replacement.
1,000,000
1,000,000
FG6-5045
1,000,000
Each holder uses 2 pc.

Each holder uses 2 pc.
Replace simultaneously
with fixing upper roller.
T01-203-01
1-4 T
2.4 Side Paper Deck

No.
Part name
1 Pickup roller (front)
2 Pickup roller (rear)
3 Feeding roller
4 Separation roller
Part No.
FF5-1220
FF5-1221
FF5-9779
FB2-7777
Qty
1
1
1
1
Life
250,000
250,000
250,000
250,000
As of May 2001
Remarks
T01-204-01
1-5 T
3. Periodical Servicing
1. As a rule, provide periodical servicing very 250,000 prints.
2. Check with the Service Book before starting on a visit, and take parts for
which replacement is expected.
3. If you cleaned any charging wire with solvent, be sure that it has dried
completely before mounting it to the machine.
As of May 2001
Work steps
1. Report to the person in charge: check the general condition.
2. Record the counter reading: check faulty prints.
3. Make test prints, and check the following:
1) image density against standards;
2) white background for soiling;
3) characters for clarity;
4) margin;
5) fixing, registration for displacement, and back for soiling.
Then, check the margins against standards (single-sided): for leading edge, 4.0 +1.5/1.0 mm; for left/right, 2.5 1.5 mm; for trailing edge, 2.0 1.5 mm.
4. Clean the charging assemblies; dry wipe with lint-free paper, and clean with alcohol:
1) charging wire (primary, pre-transfer, transfer/separation),
2) grid wire (primary charging assembly),
3) shielding plate of each charging assembly,
4) roller electrode.
1-6 T
Points to Note When Replacing/Cleaning the Charging Wires and Replacing the Charging Wire Cleaner
1. At the end of the following work, check to make sure that the charging wire is in the
middle of the cleaner; otherwise, image faults can occur:
a. If you have cleaned the charging wire;
b. If you have replaced the charging wire and the charging wire cleaner; or
c. If you have moved the charging wire cleaner by hand.
Correct position
Incorrect position
2. Each charging wire uses a different type of charging wire cleaner; pay attention during
replacement:
a. For the primary/transfer charging wire cleaner, use a strengthened type (blue holder).
b. For the separate/pre-transfer charging wire cleaner, use a regular type (brown holder).
3. If you have replaced the primary/transfer charging wire, be sure to execute wire cleaning in service mode.
T01-301-01
5. Clean the optical system with a blower brush; if the dirt is excessive, use alcohol.
1. No. 1/2/3 mirror, 2. Dust-proof glass, 3. Scanning reflecting plate, 4. Standard white
plate
6. Perform the following for the optical path:
(1) For the scanner drive, check the cable for tension, and make adjustments as needed.
(The scanner cable need not be inspected/adjusted except after making the first
250,000 copies.)
(2) For the scanner rail, clean the slide portions, and apply silicone oil (FY9-6011).
7. Check the waste toner case. If it is more than half full, pour out the toner into a plastic
bag for collection; or, replace the case.
(1)You must comply with the applicable regulations imposed by the administrative body for disposal of waste toner.
(2)Do not throw away waste toner into fire. (It may cause explosion, and
can be extremely hazardous.)
1-7 T
8. Clean each filter by removing matter adhering to its surface: 1. ozone filter, 2. dustproofing filter.
9. Clean the developing assembly (developing assembly rolls).
10. Clean the pickup/feeding assembly: 1. transfer guide (upper/lower) plate, 2. registration
roller (upper, lower), 3. feeding belt, 4. each feeding roller.
11. Clean the fixing/delivery assembly: 1. separation law (upper, lower), 2. each feeding
roller, 3. inlet guide, 4. web (check), 5. inlet guide oil dish, 6. thermistor, 7. sub thermistor, 8. thermal switch.
12. Clean the cleaning assembly (side scraper).
13. Clean the copyboard glass and the reading glass.
14. Make test prints.
15. Make sample prints.
16. Check the operation of the leakage breaker:
While the power switch is on, press the test
switch of the leakage breaker to see that it operates normally (i.e., the lever shifts to OFF and
the power is cut). If it does not operate normally,
replace it and make a check once again.
To reset,
After checking its operation, turn off the power
switch, shift the lever to ON, and turn on the
Leakage breaker
power switch.
17. Put the sample prints into order; then, clean up the area around the machine.
18. Record the final counter reading.
19. Fill out the Service Book, and report to the person in charge.
Do not forget to add the above check to the history of checks made on the leakage
breaker (Service Book).
1-8 T
4. Periodical Servicing Chart

Do not use solvents or oils other than those indicated.
4.1 Reader Unit

: Clean
Unit
: Replace
Part
: Lubricate : Adjust
: Inspect
Intervals
Upon
every every every
every
installation 250,000 500,000 750,000 1,000,000
Scanner Scanner cable
Optical Scanner rail

path
Copyboard
glass
No. 1 through
No. 3 mirrors
Scanner
reflecting plate
Remarks
Only at fist
250,000
(inspection/
adjustment).
Silicone oil
(FY9-6011)
4.2 Printer Unit

: Clean
Unit
: Replace
: Lubricate : Adjust
Part
: Inspect
Intervals
Upon
every every every
every
installation 250,000 500,000 750,000 1,000,000
Externals/ Ozone filter

controls (FM3)
Dust-proofing
filter (FM2)
Laser
Dust-proof
optical path glass
Charging Charging wire
assembly (primary, pretransfer, transfer/separation)
Remarks
Remove dust
from surface.
After replacement, execute

wire cleaning
5 times.
1-9 T
Unit
Part
Intervals
Upon
every every every
every
installation 250,000 500,000 750,000 1,000,000
Charging
assembly
Charging wire
cleaner
(primary, pretransfer, transfer/separation)
Grid wire
(primary)
Charging
assembly
shielding plate
(each charging
assembly)
Roller
electrode
Primary antistray toner
sheet
Photosensi- Photosensitive
tive drum drum
Electrode (for
slip ring of
drum heater)
Remarks
Replace with
charging wire
simultaneously.
Use alcohol
and drum
cleaning powder (CK0429); for instructions, see
6. Cleaning
the Photosensitive
Drum.
Clean with
alcohol;
1) electrode,
2) protruding
wall of electrode (where
FY9-6008 is
applied).
Charge collecting brush
Developing Developing
assembly cylinder
Developing
assembly roll
1-10 T
Unit
Part
Intervals
Upon
every every every
every
installation 250,000 500,000 750,000 1,000,000
Developing Anti strayassembly toner sheet

Cleaner
Side scraper
Toner dish
(rear, front)
Fixing
Inlet guide
assembly Web
Oil dish
Thermistor
Sub thermistor
Thermal switch
Delivery Separation
assembly claw (upper,
lower)
Waste toner Waste toner
collection box
area
Pickup/
Transfer guide
feeding
Registration
assembly roller (upper,
lower)
Feeding belt
Feeding rollers
Remarks
Inspect case,
and remove
toner.
1-11 T
5. Points to Note for Periodical Servicing

Unless otherwise instructed, clean with lint-free paper and alcohol.
Make a thorough check of the block (front, rear) for melting by leakage,
deformation by heat, cracking, discoloration (yellowing). If a fault is
found, replace the part with a new one immediately.
Check the block (front, rear) including its inside.
Do not use a cloth on which metal powder is found.
If you have used solvent, make sure that the part has dried completely
before mounting it back to the machine.
Do not use a moist cloth unless specifically indicated.
Be sure to provide scheduled servicing/replacement at the specified intervals.
Scanning lamp
Dry wipe with lint-free paper.
Reflecting plate
Clean with a blower brush.
No. 1 through No. 3 mirrors
Clean it with a blower brush;
if dirt is excessive, dry wipe
with lint-free paper.
Primary/Transfer/Separation/
Dry wipe with lint-free paper;
then, clean with alcohol.
Reading glass
Copyboard glass
Dust-proofing glass
Dry wipe with lint-free paper.
Pre-exposure glass
Disposing of toner.
Developing assembly base
Clean with a moist
cloth; see Note 1.
Pickup/feeding roller
Separation claw, fixing

assembly inlet guide
Clean with solvent
and lint-free paper.
Fixing roller
(upper/lower)
Registration roller
Use cleaning oil and

lint-free paper.
Transfer guide
Reversing roller
Vertical path roller
Duplex Feeding Roller
(right/left)
Feeding assembly
Clean with a moist
cloth; see Note 1.
Note 1:
1-12 T
Do to leave traces of water.
6. Cleaning the photosensitive drum

Do not rotate the magnet roll
during work. Otherwise, waste
toner may fall through the
cleaner assembly.
1) Slide out the process unit. (Be sure to
place the drum protective sheet over the
fixing/feeding unit.)
2) Take out the photosensitive drum.
3) Moisten lint-free paper [1] with 5 to 10
cc of alcohol [2]; then, pour 0.2 to 0.3 g
of drum cleaning powder (CK-0429) [3]
on the lint-free paper.
4) While butting the lint-free paper relatively strongly against the photosensitive drum, wipe the surface of the drum
from the front to the rear and from the
rear to the front.
[3]
CK-0429
[2]
[1]
F01-601-01
Keep the widths of cleaning to
5 to 10 cm in the peripheral
direction of the drum.
Move the lint-free paper back
and forth 15 to 20 times over a
single area.
Forcing the lint-free paper will
not affect the life of the drum.
5) When the alcohol has evaporated, dry
wipe the surface with lint-free paper. If
the area is uneven, go back to step 4),
and increase the back-and-forth movements.
6) Rotate the drum for the width (5 to 10
cm), and repeat steps 3) through 5) until
the entire area of the surface has been
cleaned.
5 to 10cm
F01-601-02
1-13 T
CHAPTER 2
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT BASIC PROCEDURE
1. Making Pre-Checks
<Pre-Checks>
Clean the following:
1. Primary charging assembly grid wire
2. Primary charging wire
3. Pre-transfer charging wire
4. Transfer charging wire
Check the following:

1. Height of charging wire
If a fault is found on copy images,
Points to Note When Making Checks on the Printer Side

The machine's potential control mechanism is designed for both
copier image output and printer (PDL) image output, and its parameters
for potential control in service mode may be adjusted independently of
each other.
As such, when an image fault occurs, try to find out which side is
causing it, and generate the appropriate images (data) for adjustment of
related parameters.
If a fault is found on printer images,
Using the NA3 Chart, make two copies each

in the following modes:
1. AE mode
2. Text mode
3. Text/photo mode
Generate several of the following test sheets:
1. 04 (blank)
2. 05 (halftone)
3. 06 (solid black)
Generate several each of the following

printer (PDL) images
1. Image with large background
(to check for fogging)
2. Image including solid black
(to check solid black density)
3. Image including halftone
(to check halftone density)
Output Conditions
F value=5
potential control: ON
Are the test

prints normal?
NO
Perform 2. Making Checks on the

Printer Unit.
YES
Perform 4. Making Checks

on the Reader Unit.
2-1 T

<Checking the Density Slope>
<Checking Images>
Checking Halftone Images
<Checking fro Fogging>

REF.
NO
Are there vertical

lines in the image?
Generate a halftone image.
Generate a blank print.
*1:VD target value

COPIER >DISPLAY >DPOT >VDT (for copier image)
COPIER >DISPLAY >DPOT >VDT-P (for printer image)
*2:VL1 target value
COPIER >DISPLAY >DPOT >VD1T (for copier image)
COPIER >DISPLAY >DPOT >VD1T-P (for printer image)
YES
Clean the following; also check

for foreign matter:
1. Dust-proofing glass
2. Charging assemblies
Is it foggy?
Is there a
NO
difference in density between
front and rear?
YES
YES
Is the rear lighter?
NO
Check the following readings in service mode:

COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VDM (for copier image)
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VDM-P (for printer image)
NO
NO
Are there vertical

lines in the image?
Are the readings 6 V

of the target value?
(*1)
YES
YES
Turn the adjusting screw
found at the front of the
primary charging assembly
clockwise. (2 full turns max.)
Turn the adjusting screw

found at the rear of the
primary charging assembly
clockwise. (2 full turns max.)
Make the selections in service mode, and turn off

and then on the main power switch:
Execute forced
potential control.
Generate one print of a halftone image.
Check the primary charging

system and the potential control
system; if normal, replace the
NO
YES
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VL1M (for copier image)
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VL1M-P (for printer image)
Are the readings 6 V

of the target value?
(*2)
Check the following, and replace them if

necessary:
1. Laser (for output)
2. Potential control system
3. Photosensitive drum
NO
YES
necessary.
NO
1. If there still is a difference in density after giving the adjusting screw 2 turns (each turn
causing a change of about 0.7 mm), check the scanning lamp and the scanner for soiling.
2. When making a clockwise turn, be sure that the intervals between wire grid runs are not
larger than 9 mm.
When making a counterclockwise turn, be sure that the intervals between wire grid runs
are not smaller than 7.5 mm.
3. The machine will not execute potential control even when the main power switch is
turned off and then on if the temperature of the fixing assembly is 150C or higher.
Memo
2-2 T
Moving the wire from the photosensitive drum causes the image to be lighter, while
moving it closer causes the images to be darker.
Are the readings 70 15 V?

YES
Adjust the offset value of the VL target potential.
Adjusting the Offset of the VL Target Potential

(DE-OFFSET/DE-OFFSET-P)
Vary the value using the following as a guide:
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>DE-OFST (for copier image)
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>DE-OFST-P (for printer image)
Lighter image
-50
-40
-30 -20
-10
Default
Darker image
+10 +20 +30 +40 +50

<Checking the Solid Black Density>
Generate a solid black print.

<Checking the Halftone Density>
Is the density
too low or too high (too
light or too dark)?
NO
Generate a halftone image.
YES
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VDM (for copier image)
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VDM-P (for printer image)
Are the
readings 6 V of the
target value?
(*1)
NO
Check the primary charging

system; if normal, replace the
YES
Are the
readings 6 V of the
target value?
(*2)
NO

necessary:
YES
Are the readings

70 15 V?
NO
YES

necessary:
Is the halftone
density optimum?
NO
YES
End.
To check a copier image,

See if No. 6 and No. 7 (halftone) of the Test Chart is
reproduced to the more or less the same density.
To check a printer (PDL) image,
See if the density of the halftone area represents the
original data properly.
REF.
*1:VD target value

COPIER >DISPLAY >DPOT >VDT (for copier image)
COPIER >DISPLAY >DPOT >VDT-P (for printer image)
*2:VL1 target value
COPIER >DISPLAY >DPOT >VD1T (for copier image)
COPIER >DISPLAY >DPOT >VD1T-P (for printer image)
Adjusting the Offset Value of the VD Target Potential

(VD-OFFSET/VD-OFFSET-P)
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VD-OFST (for copier image)
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VD-VD-OFST-P (for printer image)
Lighter image
Adjust the offset of the VD target potential.
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
Default
Darker image
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
2-3 T
4. Making Checks on the Reader Unit

<Making Image Initial Checks>
Is there a difference
in density between
front and rear?
NO
Are there vertical

lines in the images?
<Checking the Solid Black Density>
<Checking the Density Slope>
YES
NO
Make a copy of
the NA3 Chart in text mode. Is
gray scale No. 1 (solid black)
too light?
<Checking for Fogging>
NO
Make a copy of
the NA3 Chart in text mode.
Is the white background
foggy?
YES
Execute shading adjustment in service

mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ.
YES
NO
YES
1. Mirrors
2. Lens
3. Standard white plate
(mounted to back of
copyboard glass)
4. Copyboard glass
Execute shading in service mode:

COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ
Execute shading in service mode:

COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ
Is there a
difference in density
between front
and rear?
Clean the mirrors.

Perform the instructions
NO
under Checking for
Fogging on the printer side.
Check the life of the

scanning lamp; if it has
reached the end of its
life, replace it.
Is the white
background
foggy?
YES
YES
<Checking Halftone Density>
Perform the instructions under

Checking the Density Slope
for the printer unit.
B
When
the A3 Chart
is copied in text/photo
mode, is the density of No.8 optimum
when compared with Nos.7
through 9?
NO
NO

1. Mirrors
2. Lens
3. Standard white plate
4. Scanning lamp
5. Reflecting plate
Increase the white level target value for

shading correction in service mode:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>SH-TRGT
(40 max.).
Executing Potential Control

Turn off and then on the power switch; then,
make a copy.
Make a copy of the

NA3 Chart in AE mode. Is the
output foggy?
YES

mode:
NO
YES
End.

mode:
NO
If it is too dark,
Is the white
background
foggy?
YES
If it is too light,
Increase the setting of the
following in service mode:
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS
>DENS-ADJ
Decrease the setting of the

following in service mode:
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS
>DENS-ADJ
Make one copy of the A3 Chart in

text/photo mode.
YES
Is the density of
gray scale No. 1 (solid black)
too low (light)?
NO
Decrease the value of AE density

adjustment in service mode:
COPIER>ADJUST>AE>AE-TBL.
YES
Perform the instructions under
Checking the Solid Black Density
for the printer unit.
Is the
density of gray scale
No.8 (halftone)
different?
NO
Go to Checking the Halftone Density for the printer side.
2-4 T
CHAPTER 3
STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
1. Image Adjustments
1.1 Standards of Image Position
The image margin/non-image width of a print made in Direct must be as follows:
2.51.5mm
0
2
4.0
+1.5mm
- 1.0mm
4
6
8
10
F03-101-01 Image Leading Edge Margin
F03-101-02 Left/Right Image Margin
2.51.5mm
0
2
4
6
4.0
+1.5mm
- 1.0mm
F03-101-03 Leading Edge Non-Image

Width
8
10
F03-101-04 Left/Right Non-Image Width
3-1 T
1.2 Checking the Image Position

Make prints using the following as the source of paper (10 prints each), and check to see
that the image margin and the non-image width are as indicated:
Each cassette
Front deck (left, right)
Manual feed tray
Duplex feeding unit
Side paper deck
If not as indicated, adjust the image position in the following order:
1. Adjusting the left/right image margin (registration)
2. Adjusting the image leading edge margin (registration)
3. Adjusting the left/right non-image width (CCD read start position)
4. Leading edge non-image width (scanner image leading edge position)
1.3 Adjusting the Left/Right Image Margin

1.3.1 Cassette 3/4
1) Loosen the two fixing screws [1] found
on the left and the right of the cassette.
[1]
F03-103-01
2) Remove the paper size plate [2], and
turn the adjusting screw [3] found in the
opening of the paper size plate [2] to
adjust the position; then, tighten the two
fixing screws [1].
After making the adjustment, be sure to
execute the following service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CST>C3STMTR/A4R or C4-STMTR/A4R
[2]
[3]
F03-103-02
3-2 T
1.3.2 Left/Right Front Deck

1) Loosen the four screws [2] and the two
fixing screws [3] of the cassette front
cover [1].
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F03-103-03
2) Move the cassette guide assembly
(front) [4] to the front or the rear to
make adjustments.
[4]
F03-103-04
1.3.3 Manual Feed Tray

1) Loosen the two mounting screws [1] of
the manual feed tray, and adjust the position of the manual feed tray.
[1]
F03-103-05
3-3 T
1.3.4 Duplex Feeding Unit

1) Adjust the image margin as indicated using service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>FeedADJ>ADJ-REFE.
Decreasing the ADJ-REFE setting

(A decrease by 10 will
ecrease the margin by 1 mm.)
Edge of paper
Increasing the ADJ-REFE setting
(An increase by 10 will increase
the margin by 1 mm.)
2.52.0mm
0
2
4
6
8
10
F03-103-06
1.3.5 Side Paper Deck

1) Slide out the compartment, and turn the two screws to adjust the position of the latch
plate of the deck open solenoid. (At this time, use the index on the latch plate as a
guide.)
Latch plate
Index
Screws
F03-103-07
3-4 T
1.4 Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin

1) Adjust the image margin in service mode so that it is as indicated:
COPIER>ADJUST>Feed-ADJ>REGIST.
Decreasing the REGIST setting

(A decrease by 10 will increase the margin by 1 mm.)
Edge of paper
Increasing the REGIST setting
(An increase by 10 will decrease the margin by 1 mm.)
F03-104-01
1.5 Adjusting the Left/Right Non-Image Width

1) Adjust the non-image width in service mode so that it is as indicated:
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y.
Edge of image
Increasing the ADJ-Y setting
(An increase by 10 will increase
the non-image width by 1 mm.)
Decreasing the ADJ-Y setting

(A decrease by 10 will
decrease the margin by 1 mm.)
2.5mm2.0
0
2
4
6
8
10
F03-105-01
3-5 T
1.6 Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width

1) Adjust the non-image width in service mode so that it is as indicated:
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X.
Decreasing the ADJ-X setting
(A decrease by '10' will decrease the width by 1 mm.)
Image leading edge
Increasing the ADJ-X setting
(An increase by '10' will increase the width by 1 mm.)
F03-106-01
3-6 T
2. Scanning System
2.1 Replacing the Scanner Drive Cable
See the Reader Manual: Chap. 2>5. Disassembly/Assembly
2.2 Adjusting the Position of the Scanner Mirror Base

See the Reader Manual: Chap. 2> 5. Disassembly/Assembly

See the Reader Manual: Chap. 2>5. Disassembly/Assembly
3-7 T
3. Image Formation System

3.1 Routing the Grid Wire of the Primary Charging Assembly
See the Printer Manual: Chap. 4>7.8 Charging Wire
3.2 Routing the Charging Wire of Charging Assemblies

See the Printer Unit: Chap. 4>7.8 Charging Wire
3.3 Mounting the Drum Cleaning Blade

See the Printer Manual: Chap. 4>7.11 Drum Cleaner
3.4 Mounting the Developing Blade

See the Printer Manual: Chap. 4>7.9 Developing Assembly
3.5 Replacing the Potential Sensor/Potential Control PCB

See the Printer Unit: Chap. 4>7.4 Potential Sensor Assembly
1. The potential sensor and the potential control PCB are adjusted as a
single unit; be sure to replace both at the same time.
2. If you have replaced the sensor and the PCB, be sure to execute offset
adjustment of the sensor.
3-8 T
4. Pickup/Feeding System
4.1 Orientation of the Deck/Cassette Pickup Roller
The pickup roller may be mounted by reversing the steps used to remove it; however, be
sure to keep the following in mind:
The pickup rollers used at the front and the rear of the machine are not interchangeable.
The collar of the pickup roller used at the front of the machine is gold-colored.
When mounting the pickup roller [1] to the pickup assembly, make sure that the round
marking [2] found on the side of the roller and the round marking [3] found on the collar
(gold-colored) are toward the front of the machine.
[2]
[3]
(direction of rotation)
[1]
Collar (gold-colored)
(front of machine)
F03-401-01
The collar of the pickup roller used at the rear of the machine is silver-colored. When
mounting the pickup roller [4] to the pickup assembly, make sure that the round marking [5] found on the side of the roller is toward the front of the machine while the round
marking on the collar (silver-colored) is toward the rear of the machine.
[6]
[5]
[4]
Collar (silver-colored)
(rear of machine)
F03-401-02
3-9 T
4.2 Orientation of the Deck/Cassette Separation Roller

When replacing the separation roller, be sure it is oriented as follows:
Cassette 3/4, Right Pickup Assembly
Left Deck Pickup Assembly

Narrower groove
Wider groove
Narrower groove
(rear of machine)
(front of machine)
Wider groove
F03-402-01
4.3 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Deck/Cassette

Pickup Assembly
When mounting the feeding roller assembly of the deck/cassette pickup assembly, be sure
the belt pulley [2] is toward the front of the machine.
(front)
[2]
[1]
(rear)
F03-403-01
3-10 T
4.4 Orientation of the Pickup Roller of the Side Paper Deck

The pickup roller may be mounted by reversing the steps used to remove it; however, be
sure to keep the following in mind:
The pickup rollers used at the front and the rear of the machine are not interchangeable.
The collar of the pickup roller found at the front of the machine is silver-colored.
When mounting the pickup roller [1] to the pickup assembly, be sure that the round marking [2] found on the collar (silver-colored) is toward the front of the machine.
[2]
[1] Pickup roller

[2] Marking (on collar)
[1]
Collar (silver-colored)
(front of machine)
F03-404-01
The collar on the pickup roller found at the rear of the machine is gold-colored.
When mounting the pickup roller [4] to the pickup assembly, be sure that the round marking [5] found on the side of the roller and the round marking [6] found on the collar (goldcolored) are toward the rear of the machine.
[5]
[4] Pickup roller

[5] Marking (roller)
[6] Marking (collar)
[4]
[6]
Collar (gold-colored)
(rear of machine)
F03-404-02
3-11 T
4.5 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Side Paper Deck

When mounting the feeding roller assembly [1] to the side paper deck, be sure that the
belt pulley [2] is toward the front of the machine. When mounting the feeding roller [3] to
the feeding roller shaft [4], be sure that the round marking [5] is toward the rear of the machine.
[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
(front)
F03-405-01
3-12 T
4.6 Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller of the

Deck/Cassette
If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup, change the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller:
If double feeding occurs, move the hook of the spring in the direction of B.
If pickup failure occurs, move the hook of the spring in the direction of A.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1] Feeding roller

[3] Pressure lever
[2] Separation roller

[4] Pressure spring
F03-406-01
3-13 T
4.7 Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller of the

Manual Feed Tray
If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup, adjust the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller.
1) Remove the right upper cover.
2) Remove the upper guide [1].
[1]
F03-407-01
If double feeding occurs, remove the mounting screw [2], and lower the mounting base
[3]; then, tighten the mounting screw [2] in hole A.
If pickup failure occurs, remove the mounting screw [2], and raise the mounting base
[3]; then, tighten the mounting screw [2] in hole B.
hole A
hole B
[2]
[3]
F03-407-02
3-14 T
4.8 Adjusting the Fixing Inlet Guide Solenoid (SL1)

Adjust the position of the solenoid using the two screws [1] so that the guide will be positioned as indicated when the solenoid turns on.
9.5mm
12.7mm
Upper roller
3.2mm
[1]
Lower roller
Inlet guide
Solenoid
F03-408-01
3-15 T
4.9 Adjusting the Position of the Pickup Solenoid (SL3, SL4)

of the Cassette 3/4
Adjust the position of the solenoid using the two screws [3] so that the distance from the
bottom of the pickup assembly to A of the roller arm is 360.5 mm when [1] and [2] are operated.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
A
360.5mm
[3]
View from A
F03-409-01
3-16 T
4.10 Adjusting the Position of the Delivery Flapper Solenoid

(SL5)
Adjust the position of the mounting screw [2] using the screw [2] so that the drive lever
[1] is pushed fully when the solenoid turns on (i.e., when the plunger is drawn).
[1]
[2]
F03-410-01
4.11 Adjusting the Position of the Right Deck Pickup Solenoid

(SL6)
Adjust the position of the solenoid so that the left edge of the arm 2 is 57.2 0.5 mm from
the center of hole A of the solenoid mounting base.
[A]
57.2 0.5mm
F03-411-01
3-17 T
4.12 Adjusting the Position of the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid

(SL7)
Before removing the left deck pickup solenoid from the support plate [1], take note of its
position with reference to the fixing screw [2] of the solenoid. Or, mark the position for the
solenoid by drawing a line on the support plate with a scriber.
When mounting the solenoid on its own, be sure to secure it in its original position.
[1]
[2]
F03-412-01
4.13 Adjusting the Position of the Reversing Flapper Solenoid

(SL8)
1) Adjust the potion of the solenoid so that the drive lever [1] is pushed fully when the solenoid turns on (i.e., when the plunger is drawn).
[1]
[2]
F03-413-01
3-18 T
4.14
Adjusting the Position of the Fixing Web Solenoid (SL9)
4.14.1 New Fixing Web

Adjust the position for the solenoid using the screw [2] so that the distance of travel of the
drive lever [1] is 8.6 mm.
[1]
[2]
8.6mm
F03-414-01
4.14.2 Existing Fixing Web

Before removing the solenoid, take note of the position [A] of the drive lever when the
solenoid turns on. After replacing the solenoid, adjust its position using the screw [2] so that
the drive lever [1] will be positioned as it was before replacement when the solenoid turns
on.
[1]
[2]
A
F03-414-02
3-19 T
4.15 Position of the Side Paper Deck Pickup Roller Releasing

Solenoid
Before removing the deck pickup roller releasing solenoid [1] from the support plate, take
note of the position of the two fixing screws [2] of the solenoid with reference to the index
on the support plate. Or, draw a line on the support plate so that it will serve as a reference
when positioning the solenoid.
When mounting the solenoid on its own, be sure to secure it in its original position.
[1]
[2]
F03-415-01
4.16 Attaching the Timing Belt of the Manual Feed Tray

Assembly
1) Butt the rack plate [1] of the manual feed tray against A (open state).
2) Move the slide volume in the direction of B, and attach the timing belt [2] to the pulley
[3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
F03-416-01
3-20 T
4.17
Attaching the Drive Belt
Attach the drive belt on the pulley and the rollers as indicated.
Main drive belt
Paper feed
drive belt
F03-417-01
3-21 T
5. Fixing System
5.1 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Heater
1) Do not touch the surface of the heater.
2) For both heaters, be sure that the side with the longer harness is toward the front.
3) Mount the main heater [1] to the right side and the sub heater [2] to the left side (viewing from the front of the fixing assembly).
4) Be user that the protrusions of the heaters will not interfere, i.e., stagger them.
5) When mounting the faston to the fixing heater at the rear, do not bend the faston terminals (A, B) as if to direct it toward the outside.
Be sure it is parallel to the holder.
5.2 Position of the Fixing Inlet Guide

Points to Note When Making Adjustments in the Field
1) For the position of the inlet guide, see the instructions under 4.8, i.e., adjusting the position of the fixing inlet guide solenoid (SL1).
2) The inlet guide will move down when the solenoid (SL1) turns on.
3) The difference in the height of the inlet guide between front and rear must be within 0.5
mm.
4) The height of the inlet guide may be adjusted by loosening the fixing screw on the
height adjusting support plate.
Removing the inlet guide base will require adjustment of the position of the
inlet guide. To avoid the adjustment, try not to loosen the mounting screw
on the inlet guide base. If you loosened it for some unavoidable reason, be
sure to position it correctly with reference to the index on the fixing assembly base.
3-22 T
5.3 Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip)

5.3.1 Taking Measurements
Wait for 15 min after the machine ends its
warm-up; then, make 20 A4 copies before
starting the work:
1) Place A4 or LTR paper, and select A4 or
LTR in the control panel.
mode to discharge the paper:
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIPCHK
Feeding
direction
Center of
paper
b : 7.8mm 0.5mm
a-c : 0.5mm or less
F03-503-01
5.3.2 Standards
1) Measure the width of a, b and c.
a and c are points 10 mm from
both edges of paper.
2) Check to see if the measurements are as

indicated. Otherwise, make the adjustment under c.
Be sure that both upper and
lower rollers are fully heated
when taking measurements.
[1]
5.3.3 Making Adjustments

1) Slide the fixing assembly out of the machine.
2) Open the delivery assembly.
3) Adjust the nip using the adjusting screw
[1] found at the front and the rear.
F03-503-02
3-23 T
6. Laser Exposure System

6.1 When Replacing the Scanner Unit
If the temperature of the fixing assembly is 150C or higher when the scanner unit is replaced, force potential control in service mode:
1) Make the following selections in service mode; then, enter '1', and press [OK]:
2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
3-24 T
7. Electrical Parts
7.1 When Replacing the CCD Unit
1) Replace the CCD unit.
2) After assembling the machine, connect the power plug to the power outlet, and turn on
3) Execute the following modes:
CCD auto adjustment: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ
CCD edge gain correction position auto adjustment:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>EGGN-POS
4) When the following data is updated (automatically), record them on the service label:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>all items
7.2 When Replacing the Reader controller PCB

1)
2)
3)
4)
Print out the data of user mode/service mode.

Replace the reader controller PCB.
Remove the EEPROM (1 pc.) from the existing PCB, and mount it to the new PCB.
After assembling the machine, connect the power plug to the power outlet, and turn on
5) Check to make sure that the following service mode settings are the same as the data before replacement:
COPIER>ADJUST>AE>all items
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>all items
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>all items
If any service mode setting is faulty, enter the respective setting recorded on the service
label in service mode.
3-25 T
7.3 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB

1) Using the Service Support Tool, back up the data by copying.
2) Replace the main controller PCB.
3) Remove the counter memory PCB, boot ROM, and SDRAM from the existing PCB, and
mount them to the new PCB.
4) After assembling the machine, connect the power plug to the power outlet; then, while
holding down the '2' and '8' keys in the control panel at the same time, turn on the main
power switch.
5) Return the data.
7.4 When Replacing the HDD Unit

When replacing the HDD unit, be sure to keep the following in mind:
1. Take appropriate measures against static charges.
2. Keep the HDD unit protected from impact.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Replace the HDD unit.

After assembling the machine, connect the power plug to the power outlet.
Connect a PC to which the Service Support Tool has been installed.
Turn on the PC, and turn on the main power switch while holding down both 2 and 8
on the keypad.
5) Using the Service Support Tool, format the HDD unit and install the system software.
3-26 T
7.5 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB

1)
2)
3)
4)
Print out the data of user mode/service mode.

Replace the DC controller PCB.
Remove the EEPROMs (6 pc.) from the existing PCB, and mount them to the new PCB.
After assembling the machine, connect the power plug to the power outlet, and turn on
5) Enter the values recorded on the label attached to the new DC controller PCB in service
mode:
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>D-PRE-TR
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-SP>D-HV-SP
6) Check to make sure that the following service mode settings are the same as the data obtained before replacing the PCB:
COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>(all items)
COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>(all items except D-HV-DE)
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>(all items)
COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>(all items)
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>(all items)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>(all items)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>(all items except D-PRE-TR and D-HV-TR)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-SP>(all items except D-HV-SP)
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>(all items)
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>(all items)
COPIER>ADJUST>MISC>(all items)
If a fault is found in the service mode settings, enter the respective setting recorded on the
service label in service mode; however, enter the settings recorded on the label attached to
the high-voltage unit for the following service mode items:
3-27 T
7.6 When Replacing the High-Voltage PCB

1) Replace the high-voltage PCB.
2) After assembling the machine, connect the power plug, and turn on the main power
switch.
3) Enter the values recorded on the label attached to the new high-voltage PCB in the following service mode items:
3-28 T
8. Checking the Surface Potential Control System

8.1 Outline
In the event of an image fault, it is important to find out if the cause is within the static
latent image formation block (including the photosensitive drum and the potential control
system) or is with the developing/transfer mechanism; and to isolate the cause, the surface
potential must first be checked in service mode.
8.2 Disabling the Auto Control Mechanism

The potential control system may be checked by disabling the auto control mechanism
(referred to hereafter as non-auto control mode).
If improvements are noted in the images made in non-auto control mode, the potential
measurement unit and the DC controller PCB may be suspected.
Further, non-auto control mode may also be made use of as an emergency measure
against an error in the auto control mechanism.
In non-auto control mode, all control settings (corona current, intensity, developing bias) will automatically be set to the standard settings stored in the
ROM.
Starting Non-Auto Control Mode
1) Make the following selections in service mode, and enter 0:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT; then, press the OK key.
2) Press the Reset key twice.
3-29 T
8.3 Zero Level Check

A "zero level check" is a check made to find out whether the control system of the DC
controller PCB identifies 0 V when the drum surface potential is 0 V.
A zero level check may be made in either of two ways, so as to find out whether a circuit
on the the DC controller PCB or the potential measurement circuit is normal:
1) Method 1:
for checking the level shift circuit of the DC controller PCB
2) Method 2:
for checking the potential measurement circuit
8.3.1 Method 1
1) Turn off the main power switch.
3) Short CP106 [1] and CP105 [2] on the DC controller PCB using a cable whose both
ends are equipped with an alligator clip or a probe.
When shorting CP106 and CP105, be sure to keep the shorting tool away
from other elements or the pattern on the PCB.
J117
J121
J116
J120
J123
J302
J108
J114
CP104
CP101
J124
CP103
CP106
J103
[1]
J203
CP105
J110
J303
J118
[2]
CP109
CP111
J201
J111
CP107
J119
J100
J126
J113
J106
CP110
J109
J125
J101
CP108
J107
J112
J104
J105
J115
J102
F03-803-01
3-30 T
4) Open the front cover, and slide out the pickup feeding unit to the front.
5) Remove the three screws [3], and detach the front switch cover [4].
[4]
[3]
F03-803-02
6) Free the cable of the potential control PCB from the cable clamp, and disconnect the
connector (4-pin) [5] connected to the DC controller PCB.
[5]
F03-803-03
7) Put the pickup feeding unit back into its initial position, and fit the door switch tool in
the door switch assembly; then, turn on the main power switch.
8) Make the following selections in service mode, and check to find out that the reading
during initial rotation is between 0 and 30: COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOT-K.
If the reading is not between 0 and 30, suspect a fault on the DC controller PCB.
9) Turn off the main power switch, and remove the door switch tool.
10) Remove the jumper wire from the DC controller PCB.
3-31 T
11) Connect the connector of the cable (of the potential control PCB).
12) Mount the front switch cover, and close the front cover.
13) Mount the rear upper cover.
14) Turn on the main power switch.
8.3.2 Method 2
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Disable potential control so that the machine will be in non-auto control mode.
Turn off the main power switch.
Remove the potential sensor from the machine.
Connect the connector of the potential controller to the connector on the machine side.
Fit the electrode (FY9-3012) [2] designed for checking potential sensors to the potential
sensor [1].
[2]
[1]
F03-803-04
When fitting the electrode to the potential sensor, be sure to keep the magnet of the electrode away from the potential sensor cover.
6) Connect the clip [3] designed for making checks to the frame of the machine frame
(GND).
[3]
F03-803-05
3-32 T
Be sure to fit the clip [3] fully away from the sensor window, not letting it
coming into contact with the cover of the sensor.
7) Insert the door switch tool into the door switch assembly.
Be sure not to touch the potential senor assembly after turning on the power
switch.
9) Make the following selections in service mode, and check to make user that the reading
during initial rotation is between 0 and 30: COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOT-K.
REF.
1. If the reading is as indicated for method 1 but is not so for method 2,

suspect dirt on the or and a fault in the potential measurement unit.
2. If the reading is as indicated for both method 1 and method 2, the signal paths and the operations from the potential sensor unit to the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB may be assumed to be normal.

11) Detach the electrode designed for checking potential sensors.
12) Mount the potential sensor support plate.
14) Enable potential control.
3-33 T
Blank Page
3-34 T
8.4 Checking the Potential System

START
Disable potential control: COPIER>

OPTION>BODY>PD-CNT=0
Checking the Primary Output
Checking the Laser Output
NO
Is the image better?
YES
1) Short CP106 and CP105 on the DC controller PCB.

2) Disconnect the connector (J9010) used to connect between
the DC controller PCB and the potential control PCB.
Turn on the main power switch.
Make the following selections in service mode:

COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOT-K.
Is the reading
between 0 and 30?
NO
Replace the DC controller

PCB.
YES

OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT=0
Enable potential control: COPIER>

OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT=1.
Measure the voltage PR-CNT during copying

of J102A-11 on the DC controller PCB.
Make the following selections in

service mode, and enter '1':
Make the following selections in service mode

(level of current of the primary charging assembly):
COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>PRIMARY.
Convert the reading (mA) indicated during printing
into a control voltage with reference to 8.5
"Potential Control Conversion Table."
Check the following indications:

for copier images:
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VL2M
for printer images:
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VL2M-P
Is the
difference between
the actual measurement of
PR-CNT and 'PRIMARY' in
service mode
10%?
NO

PCB.
Is the indication
70 15 V?
Forced execution
of potential control
YES
NO
YES
Check the laser output.
1) Disconnect the cable used to short CP106 and CP105 on

the DC controller PCB.
2) Connect the connector (J9010) used to connect between
the DC controller PCB and the potential control PCB.
Turn on the main power switch.
Replace the
high-voltage transformer. Is
the problem corrected?
NO
Replace the photosensitive drum. If the

problem is not corrected, go to the
checking the laser output.
YES
END
Is the laser output a
limit value?
NO
YES
Replace the laser unit.
Check to make sure that the potential control PCB is

supplied with power; then, check the potential sensor
using the electrode designed for making checks.
3-35 T
Checking the Developing Bias Output
Checking the Transfer Output
Enable potential control: COPIER>

OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT=1
Is the toner
image on the photosensitive
drum before transfer
normal?
NO
Replace the photosensitive

drum.
YES
Measure the voltage DEV-DC-CNT
during printing of J102A-8 on the DC
controller PCB.

OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT=0.
Measure the voltage TR-CNT during

printing of J102A-12 on the DC
controller PCB.
Make the following selections (DC

value of the developing bias):
COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>BIAS.
Covert the indication during printing
(V) into a control voltage with
reference to 8.5 "Potential Control
Conversion Table."
Is the
deferense between
the actual measurement of
DEV-DC-CNT and 'BIAS' in
service mode
10%?
YES
Make the following selections in service

mode (level of current of transfer
charging). Convert the reading (mA)
during printing into a control voltage based
on 8.5 "Potential Control Conversion
NO

PCB.
Is the
difference between the
actual measurement of TR-CNT
and 'TR' in service
mode 10%?
NO

PCB.
YES
Check the developing assembly for

leakage; if normal, go to a check on the
transfer output.
Replace the
high-voltage transformer.
Is the problem
corrected?
YES
END
NO
1) Check the transfer charging assembly for
leakage.
mode, and try changing the setting:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FUZZY.
3) Try replacing paper.
3-36 T
8.5 Conversion Table for the Potential Control System

Control[V]
Primary[A]
Transfer[A]
Separation[A]
3.00
1,400
Developing bias[V] Pre-transfer[A]

0
440
100
3.05
1,391
-2
437
96
3.10
1,382
-4
434
92
3.15
1,373
11
-6
431
88
3.20
1,365
15
-8
429
85
3.25
1,356
18
-10
426
81
3.30
1,347
22
-12
426
77
3.35
1,338
26
-14
420
73
3.40
1,330
30
-16
418
70
3.45
1,321
33
-18
415
66
3.50
1,312
37
-20
412
62
3.55
1,303
41
-22
409
58
3.60
1,295
45
-24
407
55
3.65
1,286
48
-26
404
51
3.70
1,277
52
-28
401
47
3.75
1,268
56
-30
398
43
3.80
1,260
60
-33
396
40
3.85
1,251
63
-35
393
36
3.90
1,242
67
-37
390
32
3.95
1,233
71
-39
387
28
4.00
1,225
75
-41
385
25
4.05
1,216
78
-43
382
21
4.10
1,207
82
-45
379
17
4.15
1,198
86
-47
376
13
4.20
1,190
90
-49
374
10
4.25
1,181
93
-51
371
4.30
1,172
97
-53
368
4.35
1,163
101
-55
365
-1
4.40
1,155
105
-57
363
-5
4.45
1,146
108
-59
360
-8
4.50
1,137
112
-61
357
-12
4.55
1,128
116
-63
354
-16
4.60
1,120
120
-66
352
-20
4.65
1,111
123
-68
349
-23
4.70
1,102
127
-70
346
-27
4.75
1,093
131
-72
343
-31
4.80
1,085
135
-74
341
-35
4.85
1,076
138
-76
338
-38
4.90
1,067
142
-78
335
-42
4.95
1,058
146
-80
332
-46
3-37 T
Control[V]
Primary[A]
Transfer[A]
Separation[A]
5.00
1,050
150
-82
330
-50
5.05
1,041
153
-84
327
-53
5.10
1,032
157
-86
324
-57
5.15
1,023
161
-88
321
-61
5.20
1,015
165
-90
319
-65
5.25
1,006
168
-92
316
-68
5.30
997
172
-94
313
-72
5.35
938
176
-96
310
-76
5.40
980
180
-99
308
-80
5.45
971
183
-101
305
-83
5.50
962
187
-103
302
-87
5.55
953
191
-105
299
-91
5.60
945
195
-107
297
-95
5.65
936
198
-109
294
-98
5.70
927
202
-111
291
-102
5.75
918
206
-113
288
-106
5.80
910
210
-115
286
-110
5.85
901
213
-117
283
-113
5.90
892
217
-119
280
-117
5.95
883
221
-121
277
-121
6.00
875
225
-123
275
-125
6.05
866
228
-125
272
-128
6.10
857
232
-127
269
-132
6.15
848
236
-129
266
-136
6.20
840
240
-132
264
-140
6.25
831
243
-134
261
-143
6.30
822
247
-136
258
-147
6.35
813
251
-138
255
-151
6.40
805
255
-140
253
-155
6.45
796
258
-142
250
-158
6.50
787
262
-144
247
-162
6.55
778
266
-146
244
-166
6.60
770
270
-148
242
-170
6.65
761
273
-150
239
-173
6.70
752
277
-152
236
-177
6.75
743
281
-154
233
-181
6.80
735
285
-156
231
-185
6.85
726
288
-158
228
-188
6.90
717
292
-160
225
-192
6.95
708
296
-162
222
-196
3-38 T
Control[V]
Primary[A]
Transfer[A]
Separation[A]
7.00
700

300
-165
220
-200
7.05
691
303
-167
217
-203
7.10
682
307
-169
214
-207
7.15
673
311
-171
211
-211
7.20
665
315
-173
209
-215
7.25
656
318
-175
204
-218
7.30
647
322
-177
203
-222
7.35
638
326
-179
200
-226
7.40
630
330
-181
198
-230
7.45
621
333
-183
195
-233
7.50
612
337
-185
192
-237
7.55
603
341
-187
189
-241
7.60
595
345
-189
187
-245
7.65
586
348
-191
184
-248
7.70
577
352
-193
181
-252
7.75
568
356
-195
178
-256
7.80
560
360
-198
176
-260
7.85
551
363
-200
173
-263
7.90
542
367
-202
170
-267
7.95
533
371
-204
167
-271
8.00
525
375
-206
165
-275
8.05
516
378
-208
162
-278
8.10
507
382
-210
159
-282
8.15
498
386
-212
156
-286
8.20
490
390
-214
154
-290
8.25
481
393
-216
151
-293
8.30
472
397
-218
148
-297
8.35
463
401
-220
145
-301
8.40
455
405
-222
143
-305
8.45
446
408
-224
140
-308
8.50
437
412
-226
137
-312
8.55
428
416
-228
134
-316
8.60
420
420
-231
132
-320
8.65
411
423
-233
129
-323
8.70
402
427
-235
126
-327
8.75
393
431
-237
123
-331
8.80
385
435
-239
121
-335
8.85
376
438
-241
118
-338
8.90
367
442
-243
115
-342
8.95
358
446
-245
112
-346
3-39 T
Control[V]
Primary[A]
Transfer[A]
Separation[A]
9.00
350
450
-247
110
-350
9.05
341
453
-249
107
-353
9.10
332
457
-251
104
-357
9.15
323
461
-253
101
-361
9.20
315
465
-255
99
-365
9.25
306
468
-257
96
-368
9.30
297
472
-259
93
-372
9.35
288
476
-261
90
-376
9.40
280
480
-264
88
-380
9.45
271
483
-266
85
-383
9.50
262
487
-268
82
-387
9.55
253
491
-270
79
-391
9.60
245
495
-272
77
-395
9.65
236
498
-274
74
-398
9.70
227
502
-276
71
-402
9.75
218
506
-278
68
-406
9.80
210
510
-280
66
-410
9.85
201
513
-282
63
-413
9.90
192
517
-284
60
-417
9.95
183
521
-286
57
-421
10.00
175
525
-288
55
-425
10.05
166
528
-290
52
-428
10.10
157
532
-292
49
-432
10.15
148
536
-294
46
-436
10.20
140
540
-297
44
-440
10.25
131
543
-299
41
-443
10.30
122
547
-301
38
-447
10.35
113
551
-303
35
-451
10.40
105
555
-305
33
-455
10.45
96
558
-307
30
-458
10.50
87
562
-309
27
-462
10.55
78
566
-311
24
-466
10.60
70
570
-313
22
-470
10.65
61
573
-315
19
-473
10.70
52
577
-317
16
-477
10.75
43
581
-319
13
-481
10.80
35
585
-321
11
-485
10.85
26
588
-323
-488
10.90
17
592
-325
-492
10.95
596
-327
-496
11.00
600
-330
-500
3-40 T
8.6 Emergency Measures for a Fault in the Potential Sensor

If transfer separation fails because of a fault in the potential sensor, try using the following service mode items to get around the problem; keep in mind, however, that this is no
more than a temporary measure used until the replacement of the potential sensor:
1. COPIER>OPTION>TEMPO>F-POT-SW
If the potential sensor has gone out of order and transfer separation faults occur as a result, enter '1'.
2. COPIER>OPTION>TEMPO>F-POT-D
The above service mode item must be set to '1':
0: if the user mainly uses originals with a low image ratio (text-oriented; default)
1: if the user mainly uses originals with a high image ratio (photo-oriented)
2: if retransfer (white spots around 50 mm along the leading edge)
3-41 T
9. Checking the Environment Sensor

9.1 Procedure
Check the environment sensor using the environment sensor tool to see that it operates
normally.
1) Make the following selections in service mode, and obtain the following data:
COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG.
Data A
TEMP: machine inside temperature (C)
data A1
HUM: machine inside humidity (%)
data A2
2) Press the Reset key twice, and turn off the main power switch.
3) Remove the environment sensor, and attach the environment sensor tool (FY9-3014).
4) Turn on the main power switch, and level the machine alone for 5 min.
5) Make the following selections in service mode, and obtain the following data:
COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG.
Data B
TEMP: machine inside temperature (C)
data B1
HUM: machine inside humidity (%)
data B2
6) Compare data A and data B; if the difference is not as indicated, replace the environment
sensor.
difference between data A1 and data B1: 05
difference between data A2 and data B2: 020
7) Press the Reset key twice, and turn off the main power switch.
8) Detach the environment sensor tool, and attach the environment sensor.
The environment sensor tool (FY9-3014) is adjusted at the factory to high
precision. Be sure to store it in an air-tight container with a drying agent.
9.2 Emergency Measure for a Fault in the Environment Sensor

If the environment sensor has gone out of order, the machine may be used by entering humidity data in the following service mode item; keep in mind, however that this is no more
than a temporary measure used until replacement of the environment sensor:
1. COPIER>OPTION>TEMPO>F-HUM-SW
Enter 1 if the environment senor has gone out of order.
2. COPIER>OPTION>TEMPO>F-HUM-D
The above service mode item must be set to 1.
Enter the humidity of the site of installation (between 30% and 99%; default, 35%)
3-42 T
10. Checking the Photointerrupters

The machines photointerrupters may be checked by means of a meter or service mode.
10.1 Using a Meter

1)
2)
3)
4)
Set the meter range to 300 VDC.

Connect the - probe of the meter to the GND terminal of the PCB to check.
Connect the + probe of the meter to the terminals indicated.
Make checks as instructed.
10.2 Using Service Mode

1)
2)
Enter service mode, and select I/O.

Bring up the I/O address to check, and make checks as indicated.
Turning on and off the sensor can turn on the machines motors. Take full
care.
10.3 Check List

Guide to Connector No.
D: DC controller PCB
R: reader controller PCB
Reader Unit (service mode: COPIER>I/O>R-CON)
Sensor
Connector No.
Checks
I/O
I/O address
Voltage
display display
PS39
R>J5012-2
Move the No. 1 mirror base
Light-blocking Present
5V
Scanner HP sensor
IO-P6-4
by hand.
plate
Absent
0V
Move the sensor lever by hand.
Copyboard Closed
5V
(ADF)
Open
0V
Present
0V
Absent
5V
PS40
R>J5012-5
IO-P6-7
PS43
R>J5006-2
Original sensor
IO-P4-6
Place an original on the copyboard. Paper
T03-1003-01
3-43 T
Printer Unit (service mode: COPIER>I/O>DC-CON)

Sensor
Connector No.
Checks
I/O
I/O address
PS2
D>J113-A14
Open and close the right lower cover. Cover
Right lower cover open/closed sensor --PS3
D>J103-B14
Open and close the manual feed tray. Tray
Manual feed tray open/closed sensor IO-P03-13

PS4
D>J106-B19
Claw jam sensor
IO-P01-14
PS5
D>J112-B2
Put paper over the point of detection. Paper
Open and close the right deck.
D>J112-A2
Right deck lifter sensor
IO-P03-1
PS7
D>J112-A5
Right deck paper sensor
IO-P01-7
PS8
D>J112-B8
Right deck limit sensor
IO-P02-4
PS9
D>J115-A14
Left deck open/closes sensor
IO-P03-12
PS10
D>J115-A5
Left deck lifter sensor
IO-P03-3
PS11
D>J115-A8
Left deck paper sensor
IO-P01-9
PS12
D>J115-A2
Left deck limit sensor
IO-P03-4
PS13
D>J110-A5
Cassette 3 paper sensor
IO-P01-3
PS14
D>J110-B5
IO-P01-5
PS15
D>J110-A11
Put paper in the right deck.
Paper
D>J110-B11
0V
Closed
5V
Open
0V
Closed
5V
Present
0V
Absent
5V
0V
Closed
5V
Present
5V
Absent
0V
5V
Paper
Present
Absent
0V
Paper
Present
5V
Open and close the left deck.
Left deck Open

Closed
5V
Put paper in the left deck.
Paper
Present
5V
Absent
0V
Paper
Present
5V
Absent
0V
Paper
Present
5V
Absent
0V
Put paper in the cassette 3.
Paper
Present
5V
Absent
0V
Paper
Present
5V
Open and close the cassette 3.
Cassette Open
Open and close the cassette 4.
Cassette Open
Closed
5V
Paper
Present
5V
Absent
0V
Paper
Present
0V
Absent
5V
Paper
Present
5V
Absent
0V
Absent
Absent
Cassette 3 open/closed sensor IO-P04-3

PS16
Open
Right deck Open
Right deck open/closed sensor IO-P03-11

PS6
Voltage
display display
Closed
Cassette 4 open/closed sensor IO-P04-4

PS17
D>J110-A2
Cassette 3 lifter sensor
IO-P03-5
PS18
D>J110-B2
IO-P03-6
PS19
D>J112-A8
Put paper over the point of
Right deck re-tray sensor
IO-P01-2
detection.
0V
0V
0V
0V
5V
0V
T03-1003-02
3-44 T
Sensor
Connector No.
Checks
I/O
I/O address
Voltage
display display
PS20
D>J115-A11
Left deck re-try sensor
IO-P02-2
detection.
PS21
D>J110-A8
Cassette 3 re-try sensor
IO-P02-0
detection.
PS22
D>J110-B8
Paper
Present
Absent
5V
0V
Paper
Present
5V
Absent
0V
Paper
Present
5V
IO-P02-1
detection.
Absent
0V
PS23
D>J108-B9
Put paper on the manual feed tray. Paper
Present
5V
Manual paper sensor
IO-P01-0
Absent
0V
PS24
D>J113-A5
Open the right cover, and move the Light-blocking Present
5V
IO-P01-8
sensor lever.
Absent
0V
PS25
D>J113-A2
5V
IO-P01-10
sensor lever.
0V
plate
plate
Absent
PS26
D>J110-A14
5V
IO-P01-4
sensor lever.
0V
plate
Absent
PS27
D>J110-B14
5V
IO-P01-6
sensor lever.
plate
Absent
0V
PS28
D>J113-B2
Paper
Present
5V
IO-P02-8
detection.
Absent
0V
PS29
D>J106-A9
Paper
Present
5V
IO-P01-1
detection.
Absent
0V
PS30
D>J107-B13
Paper
Present
5V
Absent
0V
Paper
Present
5V
Absent
0V
Paper
Present
5V
Absent
0V
Paper
Present
5V
Absent
0V
Paper
Present
5V
Absent
0V
Paper
Present
5V
Absent
0V
Paper
Present
5V
Absent
0V
Paper
Present
5V
Absent
0V
Duplex pre-registration sensor IO-P02-5
detection.
PS31
D>J107-B12
Duplex horizontal registration sensor IO-P02-6
detection.
PS32
D>J112-B5
IO-P03-2
detection.
PS33
D>J107-A16
IO-P01-15
detection.
PS34
D>J107-B14
Duplex sensor
IO-P02-11
detection.
PS35
D>J106-B1
Inside delivery sensor
IO-P01-12
detection.
PS36
D>J106-B20
Outside delivery sensor
IO-P01-11
detection.
PS37
D>J107-B15
Reversal sensor 1
IO-P02-3
detection.
T03-1003-03
3-45 T
Sensor
Connector No.
Checks
I/O
I/O address
Voltage
display display
PS38
D>J107-B16
Reversal sensor 2
IO-P02-7
detection.
PS45
D>J106-B5
Put paper over the
IO-P02-12
sensor.
PS46
D>J106-B2
Paper
Present
Absent
5V
0V
Web
Present
0V
Short
5V
Paper
Present
5V
Delivery assembly jam sensor IO-P06-2
detection.
Absent
0V
PS47
Remove the deck from the machine, Light-blocking Present
5V
Right deck level (upper) sensor IO-P05-8
and move the sensor lever.
Absent
0V
PS48
5V
Right deck level (lower) sensor IO-P05-12
0V
PS49
D>J115-B2
D>J115-B5
D>J115-B8
plate
plate
Absent
5V
Left deck level (upper) sensor IO-P05-9
0V
PS50
0V
5V
D>J115-B11
Left deck level (lower) sensor IO-P05-13
plate
plate
Absent
Absent
T03-1003-04
3-46 T
CHAPTER 4
TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/
MALFUNCTIONS
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS
1. Making Initial Checks in the Event of an Image Fault

1.1 Site Environment
The site must meet the following requirements:
1. The main source of power must provide the rated voltage. (The power plug must remain
connected throughout the night.)
2. The site must not be subject to high temperature/humidity (near a water faucet, water
boiler, humidifier) or low temperature. It must not be near a source of fire, and must not
be subject to dust.
3. The site must not be subject to ammonium gas.
4. The site must be free of the direct rays of the sun; otherwise, curtains must be provided
to block out the rays.
5. The room must be well ventilated.
6. The floor must keep the machine level.
7. The source of power must provide power night and day.
Check the site of installation to see if it meets the requirements.
1.2 Checking the Originals for Symptoms

Try to find out where the problem is caused by the originals or the machine:
1. The copy density is optimum when it is as indicated by the index (51).
2. An original with a reddish background prevents good contrast; e.g., red slips.
3. Check the original for density:
Memo
A diazo copy (used as an original) or an original with transparency tends to

produce prints that are likely to be judged foggy..
An original prepared in pencil tends to produce prints that are likely to be
judged light..
1.3 Copyboard Cover, Copyboard Glass, and Standard White

Plate
Check the copyboard cover, copyboard glass, and standard white plate for dirt and
scratches. If soiled, clean it with mild detergent or alcohol; if scratched, replace it.

1. Check each charging assembly for soiling and each charging wire for a fault (scratch,
rust, etc.).
2. Clean the charging wire of each charging assembly and the shielding plate; if the dirt is
excessive, replace it.
3. Check the type and the height of each charging assembly.
4. Check to make sure that each charging assembly is correctly mounted.
5. Check the charging wire cleaning pad (of each charging assembly) for displacement.
4-1 T
1.5 Checking the Developing Assembly

1) Check to make sure that the rolls on both ends of the developing assembly are in contact
with the drum.
Otherwise, light images may occur.
2) Check to make sure that the surface of the developing cylinder is coated with an even
layer of toner.
Otherwise, light images or uneven density may occur.
1.6 Checking the Paper

1) Check to see if the paper is of a recommended type.
Advise the user that the use of paper not of a recommended type may not bring abut the
best image quality.
2) Check to find out if the paper is moist.
Try using paper fresh out of package.
Advise the user that the use of moist paper will adversely affect transfer, generating poor
images. Advise him/her on the correct method of storing paper.
1.7 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts

Check with the Scheduled Servicing Chart and the Periodically Replaced Parts Table; if
any part has reached the end of its life, replace it.
1.8 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure

If the prints have uneven density (difference in density between front and rear), light images, or foggy background, perform the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure.
1.9 Others
Bringing in a machine from a cold to warm room in winter for installation can cause condensation inside the machine, leading to various problems.
Memo
4-2 T
1. Condensation in the scanner (glass, mirror, lens) can cause dark images.
2. Condensation in the charging system can cause electrical leakage.
3. Condensation on the pickup/feeding guide plate can cause paper feeding faults.
If condensation is noted, dry wipe the parts, or leave the machine alone
while powered for 60 min or so.
2. Samples of Image Faults

B. Samples of Image Faults
Note: The samples are made artificially to provide an idea of faulty copies, and may not represent actual faults.
(The NA-3 Test Sheet was copied in DIRECT mode on A4 paper, and reduced for printing.)
1. The copy is too light (halftone only).
2. The copy is too light (both halftone and solid black). 3. The copy is too light (entire copy, appreciably).
4. The copy has uneven density (darker along front).
5. The copy has uneven density (lighter along front).
6. The copy is foggy (entire copy).
7. The copy is foggy (feeding direction).
8. The copy has black lines

(feeding direction, fuzzy, thick).
9. The copy has black lines (feeding direction, fine).
10. The copy has white strips (feeding direction).
11. The copy has white lines (feeding direction).*
12. The copy has white strips (cross-feeding direction).
13. The back of the copy is soiled.
14. The copy has poor fixing.
15. The copy has displaced registration

(leading edge, extremely excessive margin).

(leading edge, excessive margin).

(leading edge, no margin).
18. The copy has blurred images.
19. The copy is foggy (cross-feeding direction).
20. The copy has poor sharpness.
21. The copy is blank.
22. The copy is solid black.
23. The copy has black or white dots after

replacement of the drum.
* Copies made with the copyboard lifted; faults
may also appear on normally made copies.
Strips may vary in width.
4- 4 T
COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC. iR5000i/ iR6000i REV.0 JUNE 2001
3. Troubleshooting Image Faults

3.1 The image is too light (halftone)
AE adjustment
1) Make prints in AE mode. Is the density normal?
YES: End.
Developing assembly
2) Are the rolls of the developing assembly in firm contact with the photosensitive drum?
YES: Check to see if the surface of the developing cylinder is coated
with an even layer of toner.
NO: Check to find out if the developing assembly locking unit is
mounted correctly.
4-5 T
3.2 The print is too light (including solid black area)

3.3 The print is too light (overall, appreciably)
1) Turn off the main power switch in the middle of printing. At this time, is
the toner image on the surface of the photosensitive drum (before transfer)
more or less normal?
YES: The cause is in a process that follows transfer. Go to step 3).
Developing assembly
NO: Check to see if the developing assembly locking unit is mounted
correctly.
YES: Check the control system of the developing bias.
3) Is the pre-transfer charging assembly fitted securely?
NO: Fit the charging assembly securely.
Transfer faults
4) Is the transfer/separation charging assembly fitted securely?
NO: Fit the transfer/separation charging assembly securely.
5) Try changing the setting of the following in service mode between 1
and 3: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FUZZY. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End. (The problem is due to the environment.)
NO: Set 0 to FUZZY, and go to the next step.
6) Measure the resistance between the transfer guide and the base (metal)
with a meter. Is it 0?
YES: Check to find out if the transfer guide is in contact with a metal
area (e.g., side plate of the feeding assembly).
NO: Check the high-voltage transformer (HVT) and the DC controller
PCB.
4-6 T
3.4 The print has uneven density (darker at front)

3.5 The print has uneven density (lighter at front)
Pre-exposure lamp
1) Does the pre-exposure lamp turn on at an even intensity across its length
during printing?
NO:
1.
Replace the pre-exposure lamp.
2.
Developing assembly
NO: Check to see if the developing assembly locking unit is mounted
correctly.
3) Is the surface of the developing cylinder coated with an even layer of
toner?
NO:
1.
Clean the edge of the blade of the developing assembly. (dry wiping)
2.
Clean the surface of the developing cylinder.
3.
Check to see if the toner inside the developing assembly is thicker
on one side.
YES: Check the nip of the fixing roller.
4-7 T
3.6 The print is foggy (overall)

Potential control system
1) Set 0 to the following in service mode to turn off potential control:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PC-CNT> Is the problem corrected?
YES: The cause is in the potential control mechanisms. Make checks according to the instructions for the potential control mechanism in
Chapter 3 Standards and Adjustments.
Photosensitive drum cleaner unit
2) Is the cleaning blade mounted correctly?
NO: Mount the cleaning blade correctly.
Pre-exposure lamp/DC controller PCB
3) Is the pre-exposure lamp on during printing?
NO:
1.
Replace the pre-exposure lamp.
2.
Developing assembly
4) Are the developing rolls worn?
YES: Replace the developing rolls.
Photosensitive drum
5) Is the photosensitive drum soiled?
YES: Clean the photosensitive drum.
NO: Replace the photosensitive drum.
4-8 T
3.7 The print if foggy vertically

3.8 The print has black lines (vertical, blurred, thick)
Reader unit
1) Does the problem occur on copy images only?
YES: The cause is in the reader unit. Check the following:
1.
Scanning lamp for dirt and life
2.
Reflecting plate, mirrors, lens, and glass for dirt
3.
Standard white plate (back of copyboard glass) for dirt
Fixing assembly
2) During printing, turn off the main power switch while paper is in the
feeding assembly; then, check the image on the paper. Is it normal?
YES: The cause is in a process after the fixing system. Check the following:
1.
Fixing assembly upper roller for dirt
2.
Web for dirt
Potential control system
3) Set 0 to the following in service mode to turn off potential control:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PC-CNT. Is the problem corrected?
YES: The problem is in the potential control system. Make checks for
the potential control system in Chapter 3 Standards and Adjustments.
4) Clean the primary charging wire, grid wire, and shielding plate. Is the
problem corrected?
YES: End.
Pre-exposure lamp
5) Clean the pre-exposure lamp. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Developing assembly, Photosensitive drum cleaner unit
toner?
NO:
1.
Check the edge of the blade of the developing assembly.
2.
Check the surface of the developing cylinder.
YES:
1.
Check the edge of the cleaning blade of the photosensitive drum.
2.
Check the photosensitive drum cleaner unit.
4-9 T
3.9 The print has black lines (vertical, fine)

Reader unit
1) Does the problem occur only in copy images?
YES:
1.
Check the standard white plate and mirrors for dirt.
2.
Execute the following in service mode:
Dust-proofing glass.
2) Clean the Dust-proofing glass. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Fixing system
3) During printing, turn off the main power switch while paper is in the
feeding assembly; then, check the image. Is it normal?
1.
Fixing assembly upper roller for scratches and black lines.
2.
Web for dirt
3.
Thermistor and separation claw for dirt, and reciprocating operation
4) Clean the primary charging assembly. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Photosensitive drum cleaner unit
5) Is there paper or foreign matter trapped in the cleaning blade assembly?
YES: Remove the foreign matter, and clean the cleaning blade and the
casing of the cleaner unit.
6) Are there scratches on the edge of the cleaning blade? (Feel the edge of
the blade with your finger to find out.)
YES: Turn it over to use the other edge. If both edges have scratches, replace it.
Photosensitive drum, Developing system
7) Are there scratches or black lines in the peripheral direction of the surface of the photosensitive drum?
YES: Replace the photosensitive drum.
If scratches are found, be sure to find out the cause.
NO: Check the developing system.
4-10 T
3.10
3.11
The print has white spots (vertical)

The print has white lines (vertical)
Reader unit
YES: The cause is in the reader unit. Check the following:
1.
Standard white plate (back of copyboard glass) for dirt
2.
3.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>SH-PS-ST.
Fixing assembly
2) Generate test print TYPE [00]. Turn off the main power switch immediately before the paper enters the fixing assembly, and check the image. Is it
normal?
1.
Fixing assembly upper roller for offset
Photosensitive drum
3) Are there scratches in the peripheral direction of the surface of the photosensitive drum that match the image?
YES: Find out the cause of the scratches, and replace the photosensitive
drum.
Developing assembly
toner?
NO: Check the edge of the blade of the developing assembly for paper
lint or the like.
Transfer/Separation charging assembly, Pre-transfer charging assembly
5) Clean the pre-transfer charging assembly and the transfer/separation
charging assembly. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Try changing the setting of the following in service mode:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FUZZY.
4-11 T
3.12
The print has white spots (horizontal)
Reader unit
YES:
1.
Check the scanner rail for foreign matter.
2.
Check the scanner cable for tension
Charging wire
2) Does the problem occur at even intervals?
YES: Clean each charging wire.
Developing assembly, Photosensitive drum
3) Does the problem occur at intervals of about 43 mm?
YES: Check the developing assembly:
1.
Clean the developing rolls.
2.
Dry wipe the surface of the developing cylinder.
3.
If scratches are found on the surface of the developing cylinder, replace the developing cylinder.
NO: Check the photosensitive drum.
1.
Clean the photosensitive drum.
2.
If scratches are found on the surface of the photosensitive drum,
find out the cause and replace the photosensitive drum.
4-12 T
3.13
The back of the print is soiled
Transfer guide
1) Is the transfer guide soiled with toner?
YES:
1.
Clean the transfer guide.
2.
Check the transfer guide bias.
3.
Check the developing assembly for leakage of toner.
Drum cleaner
2) Is the paper feeding assembly soiled with toner?
YES:
1.
Clean the feeding assembly.
2.
Check the drum cleaner assembly for leakage of waste toner.
Fixing assembly
3) Is the fixing assembly lower roller soiled?
YES:
1.
Clean the fixing assembly lower roller.
2.
Clean the fixing assembly inlet guide.
3.
Check the fixing upper roller and the web for dirt.
NO: Check the following:
1.
Registration roller for dirt.
2.
Delivery roller and separation claw for dirt.
4-13 T
3.14
The print has fixing faults
Paper
1) Is the paper of a type that has poor fixing performance (e.g., thick paper)?
YES: Set 2 (thick paper mode) in service mode:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FSPD-S.
Perform the following, and advise the user:
a.
Set the source of paper (cassette, deck) to Heavy.
Additional Function>common settings>store paper type>source of
paper>Heavy
b.
Advise the user to always use the selected source of paper (after
depositing thick paper) whenever using thick paper.
2) Is the paper of a recommended type?
NO: Try using recommended paper. If the results are good, advise the
user to use recommended paper.
Fixing assembly
3) Does the problem occur vertically?
YES: Check the fixing roller for scratches and dirt.
NO: Check the fixing roller for nip.
4-14 T
3.15
3.16
3.17
The print has a displaced leading edge

(appreciably large margin)
The print has a displaced leading edge (large margin)
The print has a displaced leading edge (no margin)
Placement of originals
1) Is the original placed correctly?
NO: Place the original correctly.
Pickup assembly
2) Make prints using the following source of paper. Is the displaced leading edge different?
1.
Let/right front deck
2.
Cassettes
3.
Side paper deck
4.
Duplex feeding assembly (double-sided print)
YES: Check the source of paper in question for the following:
1.
Life of each roller
2.
Paper lint on each roller
3.
Dirt on the paper path
Registration clutch, Registration roller
3) Make adjustments in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>FeedADJ>REGIST. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO:
1.
Check the registration roller for deformation/wear.
2.
Check the registration roller drive system.
4-15 T
3.18
The print has a blurred image
Reader unit
YES: Go to step 2).
NO: Go to step 5).
Scanner drive cable
2) While the scanner is moving, is the cable wound on the cable pulley in
lengths laid on top of one another?
YES:
1.
Route the cable once again.
2.
If the cable has a fault, replace it.
Scanner drive belt
3) Is the belt too taut or too slack?
YES:
1.
Attach the belt properly.
2.
If the belt has a fault, replace it.
Scanner rail
4) Move the No. 1 mirror base slowly by hand. Does it move smoothly?
YES: Check the each mirror to see if it is free of wobbling.
NO: Clean the surface of the scanner rail, and apply a small amount of
silicone oil so that the No. 1 mirror base moves smoothly.
Photosensitive drum
YES:
1.
Check the drum gear.
2.
Check the ends of the drum (in contact with the developing rolls)
for scratches and protrusions.
Drum drive gear
YES: Check the drum drive gear.
Developing gear
7) Does the problem occur at intervals of about 2.5 mm?
YES:
1.
Check the developing assembly.
2.
Check to find out if the end of the drum is coated with toner; if so,
clear it.
Drum drive system
YES: Check the cleaner assembly and the drum drive system.
Laser scanner unit
9) Is the problem noted at intervals of about 0.5 mm?
YES: Check the laser scanner unit. (The polygon mirror may be faulty.)
4-16 T
3.19
The print is foggy (horizontally)

1) Make a copy in Direct. Does the problem occur in the same position?
YES: Go to step 3).
Reader unit
2) Does the scanning lamp flicker while the scanner is moving forward?
YES: Check the scanning lamp and the inverter PCB.
NO: Check the scanner drive system of the reader unit.
Scanner, Feeding system (wobbling)
3) Make a reduced copy, and compare it against a copy made in Direct. Is
the position of the problem different?
NO: Check the scanner.
YES: Check the feeding system.
3.20
The print has poor sharpness
Reader assembly
1) Does the problem occur only in copy mages?
YES: Go to step 2).
NO: Go to step 4).
Copyboard glass
2) Is the copyboard glass coated with oil?
YES: Clean the copyboard glass.
Mirrors
3) Is the horizontal reproduction on in copies made in Direct within standards?
NO: Adjust the distance between No. 1 mirror and No. 2 mirror.
YES: Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, mirrors, and lens.
Dust-proofing glass, Photosensitive drum
4) Clean the durst-proofing glass. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Sharpness
5) Try changing the level of sharpness in service mode. Is the problem corrected?
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SHARP (A lager setting increases the sharpness.)
YES: End.
NO: Replace the photosensitive drum.
4-17 T
3.21
The print is blank
Reader unit
YES: Check the connection of the following PCBs; if normal, replace the
PCB.
1.
CCD/AP PCB
2.
DC controller PCB
2) Make the following selections in service mode:
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT.
(Copier) Are the readings <VDM> 6V of the <VDT> ?
(Printer) Are the readings <VDM-P> 6V of the <VDT-P> ?
NO:
1.
Check the primary charging assembly.
2.
Check the HVT PCB.
3.
Check the potential sensor and the potential control PCB.
Developing assembly locking unit
3) During printing, is the developing assembly locked against the photosensitive drum?
NO: Check the mechanism of the developing assembly locking unit.
Developing assembly drive assembly
4) During copying, is the developing assembly rotating?
NO: Check the drive system for the developing assembly.
5) Is the transfer charging assembly fitted fully and securely?
NO: Fit it securely.
6) Is leakage found in the transfer charging assembly?
YES: Check the transfer charging assembly.
NO:
1.
2.
Replace the main controller PCB.
4-18 T
3.22
The print is solid black
Reader unit/Printer unit (isolation)

YES: Go to step 2).
NO: Go to step 3).
Scanning lamp
2) Is the scanning lamp on?
NO: See The scanning lamp fails to turn on.
YES: Check the connection of the following PCBs; if normal, replace the
PCB.
1.
CCD/AP PCB
2.
DC controller PCB
Laser unit
COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC>LPOWER. Is the laser output present during
printing?
NO: Replace the laser unit.
YES:
1.
2.
Replace the main controller PCB.
4-19 T
4. Troubleshooting Malfunctions
4.1 Troubleshooting by Malfunction
4.1.1 E000
Thermistor (TH1, TH2)
1) Clear E000, and turn off and then on the main power switch. Make
the following selections in service mode:
COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG. Does <FIX-U> show an increase in
temperature?
YES: The thermistor is faulty. Check the following:
thermistor for mounting condition
thermistor for soiled surface
connection
Fixing heater (H1, H2; open circuit)
2) Is the electrical continuity of the fixing upper heater normal?
NO: Replace the fixing heater.
DC controller PCB, AC driver PCB (faulty)
3) Turn off the main power switch, and let the fixing upper roller cool.
Then, turn on the main power switch. Clear E000, and trun off and
then on the main power switch. Make the following in service
mode: COPIER>I/O>DC-CON. Are bit 4 and bit 5 of IO-P12 0?
YES: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the DC controller PCB.
NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the AC driver PCB.
4.1.2 E001
AC driver PCB (fixing heater drive circuit; short circuit)
1) While keeping the main power switch off, let the fixing upper roller
cool. While at it, check each thermistor for a soiled surface, poor
mounting, and poor connection.
Turn on the main power switch, and clear E001; then, turn off and
then on the power switch. Make the following selections in service
mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG. Is <FIX-U> about 230C or
higher?
YES: Replace the AC driver PCB.
Thermistor (TH1, TH2), DC controller PCB
2) Try replacing the thermistor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the DC controller PCB.
4-20 T
4.1.3 E002
4.1.4 E003
General condition
1) Turn on the main power switch, and clear E002/E003. Then, turn
off and then on the main power switch. Is the fixing heater operating?
NO: See The fixing heater fails to operate.
General condition
2) Is the connection of the connectors on the DC controller PCB and
in the fixing assembly good? In addition, is the wiring from the
thermistor to the DC controller PCB good?
NO: Correct the connection/wiring.
Main thermistor (TH1; mounting)
3) Is the thermistor in even contact with the fixing upper roller?
NO: Mount it correctly.
Main thermistor (TH1; soiling)
4) Clean the area of contact of the thermistor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Main thermistor (TH1; faulty)
5) Try replacing the thermistor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Fixing heater (H1, H2), DC controller PCB
6) Try replacing the heater. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
4.1.5 E004
Fixing heater (H1, H2), AC driver PCB, DC controller PCB
1) Try replacing the fixing heater. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
2) Try replacing the AC driver PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.1.6 E005
Fixing web
1) Is the fixing web taken up?
YES: Replace the web with a new one.
4-21 T
Service mode
2) After replacing the fixing web, has the fixing web counter been reset in service mode (COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB) ?
NO: Reset the counter.
Fixing web length detecting lever.
3) Is the position of the web length detecting lever correct?
YES: Correct the position of the lever.
Fixing web length sensor (PS45), DC controller PCB
4) Is the fixing web length sensor normal? (See the instructions on
how to check the photointerrupters.)
NO: Replace the sensor.
YES: Replace the DC controller PCB.
4.1.7 E010
Connector
1) Is the connector of the main motor connected?
NO: Connect the connector.
Main motor (M2), DC controller PCB
2) When the Start key is pressed, does the voltage between J108-A6
(+) and J108-A8 (-) on the DC controller PCB change from 0 to
about 5 V?
YES: Replace the main motor.
4.1.8 E012
Connector
1) Are the connectors of the drum (J601, J602) connected securely?
NO: Connect them securely.
DC power supply PCB
2) Turn on the main power switch, and measure the voltage of the
connectors of the drum motor. Is it as indicated?
J601-1:24 V (approx.)
J601-2:0 V
NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the DC power supply PCB.
4-22 T
Drum motor (M1), DC controller PCB

3) Turn on the main power switch, and measure the voltage of the
connectors of the drum motor. Is it as follows?
J602-2:5 V
J602-3:5 V
J602-1:0 V
YES: Replace the drum motor.
4.1.9 E013
Waste toner feedscrew (locked)
1) Is the waste toner feedscrew drive gear pushing the waste toner
feedscrew lock detecting switch (MSW2)?
YES: Connect the connector.
Waste toner feedscrew lock detecting switch (MSW2), DC controller PCB
2) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>I/O>DCCON. Is bit 15 of IO-P02 0?
YES: It is likely that the feedscrew inside the waste toner pipe is prevented from rotating because of some fault. If the outlet of the
waste toner pipe is clogged with toner, remove the waste toner
drive unit, and remove the toner. If otherwise, try turning the main
motor clockwise by hand. If the screw rotates, wait and see what
happens; if the screw does not rotate, replace the waste toner feeding unit.
4.1.10 E014
Connectors
1) Are the connectors of the fixing motor connected?
NO: Connect the connectors.
Fixing motor (M19), DC controller PCB
2) When the Start key is pressed, does the voltage between J106-B16
(+) and J106-B18 (-) on the DC controller PCB change from 0 to
about 5 V?
YES: Replace the fixing motor.
4-23 T
4.1.11 E020
General condition
1) Is the developing assembly locking plate mounted correctly?
NO: Mount the plate correctly.
General condition
2) Is the shutter releasing member of the hopper mouth mounted correctly to the developing assembly locking plate?
NO: It is likely that the inside of the hopper is clogged with toner. Remove and then mount back the shutter releasing member to remove
the clog, or replace the hopper unit.
General condition, Developing assembly toner sensor (TS1)
3) Is the developing assembly adequately provided with toner?
YES: Check the developing assembly toner sensor.
General condition, Hopper toner sensor (TS2)
4) Is the hopper adequately provided with toner?
NO: Check the hopper toner sensor.
Hopper connector, Hopper supply motor (M10)
5) Is the connection of the hopper connector normal?
NO: Connect the connector securely.
YES: Check the hopper supply motor.
4.1.12 E032
Connector
1) Is the remote diagnostic device connected securely?
NO: Connect it securely.
Remote diagnostic device
2) Try replacing the remote diagnostic device. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Check the wiring; if normal; replace the main controller PCB.
4.1.13 E061
Laser shutter
1) Remove the laser scanner unit. Is the laser shutter mechanism normal?
NO: Correct the laser shutter mechanism.
Potential sensor unit
2) Is the potential sensor normal? (See Checking the Surface Potential Control System under Standards and Adjustments.)
NO: Adjust or replace the potential sensor unit.
4-24 T
Laser unit, DC controller PCB

3) Try replacing the laser unit. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.1.14 E100
BD PCB
1) Try replacing the BD PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Laser output
YES: End.
Laser scanner unit, DC controller PCB
YES: End.
4.1.15 E110
Connectors
1) Is the connector (J116) on the DC controller PCB connected securely?
Connector
2) Open the manual feed cover, and remove the developing assembly
locking plate. Is the relay connector (5-pin) behind the laser scanner plate connected securely? (Do NOT detach the lid of the laser
scanner unit.)
Laser scanner unit, DC controller PCB
3) Try replacing the laser scanner unit. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.1.16 E121
Foreign object
1) Is there a foreign object that hinders the rotation of the fan in the
rotating mechanism of the controller cooling fan?
YES: Remove the foreign object.
4-25 T
Connector
2) Is the connector (J108) on the DC controller PCB connected correctly?
Controller cooling fan (FM4), DC controller PCB
3) Try replacing the controller cooling fan. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.1.17 E196
EEPROMs
1) If the EEPROMs (6 pc.) have been removed from the DC controller
PCB, have they been put back in their initial sockets?
IC Nos. and Stickers on the EEPROMs
IC104: brown, IC105: red, IC109: yellow,
IC110: green, IC127: blue, IC130: white
NO: Fit the EEPROM to the correct socket.
EEPROMs
2) Are all EEPROMs securely connected to the sockets of the DC controller PCB?
NO: Connect them correctly.
Data
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DC-CON. Is the problem corrected? Thereafter, be sure to enter the service mode data once
again.
YES: Check the operation; if normal, end the work.
EEPROM, DC controller PCB
4) Try replacing the EEPROM. Is the problem corrected?
Thereafter, be sure to enter the service mode data once again.
YES: End.
4.1.18 E202
General condition
1) Is the scanner in its home position when E202 is indicated?
NO: See The mirror assembly 1 fails to move.
4-26 T
Scanner HP sensor (PS39), Reader controller PCB

2) Is the scanner HP sensor normal? (Check the instructions on how
to check photointerrupters.)
YES: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the reader controller PCB.
4.1.19 E204
Wrong operation
1) Turn off and then on the main power switch. Is the problem corrected?
YES: Check the operation once again; if normal, end the work.
Sensor (sensitivity)
2) Adjust the sensitivity of the ADF read sensor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Read sensor (S2)
3) Try replacing the ADF read sensor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
ADF controller PCB, Reader controller PCB
4) Try replacing the ADF controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the reader controller PCB.
4.1.20 E220
Wiring
1) Is the wiring from the xenon lamp to the reader controller PCB
normal?
NO: Disconnect and then connect the connectors; correct or replace the
wiring.
Inverter PCB, Reader controller PCB
2) Try replacing the lamp inverter PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Replace the reader controller PCB.
4.1.21 E225
Xenon lamp (LA2)
1) Try replacing the xenon lamp. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4-27 T
CCD unit, Reader controller PCB

2) Try replacing the CCD unit. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.1.22 E240
Wiring
1) Is the wiring from the main controller PCB to the DC controller
PCB normal?
YES: End.
DC controller PCB, Main controller PCB
2) Try replacing the DC controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the main controller PCB.
4.1.23 E243
Wrong operation
1) Turn off and then on the power switch. Is the problem corrected?
Control panel CPU PCB, Main controller PCB
2) Try replacing the control panel CPU PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.1.24 E248
EEPROMs
1) Are the EEPROMs connected securely to the sockets of the reader
controller PCB?
NO: Connect them securely.
Data (faulty)
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>R-CON. Is the problem corrected?
Thereafter, be sure to enter the service mode data.
EEPROM, Reader controller PCB
3) Try replacing the EEPROM. Is the problem corrected?
Thereafter, be sure to enter the service mode data newly.
YES: End.
4-28 T
4.1.25 E302
Connectors
1) Are the connectors (J6001/J6002) on the CCD/AP PCB and the
connectors (J5002/J5003) on the reader controller PCB connected
securely?
NO: Connect the connectors securely.
CCD unit
2) Try replacing the CCD unit. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Reader controller PCB, Main controller PCB
3) Try replacing the reader controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.1.26 E601
a. E601-0000
Wiring
1) Are the connection and the cable of the connector (J1017) on the
main controller PCB and the connector (J1551) on the hard disk
drive normal?
NO: Correct the connection/cable.
Hard disk drive (HDD), Main controller PCB
2) Try replacing the hard disk drive and downloading the system software. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Replace the main controller PCB.
b. E601-0001
Wiring
1) Are the connection and the cable of the connector (J122) on the DC
controller PCB and the connector (J1015) on the main controller
PCB normal?
DC controller PCB, Main controller PCB
YES: End.
4-29 T
4.1.27 E602
Wiring
1) Are the connection and the cable of the connector (J1017) on the
main controller PCB and the connector (J1551) on the hard disk
drive normal?
Hard disk drive (HDD), Main controller PCB
2) Try replacing the hard disk drive and downloading the system software. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.1.28 E607
Foreign object
rotating mechanism of the hard disk fan?
Connector
Hard disk fan (FM7), DC controller PCB
3) Try replacing the hard disk fan. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.1.29 E677
Connector
1) Is the connection of the printer board (accessory) normal?
NO: Correct the connection.
Printer board, Main controller PCB
2) Try replacing the printer board.
YES: End.
4-30 T
4.1.30 E710
a. E71-0001
Wrong operation, Reader controller PCB
YES: Check the operation once gain; if normal, end the work.
b. E710-0002
Wrong operation, DC controller PCB
c. E71-0003
Wrong operation, Main controller PCB
4.1.31 E711
a. E711-0001
Wrong operation
Connector, ADF controller PCB
2) Is the interface cable between the ADF controller PCB and the
reader controller PCB normal?
NO: Correct the cable.
YES: Replace the ADF controller PCB.
b. E711-0002
Wrong operation
Connector, Finisher controller PCB
2) Is the interface cable between the finisher controller PCB and the
DC controller PCB normal?
YES: Replace the finisher controller PCB.
4-31 T
c. E711-0003
Wrong operation
Connector, Remote diagnostic device PCB
2) Is the interface cable between the remote diagnostic device PCB
and the main controller PCB normal?
YES: Replace the remote diagnostic device PCB.
4.1.32 E712
Wrong operation
Connector
2) Is the cable between the ADF controller PCB and the reader controller PCB normal?
ADF controller PCB, Reader controller PCB
3) Try replacing the ADF controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.1.33 E713
Wrong operation
Connectors
2) Is the interface cable between the finisher controller PCB and the
DC controller PCB normal?
Finisher controller PCB, DC controller PCB
3) Try replacing the finisher controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4-32 T
4.1.34 E717
Connector
1) Is the remote diagnostic device PCB connected securely?
Remote diagnostic device PCB, Main controller PCB
2) Try replacing the remote diagnostic device PCB. Is the problem
corrected?
YES: End.
4.1.35 E719
Connector
1) Is the coin vendor connected securely?
NO: Connect the coin vendor securely.
Coin vendor, Main controller PCB
2) Try connecting to a different coin vendor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.1.36 E732
Wrong operation
Connectors, Reader controller PCB
2) Is the connection of the connector (J1014) on the main controller
PCB and the connector (J5004) on the reader controller PCB normal? Further, is the cable between these connectors normal?
NO: Correct the connectors/cable.
YES: Replace the reader controller PCB.
If the reader unit is detected at time of installation,
3) Turn off and then on the power to recover.
4.1.37 E733
Wrong operation
4-33 T
Connectors, DC controller PCB

PCB and the connector (J122) on the DC controller PCB normal?
Further, is the cable between these connectors normal?
YES: Replace the DC controller PCB.
4.1.38 E740
Wrong operation
General condition
2) Is the detail code 0002?
YES: Go to step 4.
Connectors
3) Are the connectors of the Network PCB and the connectors of the
main controller PCB normal? Further, is the cable between these
connectors normal?
MAC address setting
4) Have the MAC address checked by the network administrator, and
reset it. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
LAN card, Main controller PCB
5) Try replacing the Network PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
If the reader unit is detected at time of installation,
3) Turn off and then on the power to recover.
4.1.39 E741
Disabling each PCI slot in service mode (BOARD>PCI1-OFF through PCI3-OFF) will
limit the occurrence of errors.
Wrong operation
Board
2) Is the connection between the riser PCB and the main controller
PCB normal? Further, is the cable normal?
4-34 T
Riser board, Main controller PCB

3) Try replacing the riser PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.1.41 E743
Wrong operation
Connector, Main controller PCB
PCB and the connector (J5004) on the reader controller PCB normal? Further, is the cable between these connectors normal?
YES: Replace the main controller PCB.
4.1.42 E804
Foreign object
rotating mechanism of the DC power supply fan?
Connector
DC power supply fan (FM6), DC controller PCB
3) Try replacing the DC power supply fan. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.1.43 E805
a. E805-0001
Foreign object
rotating mechanism of the heat discharge fan?
Connector
4-35 T
Heat discharge fan (FM3), DC controller PCB

3) Try replacing the heat discharge fan. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
b. E805-0002
Foreign object
rotating mechanisms of the feeding fan?
Connector
Feeding fan (FM1), DC controller PCB
3) Try replacing the feeding fan. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.1.44 E824
Foreign object
rotating mechanisms of the primary charging cooling fan?
Fan (direction, mounting condition)
2) Are the orientation and the mounting of the primary charging cooling fan normal?
NO: Mount the cooling fan correctly.
Connector
3) Is the connector (J103) on the DC controller connected securely?
Primary charging cooling fan (FM6), DC controller PCB
4) Try replacing the primary charging cooling fan. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4-36 T
4.2.1 AC power is absent

Power plug
1) Is the power plug connected to the power outlet?
NO: Connect the power plug.
Power source
2) Is there rated AC voltage present at the power outlet?
NO: The problem is not in the machine. Advise the user.
Leakage breaker
3) Has the leakage breaker located in the left bottom of the machine
turned on (i.e., is the switch at the marking)?
NO: Remove the cause that turned on the leakage breaker, and shift the
switch of the leakage breaker to the | marking.
Power cord, Line noise filter (LF1)
4) Try replacing the power cord/line filter. Is the problem corrected?
NO: Check the wiring of the AC power supply line and the connectors
for poor contact.
Main power switch (SW1), Wiring
when the switch is turned on and when the
5) Is the resistance 0
switch is turned off?
NO: Replace the power switch.
YES: Check the wring of the AC power line and the connectors for poor
contact.
4.2.2 DC power is absent

AC power supply
1) Is there rated AC voltage between connectors J4001-1 and J4001-2
on the DC power supply PCB?
NO: See AC power is absent.
Fuse (F4001)
2) Is the fuse on the DC power supply PCB blown?
YES: Remove the cause of the fuse, and replace the fuse.
4-37 T
Wiring, DC load, DC power supply PCB

3) Turn off the main power switch. Is the voltage between the following terminals on the DC power supply PCB as indicated when the
power is turned on in about 3 min?
Connector
Output voltage
Remarks
J4014-1 to 5
3VA1
3%
J4017-1 to 5
3VA2
3%
J4003-7
3VA3
3%
J4015-1 to 3
3VB
+ 2%, - 2.5%
J4003-5
5V
3%
J4004-1
5V
3%
J4008-1
5V
3%
J4009-1
5V
3%
J4016-1, 2
5V
3%
J4003-3, 4
12VU
5%
J4005-1
24VU1
5%
J4004-3
24VU2
5%
J4009-3
24VU2
5%
J4003-1
24VU3
5%
J4006-1
24VU3
5%
J4007-1, 3
24VU4
5%
J4010-1
24VU4
5%
J4011-1
24VU4
5%
J4013-2
24VA
+ 7%, - 5%
However, the above output voltages assume tolerances of 10% in
the AC input power.
YES: Check the wiring from the DC power supply PCB to each load.
NO: Replace the DC power supply PCB.
4.2.3 Pickup fails

General condition
1) Slide out and then in the cassette. Is the sound of the lifter falling
and the lifter motor rotating heard?
NO: See The lifter fails to move up.
Sensor
2) In service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM), find out which sensor
has detected the jam. Is the sensor normal?
NO: Check the wiring and the sensor lever; if normal, replace the sensor.
Drive motor
3) Is each drive motor mounted correctly?
NO: Mount the motor correctly.
4-38 T
Right upper cover, Right lower cover

4) Are the right upper cover and the right lower cover closed fully?
NO: Close the covers. If there is a gap, correct it.
Pressure spring
5) Are the springs of the right upper cover and the right lower cover
exerting pressure on the vertical path rollers 1, 2, 3, and 4?
NO: Check the pressure springs.
Pre-registration motor (M17), vertical path duplex/feeding motor (M25), Vertical path upper
motor (M26), Vertical path lower motor (M27)
6) Open the right upper cover and the right lower cover, and put paper over the cover open/closed sensor assembly; then, turn on
(MTR-ON) the motor in question in service mode
(COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>MTR). Does the vertical path
rollers 1, 2, 3, and 4 or the pre-registration roller rotate?
Motor
Code
22
Vertical duplex/ feeding motor
15
Vertical path upper motor
17
16
NO: Check the wiring and the motor driver PCB; if normal, replace the
motor.
Registration roller clutch
7) Is the leading edge of paper as far as the registration roller assembly?
YES: See The registration roller fails to rotate.
Pickup assembly
8) Open the right upper cover and the right lower cover, and put paper over the door switch. When the Start key is pressed, does the
feeding/separation roller rotate to move paper normally?
NO: Check the pickup assembly by referring to 5. Troubleshooting
Feeding Faults.
Right deck pickup motor (M11), Left deck pickup motor (M24), Cassette 3/4 pickup motor
(M12), DC controller PCB
9) Set the meter range to 30 VDC, and connect the meter probes to the
connectors on the DC controller PCB of the motor in question as
indicated. Does the voltage change from 24 to 0 V when the Start
key is pressed?
Motor
+
J104-A5, A6
GND
J104-B4, B3
GND
J104-A11, A12
GND
YES: Check the wiring and the motor driver PCB; if normal, replace the
motor.
4-39 T
4.2.4 The lifter fails to move up (pickup from front deck)

Gear, Lever
1) Remove the deck, and move up the lifter by hand. Does it move
smoothly?
NO: Check the gear and the lever.
Spring, Lever
2) Push up the pickup roller releasing lever with a finger. Does the
pickup roller move down?
NO: Remove the pickup assembly, and check the springs and the lever.
Right deck open/closed sensor (PS5), Left deck open/closed sensor (PS9)
3) When the deck is inserted, is the voltage of the following connectors
on the DC controller PCB about 5 V?
Sensor
+
Right deck open/closed sensor
J112-B2
J112-B1
Left deck open/closed sensor
J115-A14
J115-A13
NO: Check the sensor flag and the wiring; if normal, replace the sensor.
Right deck limit sensor (PS8), Left deck limit sensor (PS12)
4) Is the voltage of the following connectors on the DC controller PCB
about 0 V?
Sensor
+
J112-B8
J112-B7
J115-A2
J115-A1
Right deck lifter motor (M5), Left deck lifter motor (M4), DC controller PCB
5) Turn on the main power switch, and set the meter range to 30 VDC;
then, connect the - probe of the meter to GND and the + probe to
the following connectors of the DC controller PCB. Does the voltage
change from about 0 V to 24 V when the deck is inserted?
Motor
+
Right deck lifter motor
J105-13
GND
Left deck lifter motor
J105-12
GND
YES: Check the wiring and the motor drive PCB; if normal, replace the
motor.
NO: Replace the controller PCB.
4.2.5 The lifter fails to move up (pickup from cassette)

Cassette size detecting switch, Service mode
1) Is the size of the cassette indicated on the control panel?
NO: Check the cassette size detecting switch. Or, check the cassette paper size setting in service mode.
4-40 T
Cassette latch
2) Is the movement of the cassette open button assembly normal?
Spring, Lever
3) Move up the pickup roller releasing lever with your finger. Does the
pickup roller move down?
NO: Remove the pickup assembly, and check the spring and the lever.
Cassette 3 open/closed sensor (PS15), Cassette 4 open/closed sensor (PS16)
4) When the cassette is inserted, is the voltage of the following connectors on the DC controller PCB about 5 V?
Sensor
+
Cassette 3 open/closed sensor
J110-A11 J110-A10
J110-B11 J110-B10
Cassette 3 lifter motor (M20), Cassette 4 lifter motor (M21), DC controller PCB
5) Turn on the main power switch, and set the meter range to 30 VDC;
then, connect the - probe of the meter to GND and the + probe to
the following connectors from the DC controller PCB. When the
cassette is inserted, does the voltage change from about 0 to 24 V?
Motor
+
Cassette 3 lifter motor
J105-11
GND
J105-10
GND
YES: Check the wiring and the motor drive PCB; if normal, replace the
motor.
4.2.6 Pickup fails (manual feed)

Wiring
1) Is the connector (to the machine) of the manual pickup tray assembly connected correctly?
NO: Connect the connector correctly.
General condition
2) Is the leading edge of paper as far as the registration roller?
YES: See The registration roller fails to rotate.
Feeding roller, Separation roller
3) Is the orientation of the feeding roller and the separation roller correct?
NO: Mount the roller correctly.
Manual feed paper sensor (PS23)
4) When paper is placed on the manual feed pickup tray, does bit 0 of
COPIER>I/O>DC-CON>IO-P01 change from 1 to 0?
NO: Check the wiring and the sensor flag; if normal, replace the sensor.
4-41 T
Manual feed pickup clutch (CL3)

5) Execute code: 1 by making the following selections in service
mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>CL. Is the sound of the
clutch operating heard?
NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the clutch.
Manual feed releasing solenoid (SL2)
6) Execute code : 5 by making the following selections in service
mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>SL. Does the solenoid
turn on?
NO: Check the wiring and the link; if normal, replace the solenoid.
DC controller PCB
YES: End.
NO: Check the wiring to the solenoid and the connection of the connectors.
4.2.7 The vertical path roller fails to rotate

Belt, Gear, Coupling
1) It the drive from the vertical path duplex/feeding motor (M25)
transmitted to each vertical path roller through the belt, gear, and
coupling?
NO: Mount the belt, gear, and coupling correctly.
Vertical path duplex/feeding motor (M25)
mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>MTR. Does the motor
operate?
motor.
Vertical path upper motor (M26)
mode : COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>MTR. Does the motor
operate?
motor.
Vertical path lower motor (M27)
mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>PART>CHK>MTR. Does the motor
operate?
motor.
4-42 T
Pre-registration motor (M17)

mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>MTR. Does the motor
operate?
motor.
DC controller PCB
YES: End.
4.2.8 The registration roller fails to operate

Gear, Coupling
1) Is the drive from the main motor (M2) transmitted to the registration roller through the gear and coupling?
NO: Mount the gear and coupling correctly.
Registration paper sensor (PS29)
2) Place paper over the sensor. Does bit 1 of COPIER>I/O>DCCON>IO-P01 in service mode change from 0 to 1?
NO: Check the wiring and the sensor flag; if normal, replace the sensor.
Registration roller clutch (CL2)
mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>CL. Does the clutch
operate?
NO: Check the wiring and fixing/feeding relay PCB; if normal, replace
the clutch.
DC controller PCB
YES: End.
4.2.9 The No. 1 mirror mount fails to operate

Cable (broken, displaced)
1) Is the scanner drive cable routed correctly?
NO: Route the scanner drive cable correctly.
Foreign obstacle (in scanner path)
2) Is the scanner rail free of dirt? Further, does the scanner move
smoothly when pushed by hand?
NO: Check the scanner rail for surface dirt and foreign matter or object;
as necessary, clean, lubricate, or correct.
If the surface of the rail is soiled, clean it with alcohol, and apply a
small amount of silicone oil (FY9-6010).
4-43 T
Wiring, Connector
3) Are the connection and the wiring of the connectors from J5004 on
the reader controller PCB to J1014 on the main controller PCB
normal?
NO: Correct the wiring, and connect the connectors securely.
Scanner motor (M3), Reader controller PCB
4) Try replacing the Scanner wotor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.2.10 The pre-exposure LED fails to turn on

Pre-exposure LED (LA1)
1) Press the Start key. Does the state of bit 4 in service mode
(COPIER>I/O>DC-CON>IO-P15) change from 0 to 1?
YES: Check the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the pre-exposure
LED; if normal, replace the pre-exposure LED.
Pre-exposure LED (LA1), DC controller PCB
2) Set the meter range to 30 VDC. Does the voltage between J103-A3
(+) and J103-A4 (GND) on the DC controller PCB change from 0 to
24 V?
YES: Check the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the pre-exposure
LED; if normal, replace the pre-exposure LED.
4.2.11 The scanning lamp fails to turn on

Lamp (mounting)
1) Is the scanning lamp mounted correctly?
NO: Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet, and mount the
lamp correctly.
2) Press the Start key. Does bit 7 in service mode (COPIER>I/O>RCON>IO-P1) change from 1 to 0?
Inverter PCB
3) Try replacing the inverter PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Scanning lamp (LA2), Reader controller PCB
4) Try replacing the scanning lamp. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4-44 T
4.2.12 The hopper stirring motor (M9) fails to operate

General condition
1) Execute code: 5 (MTR-ON) in service mode
(COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>MTR). Does the motor operate?
NO: Go to step 3).
Hopper toner sensor (TS2)
2) Is bit 10 in service mode (COPIER>I/O>DC-CON>IO-P02) 0, indicating the absence of toner?
YES: If the hopper is adequately supplied with toner, replace the sensor.
DC controller PCB
(COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>MTR) to turn on the motor.
Does the voltage between J103-B7 (+) and J103-B8 (GND) on the
controller PCB change to about 24 V?
Relay connector (J153, J158)
4) Is the connection of the relay connector secure?
4.2.13 The hopper supply motor (M10) fails to operate

General condition
(COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>MTR). Doe the motor operate? Be sure to turn off the motor within about 10 sec to prevent
clogging with toner.
NO: Go to step 3).
Hopper toner sensor (TS2)
2) Is bit 10 in service mode (COPIER>I/O>DC-CON>IO-02) 0, indicating the absence of toner?
YES: If the hopper is adequately supplied with toner, replace the sensor.
DC controller PCB
3) Execute code: 6 in service mode (MTR-ON)
(COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>MTR) to operate the motor.
Does the voltage between J103-B5 (+) and J103-B6 (GND) on the
DC controller PCB change to about 24 V?
Relay connector (J153, J155)
4) Is the connection of the relay connector secure?
4-45 T
4.2.14 The drum heater fails to operate

General condition
1) Open the front cover, and release the fixing/feeding unit. Is the end
of the photosensitive drum warm? (Do not touch the surface of the
photosensitive drum.)
YES: The drum heater is normal.
Environment switch
2) Is the setting of the environment switch located at the left bottom of
the machine ON (powered at all times)?
NO: Set it to ON. If set to OFF, it is linked to the main power
switch.
DC controller PCB, AC driver PCB
3) Set the meter range to 12 VDC. Connect the probes of the meter to
J102-B8 (+) and J102-B7 (-) on the DC controller PCB. Is the voltage between terminals about 2 V during copying and 0 V during
standby?
Drum heater (H3)
4) Remove the drum, and set the meter range to x1. Does the index
of the meter swing when the probes of the meter are connected to
both ends of the heater?
NO: Replace the drum heater.
YES: Replace the heater control PCB.
4.2.15 The Add Toner message fails to turn on

General condition
1) Is there toner in the hopper?
YES: Go to step 2).
Hopper toner sensor (TS2), DC controller PCB
2) Replace the hopper toner sensor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.2.16 The Add Toner message fails to turn off

Toner (amount)
1) Is there toner in the hopper?
NO: Supply toner. (Find out how the user is supplying toner.)
4-46 T
Hopper toner sensor (TS2), DC controller PCB

2) Is bit 10 in service mode (COPIER>I/O>DC-CON>IO-P02) 0, indicating the absence of toner?
YES: Replace the hopper toner sensor.
4.2.17 The Set Control Card message fails to turn on

CC-IV
1) Can a print be made without inserting a control card?
YES: Check to find out if the connector of the CC-IV has a short circuit.
Control panel, Main controller PCB
2) Try replacing the control panel. Is the message indicated?
YES: End.
NO: Check the wiring from the control panel to the main controller
PCB; if normal, replace the main controller PCB.
4.2.18 The Set Control Card message fails to turn off

Control card
1) Is the control card inserted correctly?
NO: Insert the control card correctly.
CC-IV, Main controller PCB
2) Can a print be made by pressing the Start key?
YES: Replace the CC-IV.
4.2.19 The Add Paper message fails to turn on (front deck)

Right deck paper sensor (PS7), Left deck paper sensor (PS11)
1) Is the deck paper sensor mounted correctly? Further, is the movement of the sensor flag normal?
NO: Mount the sensor correctly.
4.2.20 The Add Paper message fails to turn off (cassette 3/4)
Cassette 3 paper sensor (PS13), Cassette 4 paper sensor (PS14)
1) Is the cassette paper sensor mounted correctly? Further, is the
movement of the sensor flag normal?
NO: Mount the sensor correctly.
4-47 T
Cassette pickup assembly

2) Is the lifter mechanism of the cassette normal?
NO: Replace the lifter unit or the cassette pickup assembly.
4.2.21 The fixing heater fails turn on

Fixing/feeding lock sensor (MSW3)
1) Is the fixing/feeding lock sensor mounted correctly?
NO: Mount the fixing/feeding lock sensor correctly.
YES: Replace the sensor.
2) Connect the probes of the meter to both terminals of the thermal
switch. Is there electrical continuity?
NO: Replace the thermal switch.
Main relay (RL1)
3) Try replacing the main relay. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Fixing heater (H1, H2)
4) Connect the probes of the meter to both terminals of the fixing
heater. Is there electrical continuity?
NO: Replace the fixing heater.
AC driver PCB, DC controller PCB
5) Is the voltage between the following connectors on the DC controller PCB about 5 V?
Heater
+
Main heater (H1)
J102-B11
J102-B7
Sub heater (H2)
J102-B9
J102-B7
YES: Replace the AC driver PCB.
4.2.22 Pickup fails (paper deck)

Right upper cover, Right lower cover
1) Are the right upper cover and the right lower cover closed properly?
NO: Close the covers.
Lifter
2) Slide out the compartment from the deck. Does the lifter move
down? Further, does the lifter move up when the compartment is
slid inside the deck?
NO: See The deck lifter fails to move up.
4-48 T
Deck pickup roller

3) Does the deck pickup roller rotate?
YES: If the roller is soiled, clean it with alcohol. If it is deformed because of wear, replace it.
Belt (displacement)
4) Is the belt used to transmit drive to the deck pickup roller attached
correctly?
NO: Attach the belt correctly.
Gear
5) Is the drive from the deck main motor transmitted through the
gear?
NO: Check the gear.
Deck pickup clutch (CL102), Deck driver PCB
6) Measure the voltage of the connector on the deck driver PCB. Does
the voltage change from 24 to 0 V when the Start key is pressed?
Clutch
+
Deck pickup clutch
J05-11
J05-12
YES: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the clutch.
NO: Replace the deck driver PCB.
4.2.23 The deck lifter fails to move up (side paper deck)

Deck
1) Is the deck mounted correctly?
NO: Mount the deck correctly.
Lifter cable
2) Is the lifter cable routed correctly?
NO: Route the lifter cable correctly.
Spring, Lever
3) Push up the deck pickup roller releasing lever with your finger.
Does the roller move down?
NO: Remove the pickup assembly, and check the spring and the lever.
Deck lifter motor (M102)
4) Does the deck lifter motor rotate?
YES: Go to step 6).
Deck open detecting switch (SW101), Deck driver PCB
5) Does the voltage between J10-1 (+) and J10-3 (GND) on the deck
driver PCB change from about 0 to 5 V when the deck is closed?
YES: Check the wiring to the switch; if normal, replace the switch.
4-49 T
Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch (SW102), Deck driver PCB
6) Is the voltage between J08-8 (+) and J08-7 (GND) on the deck
driver PCB as follows when the deck is opened/closed?
opened:
0V
closed:
5V
YES: Check the lever and the wiring; if normal, replace the switch.
4-50 T
5. Troubleshooting Feeding Faults

5.1 Paper Jams
Jams occurring in the machine may be grouped into the following by location:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Pickup assembly
Separation/feeding assembly
Fixing/delivery assembly
Drum cleaning assembly
Duplex reversing assembly
Feeding assembly
The troubleshooting procedures that follow are organized according to location; to find
out the location and the nature of a jam, use service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM).
[3]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[1]
[6]
F04-501-01
4-51 T
5.1.1 Pickup assembly

Pickup assembly
1) Is the print paper curled or wavy?
YES: Replace the paper. Advise the user on the correct method of storing
paper.
2) Try paper of a recommended type. Is the problem corrected?
YES: Advise the user to use recommended paper.
DC controller PCB, Pickup clutch
DC controller PCB, Pickup clutch
3) Are the pickup roller of the selected cassette or the deck and the
feeding roller of the manual feed tray rotating during printing?
NO: See "Pickup fails" for each source of paper.
Pickup roller
4) Is the pickup roller deformed or worn?
YES: Replace the pickup roller.
Guide plate
NO: Check the guide plate for deformation.
5.1.2 Separation/Feeding assembly

Print paper
1) Is the leading edge of print paper past the registration roller?
YES: Go to step 5.
NO: Check the distance between the upper and lower guides in front of
the registration roller; then, make adjustments as needed.
Registration roller
2) Is the coupling of the registration roller engaged correctly?
NO: Mount the fixing/feeding unit correctly.
3) Is the registration roller deformed (worn) or soiled?
YES: If dirt is found, clean it with alcohol; if deformation (i.e., wear) is
found, replace it.
4) Are the retaining springs on both ends of the registration roller
mounted correctly?
NO: Mount them correctly.
YES: Check the transfer guide for foreign matte and deformation.
Registration clutch
5) Is the operation of the registration clutch normal?
NO: Check the registration clutch.
4-52 T
Transfer/Separation charging assembly

6) Is the transfer/separation charging assembly mounted securely?
YES: Check the transfer/separation charging assembly.
7) Are there burrs on the paper guide of the transfer/separation
charging assembly?
YES: Remove the burrs.
8) Is there foreign matter on the transfer/separation charging assembly?
YES: Remove the foreign matter.
Print paper
9) Try paper of a recommended type. Is the problem corrected?
Separation claws (cleaning assembly)
10) Are the separation claws under the cleaning assembly damaged?
YES: Replace the separation claws.
11) Is the spring of the separation claw displaced?
YES: Mount the spring correctly.
Feeding belt
12) Are the three feeding belts rotating correctly?
NO: Check the belts and pulleies.
Feeding fan
YES: Check to make sure that the feeding fan is operating.
5.1.3 Fixing/Delivery assembly

Separation claws (delivery assembly)
1) Are the separation claws worn/deformed?
YES:
1.
Replace the separation claws.
2.
If dirt is found, clean them with solvent.
Upper/lower roller (fixing assembly)
2) Is the upper/lower roller of the fixing assembly worn or scratched?
YES: Replace the roller.
Paper guide (fixing assembly)
3) Is the paper guide soiled with toner?
YES: Clean it with solvent.
4) Is the height of the paper guide normal?
NO: Adjust it.
5) Is the inlet guide switched over to suit the passage of small-size paper and large-size paper?
NO: Check the fixing assembly inlet guide drive solenoid (SL1).
4-53 T
Nip
6) Is the lower roller pressure (nip) as indicated?
NO: Adjust it.
Web
7) Is the web taken up correctly?
NO: Check the fixing cleaning assembly.
8) Move the plunger of the fixing web solenoid (SL9) by hand. Is the
web taken up?
NO: Check the fixing web drive assembly.
Delivery assembly sensor lever
9) Does each sensor lever of the delivery assembly move smoothly?
NO: Adjust it so that it moves smoothly.
Delivery sensor
10) Are the external delivery sensor (PS36) and the fixing assembly outlet sensor (PS4) normal?
Delivery paper deflecting plate
11) Move the delivery paper deflecting plate with your finger. Dos it return to its initial position by the work of the spring?
NO: Correct how the delivery paper deflecting plate is mounted.
12) Us the paper path of the delivery paper deflecting plate deformed
or scratched?
YES: Replace the delivery paper deflecting plate.
Delivery roller drive assembly
13) Does the delivery roller move smoothly?
NO: Check the delivery roller drive assembly.
Leading edge margin
14) Is the leading edge margin of print paper 0.3 mm or more and 5.5
mm or less?
NO: Make adjustments in service mode so that the margin is as indicated.
5.1.4 Fixing/Delivery assembly (face-down delivery assembly)

Delivery sensor
1) Is the internal delivery sensor (PS35) normal?
Reversal sensor
2) Is the reversal sensor 2 (PS38) normal?
Delivery flapper solenoid (SL5)
3) Does the delivery flapper move correctly?
NO: Correct the potion of the delivery flapper solenoid, or replace it.
4-54 T
Reversal flapper solenoid (SL8)

4) Does feeding reversal flapper move correctly?
NO: Correct the position of the reversal flapper solenoid, or replace it.
5) Does the reversal motor (M14) rotate at the correct timing?
NO: Replace the reversal motor (M14).
5.1.5 Cleaning Assembly

Transfer/Separation charging assembly, Pre-transfer charging assembly
1) Are feeding transfer/separation charging assembly and the pretransfer charging assembly fitted correctly?
NO: Fit the transfer/separation charging assembly correctly.
2) Is the height of the charging wire as indicated?
NO: Adjust the height of the charging wire.
Separation claws (cleaning assembly)
3) Are the separation claws under the cleaning assembly damaged?
YES: Replace the separation claws.
4) Is the spring of the separation claws displaced?
YES: Mount the spring correctly.
Print paper, High-voltage transformer, DC controller PCB
5) Try paper of a type recommended by Canon. Is the problem corrected?
NO:
1.
Check the high-voltage transformer.
2.
Check the DC controller PCB.
5.1.6 Feeding Assembly
1) Is the duplex feeding assembly mounted correctly?

Sensor lever
2) Do the sensor levers of the reversal sensor 1 (PS37), duplex paper
sensor (PS34), and the duplex pre-registration paper sensor (PS30)
move smoothly?
NO: Adjust them so that they move smoothly.
Sensor
3) Are the reversal sensor 1 (PS37), duplex paper sensor (PS34), and
duplex pre-registration paper sensor (PS30) normal?
NO: Replace any faulty sensor.
4-55 T
Motor
4) Do the reversal motor (M14), duplex feeding left motor (M29), duplex feeding right motor (M18), and vertical path duplex motor
(M25) rotate at the correct timing?
NO: Replace the motor.
4-56 T
5.2 Feeding Faults

5.2.1 Double Feeding
Separation roller
1) Is the separation roller deformed or worn?
YES: Replace the separation roller.
Spring
NO: Replace the spring used to pull the separation roller.
5.2.2 Wrinkles
Pickup assembly
1) Turn off the power while print paper is moving through the feeding
assembly. At this time, is the print paper wrinkled? Or, is the paper
askew?
YES: Check the pickup assembly.
Check the guide in front of the registration roller.
Check the registration roller.
Check the operation for the feeding fan.
Check the separation charging assembly.
Print paper
2) Try paper fresh out of package. Is the problem corrected?
YES: The paper may be moist. Advise the user on the correct method of
storing paper.
3) Try paper recommended by Canon. Is the problem corrected?
Paper guide, Fixing assembly inlet drive solenoid (SL1)
4) Is the paper guide coated with toner or foreign matter?
YES: Clean it with solvent.
5) Are the height of the paper guide and the movement of the solenoid
correct?
NO: Correct the height of the paper guide and the operation of the solenoid.
Lower roller pressure
6) Is the lower roller pressure (nip) as indicated?
NO: Adjust it.
Upper/lower roller
YES: Try replacing the upper and lower roller one after the other.
4-57 T
6. Arrangement and Functions of Electrical Parts

6.1 Clutches
CL1
CL3
CL2
CL4
F04-601-01
6.1.1 Reader Unit

The reader unit does not have a clutch.
6.1.2 Printer Unit

Symbol
CL
4-58 T
Name
Clutch
Notation
CL1
CL2
CL3
CL4
Function
Drives the developing cylinder.
Drives the registration roller.
Drives the manual feed pickup roller.
Drives the left deck pull-off roller.
6.2 Solenoids and Switches
SL2
SL5
SL9
SL8
SW2
SL1
MSW2
MSW3
SL3
SL4
MSW1
SW1
SL6
SL7
SW4
SW3
F04-602-01
4-59 T
6.2.1 Reader Unit

The reader unit does not have a solenoid or a switch.
6.2.2 Printer Unit

Symbol
SL
Name Notation
Function
Solenoid SL1
Drives the fixing assembly inlet guide.
SL2
Drives the manual feed pickup mechanism.
SL3
Drives the cassette 3 pickup mechanism.
SL4
Drives the cassette 4 pickup mechanism.
SL5
Drives the delivery flapper.
SL6
Drives the right deck pickup mechanism.
SL7
Drives the left deck pickup mechanism.
SL8
Drives the reversing flapper.
SL9
Drives the fixing web.
Switch
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
MSW1
MSW2
MSW3
4-60 T
Main power switch

Front cover switch
Environment switch
Detects the state (locked) of the waste toner screw.
Detects the state (open/closed) of the manual feed tray
cover detection
Detects the attachment/detachment of the fixing/feeding unit.
6.3 Motors
M3
M15
M9
M10
M13
M6
M7
M16
M4
M8
M19
M18
M5
M29
M14
M20
M21
M17
M1
M2
M25
M26
M11
M24
M27
M12
F04-603-01
4-61 T
6.3.1 Reader Unit

Symbol
Name
Motor
Notation
M3
Scanner motor
Function
Notation
M1
M2
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M24
M25
M26
M27
M29
Function
Drum motor
Main motor
Left deck lifter motor
Right deck lifter motor
Primary charging wire cleaning motor
Pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor
Transfer/separation charging wire cleaning motor
Hopper supply motor
Delivery motor
Reversal motor
Laser scanner motor
Duplex horizontal registration motor
Duplex feeding right motor
Fixing motor
Vertical path duplex feeding motor
Vertical path upper motor
Duplex feeding left motor
6.3.2 Printer Unit

Symbol
4-62 T
Name
Motor
6.4 Fans
FM7
FM2
FM5
FM8
FM6
FM4
FM1
FM3
F04-604-01
4-63 T
6.4.1 Reader Unit

The reader unit does not have a fan.
6.4.2 Printer unit

Symbol
4-64 T
Name
Fan
Notation
FM1
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
FM6
FM7
FM8
Function
Feeding fan
Primary charging cooling fan
Heat discharging fan
Controller cooling fan
De-curling fan
DC power supply fan
HDD fan
Duplex feeding fan
6.5 Sensors
PS23
PS25
PS48
PS47
PS50
PS49
PS26
PS13
SV1
SVR4
PS21
PS17
SV2
PS15
PS27
PS14
SVR5
PS22
PS18
SVR2
SVR3
PS16
PS43
PS40
PS39
PS24
PS28
PS7
PS32
PS8
PS19
PS6
PS11
PS5
PS12
PS20
PS10
PS9
F04-605-01
4-65 T
SVR1
PS3
PS31
PS34
PS30
PS38
PS33
PS37
PS2
PS29
PS4
PS35
PS45
PS36
PS46
F04-605-02
4-66 T
6.5.1 Reader Unit

Symbol
Name
Notation
Photointerrupter PS39
PS40
Function
Scanner HP sensor
SIZE
Photosensor
Original sensor
PS43
6.5.2 Printer Unit

Symbol
Name
Notation
Photointerrupter
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS7
PS8
PS9
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS13
PS14
PS15
PS16
PS17
PS18
PS19
PS20
PS21
PS22
PS23
PS24
PS25
PS26
PS27
PS28
PS29
PS30
Function
Right lower cover open/closed sensor
Manual feed tray open/closed sensor
Claw jam sensor
Right deck open/closed sensor
Right deck lifter sensor
Right deck paper sensor
Left deck open/closed sensor
Left deck lifter sensor
Left deck paper sensor
Right deck re-try sensor
Left deck re-try sensor
Manual feed paper sensor
Duplex pre-registration sensor
4-67 T
Symbol
SV
Name
Notation
Photointerrupter PS31
PS32
PS33
PS34
PS35
PS36
PS37
PS38
PS45
PS46
PS47
PS48
PS49
PS50
Function
Duplex horizontal registration sensor
Reversal sensor 1
Reversal sensor 2
Delivery jam sensor
Right deck level sensor (upper)
Right deck level sensor (lower)
Left deck level sensor (upper)
Left deck level sensor (lower)
Photointerrupter SV1
Detects the length of paper in the cassette 4.

(100-V model only)
Detects the length of paper in the cassette 3.
SV2
Slide resistor
SVR1
SVR2
SVR3
SVR4
SVR5
4-68 T
Detects the width of paper on the manual feed

tray.
Detects the level of paper in the cassette 3.
Detects the level of paper in the cassette 4.
Detects the width of paper in the cassette 3.
Detects the width of paper in the cassette 4.
(100-V model only)
6.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others
LA2
H5
LA1
H6
H3
THM2
TS1
TS2
THM1
TP1
H1
H2
HU1
ELCB
H4
F04-606-01
4-69 T
6.6.1 Reader Unit

Name
Lamp
Notation
LA2 Scanning lamp
Heater
H5
H6
Function
Lens heater (standard in 100-V model)

Mirror heater (standard in 100-V model)
6.6.2 Printer Unit

Name
Lamp
Heater
Notation
Function
LA1 Pre-exposure lamp (LED)
H1
H2
H3
H4
Fixing main heater

Fixing sub heater
Drum heater
Cassette heater (standard in 100-V model)
Thermistor
TH1 Fixing heater main thermistor

TH2 Fixing heater sub thermistor (ends)
Thermal switch
TP1
Leakage breaker
Toner sensor
Fixing heater thermal switch
ELCB Leakage breaker

TS1
TS2
Developing assembly toner sensor

Hopper toner sensor
Environment sensor HUM1 Temperature/humidity sensor (machine internal temperature

sensor)
4-70 T
6.7 PCBs
[11]
[10]
[14]
[17]
[6]
[18]
[7]
[23]
[9]
[2]
[24]
[15]
[13]
[12]
[30]
[29]
[25]
[26]
[20]
[21]
[1]
[27]
[28]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[22]
F04-607-01
4-71 T
6.7.1 Reader Unit

Ref.
12
13
15
25
Name
CCD/AP PCB
Inverter PCB
Fuse PCB
30
Differential PCB
Function
Controls the reader unit/ADF.
Drives the CCD/processes analog images.
Controls the scanning lamp.
Controls the mirror/lens heater. (standard in 100-V
model)
Signal conversion
6.7.2 Printer unit

Ref.
Name
1 DC controller PCB
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
14
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
Function
Controls the power supply of the printer unit/finisher.
DC power supply PCB
Supplies DC power.
AC driver PCB
Controls the AC circuit.
Motor driver PCB
Controls the motor.
HVT PCB
Generates high-voltage.
Controls the surface potential of the photosensitive
drum.
Drum heater control PCB
Controls the drum heater.
Accessories power supply PCB Supplies power to the finisher.
Duplex driver PCB
Controls the sensor, motor, and solenoid of the duplex unit.
Control panel PCB
Controls the keys and LEDs.
Laser driver PCB
Controls the laser drive.
BD PCB
Detects the laser beam.
Controls the control panel.
LCD contrast adjustment PCB Adjusts the contrast of the control panel.
Serial number PCB
Controls the serial number.
Anti-rush current PCB
Prevents rush current in the fixing/feeding assembly and the duplex unit.
Capacitor PCB
Removes noise.
Relays signals of sensors and motors of the fixing/
feeding unit.
Main controller PCB
Processes digital images/controls the system.
Differential PCB
Signal conversion
RISER PCB
Connecting board
LIPS PCB
LIPS board
Ethernet PCB
Ethernet board
4-72 T
6.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and

Check Pins by PCB
Of the VRs, LEDs, and switches found on the machine, those used in the field are discussed:
1. Some LEDs have leakage current and emit dim light when off; this is a
normal condition and must be kept in mind:
2. VRs that may be used in the field:
VRs that must not be used in the field:
Any VR and check pin not found in the lists is for use at the factory, requiring special tools and high accuracy. Do not touch them in the field.
6.8.1 Main Controller PCB

J1014
J1061
J1060
J1024
J1019 J1018
J1022
J1015
LED1002
J1011
LED1001
J1006
J1013
LED1008
J1021
SW1002
J1028
J1020
J1058
J1027
J1003
J1004
LED1007 LED1003
LED1005
LED1004
F06-608-01
The DIP switch (SW1002 ) is for the factory. Do not use it in the field. (It is used when
making settings before shipment of the machine.)
4-73 T

1 4
1 1
J116
J120
J302
10
J123
A1
J117
J121
J108
J114
1
A1
B20
J118
VR103
B1
A20
J203
J303
1
A1
J101
J125
B1
A1 A9
J107
A1 A20
J112
A18 B1
A15
A1
13
J104
B9 B1
A1
A16
B15
B1
A1
1
A1
A18
J109
8 1
J201
J119
J100
A1
A9 B14
J111
B13
A14 A1
B1 B15
B1
J126
A20
A13
B1
J113
B1
A15
J106
A1
B17
J110
B1
A17
12
J103
A1
B20
J124
B1
A12
B12
1 4
20
J102
J115
J105
B1
B20
B16
F04-608-02
The shorting connectors of J303 are set as follows; be sure to transfer the shorting connectors to the new PCB upon replacement:
100V
120V
230V
...
J3031
2
3
4
5
6
7
12
:shorted by a jumper wire.
F04-608-03
4-74 T
6.8.3 Reader Controller PCB

4
J5021
GND
J5011
J5009
1
2
J5015
J5010
J5013
SW5001
J5014
J5005
J5004
B40
J5008
A1
3
B1
J5002
1 1
J5007 1
J5012
J5006
A40
5 J5001 2
F04-608-04
SW5001-1
Inch series.
AB series
ON:
OFF:
SW5001-2
Not used.
Not used.
6.8.4 Power Supply PCB

1
10 1
15
J4009
J4015
4
J4008
1
10
PN4002
J4007
J4003
1
J4004
8 1
1
1
1
2
2 12 1 3
PN4006
J4010 J4013
J4011 J4002
10
PN4003
PN4001
PN4004
J4006
11
J4014
J4016
3
1
J4017
1
10
J4005
1
15
J4001
PN4005
F04-608-05
4-75 T
6.8.5 HVT PCB
J4506
J4507
J4508
J4505
J4504
VR4501
1
13 1
J4502
J4503
J4501
F04-608-06
6.8.6 Drum Heater Control PCB

SW2001
J2001
ON
1 2
F04-608-07
ON:
OFF:
SW2001-1
controlled to 47C
controlled to 43C (default)
SW2001-2
Not used.
Not used.
For details of drum heater control, see 6. Controlling the Drum Heater in Chapter 4.
4-76 T
CHAPTER 5
SERVICE MODE
1. Organization of Service Mode

1.1 Outline
The screens in service mode are grouped into three: Initial screen, Level 1/Level 2 screen,
and Level 3 screen.
User screen
( )(2,8)( )
Reset key
Initial screen
Reset key
Select an item.
Level 1/Level 2
From Level 1/
screen
Level 2 screen
Select a Level 1 item at the top of the screen.
Select a Level 2 item from the list.
Level 3 screen
Level 3 screen
Preceding/
Following page
Level 3 screen
Preceding/
Following page
Level 3 screen
Preceding/
Following page
F05-101-01
5-1 T
The machines service mode is divided into the following seven types:
COPIER
FEEDER
DISPLAY
Control display mode
SORTER
I/O
I/O display mode
ADJUST
Adjustment mode
BOARD
FUNCTION
Operation/inspection mode
OPTION
Settings mode
TEST
Test print mode
COUNTER
Counter mode
F05-101-02
1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections

1) Press the user mode key ( ) on the control panel.
2) Press the 2 and 8 keys at the same time.
3) Press the user mode key ( ).
In response, the Initial screen will appear.
Service mode of the copying machine

COPIER
Service mode of the ADF

Only if installed.
FEEDER
Service mode of the finisher

Only if installed.
SORTER
Service mode of the accessory boards.

Only if installed.
BOARD
F05-102-01
5-2 T
1.3 Ending Service Mode

Press the Reset key once to return to the service mode Initial screen (F05-102-01).
Press the Reset key twice to end service mode and to return to the User (standard) screen.
If you used ADJUST, FUNCTION, or OPTION in service mode, be sure to
turn off and then on the power switch after ending service mode.
1.4 Backing Up Service Mode

Each machine is adjusted before shipment from the factory, and adjustment settings are
indicated on the service label (attached to the service book case found behind the front
cover).
The service label of the reader unit is attached behind the reader rear upper cover.
If you have replaced the reader controller PCB or the DC controller PCB, be sure to remove the EEPROM from the old PCB and mount it to the new PCB.
If you have initialized the RAM, the ADJUST and OPTION settings are replaced with the
default settings. If you have made adjustments and changed service mode settings in the
field, be sure to record the new settings on the service label. (If the label does not show an
appropriate item, make use of its blank space.)
If you want, you can print out all service mode settings at once using service mode
(COPIER>FUNCTION>MIS-P>P-PRINT).
Service Label
F05-104-01 Service Label
5-3 T
1.5 Basic Operations

1.5.1 Initial Screen
COPIER
Initial item
FEEDER
Touch to select an
item
SORTER
BOARD
F05-105-01
1.5.2 Level 1/Level 2 Screen
Level 1 item
Touch to select an item
VERSION
USER
DPOT
ACC-STS
ANALOG
Level 2 items
CST-STS
Touch to select an item
JAM
MISC
ERR
ALARM-1
SENSOR
HV-STS
F05-105-02
5-4 T
1.5.3 Level 3 Screen

Page number
<VERSION>
Level 2 item
< 1/2 >
DC-CON
ready to accept a servicing/

copying operation.
JAM:
paper jam exists.
SERVICE:
service operation under way.
WAITING:
initial rotation or the like under
way.
DOOR:
door open.
COPYING: copying under way.
ERROR:
error exists.
NO-TONER: toner absent
WTNR-FUL: full of waste toner.
READY:
R-CON
PANEL
FEEDER
SORTER
Level 3 item
< READY >
NIB
PS/PCL
LIPS
To go back to previous page

To go to next page
F05-105-03
ADJ-X
+/-
OK
Accepts input value

Switches between + and Stop
key: stops the ongoing operation.
Clear
key: clears a value.
Start
key: makes copies without ending service mode.
F05-105-04
5-5 T
2. DISPLAY (control/display mode)

2.1 COPIER
The following screen appears in response to COPIER>DISPLAY; for the items, see the
pages that follow:
VERSION
USER
DPOT
ACC-STS
ANALOG
CST-STS
SENSOR
JAM
MISC
ERR
ALARM-1
HV-STS
ALARM-2
F05-201-01
5-6 T
COPIER>DISPLAY
<VERSION>
Indicates the PCB ROM versions of the machine and accessories.
Indication<xx, yy> xx: version number yy:R & D control number.
DC-CON
Indicates the ROM version of the DC controller PCB.
R-CON
Indicates the ROM version of the reader controller PCB.
PANEL
Indicates the ROM version of the control panel CPU PCB.
FEEDER
Indicates the ROM version of the feeder controller PCB.
SORTER
Indicates the ROM version of the finisher controller PCB.
NIB
Indicates the version of the network software.
PS/PCL
Indicates the version of the PS/PCL.
LIPS
Indicates the version of the printer board (LIPS).
SDL-STCH
Indicates the ROM version of the saddle stitcher controller PCB.
MN-CONT
Indicates the version of the software of the main controller PCB.
BOOT-ROM
Indicates the ROM version of the boot ROM of the main controller block.
DIAG-DVC
Indicates the version of the self diagnosis device.
RUI
Indicates the version of the Remote UI.
LANG-EN
Indicates the version of the English file.
LANG-FR
Indicates the version of the French file.
5-7 T
COPIER>DISPLAY
LANG-DE
Indicates the version of the German file.
LANG-IT
Indicates the version of the Italian file.
LANG-JP
Indicates the version of the Japanese file.
LANG-CS
Indicates the version of the Czech file.
LANG-DA
Indicates the version of the Danish file.
LANG-EL
Indicates the version of the Greek file.
LANG-ES
Indicates the version of the Spanish file.
LANG-ET
Indicates the version of the Estonian file.
LANG-FI
Indicates the version of the Finnish file.
LANG-HU
Indicates the version of the Hungarian file.
LANG-KO
Indicates the version of the Koran file.
LANG-NL
Indicates the version of the Dutch file.
LANG-NO
Indicates the version of the Norwegian file.
LANG-PL
Indicates the version of the Polish file.
LANG-PT
Indicates the version of the Portuguese file.
LANG-RU
Indicates the version of the Russian file.
LANG-SL
Indicates the version of the Slovenian file.
5-8 T
COPIER>DISPLAY
LANG-SV
Indicates the version of the Swedish file.
LANG-TW
Indicates the version of the Chinese file (traditional).
LANG-ZH
Indicates the version of the Chinese file (simplified).
<USER>
Indicates the User screen and items related to the user.
LANGUAGE
Indicates the language/paper size configuration used.
Display <LANGUAGE
xxyy. zz. aa>
xx (2 higher-order digits): country code
yy (2 lower-order digits) : language code
zz
: destination code (00: CANON, 01: OEM)
aa
: paper size configuration code (00: AB, 01:
Inch, 02: A, 03: all sizes)
COUNTER
Indicates the type of control of the software counter. (00: 100 V, 01: USA,
Europe)
MODEL
Indicates the identification of the model. (0: iR5000i, 1: iR6000i)
5-9 T
COPIER>DISPLAY
<ACC-STS>
Indicates the connection of accessories.
FEEDER
Indicates the connection of the ADF. (0: not connected, 1: connected)
SORTER
Indicates the state (connection) of the finisher and the puncher unit.
Display: xy
x= 0: none, 1: finisher, 2: saddle finisher, 3: shift tray
y= 0: none, 1: 2-hole, 2: 2/3-hole, 3: 4-hole (FRN), 4: 4-hole (SWDN)
DECK
Indicates the connection of the paper deck (accessory). (0: not connected,
1: connected)
CARD
Indicates the connection of the control card. (0: not connected, 1: connected)
DATA-CON
Indicates the connection of a self diagnosis device. (0: none, 1: copy data
controller, 2: remote diagnostic device)
RAM
Indicates the size of the memory mounted to the main controller. (64 MB,
128 MB)
NIB
Indicates the connection of a network board. (0: none, 1: Etherboard, 2: Token-Ring, 3: both)
LIPS-RAM
Indicates the size of the memory mounted on the LIPS board. (xx MB)
LIPS
Indicates the connection of the LIPS board. (0: not connected, 1: connected)
PS/PCL
indicates PS/PCL settings (0: absent; 1: PS/PCL; 2: PS kanji)
RIP1
Indicates the connection of the RIP1 board. (0: not connected, 1: connected)
NETWARE
indicates presence of NetWare firmware (0: absent; 1: present)
5-10 T
COPIER>DISPLAY
<ANALOG>
Indicates the measurement taken by the analog sensor.
TEMP
Indicates the machines internal temperature. (by environment sensor)
Unit: C
HUM
Indicates the machines internal humidity. (by environment sensor)
Unit: %RH
FIX-U
Indicates the temperature of the upper fixing roller.
Unit: C
<CST-STS>
Indicates the paper size of the cassette and the manual feeder.
WIDTH-C3
Indicates the paper width of the cassette 3 in terms of paper size.
WIDTH-C4
Indicates the paper width of the cassette 4 in terms of paper size.
WIDTH-MF
Indicates the paper width of the manual feeder in terms of paper size.
5-11 T
COPIER>DISPLAY
<JAM>
Indicates jam data.
< JAM >
< 1/7 >
< READY >
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII

F05-201-02
Item
AA
BBBB
CCCC
DDDD
E
Description
Indicates the numbers of jams
(larger the number, the more past the jam).
Indicates the date of occurrence.
Indicates the hour of occurrence.
Indicates jam recovery time.
Indicates the location of occurrence.
FFff
Jam code
G
HHHHHH
IIIII
Indicates the source of paper.
5-12 T
Remarks
1 to 50 (50 max.)
month, day (2 digits each)
24-hour notation
24-hour notation
0: copying machine
1: feeder
2: finisher
FF: jam type
(T05-201-01)
ff: jam sensor
(T05-201-02)
(For the feeder, T05-20104.)
(T05-201-03)
Indicates the paper size.
COPIER>DISPLAY
FF: Types of Jams

Code
00xx
01xx
02xx
0Axx
0Bxx
Type
none
delay jam
stationary jam
stationary jam at power-on
front cover open jam
T05-201-01
ff: Jam Sensor

Code
xx01
xx02
xx03
xx04
xx05
xx06
xx07
xx08
xx0B
xx0C
xx0D
xx0E
xx0F
xx10
xx11
xx12
xx13
xx14
xx15
xx16
xx1E
xx1F
xx32
xx33
xx34
xx35
xx36
xx37
Sensor
registration paper sensor (PS29)
laser write start sensor (PS28)
vertical path 1 paper sensor (PS24)
right deck feed paper sensor (PS32)
left deck feed paper sensor (PS33)
right deck re-try sensor (PS19)
left deck re-try sensor (PS20)
cassette 3 re-try sensor (PS21)
cassette 4 re-try sensor (PS22)
claw jam sensor (PS4)
internal delivery sensory (PS35)
external delivery sensor (PS36)
delivery assembly jam sensor (PS46)
reversal sensor 2 (PS38)
reversal sensor 1 (PS37)
duplexing paper sensor (PS34)
duplexing pre-registration sensor (PS30)
deck pickup sensor (PS101)
deck feed sensor (PS106)
buffer path sensor (PI14)
inlet sensor (PI1)
delivery sensor (PI3)
staple tray sensor (PI4)
vertical path paper sensor (PI17S)
delivery sensor (PI11S)
T05-201-02
G: Source of Paper
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description
right front deck
left front deck
cassette 3
cassette 4
not used
not used
paper deck (accessory)
manual feed tray
duplexing block
T05-201-03
FFff: Sensors for and Types of Jams

in the Feeder
x=1: 1st original picked up.
x=0: 2nd or subsequent original picked up.
Code
Description
00x1 Post-separation sensor
(S3) delay
00x2 Post-separation sensor
(S3) stationary
00x3 Registration senor (PI1)
delay
00x4 Registration sensor (PI1)
stationary
00x5 Read sensor (S2) delay
00x6 Read sensor (S2) stationary
00x7 Delivery reversal sensor
(S1) delay
00x8 Delivery reversal sensor
(S1) stationary
00x9 User ADF open
00xA ADF open
00xB User cover open
00xC Cover open
00xD Residual
00xE Pickup fault
00xF Timing error
Sensor
S3
S2, S3
S3, PI1
PI1
S2
S2
S1, S2
S1, S2
PI2
PI2
SW2
SW2
PI1, S1,
S2, S3
PI5
S2
T05-201-04
5-13 T
COPIER>DISPLAY
<ERR>
Indicates error data.
< ERR >
< 1/7 >
< READY >
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G HH

F05-201-03
Item
AA
BBBB
CCCC
DDDD
EEEE
Description
Indicates the numbers of errors (the higher
the number, the more recent the error).
Indicates the date of occurrence.
Indicates the time of occurrence.
Indicates the return time.
Indicates the error code in question.
FFff
G
Indicates the detailed code in question.

Indicates the location of occurrence.
5-14 T
Remarks
1 to 50 (50 max.)
month, day (2 digits each)
24-hour notation
24-hour notation
See Self Diagnosis in
Chapter 6.
if none, 0000.
0: copying machine/
main controller
1: feeder
2: finisher
3: C.F.F.
4: reader
5: printer
6: PDL
7: fax
COPIER>DISPLAY
<HV-STS>
Indicates the measurements taken of the voltage/current system.
PRIMARY
Indicates the level of primary charging current.
PRE-TR
Indicates the level of current for pre-transfer (post) charging.
TR
Indicates the level of transfer charging current.
SP
Indicates the level of separation charging current.
BIAS
Indicates the level of developing bias DC.
SP-N2
Indicates the level of separation charging current for the 2nd side of a
double-sided print.
TR-N2
Indicates the level of transfer charging current for the 2nd side of a doublesided print.
5-15 T
COPIER>DISPLAY
<DPOT>
Indicates the photosensitive drum surface potential control data.
DPOT-K
Indicates the surface potential of the photosensitive drum. (unit: V)
VL1T
Indicates the target value of the light-area potential (VL1) for copying.
VL1M
Indicates the measurement taken of the light-area potential (VL1) for copying. (optimum value: VL1T 6 V; reference only)
VL2M
Indicates the measurement taken of the light-area potential (VL2) for copying. (optimum value: 70 15 V; reference only)
VDT
Indicates the target dark-area potential (VD) for copying.
VDM
Indicates the measurement of the dark-area potential (VD) for copying. (optimum value: VDT 6 V; reference only)
VL2M-P
Indicates the measurement of the light-area potential (VL2) for printer
(PDL) images. (optimum value: 70 15 V; reference only)
VL1M-P
(PDL) images. (optimum value: VL1T-P 6 V)
VL1T-P
(PDL) images.
VDM-P
Indicates the measurement of the dark-area potential (V) for printer (PDL)
images.
VDT-P
Indicates the target level of dark-area potential (VD) for printer (PDL) images.
LLMT-P
Indicates the laser power voltage control mechanism for printer (PDL) images. (0: normal, 1: error)
5-16 T
PLMT-P
Indicates the primary charging current control mechanism for printer (PDL)
images. (0: normal, 1: error)
LLMT
Indicates the laser power voltage control mechanism for copying. (0: normal, 1: error)
PLMT
Indicates the primary charging current control mechanism for copying. (0:
normal, 1: error)
BIAS-P
Indicates the result of potential control for the developing bias for copying.
BIAS-C
Indicates the result of potential control for the developing bias for copying.
LPOWER-P
Indicates the result of potential control for the laser intensity during output
of printer (PDL) images. (range of indication: 0 to 255, 0: error)
LPOWER-C
Indicates the result of potential control for the laser intensity during output
of copy images. (range of indication: 0 to 255, 0: error)
PRIM-P
Indicates the result of potential control for the primary charging current for
printer (PDL) images. (range of indication: 0 to 1400 A, optimum value:
500 to 1000 A)
PRIM-C
Indicates the result of potential control for the primary charging current for
copying. (range of indication: 0 to 1400 , optimum value: 500 to 1000 A)
<SENSOR>
Indicates the state of sensors.
DOC-SZ
Indicates the size of the original detected by the original size sensor.
MISC
indicates the state of others.
LPOWER
Indicates the laser intensity on a real-time basis.
(range of indication: 0 to 255)
5-17 T
<ALARM-2>
Indicates alarm data.
< ALARM-2 >
< 1/7 >
< READY >
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEFFFF GGGG HHHHHHHH

F05-201-04
Item
AA
BBBB
Description
indicates sequence of alarm occurrences
(the higher, the older)
indicates date of alarm
CCCC
DDDD
EEEFFFF
indicates time of alarm

indicates time of alarm recovery
indicates alarm code
Remarks
1 to 50 (50 max.)
month, day
(2 characters each)
24-hr notation
24-hr notation
EE: location code
FFFF: alarm code
GGGG
indicates alarm detail code
HHHHHHHH indicates total counter reading at time of alarm
5-18 T
FEEDER>DISPLAY
2.2 FEEDER
FEEDSIZE
Indicates the size of an original detected by the ADF.
5-19 T
3. I/O (I/O display mode)

The following screen appears in response to COPIER>I/O; for the items, see the pages
that follow:
Input/output port of DC controller PCB
DC-CON
R-CON
Input/output port of reader controller PCB

FEEDER
Input/output port of ADF controller PCB
SORTER
Input/output port of finisher controller PCB

MN-CONT
Input/output port of main controller PCB
F05-301-01
<Guide to the Screen>
P001 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
bit 0
bit 15
address
5-20 T
COPIER>I/O
3.1 DC-CON
Indicates the input/output ports of the DC controller PCB.
<DC-CON (1/8)>
Address
IO-P01
IO-P02
IO-P03
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
Notation
PS23
PS29
PS19
PS13
PS26
PS14
PS27
PS7
PS24
PS11
PS25
PS36
PS35
Description
manual feed paper sensor signal
registration paper sensor signal
right deck re-try sensor signal
cassette 3 paper sensor signal
vertical path 3 paper sensor signal
cassette 4 paper sensor signal
right deck paper sensor signal
left deck paper sensor signal
external delivery sensor signal
internal delivery sensor signal
not used
claw jam sensor signal
PS4
PS33
left deck feed paper sensor
PS21
cassette 3 re-try sensor signal
PS22
cassette 4 re-try sensor signal
PS20
left deck re-try sensor signal
PS37
reversal sensor 1 signal
PS8
right pre-registering limit sensor signal
PS30
duplexing pre-registration senor signal
PS31
duplexing horizontal pre-registration sensor signal
PS38
reversal sensor 2 signal
PS28
laser write start sensor signal
TS1
developing assembly toner sensor signal
TS2
hopper toner sensor signal
PS34
duplexing paper senor signal
PS45
fixing web length detection signal
not used
hopper connector detection signal
MSW1 waste toner screw lock detection signal
MSW2 manual feed cover open/closed detection signal
PS6
right deck lifter sensor signal
PS32
right deck feed paper sensor signal
Remarks
0: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
0: paper present
0: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: limit
1: paper present
0: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
0: toner absent
0: toner absent
1: paper present
1: absent
1: disconnected
0: clogged
1: closed
1: paper present
1: paper present
5-21 T
COPIER>I/O
<DC-CON (2/8)>
Address
IO-P04
IO-P05
5-22 T
Bit
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Notation
PS10
PS12
PS17
PS18
SV1
SV1
CL2
PS5
PS9
PS3
SW2
PS15
PS16
SV2
SV2
TH2
TH1
RL1
FM1
FM2
FM6
FM3
FM7
FM4
FM8
FM5
PS47
Description
left deck lifter sensor signal
left deck limit sensor signal
cassette 3 lifter sensor signal
cassette 4 lifter sensor signal
cassette 4 universal detection
cassette 4 length detection signal 0
cassette 4 length detection signal 1
registration roller clutch drive signal
right deck open/closed detection sensor signal
left deck open/closed sensor signal
right cover open/closed detection signal
not used
front cover open/closed detection signal
duplexing unit detection signal
fixing/feeding unit detection signal
hard disk unit detection signal
cassette 3 open/closed sensor signal
cassette 4 open/closed sensor signal
cassette 3 size detection signal 0
cassette 3 size detection signal 1
not used
fixing sub thermistor error detection signal 1
fixing main thermistor error detection signal
E001 error hard detection signal
fixing sub thermistor error detection signal 2
main relay OFF detection signal
main SSR error signal
sub SSR error signal
DC controller switch signal
separation feeder fan stop detection signal
primary charging cooling fan stop detection signal
DC power supply fan stop detection signal
heat discharge fan stop detection signal
hard disk fan stop detection signal
controller cooling fan stop detection signal
duplexing feed fan stop detection signal
de-curling fan stop detection signal
right deck paper level sensor (upper) signal
Remarks
1: paper present
1: limit
1: paper present
1: paper present
0: universal
1: ON
1: closed
1: closed
1: closed
0: closed
0: connected
0: connected
1: absent
1: closed
1: closed
1: error
1: error
1: error
1: error
1: error
1: error
1: new
1: stop
1: stop
1: stop
1: stop
1: stop
1: stop
1: stop
1: stop
1: paper present
COPIER>I/O
<DC-CON (3/8)>
Address
IO-P06
IO-P07
Bit
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
Notation
Description
PS49
left deck paper level sensor (upper) signal
SSR error signal
not used
PS48
right deck paper level sensor (lower) signal
left deck paper level sensor (lower ) signal
PS50
not used
PS104/ shift tray full sensor signal
105
fixing motor clock detection
M19
M15
laser scanner motor lock detection signal
delivery jam sensor signal
PS46
for factory adjustment
not used
LZC-ERROR
LZD-ERROR
LZ-HEAT RDY
LZ-HEAT ERROR
PS103 shift tray paper sensor signal
PS104 shift tray HP detection (front)
PS105 shift tray HP detection (rear)
shift tray connection detection signal
flicker control signal
power supply spec 1
Remarks
1: paper present
1: error
1: paper present
1: paper present
0: full
1: locked
1: locked
1: paper present
0: paper present
1: HP
1: HP
0: connected
0: flicker
0
1
0
100V 120V 230V
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
power supply spec 2

SW3
SW4
SW5
duplexing feed fan detection signal
SW7
not used
not used
not used
not used
high-voltage separation error signal
5-23 T
COPIER>I/O
<DC-CON (4/8)>
Address
IO-P08
IO-P09
IO-P10
5-24 T
Bit
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
Notation
Description
high-voltage transfer error signal
high-voltage primary error signal
not used
CL1
developing clutch drive signal
CL2
registration roller clutch drive signal
CL3
manual feed pickup clutch drive signal
not used
not used
not used
CL4
left deck pull-off clutch drive signal
not used
roller bias ON signal
developing bias AC drive signal
high-voltage high humidity switch signal
high-voltage AC driver signal
high-voltage remote signal
EEPROM select signal 1
shift tray detection signal
SM101 shift tray motor (CW) signal
SM101 shift tray motor (CCW) signal
SL6
right deck pickup solenoid drive signal
left deck pickup solenoid drive signal
SL7
SL3
cassette 3 pickup solenoid drive signal
cassette 4 pickup solenoid drive signal
SL4
manual feed releasing solenoid drive signal
SL2
not used
SL5
delivery flapper solenoid drive signal
SL8
reversing flapper solenoid drive signal
fixing assembly inlet guide drive solenoid (return) drive signal
SL1
SL1
fixing assembly inlet guide drive solenoid (suction) drive signal
fixing assembly web solenoid drive signal
SL9
not used
not used
M5
right deck lifter motor drive signal
M4
left deck lifter motor drive signal
M6
primary charging wire cleaning motor (CCW)
signal
Remarks
1: ON
0: ON
1: ON
1: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
0: ON
1: ON
1: ON
0: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
0: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
0: ON
0: ON
1: ON
COPIER>I/O
<DC-CON (5/8)>
Address
Bit
3
4
5
IO-P11
IO-P12
IO-P13
IO-P14
IO-P15
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
Notation
Description
M6
primary charging wire cleaning motor (CW) signal
pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor (CW)
M7
signal
pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor
M7
(CCW) signal
M8
transfer/separation charging wire cleaning motor (CW) signal
M8
transfer/separation charging wire cleaning motor (CCW) signal
M1
drum motor drive signal
M2
main motor drive signal
not used
M19
fixing motor drive signal
M15
laser scanner moter drive signal
M9
hopper stirring motor drive signal
M10
hopper supply motor drive signal
M15
laser scanner motor speed switch signal
M21
cassette 4 lifter motor drive signal
M20
cassette 3 lifter motor drive signal
not used
not used
fixing main heater ON signal
H1
H2
fixing sub heater ON signal
H3
drum heater ON signal
not used
FM1
separation feed fan (half-speed) signal
FM1
separation feed fan (full-speed) signal
FM2
primary charging cooling fan (half-speed) signal
FM2
primary charging cooling fan (full speed) signal
not used
not used
FM3
heat discharge fan (half-speed) signal
FM3
heat-discharge fan (full-speed) signal
FM7
hard disk fan (half-speed) signal
FM7
hard disk fan (full-speed) signal
FM4
controller cooling fan (half-speed) signal
FM4
controller cooling fan (full-speed) signal
not used
not used
FM5
de-curling fan (half-speed) signal
FM5
de-curling fan (full-speed) signal
RL1
main relay OFF signal
Remarks
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
1: ON
1: ON
0: half-speed
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
5-25 T
COPIER>I/O
<DC-CON (6/8)>
Address
IO-P16
IO-P17
IO-P18
IO-P19
5-26 T
Bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Notation
LA1
VS1
FM8
M14
M29
Description
not used
not used
not used
not used
pre-exposure LED ON signal
potential sensor ON signal
fixing 12 V supply signal
DDI-PPRDY
DDI-CTS
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
DDI-CPRDY
DDI-PRSST
DDI-RST
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
duplexing feed fan
not used
reversal motor clock signal
not used
not used
not used
duplexing feed left motor clock signal
not used
Remarks
1: ON
1: ON
0: supplied
COPIER>I/O
<DC-CON (7/8)>
Address
IO-P20
IO-P21
IO-P22
IO-P23
IO-P24
Bit
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
Notation
Description
M13
delivery motor clock signal
CL2
registration roller clutch ON signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
M17
pre-registration motor clock signal
not used
M18
duplexing feed right motor clock signal
serial 0-TXD
serial 1-TXD
serial 0-RXD
serial 1-RXD
not used
not used
not used
not used
cassette paper width input port switch signal
FM6
M16
M1
M2
not used
DC power supply fan drive signal
duplexing horizontal registration motor clock signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
laser enable signal
not used
not used
drum tor INT
main motor INT
error INT
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
Remarks
-
1: cassette 4,
0: cassette 3
0: ON
-
0: enabled
5-27 T
COPIER>I/O
<DC-CON (8/8)>
Address
IO-P25
IO-P26
IO-P27
IO-P28
5-28 T
Bit
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Notation
SW101
PS102
PS103
PS101
PS106
CL102
PS107
PS108
SW102
PS105
PS109
LED100
SL101
CL102
M101
M102
SW102
SL102
M101
Description
pulse count INT
DMA-END-INT
DMA-REQ-INT
deck open detection switch signal
deck paper absent sensor signal
deck lifter upper limit sensor signal
deck pickup sensor signal
deck feed sensor signal
deck pickup clutch ON signal
not used
deck paper supply position sensor signal
deck paper level sensor signal
deck lifter lower limit detection signal
deck set sensor signal
deck open sensor signal
deck ID1
deck ID2
not used
not used
deck open LED ON signal
deck pickup roller releasing solenoid drive signal
not used
deck pickup clutch drive signal
not used
not used
deck main motor drive signal
deck lifter motor drive signal
deck lifter lower limit detection signal
deck open solenoid
deck main motor fixing current setting
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
Remarks
0: closed
1: paper present
1: upper limit
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: ON
1: ON
1: paper present
1: lower limit
1: connected
1: closed
1: connected
0: connected
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
COPIER>I/O
3.2 R-CON
Indicates the input/output ports of the reader controller PCB.
<R-CON (1/2)>
Address
IO-P01
IO-P02
IO-P03
IO-P04
IO-P05
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
IO-P06
Notation
Description
M3
scanner motor clock signal
M3
scanner motor CCW/CW switch signal
M3
scanner motor HOLD/OFF switch signal
M3
M3
PS43
LA2
PS43
PS43
Remarks
when 10, ON
0: CCW, 1: CW
0: current hold,
1: current OFF
scanner motor driver reset signal
1: reset
scanner motor stream reading current switch signal 0: stream reading current
original sensor ON switch signal
0: sensor ON
fan error signal
not used
scanning lamp ON switch signal
0: lamp ON
SK signal to EEPROM
normal clock
DDI-SPI(1)
not used
DDI-SPI(2)
not used
DI signal to EEPROM
DATA area
DDI-SCTS
0: DDI reception ready
0: DDI power ready
DDI-SPRDY
DDI-SCPRDY
0: DDI power ready
scanning lamp inverter error signal
1: error
DDI-S transmission
DATA area
RS232C transmission (factory terminal transmission) DATA area
DDI-S reception
DATA area
RS232C reception (factory terminal reception) DATA area
ITOP transmission (image leading edge signal) not used
DDI-SRTS
0: DDI transmission ready
not used
not used
DDI-SPO(0)
not used
DDI-SPO(1)
not used
DDI-SPO(2)
not used
not used
not used
not used
original sensor 3 signal (AB input)
0: original present
original sensor 4 signal (Inch input)
0: original present
DDI-SPRTST
0: DDI-SPRTST signal ON
serial data to CCD
DATA area
clock to CCD
when 010, data
transmitted
output to RING2
when 010, data
transmitted
not used
5-29 T
COPIER>I/O
<R-CON (2/2)>
Address
IO-P07
IO-P08
IO-P09
IO-P10
5-30 T
Bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3-7
0-7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Notation
LA2
PS39
PS40
PS40
M3
M3
M3
M3
M3
M3
M3
M3
M3
M3
M3
Description
PCB check mode (for factory)
scanning lamp (LOW/HI) switch signal
CS output to EEPROM
scanner HP sensor signal
ADF-ITOP (image leading edge) signal
copyboard cover sensor (used as interrupt)
copyboard cover sensor
WATCH-DOG pulse output
output to analog processor
DO signal from EEPROM
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
scanner motor drive control 2
scanner motor drive control (RETURN)
scanner motor drive control 0, 1
scanner motor drive control 0, 1
scanner motor drive current control
not used
Remarks
0: check mode
not used
1: CP
1: HP
0: ADF original image
leading edge interrupt
1: ADF (copyboard) closed
1: ADF (copyboard) closed
normal clock
when 010, data
transmitted
Data area
default setting
default setting
default setting
default setting
default setting
default setting
default setting
default setting
default setting
default setting
default setting
COPIER>I/O
3.3 MN-CON
Indicates the input/output ports of the main controller PCB.
<MN-CON (1/2)>
Address
P001
P002
P003
P004
P005
P006
P007
Bit
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
Notation
Description
GPDATA not used (1 fixed)
not used (1 fixed)
not used (1 fixed)
not used (1 fixed)
SPI
DDI-S general input
DDI-S general input
DDI-S general input
SPRTST signal, printer start-up signal
DDI-P general input
DDI-P general input
DDI-P general input
DDI-S general input
SPO
DDI-S general output
DDI-S general output
PPO
GPI
GPO
3.3-V non-all night power OFF signal

SSCNST signal
DDI-P general output
PPRTST signal
battery alarm
parallel EEPROM R/B#
flash ROM R/B#
serial ROM connection detection
operation enable (CC-IV)
operation enable (coin robot)
serial EEPROM D0
HD connection detection
battery charge control
flash ROM write protect
SPO[2]
not used
PCI (PDL) soft reset
serial EEPROM CS
Remarks
not used
not used
not used
0: reader image start
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
1=5W (OFF) sleep mode
0: normal (ON),
not used
not used
not used
not used
0: printer image start
not used
0: writing
0: writing/deleting
1: connected
1: enabled
1: enabled
access port to EEPROM
1: HD present
not used
not used
not used
0: LIPS board forced reset
5-31 T
COPIER>I/O
<MN-CON (2/2)>
Address
P008
5-32 T
Bit
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Notation
IPCPA
Description
serial EEPROM SCK
serial EEPROM DIN
pickup count
delivery count
coin robot pickup count
coin robot delivery count
LCD back-light control
color UI I/F enable
parallel EEPROM write protect
FAX SSB forced reset
FAX SSB identification
Color UI detect
BWUI detect
board version
board version
board version
Remarks
1: counter
1: counter
1: count
1: count
1: ON
not used
0: write enabled
not used
not used
not used
not used
0: color UI present
0: B/W UI present
for factory
for factory
for factory
COPIER>I/O
3.4 FEEDER
Indicates the input/output ports of the ADF controller PCB.
<FEEDER (1/3)>
Address
IO-P01
IO-P02
IO-P03
IO-P04
IO-P05
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
Notation
Description
feed motor drive clock
M2
not used
feed motor clock LB
M2
pickup motor clock LB
M1
not used
delivery reversal motor clock LB
M3
large/small identification sensor signal
PI3
PI4
A4R/LTRR identification sensor signal
M1
pickup motor drive clock signal
M1
pickup motor mode signal
M1
pickup motor CW/CCW signal
M1
pickup motor enable output
not used
M2
feed motor enable output
CL1
pickup clutch drive signal
SL1
locking solenoid signal
serial communication
image leading edge signal
serial communication
EEPROM data output
EEPROM clock
EEPROM chip select
not used
not used
VR1
original width VR signal
S3
post-separation sensor analog signal
S2
read sensor analog signal
S1
delivery reversal sensor analog signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
external WDT clock output
D/A data output
D/A clock output
Remarks
1: paper present (large)

1: A4R
1: enable
1: ON
1: attracted
transmission (TxD0)
reception (RxD0)
transmission (TxD1)
(SCK0)
(AN0)
(AN1)
(AN2)
(AN3)
5-33 T
COPIER>I/O
<FEEDER (2/3)>
Address
IO-P06
IO-P07
IO-P08
IO-P09
IO-P10
5-34 T
Bit
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
Notation
FM1
FM1
S3
PI1
S2
S1
SW1
PI2
M3
M3
M3
M3
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
M2
M2
M2
Description
D/A load signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
EEPROM data input
cooling fan lock signal
cooling fan
not used
post-separation sensor signal
registration 1 sensor signal
read sensor signal
delivery reversal sensor signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
cover open switch
ADF open/closed sensor signal
delivery reversing motor excitation phase
(A) output
(*A) output
key (B) output
(*B) output
feed motor mode output
feed motor mode output
feed motor (CW/CCW) switch signal
DIP switch (DIPSW8) signal
not used
Remarks
1: locked
(IRQ0)
(IRQ1)
(IRQ2)
(IRQ3)
1: opened
1: opened
during output, alternately 0 and 1
1: CCW
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
COPIER>I/O
<FEEDER (3/3)>
Address
IO-P11
AD-P01
AD-P02
AD-P03
AD-P04
AD-P05
AD-P06
AD-P07
AD-P08
DA-P01
DA-P02
DA-P03
DA-P04
DA-P05
DA-P06
DA-P07
DA-P08
DA-P09
DA-P10
DA-P11
DA-P12
Bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Notation
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
VR1
S3
S2
S1
M1
M2
M3
S3
S3
S2
S2
S1
S1
Description
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
LED ON signal
LED ON signal
LED ON signal
LED ON signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
tray volume
post-separation sensor analog input
read sensor analog input
delivery paper reversal sensor analog input
not used
not used
not used
not used
pickup motor
feed motor
delivery reversal motor
post-separation sensor_DA
post-separation sensor_TH
read sensor DA
read sensor TH
delivery reversal sensor_DA
delivery reversal sensor_TH
not used
not used
not used
Remarks
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
(hereafter, analog ports)
5-35 T
3.5 SORTER
Indicates the input/output ports of the finisher controller PCB.
<Sorter (1/3)>
3.5.1 Finisher Block

Address
IO-P001
(output)
IO-P002
(output)
IO-P003
(output)
IO-P004
(input)
5-36 T
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Notation
M8
M8
M4
M4
M3
M3
M5
M2
M7
M1P
M2P
M2P
M5
M5
LED2
PS1
LED1
Description
not used
not used
No. 2 feed motor phase A output
No. 2 feed motor phase B output
stapler shift motor phase B output
stapler shift motor phase A output
alignment motor phase B output
alignment motor phase A output
not used
tray lift motor PWM
delivery motor PWM
swing motor PWM
punch motor PWM
horizontal registration motor phase B output
horizontal registration motor phase A output
tray lift motor DOWN drive output
tray lift motor UP drive output
not used
not used
LED2 ON solenoid output
not used
height sensor (input)
LED1 ON signal output
height sensor external clock (input)
not used
not used
not used
dust full detection signal
24-V output off detection signal
horizontal registration detection signal 1
trailing edge detection signal
punch LED ON signal (output)
not used
Remarks
1: down
1: up
0: ON
1: ON
Address
IO-P005
(output)
IO-P006
(input)
IO-P007
(input)
IO-P008
(output)
IO-P009
(input)
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
Notation
Description
M9
inlet feed motor phase A output
inlet feed motor phase B output
M9
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
PI4
stapler tray paper detection signal
punch motor clock detection signal
M1
No. 1 feed motor phase A (output)
M1
No. 1 feed motor phase B (output)
No. 2 feed motor clock input
inlet feed motor clock input
No. 1 feed motor clock input
delivery motor clock detection signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
tray lift motor clock signal 1
tray lift motor clock signal 2
swing motor clock detection signal
not used
stacker EEPROM CLK signal
stacker EEPROM data out signal
stitcher EEPROM CS signal
*LWR (input/output)
*HWR (output/output)
*RD (input/output)
*AS (input/output)
stacker unit EEPROM data (input)
not used
PI17
buffer path inlet paper detection signal
PI3
delivery paper detection signal
PI14
buffer path paper detection signal
PI1
inlet paper detection signal
PI22
stapler drive home position detection signal
not used
Remarks
0: paper present
0: paper present
1: paper present
0: paper present
0: paper present
1: HP
5-37 T
Address
IO-P010
IO-P011
IO-P012
(input)
IO-P013
IO-P014
(input)
IO-P015
(input)
IO-P016
(input)
5-38 T
Bit
6
7
8
0-8
0-8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0-8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Notation
MS7
MS8
PI11
PI12
PI3P
PI1P
MS2P
MS1P
Description
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
stapler connection detection signal
stapler cartridge detection
staple ready signal
staple absent detection signal
not used
tray 1 paper detection signal
tray 2 paper detection signal
not used
not used
not used
punch unit connection detection signal
punch home position detection signal
horizontal registration home position detection signal
front cover open detecting switch signal
upper cover open detecting switch signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
PUSH SW3
PUSH SW2
punch unit EEPROM data in
stapler shift home position detection signal
alignment home position detection signal
tray open position detection signal
shutter open detection signal
swing guide open detection signal
not used
DIP SW3 bit 1
DIP SW3 bit 2
DIP SW3 bit 3
DIP SW3 bit 4
DIP SW3 bit 5
DIP SW3 bit 6
DIP SW3 bit 7
DIP SW3 bit 8
not used
Remarks
0: connected
0: cartridge present
0: staple present
0: paper present
0: paper present
1: HP
0: HP
0: closed
0: closed
0: HP
0: HP
1: HP
1: open
0: open
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
Address
IO-P017
(input)
IO-P018
(output)
IO-P019
(output)
IO-P020
(output)
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Notation
Description
PI15
joint detection signal
cover open/closed detection signal
PI16
saddle unit connection detection signal
MS5
tray upper limit detecting switch signal
tray safety switch signal
MS.
MS1
cover open/closed detecting switch signal
MS4
shutter closed detecting switch signal
MS6
swing guide closed detecting switch signal
not used
M7
swing motor CW drive output
swing motor CCW drive output
M7
M1P
punch motor CCW drive output
M1P
punch motor CW drive output
delivery motor CCW drive output
M2
M2
delivery motor CW drive output
M6
stapler motor CCW drive output
M6
stapler motor CW drive output
not used
stepping motor OFF
M2P
punch horizontal registration motor current switch
M9
inlet feed motor current switch 2
M9
inlet feed motor current swing 1
M8
No. 2 feed motor current switch 2
M8
M1
M1
not used
punch unit EEPROM data out
punch unit EEPROM CS
punch unit EEPROM CLK
not used
not used
height sensor ON/OFF
M4
stapler shift motor current switch
M3
alignment motor current switch
not used
Remarks
1: connected
1: closed
1: upper limit
0: safe
0: closed
1: closed
0: closed
1: CW
1: CCW
0: CCW
0: CW
1: CCW
1: CW
0: CCW
0: CW
1: OFF
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
5-39 T
Address
IO-P021
(output)
IO-P022
AD-P01
AD-P02
AD-P03
AD-P04
AD-P05
AD-P06
AD-P07
DA-P01
5-40 T
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0-8
-
Notation
Description
SL7
belt escape solenoid drive signal
buffer outlet solenoid drive signal
SL3
not used
SL2
buffer inlet solenoid drive signal
flapper solenoid drive signal
SL1
SL5
paddle solenoid drive signal
solenoid timer output
escape solenoid drive signal
SL6
not used
not used
dust full detection signal
24-V output OFF detection signal
trailing edge detection signal
punch LED ON signal (output)
Remarks
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
3.5.2 Saddle Stitcher Unit

Address
IO-P023
(output)
IO-P024
(output)
IO-P025
(input)
IO-P026
(input)
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Notation
M6S
M6S
M7S
M7S
M2S
M2S
SL1S
SL2S
SL4S
M4S
PI15S
PI11S
PI14S
PI5S
Description
stitcher motor (rear) CW drive output
stitcher motor (rear) CCW drive output
stitcher motor (front) CW drive output
stitcher motor (front) CCW drive output
paper fold motor CW drive output
paper fold motor CCW drive output
No. 1 deflecting plate solenoid drive signal
No. 2 deflecting plate solenoid drive signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
feed roller plate solenoid drive signal
solenoid timer output
paper positioning plate motor current switch
not used
24-V output OFF detection signal
paper push-on plate leading edge position signal
delivery detection signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
paper fold motor clock detection signal
paper push-on plate motor clock detection signal
paper push-on HP detection signal
alignment plate HP detection signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
Remarks
0: CW
0: CCW
0: CW
0: CCW
0: CW
0: CCW
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
0: when ON
1: down
0: leading edge
0: paper present
1: HP
0: HP
5-41 T
Address
IO-P027
(input)
IO-P028
(output)
IO-P029
(output)
IO-P030
(input)
IO-P031
(input)
5-42 T
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
Notation
PI7S
PI16S
SW2
PI17S
PI12S
PI13S
M4S
M4S
M8S
M1S
M1S
M8S
M5S
M5S
M2S
M8S
M3S
M3S
M3S
M5S
PI19S
PI20S
MS5S
MS7S
PI8S
PI6S
PI18S
PI5S
PI14S
PI3S
PI2S
PI21S
PI21S
Description
paper positioning HP detection signal
stitcher IN detection signal
PUSH SW2 ON/OFF
vertical path paper detection signal
crescent roller phase detection signal
guide home position detection signal
not used
not used
not used
paper positioning plate motor phase A output
paper positioning plate motor phase B output
paper push-on plate motor PWM
feed motor current switch
feed motor phase A output
feed motor phase B output
not used
paper push-on plate motor CCW drive output
not used
alignment motor phase A output
alignment motor phase B output
paper fold motor PWM
paper push-on motor CW drive output
guide motor phase A output
guide motor phase B output
guide motor current switch
alignment motor current switch
not used
No. 2 paper sensor paper detection signal
stitching HP detection signal 2
stitching HP detection signal 1
paper positioning plate paper detection signal
tray paper detection signal
not used
not used
alignment plate HP sensor connection detection
paper push-on plate HP sensor connection detection
delivery cover sensor connection detection
front cover open/closed sensor connection detection
paper folding HP sensor connection detection
paper folding HP detection signal
Remarks
0: HP
0: in
1: paper present
0: HP
0: HP
0: ON
0: CCW
0: CW
0: ON
0: ON
0: paper present
0: paper present
1: HP
1: HP
0: paper present
0: paper present
0: paper present
1: connected
1: connected
1: connected
1: connected
1: connected
0: HP
Address
IO-P032
IO-P033
(input)
IO-P034
(input)
AD-P09
AD-P10
AD-P11
AD-P12
AD-P13
AD-P14
AD-P15
AD-P16
Bit
6
7
8
0-8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-
Notation
MS4S
MS6S
MS1S
MS2S
PI3S
PI2S
PI9S
MS3S
PI9
PI13
PI16
PI15
Description
not used
not used
not used
not used
staple absent detection signal 2
staple absent detection signal 1
inlet cover open detecting switch signal
front cover open detecting switch signal
delivery cover open detecting signal
front cover open detection signal
inlet cover open detection signal
delivery cover open detecting switch signal
not used
TIP SW1 bit 8
TIP SW1 bit 7
TIP SW1 bit 6
TIP SW1 bit 5
TIP SW1 bit 4
TIP SW1 bit 3
TIP SW1 bit 2
TIP SW1 bit 1
not used
stitcher (rear) punching detection
stitcher (front) punching detection
not used
inlet cover sensor connection detection
not used
guide HP sensor connection detection
stitcher compartment sensor connection detection
paper push-on plate leading edge position
sensor connection detection
Remarks
1: staple absent
1: staple absent
0: closed
0: closed
0: closed
1: closed
1: closed
1: closed
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
connected at 7F or lower*
*Hexadecimal.
5-43 T
4. ADJUST (adjustment mode)

4.1 COPIER
The following screen appears in response to COPIER>ADJUST; for the items, see the
pages that follow:
BLANK
AE
V-CONT
ADJ-XY
FEED-ADJ
CCD
LASER
HV-PRI
CST-ADJ
HV-TR
DEVELOP
HV-SP
MISC
DENS
F05-401-01
5-44 T
COPIER>ADJUST
<AE>
Executing AE Adjustment
If you have cleared the RAM on the reader controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on
the service label.
AE-TBL
Range of
adjustment
Use it to adjust the density of characters for image density adjustment.

1 to 9 Default: 5
Copy density
White
White
Original density
A higher setting increases text density.
A lower setting decreases text density.
F05-401-02
5-45 T
COPIER>ADJUST
<ADJ-XY>
Executing Image Read Start Position Adjustment
If you have cleared the RAM on the reader controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on
the service label.
ADJ-X
Range of
adjustment
Caution
Use it to adjust the scanner image leading edge position.

250 to 290 (A change of 1 causes a shift of 0.1 mm.)
Be sure to execute this mode before adjusting the margin.
Do not use this mode to create a margin.
Vertical size plate
Copyboard glass

Lower setting
Higher setting
F05-401-03
ADJ-Y
Range of
adjustment
Use it to adjust the CCD read start position.

Lower setting
Higher setting
Read start position
Original
Vertical size plate
F05-401-04
5-46 T
COPIER>ADJUST
ADJ-S
Range of
adjustment
Caution
The scanner home position.

Not change.
ADJ-Y-DF
Range of
adjustment
Use it to adjust the ADF read start position (ADF horizontal registration) in
scanning direction.
100 to 400 (unit: 0.1 mm)
Print image
Lower setting
Higher setting
Feed direction
F05-401-06
STRD-POS
Range of
adjustment
Use it to adjust the CCD read position for stream reading.

5-47 T
COPIER>ADJUST
<CCD>
Making CCD- and Shading-Related Adjustments
If faulty images are noted after executing COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ, enter
the settings indicated on the service label.
SH-TRGT
Use it to enter the white level target value for shading correction.
SH-RATIO
Use it to enter the data on the white label ratio (standard white paper and
standard white plate) for shading correction.
EGGN-ST
Use it to enter an adjustment value for the edge gain correction start position for the CCD.
EGGN-END
Use it to enter an adjustment value for the edge gain correction end position
for the CCD.
<LASER>
Adjusting the Laser Output
If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the service label.
PVE-OFST
Range of
adjustment
Use it to adjust the position of laser projection.

-100 to +100
POWER
Range of
adjustment
5-48 T
Use it to adjust the laser power for non-potential control.

0 to 255
COPIER>ADJUST
<DEVELOP>
Adjusting the Developing Bias Output
BIAS
Range of
adjustment
Caution
Use it to enter the adjustment value for the development bias.

0 to 600 (A higher setting makes images lighter.)
If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the service label.
This mode is valid only when the potential control mechanism is disabled.
HVT-DE
Caution
Use it to enter the offset value for the development high-voltage output for
the high-voltage unit.
If you have replaced the high-voltage unit or cleared the RAM on the DC
controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the new high-voltage unit.
D-HV-DE
Caution
Use it to enter the offset value for the development high-voltage output of
If you have replaced the DC controller PCB or cleared the RAM on the DC
controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the label on the new DC controller PCB.
5-49 T
COPIER>ADJUST
<DENS>
Making Fine Adjustments for Copy Density Auto Correction
If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on
the service label.
DENS-ADJ
Range of
adjustment
Use it to correct the density of images (copier/printer).

If images are foggy or high-density areas are faint, correct the F-value table.
1 to 9 (default: 5)
White
Copy density
F9 F1
Black
Original density
A lower setting
decreases fogging
White
A higher setting
decreases faintness
F05-401-07
<BLANK>
Adjusting the Non-Image Width
If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the
service label.
BLANK-T
Range of
adjustment
Use it to enter the image leading edge non-image width adjustment value.
1 to 500
BLANK-B
Use it to enter the image trailing edge non-image width adjustment value.
5-50 T
COPIER>ADJUST
<V-CONT>
Adjusting the Potential Control System
Normally, the machines potential control is not executed if the temperature of the fixing assembly is 150C or higher. If you have adjusted any of the following potential
control-related modes, be sure to execute potential control by making the following
selections: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT-S.
the service label.
EPOTOFST
Range of
adjustment
Use it to enter the offset value for the potential sensor.

0 to 255 (default: 0)
VD-OFST
Range of
adjustment
Use it to enter the offset value for the VD target potential for the copier.
-5 to +5 (unit: 10 V; default: 0)
DE-OFS-P
Range of
adjustment
Use it to enter the offset value for the VL target potential for the printer
(PDL; Vdc fine-adjustment).
-50 to +50 (unit: V; default: 0)
VD-OFS-P
Range of
adjustment
Use it to enter the offset value for the VD target potential (VDC fine-adjustment) for the printer (PDL).
-5 to +5 (unit: 10V; default: 0)
DE-OFST
Range of
adjustment
Use it to enter the offset value for the VL target value for the copier (Vdc
fine-adjustment).
-50 to +50 (default: 0)
5-51 T
COPIER>ADJUST
<HV-PR1>
Adjusting the Output of the Primary Charging Assembly
the service label.
PRIMARY
Range of
adjustment
Use it to enter the adjustment value of the primary current for non-potential
control.
0 to 1400
<HV-TR>
Adjusting the Output of the Transfer Charging Assembly/Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly
TR-N1
Caution
Use it to enter the output adjustment value for the transfer charging current
(for printing on the face of plain paper and printing on the 1st side of a
double-sided sheet).
If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the settings
indicated on the service label.
TR-N2
Caution
Use it to enter the output adjustment value for the transfer charging current
(printing on the 2nd side of a double-sided plain paper sheet).
PRE-TR
Caution
Use it to enter the output adjustment value for the pre-transfer charging current.
HVT-TR
Caution
5-52 T
Enter the offset value for the transfer high-voltage output of the high-voltage unit.
controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the new
high-voltage unit.
COPIER>ADJUST
H-PRE-TR
Caution
Use it to enter the offset value for the pre-transfer high-voltage output of
DC controller PCB.
D-PRE-TR
Caution
Use it to enter the offset value for the pre-transfer high-voltage output of
DC controller PCB.
D-HV-TR
Caution
Use it to enter the offset value for the transfer high-voltage output of the
DC controller PCB.
DC controller PCB.
<HV-SP>
Adjusting the Output of the Separation Charging Assembly
SP-N1
Caution
Use it to enter the output adjustment value of the separation charging current (printing on the face of a sheet of plain paper and printing on the 1st
side of a double-sided sheet).
SP-N2
Caution
Use it to enter the output adjustment value of the separation charging current (printing on the 2nd side of a double-sided sheet of plain paper).
HVT-SP
Caution
Use it to enter the offset value for the separation high-voltage output of the
high-voltage unit.
high-voltage unit.
5-53 T
COPIER>ADJUST
D-HV-SP
Caution
Use it to enter the offset value for the separation high-voltage output of the
DC controller PCB.
DC controller PCB.
<FEED-ADJ>
Adjusting the Feeder System
REGIST
Range of
adjustment
Caution
Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration roller clutch turns on.
A higher setting delays the timing at which the registration roller clutch
turns on, thereby decreasing the leading edge margin.
-50 to +50 (unit: 0.1 mm)
ADJ-REFE
Range of
adjustment
Caution
Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for re-pickup.

If the image is displaced on the front, increase the setting.
-101 to +100 (unit: 0.1 mm)
RG-MF
Range of
adjustment
Caution
5-54 T
Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration roller clutch turns on at
time of pickup in manual feed mode.
A higher setting delays the timing at which the registration roller clutch
turns on, thereby decreasing the leading edge margin.
-50 to +50 (unit: 0.1 mm)
COPIER>ADJUST
<CST-ADJ>
Making Cassette-/Manual Feed-Related Adjustments
the service label.
C3-STMTR
Caution
Enter the paper width basic value (STMTR) for the cassette 3.
If you have replaced the paper width detecting VR, execute
FUNCTION>CST in service mode.
C3-A4R
Caution
Use it to enter the paper width basic value (A4R) for the cassette 3.
C4-STMTR
Caution
Use it to enter the paper width basic value (STMTR; 100-V model only) for
the cassette 4.
C4-A4R
Caution
Use it to enter the paper width basic value (A4R; 100-V model only) for the
cassette 4.
MF-A4R
Caution
Use it to enter the paper width basic value (A4R) for the manual feed tray.
MF-A6R
Caution
Use it to enter the paper width basic value (A6R) for the manual feed tray.
MF-A4
Caution
Use it to enter the paper width basic value (A4) for the manual feed tray.
C3-LVOL
Use it to enter the stacking capacity of the cassette 3 (50 sheets).
C3-HVOL
5-55 T
COPIER>ADJUST
C4-LVOL
C4-HVOL
<MISC>
Making Other Adjustments
the service label.
ATM
Range of
adjustment
5-56 T
Use it to select an operating environment in relation to atmospheric pressure.

A low atmospheric pressure tends to cause leakage; lower the target potential control.
0 to 2
0: 1 to 0.75 atm (up to altitude of 2500m)
1: 0.75 to 0.70 atm (up to altitude of 2500 to 3000m)
2: 0.70 to 0.65 atm (up to altitude of from 3000 to 3500m)
COPIER>ADJUST
4.2 FEEDER
DOCST
Range of
adjustment
Use it to adjust the original leading edge registration when the ADF is selected as the source of paper.
A higher setting decreases the leading edge margin.
The data will be stored on the ADF controller PCB.
-10 to +10 (unit: 0.5 mm)
Using the Mode
1) Make a print of the test chart, and check the position of the image.
2) Select the mode item, and change the setting to make adjustments.
3) Press the OK key.
4) Make a print of the test chart once again, and check to see the position of
the image is as indicated.
Print image
Feed direction
Higher setting
Lower setting
F05-402-01
LA-SPEED
Range of
adjustment
Use it to adjust the original feed speed for ADF stream reading speed.
A higher setting increases the speed.
The data will be stored on the ADF controller PCB.
-30 to +30 (unit: 0.1%)
5-57 T
SORTER>ADJUST
4.3 SORTER
PNCH-HLE
Range of
adjustment
Use it to adjust the position of the punch holes (paper feeding direction)
when the puncher unit is used.
A higher setting moves the punch holes toward the leading edge
(middle) of the sheet.
-4 to +2 (unit; mm)
Using the Mode
1) Make a print of the Test Chart, and check the position of the holes.
2) Select this item, and change the setting as needed.
4) Make a print of the Test Chart once again, and see that the position for
the holes is as indicated.
Paper
Feeding direction
Higher setting Lower setting
F05-403-01
5-58 T
5. FUNCTION (operation/inspection mode)

5.1 COPIER
The following screen appears in response to COPIER>FUNCTION; for the items, see the
pages that follow:
INSTALL
FIXING
CCD
PANEL
LASER
PART-CHK
SYSTEM
CLEAR
MISC-R
DPC
MISC-P
CST
HRD-DISK
CLEANING
SENS-ADJ
F05-501-01
5-59 T
COPIER>FUNCTION
<INSTALL>
Modes for Installation
TONER-S
Caution
Use it to supply toner from the hopper to the developing assembly and to
stir the toner inside the developing assembly.
Make sure that the developing assembly is properly mounted before
pressing the OK key.
Do NOT turn off the power while the machine is in operation.
Using the Mode
1) Select the mode item, and press the OK key.
2) The machine executes toner supply. (about 8 to 10 min)
While toner is being supplied, the duration (sec) is counted down starting at 600 sec.
3) The machine stops automatically at the end of the operation.
STRD-POS
Caution
Use it to execute auto adjustment of the position of the CCD read position
for stream reading mode.
Execute this mode at time of installing an ADF or if you have removed
and then installed the existing ADF.
Using the Mode
1) Select this item, and press the OK key.
Auto adjustment is executed.
2) See that the adjustment ends automatically.
3) Record the updated setting indicated in service mode on the service
label: COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>STRD-POS.
CARD
Setting Up the Card Reader
Enter the number of the card to use. (detail: 1)
(from 1 to 2001; as many as 300 cards may be used starting with the card
whose number has been entered.)
Initialize the card control data.
Initialize the card names (group ID; from registered number)
Initialize the ID number for the card in question.
5-60 T
COPIER>FUNCTION
<CCD>
Executing Auto Adjustment for CCD-/Shading-Related Items
CCD-ADJ
Caution
Use it to execute CCD auto adjustment.

Execute this mode if you have replaced the CCD unit, scanning lamp,
inverter PCB, or copyboard glass (standard white plate).
Use the whitest of all papers used by the user as the standard white
paper.
Using the Mode
1) Place sheets of standard white paper (10 sheets min.) on the copyboard
glass.
The machine executes auto adjustment. (about 1 min)
The machine stops operation at the end of auto adjustment.
3) Record the updated settings on the service label (all under
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD).
(rear)
Standard white paper
F05-501-02
5-61 T
COPIER>FUNCTION
SHDG-POS
Range of
adjustment
Caution
Use it to enter data for changing the position of measurement on the standard white plate used for shading correction.
216 to 296 (a multiple of 8 causes a shift of about 0.189 mm)
If dirt is found on the copyboard glass, execute this mode to avoid the
area when reading the standard white plate.
You must execute the following if you have changed the setting:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>SH-PS-ST.
Vertical
size plate
Shading
position
Copyboard glass

Higher setting
Lower setting
F05-501-03
5-62 T
COPIER>FUNCTION
EGGN-POS
Caution
Use it to execute auto adjustment for the edge gain correction position for
the CCD. (The CCD edge gain correction mechanism is effective only when
an ADF is in use.)
If the CCD unit has been replaced, be sure to execute the following in
advance: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ.
If the CCD unit, No. 1 mirror mount, or No. 2 mirror mount has been
replaced, execute this mode.
Using the Mode
1) Open the ADF (copyboard cover; be sure to do so).
2) Select the item, and press the OK key.
3) Wait until auto adjustment ends (about 1 sec).
4) See that auto adjustment ends automatically and the results (OK/NG)
are displayed.
If NG is indicated, check the following, and execute adjustment once
a. Is the ADF (copyboard cover) open?
b. Is the reading glass mounted correctly?
c. Is the edge gain correcting plate attached to the reading glass
normal?
d. Is the scanning lamp on?
5) When the following has been updated, enter the new
settings:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD-EGGN-ST and -EGGN-END.
Edge gain correction plate
Copyboard
glass
Reading
glass
(front)
F05-501-04
5-63 T
COPIER>FUNCTION
<LASER>
Using Laser-Related Operations
POWER
Turning On the Laser
Using the Mode
2) The laser turns on.
3) Press the Stop key to turn it off.
<DPC>
Using Potential Sensor-Related Operations
DPC
Caution
Use it to force potential control.

The machine will not execute potential control when the power switch is
turned off and then on if the temperature of the fixing assembly is 150C or
higher. If you have replaced the photosensitive drum or the laser unit, or
changed the drum potential setting, execute potential control using this
mode item.
Using the Mode
1) Select the mode item, and enter 1, then, press the OK key.
2) Turn off and then on the power switch.
The machine will execute potential control.
OFST
Caution
5-64 T
Use it to execute offset adjustment for the potential sensor.

Do not execute this mode on its own; it is designed as part of a series of
work to perform after replacing the potential sensor unit. (See the Printer
Manual: Chap. 4, 7. Disassembly and Assembly.)
Using the Mode
The machine stops the operation automatically at the end of offset
adjustment.
COPIER>FUNCTION
<CST>
Executing Size Auto Adjustment for the Cassette/Manual Feed Tray
C3-STMTR
C3-A4R
C4-STMTR
C4-A4R
Caution
Use it to store the paper width basic value for the cassette 3/4.
STMTR width: 139.5 mm, A4R width: 210 mm
For fine adjustment after storing the basic value, make the following selections: ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C3-STMTR, C3-A4R, C4-STMTR, C4-A4R.
Using the Mode
1) Place STMTR paper in the cassette, and adjust the side guide plate to
suit the STMTR width.
2) Select C3-STMTR (C4-STMTR), and press the OK key.
The machine executes adjustment automatically, at the end of which the
value is stored.
3) Likewise, repeat steps 1) and 2) for A4R.
MF-A4R
MF-A6R
MF-A4
Caution
Use it to store the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray.
For fine adjustment after storing the basic value, make the following selections: ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4R, MF-A6R, MF-A4.
Using the Mode
1) Place A4R paper on the manual feed tray, and adjust the side guide to the
A4R width.
2) Select MF-A4R, and press the OK key.
The machine executes adjustment automatically, at the end of which the
value is stored.
3) Likewise, repeat steps 1) and 2) for A6R and A4.
5-65 T
COPIER>FUNCTION
<CLEANING>
Executing Cleaning Operations
WIRE-CLN
Caution
Use it to execute automatic cleaning of the charging wire five times (5

round trips) consecutively.
If you have replaced the primary charging wire or the transfer charging
wire, execute this mode item.
Using the Mode
The machine executes auto cleaning of the charging wire five times
consecutively.
The machine stops automatically at the end of the cleaning operation.
<FIXING>
Executing Auto Adjustment for Fixing Assembly-Related Items
NIP-CHK
Use it to obtain an output for measuring the fixing nip width.

Using the Mode
1) Make about 20 A4 copies of the test sheet.
2) Place an A4 sheet of paper on the manual feed tray.
3) Select the mode item (to highlight), and press the OK key.
The sheet will be picked up and stopped between the fixing rollers; it is
then discharged in about 20 secs.
4) Measure the width of the area indicated.
Standard:
7.8mm 0.5mm
Feed
direction
Standard:
|a-c|=0.5mm or less
Middle
of paper
F05-501-05
Caution
5-66 T
a and b are points 10 mm from the edges of paper.
COPIER>FUNCTION
<PANEL>
Checking the Control Panel
LCD-CHK
Use it to check for missing dots on the touch panel.
Using the Mode
The entire face of the touch panel turns on in white and blue repeatedly.
2) Press the Stop key to stop the operation.
LED-CHK
Use it to check the LEDs on the control panel.
Using the Mode
The LEDs will turn on in sequence.
2) Select LED-OFF to end the operation.
LED-OFF
Use it to end a LED check of the control panel.
Using the Mode
1) Select the mode item to end the check.
KEY-CHK
Use it to check key inputs.
Using the Mode
1) Select the mode item.
2) Press any key so that its corresponding character will appear on the touch
panel, indicating that the input is normal. (T05-501-01)
TOUCHCHK
Caution
Use it to adjust the coordinates of the touch panel.

Use it to mach the points of presses on the touch panel and the LCD
coordinates.
Execute this mode if you have replaced the LCD unit.
Using the Mode
2) Press + indicated on the touch panel at nine locations in sequence.
3) Select TOUCHKEY once again to end the operation.
5-67 T
COPIER>FUNCTION
<INPUT KEY/DISPLAY>
Key
Screen display
counter check
copy
scan
0 to 9
stop
ID
additional functions
BILL
COPY
OTHER
0-9
STOP
ID
USER
Key
Screen display
start
mail box
reset
energy saver
clear
interrupt
guide
START
PB
RESET
STAND BY
CLEAR
INTERRUPT
?
T05-501-01
<PART-CHK>
Checking the operation of various loads.
CL
Use it to select the clutch to check.
Using the Mode
2) Using the keypad, enter the code of the clutch in question (T05-501-02).
CL-ON
Use it to check the operation of a clutch.
Using the Mode
ON 10 secs OFF ON 10 secs OFF ON OFF
5-68 T
COPIER>FUNCTION
MTR
Use it to select the motor to check.
Using the Mode
2) Using the keypad, enter the code of the motor to check (T05-501-03).
MTR-ON
Use it to check the operation of the motor.
Using the Mode
ON for 20 secs OFF
The hopper motor and the duplex horizontal registration motor remains
on for 10 sec and then turns off.
The shift tray motor stops at the front/rear home position.
SL
Use it to select the solenoid to check for operation.
Using the Mode
2) Using the keypad, enter the code of the solenoid (T05-501-04).
SL-ON
Use it to check the operation of the solenoid.
Using the Mode
ON OFF for 10 secs ON OFF for 10 secs ON OFF
<Code/Clutch Name>
Code
Name
1
2
3
4
5
manual feed clutch (CL3)

left deck pull-out clutch (CL4)
paper deck pickup clutch (CL102)
developing clutch (CL1)
registration roller clutch (CL2)
T05-501-02
5-69 T
COPIER>FUNCTION
<Code/Motor Name>
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Name
drum motor (M1)
main motor (M2)
fixing motor (M19)
laser scanner motor (M15)
hopper stirring motor (M9)
hopper supply motor (M10)
duplexing horizontal registration motor (M16)
right deck lifter motor (M5)
left deck lifter motor (M4)
cassette 3 lifter motor (M20)
cassette 4 lifter motor (M21)
right deck pickup motor (M11)
Code
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Name
left deck pickup motor (M24)
cassette 3/4 pickup motor (M12)
vertical path duplexing feed motor (M25)
vertical path lower motor (M27)
vertical path upper motor (M26)
paper deck main motor (M101)
reversal motor (M14)
duplexing feed left motor (M29)
delivery motor (M13)
pre-registration motor (M17)
duplexing feed right motor (M18)
shift tray motor (SM 101)
T05-501-03
<Code/Solenoid Name>
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
Name
right deck pickup solenoid (SL6)
left deck pickup solenoid (SL7)
cassette 3 pickup solenoid (SL3)
cassette 4 pickup solenoid (SL4)
manual feed releasing solenoid (SL2)
paper deck pickup roller
releasing solenoid (SL101)
Code
Name
7
delivery flapper solenoid (SL5)
8
reversing flapper solenoid (SL8)
9
fixing inlet guide drive solenoid
(SL1); return
10
fixing inlet guide drive solenoid
(SL1); draw
11
fixing web solenoid (SL9)
T05-501-04
5-70 T
COPIER>FUNCTION
<CLEAR>
Cleaning the RAM, Jam History, and Error Code History
The data is cleared only when the main power switch has been turned off and then on; be
sure to turn it off and then on at the end.
ERR
Use it to clear error codes.
Using the Mode
DC-CON
Use it to clear the RAM on the DC controller PCB.
Using the Mode
R-CON
Use it to clear the RAM on the reader controller PCB.
Using the Mode
SERVICE
Use it to clear the backup data of service mode (COPIER>OPTION).
Using the Mode
JAM-HIST
Use it to clear the jam history.
Using the Mode
ERR-HIST
Clearing the Error History
Using the Mode
E354-CLR
---
E355-CLR
---
5-71 T
COPIER>FUNCTION
PWD-CLR
Use it to clear the password set for system administrator in user mode.
Using the Mode
ADRS-BK
Initializing the Address Book Data
CNT-MCON
Use it to clear the counter for servicing located on the main controller PCB.
Using the Mode
CNT-DCON
Use it to clear the counter for servicing found on the DC controller PCB.
Using the Mode
MMI
Use it to clear the backup data on user mode settings (spec, ID, group ID,
mode memory, etc.).
Using the Mode
CARD
Clearing Data Related to the Card ID (group ID)
At this time, error code 'E719' will be indicated. Clear the error indication
in service mode: FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR; then, turn off and then on the
main power switch.
ALARM
Clearing the Alarm Log
5-72 T
COPIER>FUNCTION
<MSIC-R>
Checking Reader Unit-Related Operations
SCANLAMP
Use it to check the activation of the scanning lamp.
Using the Mode
The scanning lamp will turn on.
2) Press the Stop key to turn off the lamp.
<MISC-P>
Checking Printer-Related Operations
P-PRINT
Use it to print out a list of service mode items.
Using the Mode
The machine will print out a list of service mode items.
KEY-HIST
Use it to print out the history of key inputs made on the control panel.
Using the Mode
The machine will print out the history of key inputs.
HIST-PRT
Use it to print out the history of jams and errors in service mode.
Using the Mode
1) Select the item mode, and press the OK key.
The machine will print out the history of jams and errors.
USER-PRT
Use it to print out a list of user modes in service mode.
Using the Mode
The machine will print out a list of user modes.
PRE-EXP
Use it to check the activation of the pre-exposure LED.
Using the Mode
The pre-exposure LED will remain on for about 3 secs and will turn off.
5-73 T
<SENS-AJD>
Use it to check the operation of sensors.
STCK-LMT
Caution
Use it to adjust the position of the full sensor (PS104, PS105) of the shift
tray.
If either of the full sensors (or both) detects paper, the machine will indicate
ON.
If neither of the sensors detects paper, the machine will indicate OFF.
Use this mode when the full sensor has been replaced.
Be sure to move the sensors starting at the point farthest from the paper,
moving them closer to the paper (in keeping with the characteristics of
the sensors).
Using the Mode
1) Keep both sensors at the point farthest from the paper.
2) Place a stack of sheets (about 60 mm high) at the point of detection of
either sensor on the shift tray.
4) By referring to the indication, move the sensor closer to the paper, and
fix it in position where the indication changes to ON.
5) Move the paper to the position of detection of the other sensor.
6) Repeat step 4) for the other sensor.
7) Press the Stop key to end the adjustment.
<SYSTEM>
Checking System-Related Operations
DOWNLOAD
Use it to switch to download mode of the system program.
Caution
Using the Mode
1) Turn off the machine and the PC.
2) Disconnect the network-related cable connected to the machine.
3) Connect the machine with the PC with a bi-Centronics cable.
4) Turn on the PC.
5) Turn on the machine.
7) Start downloading using the service support tool.
8) At the end of the operation, turn off and then on the main power switch.
5-74 T
COPIER>FUNCTION
CHK-TYPE
Settings
Use it to select a partition number when checking the HDD.

0:
entire HDD (default)
1 to 4: partition No.
HD-CHECK
Use it to check the partition selected using CHECK-TYPE (recovery).
Check-TYPE:
when 0, check sectors on entire HDD and recover
when 1, image storage area
when 2, general file storage area
when 3, PDL file storage area
when 4, program file storage area
To use,
Press the OK key to execute.
HD-CLEAR
Use it to initialize the hard disk.
Check-TYPE:
when 0, 4, disabled
when 1, image storage area
when 2, general file storage area
when 3, PDF-related file storage area
To use,
Press the OK key to execute.
5-75 T
COPIER>FUNCTION
5.2 FEEDER
SENS-INT
Caution
5-76 T
Use it to adjust the sensitivity of each sensor of the ADF.

Be sure to clean the sensor before executing this mode.
Using the Mode
The machine stops operation at the end of the adjustment.
6. OPTION (settings mode)

6.1 COPIER
The following screen appears in response to COPIER>OPTION; for the items, see the
pages that follow:
BODY
USER
CST
ACC
INT-FACE
TEMPO
F05-601-01
5-77 T
COPIER>OPTION
BODY
Use it to make machine settings.
PO-CNT
Settings
Use it to turn on/off potential control.

0: off, 1: on (default)
PO-CNTMD
Settings
Use it to select a potential control mode.

0: one at time of power-up (default)
1: 10 mins and 60 mins after power-up (reduced mode)
2: 10 mins and 60 mins after power-up (normal mode)
W-CLN-P
Settings
Use it to set the intervals at which auto cleaning of the primary charging
wire is executed in terms of the number of prints.
100 to 2000 (default: 2000)
MODEL-SZ
Settings
Use it to switch default ratios display and ADF original size detection by
site.
0: AB (6R5E), 1: INCH (5R4E), 2: A (3R3E), 3: AB/INCH (6R5E)
FIX-TEMP
Settings
Use it to select down sequence mode.

0: OFF, 1: priority on fixing while controlling down sequence temperature to +10C for all, 2: priority on productivity while controlling down
sequence temperature to -5C for all
IDL-MODE
Settings
Use it to select idle rotation mode for the developing assembly.

0: OFF (no idle rotation; default)
1: auto control by environment sensor
2: idle rotation started when fixing temperature reaches 100C
3: idle rotation started when main power switch is turned on
FSPD-S1
Settings
5-78 T
Use it to switch fixing control for special paper.

The selection of this mode disables the function of OHP-TEMP and
WARM-UP.
The special paper mode (2 below) is valid for the 120/230-V model
only, and is executed when a source of paper assigned to thick paper is
selected.
0: normal mode (plain paper; default), 1: special paper 1 mode (in high
humidity environment, reduces fixing temperature),
2: special paper mode (thick paper)
COPIER>OPTION
FUZZY
Settings
Use it to turn on/off fuzzy control and to make environment settings.

The selection will affect pre-transfer, transfer, and separation charging
currents.
Selecting 1 through 3 will make the operation independent of the environment sensor.
0: fuzzy control ON (default), 1: low humidity environment mode (current level lower than standard),
2: normal humidity environment mode, 3: high humidity environment
mode (current level higher than standard)
TSPLY-SW
Settings
Use it to switch the toner supply sequence executed in conjunction with the
humidity sensor.
0: changes control of toner supply motor by humidity data automatically (default)
medium/low humidity: ON for 2 sec, OFF for 1 sec
high humidity: ON for 4 sec, OFF for 2 sec
1: uses fixed pattern (ON for 2 sec, OFF for 1 sec)
SCANSLCT
Settings
Use it to turn on/off the ADF original size detection mechanism.

When ON, the scan size is determined according to the detected original
size.
0: OFF (default), 1: ON
OHP-TEMP
Caution
Settings
Use it to switch the temperature setting for transparency mode.

The control mechanism will use a lower fixing temperature to improve
separation of transparencies from the fixing roller.
This mode is disabled if WARM-UP, FSPD-S1 is set.
0: OFF (default)
1: normal temperature control -5C
F-GD-CNT
Settings
Use it to select the descent mode for the fixing inlet guide.
Move down the inlet guide if uneven density or light images occur as a
result of uneven fixing.
0: normal control (default)
1: moves down inlet guide for 1st side only (A4R/297 mm or larger)
5-79 T
COPIER>OPTION
CONFIG
Settings
Use it to select multiple pieces of firmware retained on the hard disk so as

to make appropriate settings: country, language, model, paper size series.
XXYYZZAA XX: country (JP), YY: language (ja), ZZ (00); model,
AA (00): paper size series; display will be in the following sequence and
the parentheses indicate default settings:
COPIER>DISPLAY>USER>LANGUAGE.
Using the Mode
1) Select CONFIG.
2) Select an item (to highlight), and press the +/- key.
3) Each press on the +/- key changes the contents in sequence.
4) When the appropriate setting has appeared for each item, press the
OK key.
RAW-DATA
Settings
Use it to print out received data as it is.

0: normal (default), 1: print raw data
WARM-UP
Caution
Settings
Use it to reduce the warm-up time if the room temperature is likely to be

about 18C or higher when the machine is first turned on.
In the case of the iR5000 Series, the multiple rotation initial, standby, and
print start temperatures are reduced by 15C.
In the case of the iR6000 Series (100-V model), the period of initial multiple rotation is reduced by 1 min.
For the 120/230-V model, the same control mechanism is used for both
iR6000 Series and iR5000 Series.
This mode is disabled if FSPD-S1 is set.
0: standard (default), 1: reduced mode (as above)
SHARP
Settings
Use it to change the sharpness level of the image.

A higher setting makes the images sharper.
1 to 5 (default: 3)
LAPC-SW
Settings
5-80 T
Use it to switch laser APC correction.

0: ON (initial rotation APC executed if left alone for 10 min), 1: ON
(initial rotation ON APC executed if left alone for 60 min; default),
2: (initial rotation APC executed if left alone for 120 min)
3: initial rotation APC only off; 4: OFF
COPIER>OPTION
FDW-DLV
Settings
Use it to switch face-up delivery to ensure stacking performance when making multiple prints.
0: normal (all in face-up delivery, if single original; default)
1: face-up delivery for single print of single original, face-down delivery for multiple prints)
COTDPC-D
Settings
For factory use.

0 to 3 (default: 0)
EVL-VDT
Settings
Use it to switch the drum target potential (VDT) and the developing bias
(Vdc) to reduce traces of black fixing separation claws caused by an excess
deposit of toner in a low-humidity environment.
0: no change
1: for copy image, VDT -35 V; for printer image, VDT -25 V/Vdc +25
V (default)
2: for copy image, VDT -50 V; for printer image, VDT -50 V/Vdc +25 V
3: for copy image, VDT -35 V; for printer image, no change
4: for copy image, VDT -50 V; for printer image, no change
5: for copy image, no change; for printer image, VDT -25 V/Vdc +25 V
6: for copy image, no change; for printer image, VDT -50 V/Vdc +25 V
RMT-LANG
Settings
Use it to switch the language for remote UI driven over the WEB.
Use it to select a language code (ja, en, etc.) to identify the site; expressed as in service mode
(COPIER>DISPLAY>USER>LANGUAGE).
Using the Mode
1) Select RMT-LANG.
2) Each press on the +/- key brings up a different language code.
3) When the desired language code has appeared, press the OK key.
HI-HUME
Caution
Settings
Use it to switch the developing bias frequency if separation faults occur in a

high-humidity environment.
If separation faults occur in the above environment, set it to 1.
0: 2700 Hz (default), 1: 2000 Hz
TR-SP-C1
Settings
Use it to switch the transfer/separation output level when the right deck is
used as the source of paper to prevent various problems.
0: normal (default), 1: to prevent re-transfer
2: to prevent separation fault, 3: to prevent transfer fault
5-81 T
COPIER>OPTION
TR-SP-C2
Settings
Use it to switch the transfer/separation output level when the left deck is
TR-SP-C3
Settings
Use it to switch the transfer/separation output level when the cassette 3 is

2; to prevent separation fault, 3: to prevent transfer fault
TR-SP-C4
Settings
Use it to switch the transfer/separation output level when the cassette 4 is

TR-SP-MF
Settings
Use it to prevent the transfer/separation output level when the manual feed
tray is used to prevent various problems.
TR-SP-DK
Settings
Use it to switch the transfer/separation output level when the paper deck is
TPR-DECL
Settings
Use it to switch the delivery path to improve stacking performance in reverse delivering thick paper.
0: normal (default), 1: move paper over reversing roller, and reverse/
delivery after removing curl
IFAX-LIM
Use it to control the number of output lines if a large amount of data arrives
in i-FAX.
0 to 999 (default: 500)
W/SCNR
Settings
5-82 T
Use it to indicate the presence/absence of a scanner for a copier model:

0: printer model (default)
1: model with scanner
DF_BLINE
Caution
Settings
Use it to turn on/off reduce mode (turning off edge emphasis) for black
lines in stream reading mode.
Turning on the mode will make black lines less noticeable, but the edges of
images will accordingly be less sharp
0: OFF (default), 1: ON
SMTPNXPN
Settings
Use it to change the number of the SMTP transmission port:

0 to 99999 (in increments of 1)
Default:
25
After a change, be sure to re-boot the machine.
SMTPRXPN
Settings
Use it to change the number of the SMTP reception port.

Default:
25
POP3PN
Settings
Use it to change the number of the P0P3 reception port:

Default:
110
USER
Making User-Related Settings
COPY-LIM
Settings
Use it to change the upper limit for setting a copy count.

1 to 999 (default: 999)
SLEEP
Settings
Use it to turn on/off sleep mode.

0: OFF, 1: ON (default)
WEB-DISP
Settings
Use it to turn on/off the fixing web length warning.

If OFF (no warning), the message will appear only when service mode
is started.
0: OFF (warning not issued; default ), 1: ON (warning issued)
5-83 T
COPIER>OPTION
SIZE-DET
Settings
Caution
Use it to turn on/off the original size detection mechanism.

0: ON (default), 1: OFF
After making the setting, be sure to turn off and then on the main power
switch.
W-TONER
Settings
Use it to turn on/off the waste toner case full message.

When OFF (no warning) is selected, the message will appear only when
service mode is started.
0: OFF (no warning issued; default), 1: ON (warning issued)
COUNTER1
Caution
Settings
Use it to indicate the type of soft counter of the control panel.

The type of soft counter 1 cannot be changed.
101: total 1 (default: fixed to 101; see T05-601-01)
COUNTER2
Settings
Use it to change the type of soft counter 2 of the control panel to suit the
needs of the user or the dealer.
000 to 804 (T05-601-01); default: 000 for 100-V model, 103 for 120/230V model
COUNTER3
Settings
000 to 804 (T05-601-01); default: 000 for 100-V model, 203 for 120/230V model
COUNTER4
Settings
000 to 804 (T05-601-091); default: 000 for 100-V model, 203 for 120/
230-V model
COUNTER5
Settings
000 to 804 (T05-601-01; default, 000)
COUNTER6
Settings
5-84 T
000 to 804 (T05-601-01; default: 000)
COPIER>OPTION
DATE-DSP
Caution
Settings
Use it to switch how the date is displayed.

For the 120V model, the default is 1.
0: YYYY MM/DD (default), 1: DD/MM YYYY, 2: MM/DD/YYYY
MB-CCV
Settings
Use it to impose limits on the Box function by the Control Card IV (CCIV).
0: enables control and printing regardless of presence/absence of card
in remote; in remote, makes no change
1: enables control and printing regardless of presence/absence of card
in remote; accepts print job, but stops printing in absence of card
(with card, enables printing but imposes charge; default)
2: disables control in remote; does not accept print job in remote
CONTROL
Settings
Controlling the PDL Printer Output

0: printing enabled in absence of card
1: printing enabled in presence of card
B4-L-CNT
Settings
Use it to specify whether B4 sheets are counted as large size or small size
for soft counters 1 through 6.
0: small size (default), 1: large size
TRAY-STP
Settings
Use it to prohibit suspension of printing by imposing limits to the number

of sheets to staple or mixing of sizes of the finisher.
0: normal mode (suspend printing by count/size; default)
1: suspend printing if height sensor is ON (full of paper)
MF-LG-ST
Settings
Use it to turn on the Extra Length key for sheets up to 630 mm (free in
manual feed); the 630 mm limit also applies to the ADF.
0: normal mode (default), 1: extra length mode (key indicated)
SPECK-DP
Settings
Use it to enable/disable indication of a warning for dust detection in stream

reading.
0: disable indication (default), 1: enable indication
CNT-DISP
Settings
Use it to enable/disable the indication of a serial number in response to the

Counter Check key.
0: enable indication (default), 1: disable indication
5-85 T
COPIER>OPTION
PH-D-EL
Settings
Use it to select the number of lines for photo mode printing.

0: 141 lines (default), 1: 134 lines
COPY-JOB
Settings
Use it to prevent auto copy start when a coin robot and a card reader.
0: copy job auto start selected (default)
1: copy job auto start not selected
OP-SZ-DT
Settings
Use it to turn on and off the original size detection mechanism in book
mode.
0: OFF (accepts input of original size from control panel; default)
1: ON (detects original size automatically)
NW-SCAN
Settings
5-86 T
Use it to enable/disable the network scan function:

0: disable (default)
1: enable
<Soft Counter Specifications>

The soft counters are classified as follows according to input numbers:
100s: total
500s: scan
200s: copies
600s: box
300s: prints
700: reception prints
400s: copies + prints
800: report prints
Legend
:
counter effective for the machine
4C:
full color
mono:
mono color (Y, M, C/R, G, B/sepia mono)
Bk:
black mono
L:
large size (larger than B4)
S:
small size (B4 or smaller)
number in counter: count indicating large-size sheets
In service mode, the settings may be changed so that B4 or larger may be counted as large
size (COPIER>OPTION>USER>B4-L-CNT).
Effective No.
000
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
Counter type
not indicated
total 1
total 2
total (L)
total (S)
total (4C1)
total (4C2)
total (Mono)
total (Bk 1)
total (Bk 2)
total (Mono/L)
total (Mono/S)
total (Bk/L)
total (Bk/S)
total (4C+Mono+Bk/
double-sided)
total 1 (double-sided)
total 2 (double-sided)
L (double-sided)
S (double-sided)
Effective No.
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
Counter type
copy (total 1)
copy (total 2)
copy (L)
copy (S)
copy A (total 1)
copy A (total 2)
copy A (L)
copy A (S)
local copy (total 1)
local copy (total 2)
local copy (L)
local copy (S)
remote copy (total 1)
remote copy (total 2)
remote copy (L)
remote copy (S)
copy (4C1)
copy (4C2)
T05-601-01a
5-87 T
Effective No.
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
Counter type
copy (Mono 1)
copy (Mono 2)
copy (Bk 1)
copy (Bk 2)
copy (4C/L)
copy (4C/S)
copy (Mono/L)
copy (Mono/S)
copy (Bk/L)
copy (Bk/S)
copy (4C+Mono/L)
copy (4C+Mono/S)
copy (4C+Mono/2)
copy (4C+Mono/1)
copy (4C/L/doublesided)
copy (4C/S/doublesided)
copy (Mono/L/doublesided)
copy (Mono/S/doublesided)
copy (Bk/L/double-sided)
copy (Bk/S/double-sided)
print (total 1)
print (total 2)
print (L)
print (S)
print A (total 1)
print A (total 2)
print A (L)
print A (S)
print (4C1)
print (4C1)
print (Mono 1)
print (Mono 2)
print (Bk 1)
print (Bk 2)
print (4C/L)
print (4C/S)
print (Mono/L)
print (Mono/S)
Effective No.
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
501
502
503
504
COPIER>OPTION
Counter type
print (Bk/L)
print (Bk/S)
print (4C+Mono/L)
print (4C+Mono/S)
print (4C+Mono/2)
print (4C+Mono/1)
print (4C/L/double-sided)
print (4C/S/double-sided)
print (Mono/L/doublesided)
print (Mono/S/doublesided)
print (Bk/L/double-sided)
print (Bk/S/double-sided)
PDL print (total 1)
PDL print (total 2)
PDL print (L)
PDL print (S)
copy + print (4C/L)
copy + print (4C/S)
copy + print (Bk/L)
copy + print (Bk/S)
copy + print (Bk 2)
copy + print (Bk 1)
copy + print (4C+Mono/L)
copy + print (4C+Mono/S)
copy + print (4C+Mono/2)
copy + print (4C+Mono/1)
copy + print (L)
copy + print (S)
copy + print (2)
copy + print (1)
scan (total 1)
copy scan (total/4)
scan (total 2)
scan (L)
copy scan (L/4)
scan (S)
copy scan (S/4)
T05-601-01b
5-88 T
Effective No.
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
Counter type
Bk scan (total 1)
copy scan (Bk)
Bk scan (total 2)
Bk scan (L)
copy scan (Bk/L)
Bk scan (S)
copy scan (Bk/S)
color scan (total 1)
copy scan (4C)
color scan (total 2)
color scan (L)
copy scan (4C/L)
color scan (S)
copy scan (4C/S)
copy scan (L)
copy scan (S)
copy scan (total)
Effective No.
601
602
603
604
701
702
703
704
801
802
803
804
COPIER>OPTION
Counter type
box print (total 1)
box print (total 2)
box print (L)
box print (S)
reception print (total 1)
reception print (total 2)
reception print (L)
reception print (S)
report print (total 1)
report print (total 2)
report print (L)
report print (S)
T05-601-01c
5-89 T
COPIER>OPTION
CST
Making Cassette-Related Settings
U1-NAME
U2-NAME
U3-NAME
U4-NAME
Settings
Use it to turn on/off the paper name indication when a paper size group (U1
to U4) is detected.
0: OFF (touch panel indicates U1 through U4; default)
1: ON (indicates paper name specified in CST-U1 through -U4)
CST-U1
Settings
Use it to specify paper names used for paper size group U1.
31: G-LTR (default), 22: K-LGL
CST-U2
Settings
24: FOOLSCAP (default), 26: OFFICIO, 27: E-OFFI, 36: A-OFI,
37: M-OFI
CST-U3
Settings
34: G-LGL (default), 29: A-LTR, 25: A-FLS
CST-U4
Settings
18: LTR (default), 29: A-LTR
P-SZ-C1
P-SZ-C2
Caution
Settings
Use it to specify paper size used in the front deck (C1: right deck, C2: left
deck).
After electing the appropriate paper size, be sure to turn off and then on the
main power switch.
6: A4 (default), 15: B5, 18: LTR
P-SZ-C4
Caution
Settings
5-90 T
Use it to select a paper size for the cassette 4.

This mode is effective only for the 120/230-V model.
After electing the appropriate paper size, be sure to turn off and then on
4: A3 (230-V model: default); 16: 1117 (120-V model: default); for
other size code, see T05-601-02)
COPIER>OPTION
<Code/Paper Names>
Code
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Notation
A1
A2
A3R
A3
A4R
A4
A5
A5R
B1
B2
B3
B4R
B4
B5R
B5
1117
LTRR
LTR
STMT
STMTR
Name
A1
A2
A3R
A3
A4R
A4
A5
A5R
B1
B2
B3
B4R
B4
B5R
B5
1117
LETTERR
LETTER
STATEMENT
STATEMENTR
Code
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Notation
LGL
K-LGL
K-LGLR
FLSC
A-FLS
OFI
E-OFI
B-OFI
A-LTR
A-LTRR
G-LTR
G-LTRR
A-LGL
G-LGL
FOLI
A-OFI
M-OFI
Name
LEGAL
Korean government
Korean government R
FOOLSCAP
Australian FOOLSCAP
OFFICIO
Ecuadorian OFFICIO
Bolivian OFFICIO
Argentine LETTER
Argentine LETTERR
Government LETTER
Government LETTERR
Argentine LEGAL
Government LEGAL
FOLIO
Argentine OFFICIO
Mexico OFFICIO
ALL
T05-601-02
5-91 T
COPIER>OPTION
ACC
Use it to make accessories-related settings.
COIN
Settings
Use it to turn on/off the coin vendor indication.

The control card indicator used on the control panel may be used for the
coin vendor.
0: OFF (default), 1: ON (for count vendor)
DK-P
Caution
Settings
Use it to set a paper of the paper deck.

After electing the appropriate paper size, be sure to turn off and then on the
main power switch.
0: A4 (default), 1: B5, 2: LTR
INT-FACE
Use it to set conditions when a connection is made to an external controller.
IMG-CONT
Settings
Use it to recognize an external EFI controller.

0: external EFI controller absent (default)
1: external EFI controller prevent
TEMPO
Use it as an emergency remedy when the potential sensor or the environment sensor is
faulty (out of order).
F-POT-SW
Settings
Use it to turn on and off the setting if a transfer fault occurs because of a
fault (error) in the potential sensor.
Use it as an emergency remedy until the potential sensor is replaced.
0: OFF (default), 1: enables F-POT-D setting
F-POT-D
Settings
5-92 T
Use it if a transfer fault occurs because of a fault (error) in he potential sensor.

It is valid only when F-POT-SW is set to '1'.
The level of separation current is in the order of 0>1>2.
0: for text-oriented users (originals with low image ratio)
1: for photo-oriented users (originals with high image ratio)
2: not used usually; however, if re-transfer (white spot at 50 mm
along leading edge) occurs
COPIER>OPTION
F-HUM-SW
Settings
Use it to turn on and off F-HUM-D if the environment senor has a fault (error).
Use it as an emergency remedy until the environment sensor is replaced.
0: OFF (default), 1: enables F-HUM-D
F-HUM-D
Settings
Use it to enter an approximate humidity level of the site of installation.

Uses the input humidity as the output of the humidity sensor.
Valid only if F-HUM-SW is set to '1'.
30% to 99% (default: 35%)
5-93 T
FEEDER>OPTION
6.2 FEEDER
SIZE-SW
Settings
Use it to turn on/off the mixed size detection mechanism for AB and Inch
series originals.
0: disable (default), 1: enable
6.3 SORTER
BLNK-SW
Settings
Use it to set the margin width (W) on both sides of the fold when the saddle
stitcher is used.
0: normal width (5 mm), 1: larger width (10 mm; default)
W
F05-603-01
5-94 T
BOARD>OPTION
6.4 BOARD
MENU-1
Settings
Use it to enable level 1 indication for the printer settings menu.

MENU-2
Settings

MENU-3
Settings
Use it to enable level 3 indication of the printer settings menu.

MENU-4
Settings

PCI1-OFF
Settings
Use it to turn off the slot 1 function when the board inserted into the PCI
slot 1 is out of order.
0: normal (default), 1: OFF (board function not used)
PCI2-OFF
Settings
Use it to turn off the slot 2 function when the board inserted into the PCI
PCI3-OFF
Settings
Use it to turn off the slot 3 functions when the board inserted into the PCI
5-95 T
7. TEST (test print mode)

The following screen appears in response to COPIER>TEST; for the items, see the pages
that follow:
PG
NETWORK
F05-701-01
5-96 T
COPIER>TEST
PG
Use it to select the type of test print and generate it.
TYPE
Enter the type number of the test print, and press the OK key to generate it.
Be user to return the input to 00 after generating the test print.
00: normal print, 01 through 08: see T05-701-01
Caution
Settings
TXPH
Use it to switch between text mode and photo mode during test printing.
0: text mode, 1: photo mode
Settings
PG_PICK
Settings
Use it to select the source of paper for test printing.

1: right deck (default), 2: left deck, 3: cassette 3, 4: cassette 4,
5 to 6: not used, 7: paper deck, 8: manual feed tray
<TYPE Input No./Test Print Type)

Input No.
00
01
02
03
04
Type
Input No.
image form CCD (normal print)
05
grid
06
17 gradations (w/ image correction)
07
17 gradations (w/o image correction)
08
blank
-
Type
halftone
solid black
vertical straight lines
horizontal straight lines
-
T05-701-01
5-97 T
COPIER>TEST
NETWORK
Use it to check the connections related to the network.
PING
Caution
Use it to check the connection between the machine and the network (for
TCP/IP environment only).
Use this mode to check the connection to the network after installing the
machine or when the connection to the network is found to be poor.
<NETWORK>
< 1/1 >

0.
PING
0.
IP address input
Result (OK/NG)
PREV
<READY >
0.
NEXT
+/-
OK
F05-701-02
Using the Mode
2) Connect the network cable to the machine, and turn on the main power
switch.
3) Inform the users system administrator that the machine has properly
been installed, asking him/her to make the appropriate network settings.
4) Inform the system administrator that the network connection will be
tested, and find out the remote host address (i.e., IP address of the PC
terminal on the user network) for PING.
COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING; then, enter the IP address obtained
in step 4), and press the OK key.
If the connection to the network is correct, OK will be indicated.
If NG is indicated, check the connection of the network cable; if cor
rect, go to step 6). If a fault is found in the connection of the network
cable, correct the fault, and go to step 5).
5-98 T
COPIER>TEST
COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING; then, enter the loop back address*
(127.0.0.1), and press the OK key and then the Start key.
If NG is indicated, the machine has a problem with the TCP/IP set
tings; go back to step 3), and check the settings.
If OK is indicated, the machines TCP/IP settings may be considered
to be free of a problem. However, the connection of the network inter
face board (NIC) or the NIC itself may have a problem. Go to step 7) to
make a check.
*The address will be returned before it reaches the NIC, allowing a check
on the machines TCP/IP settings.
COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING; then, enter the local host address
(i.e., the machines IP address), and press the OK key.
If NG is indicated, the NIC connection or the NIC itself is faulty.
Check the NIC connection or replace the NIC.
If OK is indicated, the machines network settings and NIC may be
considered to be free of problems. However, the environment of the user
network may be faulty. Report to the system administrator, and ask for
correction.
5-99 T
8. COUNTER (counter mode)

The following screen appears in response to COPIER>COUNTER; for the items, see the
pages that follow:
TOTAL
TOTAL
PICK-UP
PICK-UP
PRDC-1
FEEDE
FEEDER
JAM
DRBL-1
MISC
DRBL-2
F05-801-01
<Clearing the Counter Reading>

1) Select the item to clear (to highlight).
2) Press the Clear key on the control panel.
The counter will be cleared, and will return to 00000000.
<Small Size and Large Size in the Mode>

large size (L):
small size (S):
5-100 T
larger than A4 or LTR.

A4 or LTR or smaller
COPIER>COUNTER
<Guide to Consumables Counter>

The machine is equipped with consumables counters (PRDC-1, DRBL-1, DRBL-2), providing references for parts replaced on a periodical basis or parts requiring replacement.
EX.
PRM-WIRE
[1]
/ 00000027 /
[2]
00500000 /
[3]
0% !! 000082
[4] [5] [6]
[1] Indicates the name of the part. In the case of the example, the primary charging wire.
[2] Indicates the counter reading (number of actual sheets handled); clear it by pressing the
Clear key after replacing the part.
[3] Indicates the limit setting (guide to replacement); the setting may be changed by selecting the image and using the keypad (thereafter, press the OK key).
[4] Indicates the ratio of counter readings to limit levels.
[5] A single exclamation mark (!) will be indicated between 90% and 100%; two marks at
100% or higher; otherwise, no mark.
[6] Indicates an estimated number of days to replacement; in the case of the example, 82
days.
Level 1: COUNTER
Level 2: TOTAL
Level 3: SERVICE 1
SERVICE 2
COPY
PDL-PRT
FAX-PRT
PMT-PRT
BOX-PRT
RPT-PRT
2-SIDE
SCAN
List of Counter Items

Mode
total counter 1 for servicing
total counter 2 for servicing
copy counter
PDL print counter
fax reception print counter
remote copy/print counter
Box print counter
report print counter
double-sided print counter
scanner counter
5-101 T
COPIER>COUNTER
Level 2: PICK-UP
Level 3: C1
C2
C3
C4
MF
DK
2-SIDE
Level 2: FEEDER
Level 3: FEED
Level 2: JAM
Level 3: TOTAL
FEEDER
SORTER
2-SIDE
MF
C1
C2
C3
C4
DK
Level 2: MISC
Level 3: FIX-WEB*
WST-TNR
right front deck (cassette 1) pickup counter

left front deck (cassette 2) pickup counter
cassette 3 pickup counter
cassette 4 pickup counter
manual feed tray pickup counter
paper deck pickup counter
duplexing 2nd side pickup counter
feeder pickup total counter
machine total jam counter
feeder (ADF) jam counter
sorter (finisher) jam counter
duplexing assembly jam counter
manual feed tray jam counter
right front deck (cassette 1) jam counter
left front deck (cassette 3) jam counter
cassette 3 jam counter
cassette 4 jam counter
paper deck jam counter
fixing web counter (Be sure to reset after replacing the fixing
web.)
waste toner counter (Be sure to reset after disposing of the
waste toner.)
*When FIX-WEB counts up to '2000', 'E005' will be indicated.

Level 2: PRDC-1
Level 3: PRM-WIRE
PRM-GRID
PO-WIRE
TR-WIRE
SP-WIRE
PRM-CLN
TR-CLN
PO-CLN
SP-CLN
FIX-TH1
FIX-TH2
FX-TSW
OZ-FIL3
5-102 T
primary charging wire counter

primary grid wire counter
pre-transfer (post-) charging wire counter
transfer charging wire counter
separation charging wire counter
primary charging wire cleaner counter
transfer charging wire cleaner counter
pre-transfer charging wire cleaner counter
separation charging wire cleaner counter
fixing main thermistor (TH1) counter
fixing sub thermistor (TH2) counter
fixing thermal switch (TP1) counter
ozone filter (FM3) counter
COPIER>COUNTER
level 2: DRBL-1
Level 3: PRM-UNIT
PO-UNIT
PO-SCRPR
T/S-UNIT
CLN-BLD
SP-CLAW
DVG-CYL
DVG-ROLL
C3-PU-RL
C3-SP-RL
C3-FD-RL
C4-PU-RL
C4-SP-RL
C4-FD-RL
LD-PU-RL
LD-SP-RL
LD-FD-RL
RD-SP-RL
RD-FD-RL
RD-PU-RL
M-SP-RL
M-PO-RL
M-FD-RL
FX-UP-RL
FX-LW-RL
FX-IN-BS
FX-WEB*
DLV-UCLW
DLV-LCLW
primary charging assembly counter

pre-transfer charging assembly counter
pre-transfer (post-) charging assembly scraper counter
transfer/separation charging assembly counter
cleaner blade counter
cleaner separation claw counter
developing cylinder counter
developing assembly roll counter
cassette 3 pickup roller counter
cassette 3 separation roller counter
cassette 3 feed roller counter
cassette 4 pickup roller counter
cassette 4 separation roller counter
cassette 4 feed roller counter
left front deck pickup roller counter
left front deck separation roller counter
left front deck feed roller counter
right front deck separation roller counter
right front deck feed roller counter
right front deck pickup roller counter
manual feed separation roller counter
manual feed pull-off roller counter
manual feed roller counter
upper fixing roller counter
lower riding roller counter
fixing insulating bush counter
fixing web counter (Be sure to reset after replacing the fixing
web.)
delivery upper separation claw counter
delivery lower separation claw counter
*The limit of FX-WEB is set to 300,000.
5-103 T
COPIER>COUNTER
Level 2: DRBL-2
Level 3: DF-PU-RL
DF-SP-PL
DF-SP-PD
DF-FD-RL
LNT-TAPE
PD-PU-RL
PD-SP-RL
PD-FD-RL
FIN-STPR
FIN-FDBL
FIN-PDDL
SDL-STPL
PUNCH
PNCH-HRS
5-104 T
ADF pickup roller counter

ADF separation plate counter
ADF separation pad counter
ADF feed roller counter
ADF dust-collecting tape counter
paper deck pickup roller counter
paper deck separation roller counter
paper deck feed roller counter
finisher stapler counter
finisher feed belt counter
finisher paddol counter
saddle staple counter
punch counter
punch harness counter
CHAPTER 6
SELF DIAGNOSIS
1. Error Codes
1.1 List of Error Codes
The machine is equipped with a mechanism to run self diagnosis to find out its condition
(particularly of its sensors): CPU on the main controller PCB and the CPU on the DC controller PCB. If it finds a fault, it indicates the nature of the fault in its control panel.
The following is a list of codes and descriptions (including timing of detection); a code
may have detailed codes, which may be checked in service mode (COPIER>
DISPLAY>JAM/ERR).
E000
Main Cause
AC driver is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
Caution
0000 After the main power switch is turned on, the temperature detected
by the main thermistor does not reach 70C.
The error must be reset in service mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>
CLEAR>ERR).
E001
Main Cause
The main thermistor (TH1) has a short circuit. The sub thermistor (TH2)
has detected overheating. The AC driver is faulty. The DC controller PCB is
faulty.
Mode of
Detection
Caution
0001 The main thermistor or the sub thermistor has detected about
230C or higher for 2 sec.
0002 The main thermistor has detected 230C or higher (hard circuit detection).
0003 The sub thermistor has detected about 236C or higher.
CLEAR>ERR).
6-1 T
E002
Main Cause
switch (TP1) has an open circuit. The AC driver is faulty. The DC controller
is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
Caution
0000 The temperature of the upper fixing roller does not reach 100C
within 2 min after it has exceeded 70C.
CLEAR>ERR).
E003
Main Cause
AC driver is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
Caution
0000 The temperature detected by the main thermistor is 70C for 2 sec
or more after it has reached 100C.
CLEAR>ERR).
E004
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
Caution
The AC driver has a short circuit. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
0000 The AC driver is found to have a short circuit (hard circuit detection).
CLEAR>ERR).
E005
Main Cause
The fixing web has been taken up. The fixing web length sensor (PS45) is
faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
Caution
6-2 T
0000 The length of fixing web that has been taken up is in excess of the
specified length.
After replacing the fixing web, be sure to reset the two web counters in service mode: COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB and COPIER>
COUNTER>DRBL-1>FX-WEB.
E010
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
The main motor (M2) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
0000 The clock pulses do not arrive for 2 secs or more after the main
motor drive signal (MMFG) has been generated.
E012
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
The drum motor (M1) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
0000 The clock pulses do not arrive for 2 secs or more after the drum
motor drive signal (DMFG) has been generated.
E013
Main Cause
The waste toner feedscrew is faulty. The water toner clock sensor (MSW2)
is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0000 The rotation of the waste toner feedscrew goes out of order, and
the switch (MSW2) is pressed multiple times during a specific period of time.
E014
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
The fixing motor (M19) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
0000 The motor clock signal is detected for 2 secs or more continuously
after the fixing motor drive signal has been generated.
E020
Main Cause
The hopper connector is left disconnected. The hopper motor (M9/M10) is

faulty. The toner sensor (TS1/TS2) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is
faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0000 During printing, the toner supply signal is '0' (absence of toner) for
2 mins.
6-3 T
E032
Main Cause
The copy data controller or the remote diagnostic device is faulty. The Main
controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 Although once connected, the copy data controller or the remote
diagnostic device has become disconnected.
E061
Identify the fault with the potential measurement unit or with the scanner system.
With 'E061' indicated, start service mode, and make the
following selections: COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT.
Difference between
'VDM' and 'VDT'.
lower than 6V
Check the shutter

mechanisms.
higher than 6V
Value of $ is 1 V.
NG
Correct the shutter,

or replace the scanner unit.
OK
NO
Check the pre-exposure

system. (Note 1)
YES
Replace the scanner unit.
NG
Replace the
potential sensor.
Replace the DC controller.
NG
Replace the primary

charging assembly.
OK
Use service mode to check the pre-exposure mechanism: COPIER>FUNCTION>PRE-EXP.

If the fault is not corrected using the above, suspect the effects of variation in drum sensitivity.
Upgrade the DIMM ROM of the DC controller to version 0.4 or higher.
NG
Replace the
DC controller.
E100
Main Cause
The BD PCB is faulty. The laser unit is faulty. The laser driver PCB is
faulty. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The DC controller
PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 In 100 msec after the laser drive signal has been generated, the BD
signal is not detected 50 times or more within 40 msecs.
0002 While the laser is on, the BD signal cycle is found to be outside a
specific range 10 times or more.
6-4 T
E110
Main Cause
The laser scanner motor (M15) is faulty. The wiring is faulty (short circuit,
open circuit). The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 After the laser scanner motor drive signal has been generated,
the motor ready signal (LMRDY*) does not arrive for 15 secs or
more. (stop full speed, half-speed full speed)
During the period of 'full speed half speed', the motor ready
signal does not arrive for 60 secs or more after the speed change
signal has been generated.
During the period of 'full speed rotation', the motor ready signal
is not detected 50 times or more (t intervals of 100 msec).
E121
Main Cause
The controller cooling fan (FM4) is faulty. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 Although the controller cooling fan (FM4) is being driven, the
clock signal (FM4CLK) does not arrive for 5 secs or more.
E196
Main Cause
The EEPROM on the DC controller PCB is faulty. The location of the

EEPROM is wrong. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
1abb When data is written to the EEPROM, the data written and the data
read do not match.
2abb When the ID read into the EEPROM and the ID into the ROM are
compared, a mismatch is found.
3abb When ID in the EEPROM and the ID in the ROM are compared
after the main power switch is turned on, a mismatch is found.
a:
chip Nos. 0 through 5 (0: IC104, 1: IC105, 2: IC109, 3: IC110, 4:
IC127, 5: IC130)
bb:
chip faulty address (bit)
6-5 T
E202
Main Cause
The scanner HP sensor (PS39) is faulty. The scanner motor (M3) is faulty.
The reader controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The scanner HP sensor does not turn off even when the scanner has
been moved 40 mm forward after the main power switch has been
turned on or the Start key has been pressed.
0002 The scanner HP sensor does not turn on even when the scanner has
been moved 450 mm in reverse.
E204
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
The ADF controller PCB is faulty. The reader controller PCB is faulty.
0001 During printing, the image leading edge signal does not arrive from
the ADF.
E220
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
The lamp inverter PCB is faulty. The reader controller PCB is faulty.
0001 The lamp inverter PCB is found to have a fault.
E225
Main Cause
The scanning lamp (xenon tube) is faulty. The inverter PCB is faulty. The
CCD/AP PCB is faulty. The reader controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0000 A specific signal level cannot be attained by CCD gain correction
at power-on.
0002 The edge gain correction value changed more than a specific level
compared with the correction value used for the preceding sheet.
E240
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
The main controller PCB. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
0000 An error has occurred in the communication between the main

controller PCB and the CPU of the DC controller PCB.
6-6 T
E243
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
The control panel CPU PCB is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty.
0000 An error has occurred in communication between the CPU of the

control panel CPU PCB and the main controller PCB.
E248
Main Cause
The EEPROM on the reader controller PCB is faulty. The reader controller
PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The ID read into the EEPROM when the main power switch has
been turned on and the ID in the ROM do not match.
0002 When data is written into EEPROM, the data written and the data
read do not match.
0003 When data is written, the ID in the EEPROM and the ID in the
ROM are found not to match.
E302
Main Cause
The CCD/AP PCB is faulty. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The reader controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 During shading, the reader controller PCB does not end shading in
1 sec.
0002 In stream reading, the edge white accumulation (processing) does
not end after a period of 10 secs.
E315
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
Main controller PCB, Hard disk drive
0007 When a start command is seen to the encoder of the compression/

extension element of the main controller, an end interrupt does not
occur after 4 sec.
0010 When a start command is sent to the compression/extension element of the main controller at time of decoding, an end interrupt
does not occur after 4 sec.
6-7 T
E601
Main Cause
The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The hard disk drive is
faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0000 The main controller PCB has detected an error in control data
while an image was transmitted between the main controller PCB
and the hard disk drive.
0001 The main controller PCB has found an error in the control data in
transfer of images between main controller PCB and the DC controller PCB.
E602
Main Cause
The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The hard disk drive is
faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 A mount error was detected when the hard disk was started up
from the boot ROM.
0002 A data read error (from the hard disk) was detected when the hard
disk was started from the boot ROM.
0003 a sector error is found on the hard disk.
0004 an error is found in the read/write address for the hard disk.
E607
Main Cause
The hard disk fan (FM7) is faulty. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open
circuit). The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0000 While the hard disk fan (FM7) is being driven, the clock signal
(FM7CLK) does not arrive for 5 secs or more.
E677
Main Cause
The various printer board (accessories) are faulty. The main controller PCB
is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 An error has occurred in the communication between the various
printer boards (accessories) and the main controller PCB.
6-8 T
E710
Main Cause
The DC controller PCB is faulty. The reader controller PCB is faulty.

The main controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 When the main power is turned on, the IPC (IC5021) on the reader
controller PCB cannot be initialized.
0002 When the main power is turned on, the IPC (IC120) on the DC
0003 When the main power is turned on, the IPC (IC1003) on the main
E711
Main Cause
The connector is not connected properly. The remote diagnostic device PCB
is faulty. The copy data controller PCB is faulty. The ADF controller PCB is
faulty. The ADF controller PCB is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is
faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 Data has been written to the error register of the IPC (IC5021) on
the reader controller PCB four times or more within 1.5 secs.
0002 Data has been written to the error register of the IPC (IC120) on
the DC controller PCB four times or more within 2 secs.
0003 Data has been written to the error register of the IPC (IC1003) of
the main controller PCB four times or more within 2 secs.
E712
Main Cause
The connector is not connected properly. The ADF 24-V power supply is
faulty. The ADF controller PCB is faulty. The reader controller PCB is
faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 Communication does not resume in 3 secs after data has been written to the error register of the communication IC (IPC) of the ADF
controller PCB.
0002 The transmission bit is not enabled after a period of 10 sec at the
sync register of the IPC (IC5021) on the reader controller PCB.
6-9 T
E713
Main Cause
The connector is not connected properly. The finisher accessories power

supply PCB is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0000 The communications IC (IPC) on the finisher controller has gone
out of order.
E717
Main Cause
The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The copy data controller or
the remote diagnostic device is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
Caution
0001 The copy data controller or the NE controller is out of order or an

open circuit has been detected.
CLEAR>ERR).
E719
Main Cause
The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The coin vendor is faulty.
The main controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
Caution
0001 The communication between the coin vendor and the main controller PCB has been interrupted.
CLEAR>ERR).
E732
Main cause
Mode of
Detection
The connector has poor contact. The reader controller PCB is faulty.
0001 The main controller PCB has detected an error in the communication between the reader controller PCB and the main controller
PCB.
9999 in a printer mode, a read unit is detected by the main controller
PCB.
6-10 T
E733
Main cause
Mode of
Detection
The connector has poor contact. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
0001 The main controller PCB has detected an error in the communication between the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB.
E740
Main cause
Mode of
Detection
The LAN card is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty.
0001 An error is detected on the LAN card at power-on (with the card
inserted).
0002 A MAC address is found to be faulty.
0003 The LAN card register cannot be read.
E741
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
The PCI bus connection is not proper. The main controller PCB is faulty.
0000 An error has occurred in the PCI bus.
E743
Main cause
Mode of
Detection
The connector has poor contact. The main controller PCB is faulty.
0000 The reader controller PCB has detected an error in the communication between the main controller PCB and the reader controller
PCB.
E804
Main Cause
The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The DC power supply fan
(FM6) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0000 While the DC power supply fan is being driven, the clock signal
6-11 T
E744
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
The boot ROM and the firmware have a mismatch of model or type:
0001 at time of start-up, the language file and the main controller have a
version mismatch.
0002 at time of start-up, the language file is found to be too large.
0003 at time of start-up, the language file is absent.
0004 at time of start-up, the language file cannot be read.
1000 at time of start-up, the bottom ROM product name is found to be a
mismatch.
2000 at time of start-up, the serial number of the serial number PCB is
an undefined code.
E805
Main Cause
The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The feed fan (FM1) is
faulty. The heat discharge fan (FM3) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is
faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 While the heat discharge fan is being driven, the clock signal
0002 While the feed fan is being driven, the clock signal (FM1CLK)
does not arrive for 5 secs or more.
E824
Main Cause
The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The primary charging assembly cooling fan (FM2) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0000 While the primary charging assembly cooling fan is being driven,
the clock signal (FM2CLK) does not arrive for 5 secs or more.
6-12 T
1.2 Self Diagnosis of the ADF

When the machine's self diagnosis mechanism has turned on, the condition can be reset
by turning off and then on the host machine's power switch.
If the machine must remain out of order, prints may still be made by disconnecting the
machine's lattice connector, and placing an original on the host machine's copyboard glass.
E412
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
The cooling fan (FM1) is faulty. The ADF controller PCB is faulty.
0001 While the cooling fan is being driven, the lock signal (FMLCK)
arrives for 100 msec or more.
E420
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
The EEPROM is faulty. The ADF controller PCB is faulty.
0001 When the host machine's power switch is turned on, the backup
data of the EEPROM cannot be read or the data, if read, has an error.
E421
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
The EEPROM is faulty. The ADF controller PCB is faulty.
0001 Backup data cannot be written to the EEPROM or the data, if written, has an error.
E422
Main Cause
The IPC communication has an error. The communication line has an open
circuit. The ADF controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 While the machine is in standby, the communication with the host
machine has been interrupted for 5 secs or more. or, while the machine is in operation, the communication with the host machine has
been interrupted for 0.5 sec or more.
6-13 T
1.3 Self Diagnosis of the Finisher
E500
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
0001 The communication between the host machine and the finisher has
been interrupted; this error is detected by the host machine.
E503
Main Cause
The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is
faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0002 The communication between the saddle stitcher controller PCB
and the finisher controller PCB has been interrupted.
E504
Main Cause
Mode of
Detection
The height sensor (PS1) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
0001 Communication between the height sensor and the finisher controller PCB is not possible, or communication data has an error.
0002 Communication between the height sensor and the finisher controller PCB is not possible for a specific period of time.
0003 At time of power-on, the connector of the height sensor is found to
be disconnected.
0004 When the height sensor is being adjusted using the DIP switch, an
error occurred during the adjustment.
E505
Main Cause
The EEPROM is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The puncher
driver PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 When the power switch is turned on, the check sum of the
EEPROM on the finisher controller PCB is found to have an error.
0002 When the power switch is turned on, the check sum of the
EEPROM on the puncher driver PCB is found to have an error.
6-14 T
E512
Main Cause
The delivery motor clock sensor (PI10) is faulty. The delivery motor (M2)
is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 When operation starts, as many clocks as needed do not arrive
from the delivery motor clock sensor.
0002 No clock pulse arrives while paper is being moved over a distance
of 200 mm.
E530
Main Cause
The alignment plate home position sensor (PI6) is faulty. The alignment
motor (M3) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The alignment plate does not leave home position when the alignment motor has been driven for 2 secs.
0002 The alignment plate does not return to home position when the
alignment motor has been driven for 2 secs.
E531
Main Cause
The stapler home position detecting switch (MS7) is faulty. The stapler motor (M6) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The stapler does not leave home position when the stapler motor
has been driven for 0.5 sec.
0002 The stapler does not return to home position when the stapler motor has been driven for 0.5 sec.
E532
Main Cause
The stapler shift home position sensor (PI7) is faulty. The stapler shift motor (M4) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The stapler unit does not leave home position when the stapler shift
motor has been driven for 4 secs.
0002 The stapler unit does not return to home position when the stapler
shift motor has been driven for 4 secs.
6-15 T
E535
Main Cause
The swing motor clock sensor (PI20) is faulty. The swing guide open sensor (PI18) is faulty. The safety area switch (MS3) is faulty. The swing guide
closed detecting switch 2 (MS6) is faulty. The swing motor (M7) is faulty.
The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The swing guide closed detecting switch 2 does not turn on when
the swing motor has been rotated CCW for 1 sec.
0002 The swing guide open sensor does not turn on when the swing motor has been rotated CW for 1 sec.
0003 When the tray lift motor is in operation, the swing guide closed detecting switch 2 is found to be off while the tray 1/2 is at OFF position of the safety area switch.
0004 No clock arrives for 200 msecs while the machine is in swing operation.
E540
Main Cause
The tray home position sensor (PI8) is faulty. The tray lifter motor clock
sensor 1/2 (PI9/PI19) is faulty. The tray upper limit detecting switch (MS5)
is faulty. The tray lifter motor (M5) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is
faulty.
0001 The ascent does not end in 15 secs when the tray lift motor is
driven; or, the tray home position cannot be detected when the tray
lift motor has been driven for 15 secs.
0002 While the tray is moving up, the tray upper limit detection switch
is found to be on.
0003 When the tray lift motor is driven, clock pulses do not arrive from
the clock sensor 1/2 for 200 msecs.
E584
Main Cause
The shutter open sensor (PI5) is faulty. The safety area detecting switch
(MS3) is faulty. The shutter closed detecting switch (MS4) is faulty. The
No. 2 feed motor (M8) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The shutter closed detecting switch does not turn on when the No.
2 feed motor has been rotated CCW for 1 sec or more.
0002 The shutter open sensor does not turn on when the No. 2 feed motor has been rotated CCW for 1 sec.
0003 While the tray lift motor is in operation, the shutter closed detecting switch is found to be off when the tray 1/2 is at OFF position
of the safety area detecting switch.
6-16 T
E590
Main Cause
The punch home position sensor (PI3P) is faulty. The punch motor (M1P)
is faulty. The punch driver PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The puncher does not leave home position when the punch motor
has been driven for 200 msecs.
0002 The puncher does not return to home position when the punch motor has been driven for 200 msecs.
E593
Main Cause
The horizontal registration home position sensor (PI1P) is faulty. The horizontal registration motor (M1P) is faulty. The punch driver PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The puncher does not leave home position when the horizontal registration motor has been driven for 4 secs.
0002 The puncher does not return to home position when the horizontal
registration motor has been driven for 4 secs.
6-17 T
1.4 Self Diagnosis of the Saddle Stitcher
E5F0
Main Cause
The paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7S) is faulty. The paper positioning plate motor (M4S) is faulty. The saddle stitcher controller
PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not turn on
when the paper positioning plate motor has been driven for about
1.3 secs.
0002 The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not turn off
1 sec after the paper positioning plate motor has been driven for 1
sec.
E5F1
Main Cause
The folding motor clock sensor (PI4S) is faulty. The paper folding home
position sensor (PI21S) is faulty. The folding motor (M2S) is faulty. The
saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The number of detection pulses of the folding motor clock sensor
drops below a specific value.
0002 The state of the paper folding home position sensor does not
change when the folding motor has been driven for 3 secs.
E5F2
Main Cause
The guide home position sensor (PI13S) is faulty. The guide motor (M3S)
is faulty. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The guide home position sensor does not turn on when the guide
motor has been driven for about 0.5 sec.
0002 The guide home position sensor does not turn off when the guide
motor has been driven for 1 sec.
6-18 T
E5F3
Main Cause
The alignment home position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. The alignment motor
(M5S) is faulty. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The alignment plate home position sensor does not turn on when
the alignment motor has been driven for 0.5 sec (initially, driven
for about 1.7 sec).
0002 The alignment plate home position sensor does not turn off when
the alignment motor has been driven for 1 sec.
E5F4
Main Cause
The stitch home position sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty. The stitch motor
(rear, M6S) is faulty. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The stitcher home position sensor (rear) does not turn off when the
stitch motor (rear) has been rotated CW for 0.5 sec or more.
0002 The stitch home position sensor (rear) does not turn on when the
stitch motor (rear) has been rotated CCW for 0.5 sec or more.
E5F5
Main Cause
The stitch home position senor (front, MS7S) is faulty. The stitch motor
(front, M7S) is faulty. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The stitch home position sensor (front) does not turn off when the
stitch motor (front) has been rotated CW for 0.5 sec or more.
0002 The stitch home position sensor (front) does not turn on when the
stitch motor (front) has been rotated CCW for 0.5 sec or more.
6-19 T
E5F6
Main Cause
The paper push-on plate motor clock sensor (PI1S) is faulty. The paper
push-on plate leading edge position sensor (PI15S) is faulty. The paper
push-on plate home position sensor (PI14S) is faulty. The paper push-on
plate motor (M8S) is faulty. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The paper push-on plate home position sensor does not turn on
when the paper push-on plate motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or
more.
0002 The paper push-on plate home position sensor does not turn off
more.
0003 The paper push-on plate leading edge position sensor does not turn
off when the paper push-on plate motor has been driven for 0.3 sec
or more.
0004 The number of detection pulses of the paper push-on plate motor
clock sensor drops below a specific value.
0005 The paper push-on plate leading edge sensor does not turn on
more.
E5F8
Main Cause
The guide home position sensor (PI13S) is faulty. The paper push-on plate
home position sensor (PI14S) is faulty. The paper push-on plate leading
edge position sensor (PI15S) is faulty. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is
faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 The connector of the guide home position sensor is found to be
disconnected.
0002 The connector of the paper home positioning plate home position
sensor is found to be disconnected.
0003 The connector of the paper push-on plate leading edge position
sensor is found to be discontented.
6-20 T
E5F9
Main Cause
The inlet door switch (MS1S) is faulty. The front door switch (MS2S) is
faulty. The delivery door switch (MS3S) is faulty. The saddle stitch controller PCB is faulty.
Mode of
Detection
0001 When the inlet cover, front cover, and the delivery cover are found
to be closed, the inlet door switch detects an open condition for 1
sec or more from the start of the initial rotation of the host machine
or the start of printing.
0002 When the inlet cover, front cover, and delivery cover are found to
be closed, the front door switch detects an open condition for 1 sec
or more after the start of the initial rotation of the host machine or
the start of printing.
0003 When the inlet cover, front cover, and delivery cover are found to
be closed, the delivery door switch detects an open condition for 1
sec or more from the start of the initial rotation of the host machine
or the start of printing.
6-21 T
APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART

General Timing Chart I
A4, 2 Sheets, Single-Sided, Direct; Right Deck (face-down delivery)
Originals placed
Start key ON
STBY
1st original separated/feed
1st original read

2nd original separated/feed
1st original delivered

2nd original read
2nd original delivered
Original set sensor (PI5)

Post-separation sensor (S3)
Registration 1 paper sensor
(PS1)
ADF
Read sensor (S2)

Delivery reversal sensor (S1)
yyy
;;;
;;;
yyy
Pickup motor (M1)
CCW rotation
Feed motor (M2)
CW rotation
yyyy
;;;;
;;;;
yyyy
Delivery reversal motor (M3)

Locking solenoid (SL2)
Pickup clutch (CL1)
Reader unit
Image leading edge signal

Scanner home positon sensor
(PS39)
Scanning lamp (LA2)
yyy
;;;
;;;
yyy
Scanner motor (M3)
CCW rotation
CW rotation
Print command sent
Print command sent
Print command received

PSTBY
PINTR
PRINT
LSTR
PSTBY
Main motor (M2)

Drum motor (M1)
Laser ON
Pre-exposure LED
Primary charging
Grid bias
Developing clutch (CL1)
Dust collecting roller bias (DC)
yyyy
;;;;
;;;;
yyyy
yyyy
;;;;
;;;;
yyyy
Max. application 600V
Pre-transfer charging bias (DC)

Pre-transfer charging bias (AC)
Transfer charging
Separation charging bias (AC)
Separation charging bias (DC)
Fixing sub heater (100V; H2)
Printer unit
Fixing sub heater

(120/230V; H2)
Right deck pickup solenoid
(SL11)
Vertical path duplexing feed
motor (M25)
Vertical path roller 1 sensor
(PS47)
(PS29)
Fixing inlet guide solenoid
(SL1)
Eternal delivery sensor (PS36)
Fixing motor (M19)
Delivery flapper solenoid
(SL5)
yyy
;;;
;;;
yyy
CCW rotation
CW rotation
yyy
;;;
;;;
yyy
Fixing web solenoid (SL2)

Reversal flapper solenoid
(SL 11)
Reversal sensor 1(PS37)
Duplex feed left motor (M29)
Duplex feed right motor (M18)
Duplex paper sensor (PS34)
(PS30)
Horizontal registration sensor
(PS31)
A-1
General Timing Chart II

A4, 1 Sheet, Direct, Double-Sided; Right Deck
Original placed
Start key ON
STBY
Original separated/feed
Original face read
Original reversed
Original back read
Idle CCW/delivery
Original set sensor (PI5)

Post-separation sensor (S3)
Registration 1 paper sensor
(PS1)
ADF
Read sensor (S2)

Delivery reversal sensor (S1)
yyy
;;;
;;;
yyy
Pickup motor (M1)
CW rotation
CCW rotation
Feed motor (M2)
yy
;;
;;
yy
Delivery reversal motor (M3)

Locking solenoid (SL2)
yy
;;
;;
yy
Pickup clutch (CL1)
Reader unit
Image leading edge signal

Scanner home position sensor
(PS39)
Scanning lamp (LA2)
yyy
;;;
Scanner motor (M3)
CCW rotation
CW rotation
Print command sent

PSTBY
PINTR
PRINT
LSTR
PSTBY
Main motor (M2)

Drum motor (M1)
Laser ON
Pre-exposure LED
Primary charging
Grid bias
Developing clutch (CL1)
Dust colleting roller bias (DC)
yyyy
;;;;
;;;;
yyyy
yyy
;;;
;;;
yyy
Max. application 600V
Pre-transfer charging bias (DC)

Pre-transfer charging bias (AC)
Transfer charging
Separation charging bias (AC)

Separation charging bias (DC)
Fixing sub heater
(100V;H2)
Fixing sub heater
(120/230V;H2)
Right deck pickup solenoid
(SL11)
Vertical path duplex feed
motor (M25)
Vertical path roller 1 sensor
(PS47)
(PS29)
Fixing inlet guide solenoid
(SL1)
Eternal delivery sensor (PS36)
Fixing motor (M19)
Delivery flapper solenoid (SL5)
CW rotation
yyy
;;;
;;;
yyy
CCW rotation
Fixing web solenoid (SL2)

Reversal flapper solenoid
(SL11)
Duplex feed left motor (M29)
Duplex feed right motor (M18)
Duplex paper sensor (PS34)
(PS30)
Horizontal registration sensor
(PS31)
A-2
APPENDIX
B. LIST OF SIGNALS/ABBREVIATIONS
The following is a list of the signals and abbreviations used in this chapter and the circuit
diagrams.
REF.
The abbreviations in parentheses are electrical signals, but are analog signals, which cannot be expressed in terms of 1 or 0. Others are digital
signals, which may be expressed in terms of 1 or 0.
ADF_OPEN
C3LMD
C3LTP
C3OP
C3PD
C3PL0
C3PL1
C3PLV
C3PUSD*
C3PWD
C3RTD
C4LMD
C4LTP
C4OP
C4PD
C4PL0
C4PL1
C4PLV
C4PUSD*
C4PWD
C4RTD
CBOP
CJAM
D_SENS3*
DEV-AC-REMOTE
DEV-DC-CNT
DEVCD*
DMFG
ADF COVER OPEN/CLOSED DETECTION signal

CASSETTE3 LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE command
CASSETTE3 LIFTER POSITION DETECTION signal
CASSETTE3 OPEN/CLOSED DETECTION signal
CASSETTE3 PAPER DETECTION signal
CASSETTE3 LENGTH DETECTION signal
CASSETTE3 PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal
CASSETTE3 PICK-UP SOLENOID DRIVE command
CASSETTE3 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION
CASSETTE3 RETRY DETECTION signal
CASSETTE4 LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE command
CASSETTE4 LIFTER POSITION DETECTION signal
CASSETTE4 OPEN/CLOSED DETECTION signal
CASSETTE4 PAPER DETECTION signal
CASSETTE4 PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal
CASSETTE4 PICK-UP SOLENOID DRIVE command
CASSETTE4 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION
CASSETTE4 RETRY DETECTION signal
FIXING WEB LENGTH DETECTION signal
CLAW JAM DETECTION signal
DOCUMENT SIZE DETECTION signal
DEVELOPING DC BIAS REMOTE signal
DEVELOPING DC BIAS CURRENT CONTROL signal
DEVELOPING CLUTCH DRIVE command
DRUM MOTOR CLOCK signal
A-3
APPENDIX
DMON
DPDS
DRGFPD
DRUM HT ON
DSJAM
DSRGPD
DTEP
EDS
FCBSD*
FDOD
FFUS*
FM1CLK
FM1ON
FM2CLK
FM2ON
FM3CLK
FM3ON
FM4CLK
FM4ON
FM5CLK
FM5ON
FM6CLK
FM6ON
FM7CLK
FM7ON
FM8CLK
FM8ON
HPSENS
HV-CR-REMOTE
IDS
INV_ERR
L-RDY
LAMP_ON
LD(+)
LD(-)
LD-DT
A-4
DRUM MOTOR DRIVE command

DUPLEXING PAPER DETECTION signal
DUPLEXING PRE-REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal
DRUM HEATER DRIVE CONTROL signal
DERIVERY JAM DETECTION signal
DUPLEXING SIDE REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal
DEVELOPER TONER signal
EXTERNAL DELIVERY signal
FIXING WEB SOLENOID DRIVE command
FRONT DOOR OPEN/CLOSE DETECTION signal
FIXING FEED UNIT LOCKED DETECTION signal
FEEDING FAN CLOCK signal
FEEDING FAN DRIVE command
PRIMARY CHARGING COOLING FAN CLOCK signal
PRIMARY CHARGING COOLING FAN DRIVE command
DERIVERY FAN CLOCK signal
DELIVERY FAN DRIVE command
CONTROLLER COOLING FAN CLOCK signal
CONTROLLER COOLING FAN DRIVE command
DE-CURLING FAN CLOCK signal
DE-CURLING FAN DRIVE command
DC POWER SUPPLY FAN CLOCK signal
DC POWER SUPPLY FAN DRIVE command
HARD DISK FAN CLOCK signal
HARD DISK FAN DRIVE command
DUPLEXING FAN CLOCK signal
DUPLEXING FAN DRIVE command
SCANNER HOME POSITION DETECTION signal
DUST-COLLECTING ROLLER BIAS REMOTE signal
INTERNAL DELIVERY signal
INVERTER ERROR signal
LASER INTENSITY READY signal
SCANNING LAMP DRIVE command
LASER DRIVE signal
LASER DRIVE signal
LASER INTENSITY REFERENCE signal
APPENDIX
LD-EN
LDCLD*
LDEL
LDEOP
LDLM
LDLTP
LDPD
LDPD1
LDPD2
LDPFS
LDPUSD*
LDRT
LMON
LMRDY
LMSPSEL
LODOP
LSH
LWRPD
M10ON
M11_A
M11_A*
M11_B
M11_B*
M12_A
M12_A*
M12_B
M12_B*
M13_A
M13_A*
M13_B
M13_B*
M14_A
M14_A*
M14_B
M14_B*
M16_A
LASER ENABLE signal

LEFT DECK PULL-OFF CLUTCH DRIVE command
LEFT DECK LIMIT DETECTION signal
LEFT DECK OPEN/CLOSED DETECTION signal
LEFT DECK LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE command
LEFT DECK LIFTER POSITION DETECTION signal
LEFT DECK PAPER DETECTION signal
LEFT DECK PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal1
LEFT DECK PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal2
LEFT DECK FEED PAPER DETECTION signal
LEFT DECK PICK-UP SORENOID DRIVE command
LEFT DECK RETRY DETECTION signal
LASER SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE command
LASER SCANNER MOTOR READY signal
LASER SCANNER MOTOR SPEED SELECT signal
RIGHT LOWER COVER OPEN/CLOSED DETECTION signal
SAMPLE LASER ACTIVATION signal
LASER WRITE START DETECTION signal
HOPPER MOTOR (TONER SUPPLY) DRIVE command
RIGHT DECK PICK-UP MOTOR (A) DRIVE command
RIGHT DECK PICK-UP MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command
RIGHT DECK PICK-UP MOTOR (B) DRIVE command
RIGHT DECK PICK-UP MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command
CASSETTE3/4 PICK-UP MOTOR (A) DRIVE command
CASSETTE3/4 PICK-UP MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command
CASSETTE3/4 PICK-UP MOTOR (B) DRIVE command
CASSETTE3/4 PICK-UP MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command
DERIVERY MOTOR (A) DRIVE command
DERIVERY MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command
DERIVERY MOTOR (B) DRIVE command
DERIVERY MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command
REVERSAL MOTOR (A) DRIVE command
REVERSAL MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command
REVERSAL MOTOR (B) DRIVE command
REVERSAL MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command
DUPLEXING HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOTOR (A) DRIVE command
A-5
APPENDIX
M16_A*
M16_B
DUPLEXING HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command

DUPLEXING HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOTOR (B) DRIVE command
M16_B*
M17_A
M17_A*
M17_B
M17_B*
M18_A*
M18_A*
M18_B
M18_B*
M19LD
M19ON
M24_A
M24_A*
M24_B
M24_B*
M25_A
M25_A*
M25_B
M25_B*
M26_A
M26_A*
M26_B
M26_B*
M27_A
M27_A*
M27_B
M27_B*
M29_A
M29_A*
M29_B
M29_B*
M3A
M3A*
M3B
DUPLEXING HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command

PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command
PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR (A) DRIVE command
PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command
PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR (B) DRIVE command
DUPLEXING FEEDING RIGHT MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command
DUPLEXING FEEDING RIGHT MOTOR (A) DRIVE command
DUPLEXING FEEDING RIGHT MOTOR (B) DRIVE command
DUPLEXING FEEDING RIGHT MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command
FIXING MOTOR LOCK DETECTION signal
FIXING MOTOR DRIVE command
LEFT DECK PICK-UP MOTOR (A) DRIVE command
LEFT DECK PICK-UP MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command
LEFT DECK PICK-UP MOTOR (B) DRIVE command
LEFT DECK PICK-UP MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH DUPLEXING FEEDING MOTOR (A) DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH DUPLEXING FEEDING MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH DUPLEXING FEEDING MOTOR (B) DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH DUPLEXING FEEDING MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH UPPER MOTOR (A) DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH UPPER MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH UPPER MOTOR (B) DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH UPPER MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH LOWER MOTOR (A) DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH LOWER MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH LOWER MOTOR (B) DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH LOWER MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command
DUPLEXING FEEDING LEFT MOTOR (A) DRIVE command
DUPLEXING FEEDING LEFT MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command
DUPLEXING FEEDING LEFT MOTOR (B) DRIVE command
DUPLEXING FEEDING LEFT MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command
SCANNER MOTOR (A) DRIVE command
SCANNER MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command
SCANNER MOTOR (B) DRIVE command
A-6
APPENDIX
M3B*
M9ON
MFDS
MFLSD*
MFPCD*
MFPD
MFS
MMFG
MMON
PCLM1
SCANNER MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command

HOPPER MOTOR (TONER STIRRING) DRIVE command
MANUAL FEED TRAY OPEN/CLOSED DETECTION signal
MULTI FEED RELEASING SORENOID DRIVE command
MULTI FEED ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE command
MANUAL FEED PAPER WIDTH DETECTION
MULTIFEEDER PAPER DETECTION signal
MAIN MOTOR DRIVE CLOCK signal
MAIN MOTOR DRIVE command
PRIMARY CHARGING WIRE CLEANING MOTOR1 DRIVE command

PCLM2
PRIMARY CHARGING WIRE CLEANING MOTOR2 DRIVE command
PEXP
PRE-EXPOSURE LED DRIVE command
POT
PHOTOSENSITIVE DRUM SURFACE POTENTIAL signal
POTON
PHOTOSENSITIVE DRUM SURFACE POTENTIAL SENSOR POWER ON command
PR/TR-REMOTE
HIGH-VOLTAGE REMOTE signal
PR/TR-REMOTE
HIGH-VOLTAGE REMOTE signal
PR-CNT
PRIMARY CORONA CURRENT CONTROL signal
PR-LEAK-DETECT
PRIMARY CHARGING LEAKAGE DETECTION signal
PT/SP-CNT
PRE-TRANSFER CHARGING CONTROL signal
PT/SP-LEAK-DETECT PRE-TRANSFER/SEPARATION CHARGING LEAKAGE DETECTION signal
PT/SP-REMOTE
PRE-TRANSFER/SEPARATION CHARGING REMOTE signal
PTRCLM1
PRE-TRNANSFER CHARGING WIRE CLEANING MOTOR1 DRIVE command
PTRCLM2
PRE-TRNANSFER CHARGING WIRE CLEANING MOTOR2 DRIVE command
RDEL
RIGHT DECK LIMIT DETECTION signal
RDEOP
RIGHT DECK OPEN/CLOSED DETECTION signal
RDLM
RIGHT DECK LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE command
RDLTP
RIGHT DECK LIFTER POSITION DETECTION signal
RDPD
RIGHT DECK PAPER DETECTION signal
RDPD1
RIGHT DECK PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal1
RDPD2
RIGHT DECK PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal2
RDPFS
RIGHT DECK FEED PAPER DETECTION signal
RDPUSD*
RIGHT DECK PICK-UP SORENOID DRIVE command
RDRT
RIGHT DECK RETRY DETECTION signal
RGCD*
REGISTRATION ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE command
RGPD
REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal
RVFSD1*
DELIVERY FLAPPER SORENOID DRIVE command
A-7
APPENDIX
RVFSD2*
RVS1
RVS2
SL1P*
SL1R*
SP-CNT
TEP
TH1
TH2
THHUM1
TR-CNT
TR-LEAK-DETECT
TSCLM1
TSCLM2
VP1PD
VP2PD
VP3PD
VP4PD
WTFL
A-8
REVERSING FLAPPER SORENOID DRIVE command

REVERSING signal1
REVERSING signal2
FIXING ASSEMBLY INLET GUIDE SOLENOID DRIVE command
FIXING ASSEMBLY INLET GUIDE SOLENOID DRIVE command
SEPARATION CHARGING CURRENT CONTROL signal
HOPPER TONER signal
FIXING MAIN THERMISTOR signal
FIXING SUB THERMISTOR signal
MACHINE INSIDE HUMIDITY signal
TRANSFER CHARGING CURRENT CONTROL signal
TRANSFER CHARGING LEAKAGE DETECTION signal
TRANSFER/SEPARATION CHARGING WIRE CLEANING MOTOR1 DRIVE command
TRANSFER/SEPARATION CHARGING WIRE CLEANING MOTOR2 DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH 1 PAPER DETECTION signal
WASTE TONER FEEDING SCREW LOCKED DETECTION signal
C. General Circuit Diagram

18
17
16
Standard 100V model only
F-14
Front door
switch
F-17
1 2
J321M
HDD_12V
GND
GND
HDD_5V
J323
2 1
2 1
2 1
40
GND
39
NC
38
CS3
37
CS1
36
IDEA2
35
IDEA0
34
NC
33
IDEA1
32
NC
31
IDEINT
30
GND
IDEDMACK 29
28
GND
27
IDERDY
26
GND
25
IDEIOR
24
GND
23
IDEIOW
22
GND
IDEDMREQ 21
20
NC
19
GND
18
IDED15
17
IDED0
16
IDED14
15
IDED1
14
IDED13
13
IDED2
12
IDED12
11
IDED3
10
IDED11
9
IDED4
8
IDED10
7
IDED5
6
IDED9
5
IDED6
4
IDED8
3
IDED7
2
GND
CONT-RESET 1
Cassette 3
paper sensor
PS13
J531AF
J541AM
J531BM
A9
B9
J531AM
PS47
1 2 3 J571
J561F
1 2 3
J102
J101
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
J5701
J5700
J801BF
J561M
A15
B15
J1541F
J1543F
5 4 3 2 1
J1541
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
J5701F
J5700F
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J801BM
4 3 2 1
1 2 3
J566F
2 1
J566
1 2
J801M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4 3 2 1
J201M
J202F
J115A
5 4 3 2 1
J114
10
J124
J115
J113B B15
13
J2108
J2101
J2106
J2105
J2112
J2104
J2103
J2110
A20
A20
B20
XSCL
LP
YD
DF
DOFF*
16 PR/TR-REMOTE
15 PT/SP-REMOTE
14 SP-CNT
13 PT/SP-CNT
12 TR-CNT
11 PR-CNT
10 HVT_HH_REMOTE
9 DEV-AC-REMOTE
8 DEV-DC-CNT
7 HV-CR-REMOTE
6 PT/SP-LEAK-DETECT
5 TR-LEAK-DETECT
4 PR-LEAK-DETECT
3 FM6ON
2 FM6LCK
1 GND
4 OV
3 FINRXD
2 FINTXD
1
6 LDPUSD*
5 24V
16
15
14 12V
13 CASSETTE_HT_ON
12 MHSD
11 MHRD*
10 SHRD
9 SHRD*
8 DRAM_HT_ON
7 0V
7 EN*
6 S-DIN
5 RX-LOAD
4 DOUT
3 TX_END
2 MOTOR_CLK
1 S-CLK
10 FM3ON
9 GND
8 FM3CLK
3 5V
2 C3PWD
1 0V
WTFL*
GND
FT725
FT725
GND
RVS2
5V
24V
RVFSD2*
GND
DPDS
5V
GND
DGRFPD
5V
10
11
12
CL
1 2
J715M 2 1
J715
J715F 1 2
J2303
Manual
feed
pickup
clutch
FM8ON
FM8CLK
GND
L-8
L-8
SVR1
2 1
J729
PS23
Manual
feed
paper
sensor
CL3
J2306B
1 2 3
M29_B*
24V
M29_B
M29_A
24V
M29_A*
0V 5
MFPD 6
5V 7
0V 8
MFDS 9
5V 10
24V 11
MFLSD* 12
24V 1
DEVCD* 2
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
GND
LDPD
5V
1 GND
2 DSRGPD
3 5V
4 24V
5 24V
6 M16_A
7 M16_A*
8 M16_B
9 M16_B*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2
J729M
3 2 1
J727
1 2 3
J727F
1 2
J729F
SL
SL2
Manual feed
release solenoid
Manual feed paper

width detection
CL
CL1
Developing
clutch
J232
1 2 3
J232F
M29
FM8
M14
Duplex feeding
left motor
Duplex feeding fan
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
3
4
to earth
FUSER/FEED UNIT
TM702
GND
24VU
5V
GND
M13 M
Delivery motor
M19LD
M19ON
5V
GND
CJAM
EDS
J268F 6 5 4 3 2 1
J417
1 2 3 4 5 6
J417F
TH1
0V
TH2
0V
FM5DT
0V
FM5ON
J268
J417M
6 5 4 3 2 1
J413M
6 5 4 3 2 1
IDS
DSJAM
24V
FCBSD*
CBOP
J414
FFUS*
J412
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
J412F
J414F
J413F
RGPD
J411
J411F
14
20
J281
J287
TM701
to earth
REGI/SE_TR UNIT
1 2 2 1
J285 J288
A13
B13
PCB23
J282B
M26
M17
M25
M12
M24
M27
J284
Cassette 3/4
pickup motor
Left deck
pickup motor
Vertical path
lower motor
J286
1 2 3
J289
2 1
1 2 3 4
1
2
3
4
5
M11
J252M
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J274F
J252
J274
J256
J253
J253F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GND
24V
GND
IDS
5V
GND
CJAM
5V
J253M 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J274M
0V
TH2
0V
FM5DT
0V
FM5ON
Right deck
Vertical Pre-registration Vertical path
pickup motor path upper
motor
duplex/
feeding motor
motor
M19BREAK
M19LD
M19ON
5V
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
3 2 1
J7F
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
J7M
3 2 1
J282
J282A
J283
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
J257
3 2 1
3 2 1
PS4
PS35
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J255
J260
1 2
J260F
J261
1 2 3
J255F
M M8
Fixing MSW3
Fixing/
Transfer/ assembly
guide feeding
separation inlet
drive
lock
charging solenoid
sensor
wire
PS29
cleaning
motor
Registration
paper sensor
CL2
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1 2
3 2 1
J258
3 2 1
J271F
SL SL1
1 2
J261F
PS36
2 1
J258F
SL
Reversal SL5
flapper
solenoid
3 2 1
J262
CL
Registration
roller clutch
J259
J258M
J271
J263
External J263M 1 2
delivery
SL9 SL
sensor
J273
Fixing web
solenoid
1 2 3
J265M
J270M
3 2 1
J270
1 2 3
1 2
J267M
2 1
J611
Fixing motor
J270F
FM5
Fixing main Fixing
thermistor sub
thermistor
De-curling fan
J264
PS46
3 2 1
J267F
J265F
3 2 1
2 1
J265
J267
J263F
2 1
TH2
J271M
J255M
J260M
3 2 1
1 2 3
2 1
TH1
J254
4 3 2 1
J612
J254M
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
M19
Claw jam Internal

sensor delivery
sensor
Cassette
heater
Not found in
120V model
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J254F
J261M
2 1
J725
1 2
J725F
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
M27_B*
24V
M27_B
M27_A
24V
M27_A*
M24_B*
24V
M24_B
M24_A
24V
M24_A*
M12_B*
24V
M12_B
M12_A
24V
M12_A*
M25_B*
24V
M25_B
M25_A
24V
M25_A*
M26_B*
24V
M26_B
M26_A
24V
M26_A*
M11_B*
24V
M11_B
M11_A
24V
M11_A*
J411M
J412M
J414M
6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
H4
20
B12
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
Duplex feed Reversal motor

right motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
21
A12
J232M
J233F
H3
22
DMFG 9
DMON 10
5V 11
0V 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
16 M16_B*
15 M14_A
14 M14_A*
13 M14 _B
12 M14_B*
11 M14_DOWN2
10 M14_DOWN1
9 M16_A
8 M16_B
7 M16_ON
6 RVFSD2*
5 DSRFPD
4 DGRFPD
3 DPDS
2 RVS1
1 RVS2
<J322M-1>
<J322M-2>
<J322M-3>
<J322M-4>
1 TRAY_5V
2 TRAY_0V
3 TRAY_24V
4 TRAY_0V
M18
J251AM J251
BM
J702A
1 2 3
Paper deck
heater
(accessory)
MMFG
MMON
5V
0V
17
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5V
0V
24V
0V
M31
1
2
3
4
5
6
MT30
M-18
Drum heater
J6310F
J728
J725M
J727M
3 2 1
2 1
1 2 J601
PS37
FT32
J252F
M1
Drum motor
1 2
AP KIT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
OL1
H5
J602
4 3 2 1
M2
Main motor
J631
J6310M
J233M
6 5 4 3 2 1
J1513
J632
4 3 2 1
Reversal sensor 1
24V
FCBSD*
GND
CBOP
5V
TH1
W2
Drum heater
control PCB
J2002 1 2 3 4 5 6
Controller
cooling fan
J2306
J233
J228
1 2 3 4 5 6
J228F
B20
24V
RVFSD2*
GND
DSJAM
5V
GND
EDS
5V
3 2 1
J223M 5 4 3 2 1
J2306A
J2307
J228 M
6 5 4 3 2 1
J231F
Fixing drawer connector
J726
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J726M
1 2 3
J713F
FM4
1 2 3 4 5 6
J226M
J226F
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J6320F
J229F
Waste
toner
screw lock
detection
J726M
J6320
1 2 3 4
J713M
3 2 1
J268M 1 2 3 4 5 6
Potential
sensor
M6
4 3 2 1
J234
J223F 1 2 3 4 5
J223
PCB9
M18_B*
24V
M18_B
M18_A
24V
M18_A*
M14_B*
24V
M14_B
M14_A
24V
M14_A*
GND
RVS1
5V
FFUS*
3 2 1
J10F
J231M
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
J251
J251BF
AF
J251CF
J251CM
J6320M
J234M
1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4 3 2 1
J713
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Duplex driver PCB
J226
1 2 3 4
J231
Motor driver
PCB
PCB4
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
J236
1 2 3 4
1 EDS
2 CJAM
3 GND
4 5V
5 M19_ON
6 M_19LD
7 M_19BREAK
8 FM5_ON
9 0V
10 FM5DT
11 0V
12 TH2
13 0V
14 TH1
15
16 CBOP
17 FCBSD*
18 24V
19 DSJAM
20 IDS
B20
A20
J2102
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5
J5570 VS1
J2302B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
L-8
24V
RGCD*
GND
RGPD
5V
T/SCLM2
T/SCLM1
24V
SL1R*
SL1P*
12V
J10M
3 2 1
3 2 1
J9F
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2 1
GND
5V
M19_0V J321F-6
M19_24V J321F-5
4 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B16
A16
J2302A
J2305
6 5
FT33
1 2 3
J712
MSW1
1 2 3 4
J2301
1 2
ET5
J9M
GND
FUSER RELAY 24V
TEST_GND
TEST_12V
24V
RGCD*
T/SCLM1
T/SCLM2
24V
SL1P*
SL1R*
12V
24V
RVFSD2*
M13_B*
24V
M13_B
M13_A
24V
M13_A*
D-20
2 1
Hopper
stirring
motor
1 2
Primary charging
wire cleaning motor
1 2
J108B
3 2 1
J235
J234F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J229
J712F 1 2
M33
J222M J222BM
J421
1 2
ET6
MT6
FT29
16 M16_A*
15 M18_A
14 M18_A*
13 M18_B
12 FM8CLK
11 M18_DOWN2
10 M18_DOWN1
9 M29_A
8 M29_A*
7 M29_B
6 FM8ON
5 M29_DOWN2
4 M29_DOWN1
3 GND
2 FM8_CLK
1 LDPFS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
FFUS*
RGPD
M25_DOWN2
M25_DOWN1
RDPUSD_ON
M13_A
M13_A*
M13_B
M13_B*
M13_DOWN2
M13_DOWN1
M21_ON
M20_ON
M4_ON
M5_ON
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
M24_B
M24_B*
M24_DOWN2
M24_DOWN1
M27_A
M27_A*
M27_B
M27_B*
M27_DOWN2
M27_DOWN1
M26_A
M26_A*
M26_B
M26_B*
M26_DOWN2
M26_DOWN1
M25_A
M25_A*
M25_B
M25_B*
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2
J714F
SL
J421F
M
~
J419M
J193
J702B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J702C
J2101B
J2101A
1
2
3
4
5
6
J159F
J222BF
B16
A16
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4
J2109
M9
J159
J193F
J224
J224F
3 2 1
B12
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
AWG22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
M4_A
M4_A*
M4_B
M4_B*
M4_DOWN1
M4_DOWN2
M12_A
M12_A*
M12_B
M12_B*
M12_DOWN1
M12_DOWN2
M17_A
M17_A*
M17_B
M17_B*
M17_DOWN1
M17_DOWN2
M24_A
M24_A*
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
<J1401M-1>
<J1401M-2>
<J1401M-3>
<J1401M-4>
0V
MFDS
5V
TS2
Hopper
toner
sensor
J192F
J193M
2 1
J224M
2 1
J225
J225F 3 2 1
J230
J712M 2 1
J2302
1 2 3
1 2
B16
J222AF
J222AM
J421M
1
2
3
4
5
6
J159M
J192
J191
To paper deck
Not found in 120V model
M4
M
~
1 2
20
Cassette
heater switch
Left deck
lifter motor
M5
RVFSD2*
24V
12V
SL1R*
SL1P*
24V
T/SCLM2
T/SCLM1
RGCD*
24V
SW4
FT100
2
FT101
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
24V
M10ON
24V
M9ON
5V
TEP
0V
Right deck
lifter motor
J418F
J192M
J191M
3 2 1
2 1
J191F
M M7
LA1
Pre-transfer
charging
wire cleaning
motor
Pre-exposure
LED
J225M 3 2 1
J230F
1 2 3 4 5 6
SL8
SL
J229M
G-18
H-7
2 1
PS3
Manual feed
tray open/
closed sensor
RDPUSD*
24V
FAN_ON
FAN_DETECT
GND
12
13
14
15
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
FM2CLK 12
0V 13
FM2ON 14
15
FRONT_DOOR_DETECT 10
0V 11
5V 7
DTEP 8
0V 9
24V 3
PEXP* 4
PCLM1 5
PCLM2 6
PTRCM1 1
PTRCM2 2
24V
GND
3.3VA2<J9005-1>
3.3VA2<J9005-2>
3.3VA2<J9005-3>
3.3VA2<J9005-4>
3.3VA2<J9005-5>
GND<J9005-6>
GND<J9005-7>
GND<J9005-8>
GND<J9005-9>
GND<J9005-10>
H-21
1 2
J704M
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1 2
J9007F
1 2
J2F
J2M
J9007M
1 2 3
J1501
J1504M
1 2 3
J1504 1 2 3
UL1865
H-20
J719
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
J3M
PCB7 W1
H-20
J719F
1 2 3
J2F
J3F
1 2 3
MT5
FT28
S1 S2 S3
M
I-3
1 2
2 1
J325F
J2M 1 2 3
AP KIT
1 2 3
J156F
M10
F-7
F-12
1 3
ON OFF
J156
1 2
1 2
J1501M
1 2 3
For Earth
3 2 1
J155
J158F
I-2
PCB3
MT2
4 5
2 1
J714F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J2062
4
3
3
AC driver
2
2
PCB
1
1
J2051
J2053
FT872
J156M
J155M
2 1
J155F
2
Hopper
supply
motor J158M
<J2109-1>
<J2109-2>
<J2109-3>
<J2109-1>
FT15
FT18
FT871
MT8
To Earth
PCB6
J2
J1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
3 1
J8502F
EN*
S-DIN
RX-LOAD
DOUT
TX-END
MOTOR-CLK
S-CLK
FT17
T P
TP1
FT16
Fixing sub heater
1 2 3 4 5
FT23
4
3
2
1
Primary
charging
cooling fan
J158
FT25A
FT25B
4
3
2
1
Developing
assembly
toner sensor
1 2 3
J1518
M32
J222F
A16
A12
J108A
Left deck
Duplex
Duplex
Duplex
Duplex
feeding Reversal
paper pre-registration
horizontal registrationpaper sensor sensor 2
sensor
sensor
registration motor
PS33
PS38 Reversal
PS30
sensor
M16
flapper PS34
solenoid
M
PS31
1 2 3
J1516 1 2 3
J222MC
GND
LDLM
M-19
L-7
Right deck
pickup solenoid
GND
RDLM
J-19
FM2
TS1
J4002
1 2 3
1 2 3 4
J154F
C3LMD
0V
C4LMD
0V
2 1
J-18
J4015
1 2 3 4 5
J102
J108
B18 J107B
A18
1
2
3
4
J8503F
2 1
J4014
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
5V
GND
24V
GND
FT24
J8500F
J3 4 3 2 1
S4 S5 S6
J4017
J111
J107
J107A
J119
4 3 2 1
B20
SL6
J-2
1 2 3 4 5 6
FT6B
FT6A
8 4 1
FT27
FT13 FT14
J4016
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
J154
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J153F
J1401M
FT11 FT12
J1M J1F
J4011
1 2
J102A
A16
B16
S16
S17
S17
J106B
A20
1 2
D-19
J154M
J153
J161M
J161
1 2 3
J161F
J102B
J321-1 24V
J321-2 0V
13
J222FC
M17_B*
24V
M17_B
M17_A
24V
M17_A*
J1401F
Main
power
switch
2
1
Relay
RL1
SW1
FT5
Fixing main heater
5V
0V
24V
0V
24V
0V
FT7
FT22
ET3
FT8
ET2
H2
J4010
1 2
J153M
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
M-9
3 2 1
PCB2
J4007
1 2 3 4 5
J4006
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6 2 0
J160
J162F
DC power supply PCB

J4009
1 2 3 4
ET4
J9010F
J160M 2 1
J162M
3 2 1
J163F
J111A
J230M
J163
1 2 3 4
1 2
J162
J5M 1 2 3 4 5 6
FT26
FT27
J151
J151F
A10
B10
24V 3
MFPCD* 4
J106A
J118
B20 J104B
6 5 4 3 2 1
J9010
1 2 3
3.3VA1<J1020-4>
FT10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J4003
J163M
J151M
2 1
4 3 2 1
3.3VA1<J1020-5>
GND<J1020-6>
GND<J1020-7>
GND<J1020-8>
GND<J1020-9>
GND<J1020-10>
3.3VB<J1020-11>
3.3VB<J1020-12>
3.3VB<J1020-31>
GND<J1020-14>
GND<J1020-15>
FT9
FT4B
1 2 3 4
J4004
J4005
J4008
J5F 1 2 3 4 5 6
FT3B
H1
J4013
HVTPCB5PCB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
J105
A20
J9010M
J1573
2
1
J4001
B15 J103BF
A15
24V
POTON
POT-DT
0V
3.3VA1<J1020-1>
3.3VA1<J1020-2>
3.3VA1<J1020-3>
LF1B
MT3
FT2B
TEST_GND
TEST_12V
4 3 2 1
1
5V<J1026-1>
5V<J1026-2>
GND<J1026-3>
GND<J1026-4>
ELCB
FT1B
1 2
1 2 3 4 5
J6F J6M
FT4A
GND
24V
120V/20A
PLG1B
I-1
DCOM_24VU
DCOM_0V
DCOM_12V
DCOM_GND
DCOM_5V
DCOM_0V
DCOM_3.3VA
DCOM_0VU2
Environment
switch
TRAY_5V
TRAY_0V
TRAY_24V
TRAY_0V
SW3 FT19
OFF
LF1A
FT3A
J703B
For FINISHER
GND
24V
ELCB
MT1
FT2A
J703A
H-21
GND
REMOT
230V/10A
PLG1A
FT1A
B15 J103BM
J111B
9
J125
J113
M-7
24V
GND
FT21
E-8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
<J881-1>
<J881-2>
ON FT20
FT4
E-2
1 2
J106
J104
J104A
J103F
M-8
J321F
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J703C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
24V
GND
24V
GND
GND<J1021-3>
RMT_2<J1021-2>
RMT_1<J1021-1>
2
1 EX/DOM* DETECT
5 5V
4 C4PWD
3 0V
3 2 1
J109
A15 J113A
J123
DC Controller PCB
B15 J103B
A15
J103A
J103AF
HDD_12V
HDD_GND
HDD_GND
HDD_5V
ET7
J4502
<J321-1>24V
<J321-2>0V
J110
A15
B15
J115B
J103C
Power cord base
J707F
J707M
2 1
J9013
2 1
J9013F
PCB22
10
9
8
7 5V
6 C3PL1
5 0V
4 C3PL0
9 5V
8 C4PL1
7 0V
6 C4PL0
FM1CLK
0V
FM1ON
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
24V
GND
5V
GND
STCNCT*
STHPR
STHPL
SPEXIST*
SPFULL*
SCCW
SCW
FULLON
GND
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5 GND
4 FM7CLK
3 FM7ON
2 GND
1 FM7_DETECT
7
6 GND
5V
RDPD2
0V
5V
RDPD1
0V
5V
LDEOP
0V
5V
LDRT
0V
5V
LDPD
0V
5V
LDLTP
0V
5V
LDEL
0V
6
5
4
3
2
1
J112A
A9
B9
J112
J103AM A15
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
24V
GND
24V
GND
J9013M
LF1
FT3
FT2
VLCD
VEE
D3
D2
D1
D0
VEE
GND
5 4 3 2 1
J4503
1
FM4ON 2
0V 3
FM4CLK 4
J112B
A17 J110A
B17
J110B
J121
2 1
1 2 3
J704F
J701F
FIN_TXD
FIN_RXD
FIN_OVR2
Capacitor PCB
ELCB
FT1B
F-17
5 4 3 2 1
J7371F
A15 J801AM
B15
J202
J1543
J1543M
J117
PCB1
100V/15A
PLG1
S15 S13 S11
J7371M
5 4 3 2 1
J201F
J202M
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
12 5V
11 LDPD1
10 0V
9 5V
8 LDPD1
7 0V
15
14 LDCLD*
13 24V
5V
RDPFS
0V
5V
RDEL
0V
5V
RDEOP
0V
4 3 2 1
J116
J103
J-2
S14 S12
J801AF
J103M
J701
L1
HVT
transformer
J718
J718M
J801
J1541M
9 5V
8 C3RTD
7 0V
6 5V
5 C3PD
4 0V
3 5V
2 C3LTP
1 0V
5V
C4RTD
0V
5V
C4PD
0V
5V
C4LTP
0V
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
17 C3PUSD*
16 24V
15 24V
14 VP3PD
13 0V
12 5V
11 C3OP
10 0V
C4PUSD*
24V
5V
VP4PD
0V
5V
C4OP
0V
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
LSH
GND
SMALE1
LD-EN
GND
LD-DT
LZ_LDPSEL1
GND
24V
HEATER_ON
5V
GND
THERM+
THERM-
L-RDY
GND
3.3V
GND
LD(-)
LD(-)
GND
BDIN*
5V
LMON
LMRDY*
LMSPSEL
24V
GND
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5
J120
J101
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F-7
D-20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J719M
J718F
J566M
J122
J704
W5
D-18
J5770
1 2 3 4
J201
J10
2
PCB8
3
J3502
J3504
J3501
4 3 2 1
2 1
W4B
W3
W6
4 3 2 1
J5770F
SEPARATE
W4A
1 2 3
J4002
1 2 3
J701M
1 2 3
J561
1 2 3 4 5
Serial number
PCB
Accessories power
1 supply PCB
E-15
G-18
SL
SVR4
1 2 3
1 2 3
J8505
J5500
J5770M
J801F
E-10
J122A
SVR5
1 2 3
J550
1 2 3 4
J577F
J1542M
J5700M
6 5 4 3 2 1
K_DGT7
K_DGT6
K_DGT5
K_DGT4
K_DGT3
K_DGT2
K_DGT1
K_DGT0
GND
+3.3V
TRAY_0V
TRAY_24V
TRAY 24V
GND
J802
SL7
FM3
SV2
S34 S32
S33 S31
5 4 3 2 1
J201M
Shift tray PCB
Left deck
pickup
solenoid
Cassette 3 Cassette 3
Heat
length
paper width discharging
detection detection
fan
J577
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 2
SV1
S30 S28
S29 S27
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PS49
15
15
J717
FM1
J802F
4 3 2 1
J511AM
J717F 2 1
Cassette 4
Cassette 4 paper
length detection width detection
(100V model only) (100V model only)
Feeding fan
1 2 3
J1521
3 2 1
5V
HUM_OUT
GND
TH
GND
5V
VD1PD
0V
5V
VD2PD_SENSOR
0V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
J9003
J1542F
J5701M
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A9
J9003F
3 2 1
J9008
3 2 1
J1542
Right deck
level
sensor
(upper)
1 2 3 J573
J531
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
J201F
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
PCB20
A9
J511BM B9
B9
J9008F
3 2 1
6 5V
5 VD1PD
4 0V
3
2
1
A9
B9
J717M
J401F
J401M
40
40
CL
Vertical
path 2
J803
1 2 J804M
PS12
J577M
PS48
1 2 3 J572
Left deck
level
sensor
(upper)
J511AF
A9
J511M
1 2 3 4
GND
PPO<0>
GND
PPO<1>
GND
PPO<2>
GND
PROWOR
GND
PPRDY
GND
PRTS
GND
PCMD
GND
PSCNST
GND
PP0<3>
GND
PP0<4>
GND
PVREQ
GND
PBD
GND
PVD<1>
GND
PVD<3>
GND
PVD<5>
GND
PVD<7>
GND
PVD<9>
GND
PVD<11>
GND
PVD<13>
GND
PVD<15>
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
GND
ZI_ADDANROM_CNCTN
GND
ZI_ADDANROM_DOUT
ZO_ADDANROM_DIN
GND
ZO_ADDANROM_SCK
ZO_ADDANROM_CS
GND
5V
J531BF
J541
J541BM
D-17
J122B
11
J541AF
A9
B9
J805M 1 2
1 2 3 paper sensor
PS25
J803M
1 2 3 J564
K
Touch panel
1 2 3
J1523
J804F
1 2 3 J802M
PS50
1 2 3 J574
J511
J541BF
J2501
J2511
J401
Left deck
pull-off
clutch
CL4
GND
PPI<0>
GND
PPI<1>
GND
PPI<2>
GND
PCPRDY
GND
PCTS
GND
PSTS
GND
PPRTST
GND
PPI<3>
GND
PPI<4>
GND
PPI<5>
GND
PVCKL
GND
PHSYNC
GND
PVD<0>
GND
PVD<2>
GND
PVD<4>
GND
PVD<6>
GND
PVD<8>
GND
PVD<10>
GND
PVD<12>
GND
PVD<14>
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND<J4016-4>
GND<J4016-3>
5V<J4016-2>
5V<J4016-1>
GND<J4017-10>
GND<J4017-9>
GND<J4017-8>
GND<J4017-7>
GND<J4017 -6>
3.3VA2<J4017 -5>
3.3VA2<J4017-4>
3.3VA2<J4017-3>
3.3VA2<J4017-2>
3.3VA2<J4017-1>
RMT_1
RMT_2
GND
GND<J4014-15>
GND<J4014-14>
3.3VB<J4014-13>
3.3VB<J4014-12>
3.3VB<J4014-11>
GND<J4014-10>
GND<J4014-9>
GND<J4014-8>
GND<J4014-7>
GND<J4014-6>
3.3VA1<J4014-5>
3.3VA1<J4014-4>
3.3VA1<J4014-3>
3.3VA1<J4014-2>
3.3VA1<J4014-1>
D-17
6
5
4
9
8
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Laser driver
PCB
PCB11
5 4 3 2 1
J804
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-16
J511BF B9
1
2
3
1
2
3
Laser scanner
motor
2 1
J805
Keypad
PCB C
PS24
1 2 3 4
J809M
3 2 1 J803F
J805F 2 1
J6503
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LCD contrast
adjustment
PCB
J809
J807
J6507
4 3 2 1
2 1
J956
Vertical
path 1
paper sensor
J809F
4 3 2 1
3 2 1 J807F
J9004
J6506
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6
J6605
Keypad
PCB B
HU1
1 2 3 J8508
1 2 3
J1519
J9004F
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J6603
J8492
1 2 3 4 5
Left deck
Right deck
level sensor level sensor
(lower)
(lower)
PS17
4
5
6
F-19
J9006F
1 2 3 J807M
1 2 3
1 2 3
J9004M
J9006M
J6508
6 5 4 3 2 1
PS2
1 2 3
1 2 3
J9008M
J9003M
1 2 3 J532
7
8
9
J9000
J9000M 11
PS6
1 2 3 J512
J2502
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
11
PS5
1 2 3 J516
J511F
M15
J9000F
Left deck
limit
sensor
Right deck
lifter
sensor
Cassette 3
lifter sensor
P18
J2701
M20
M21
1 2 3 J533
Cassette 4
lifter sensor
BD PCB
1 2 3 4
Right lower
cover open/
closed
sensor
11 5V
10 HUM OUT
9 0V
8 TH
7 0V
PS14
1 2 3 J543
J1015A
PCB14
Laser write
start sensor
15 5V
14 LODOP
13 0V
12
Cassette 4
paper sensor
J1014B
1 2 3 J542
lifter
lifter 3 2 1
motor
motor J9006
Left deck
lifter
sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
40
40
J806
1 2 3
1 2 3 J565
Right deck
open/
closed
sensor
J534 1 2 3
5V
RDRT
0V
5V
RDPD
0V
5V
RDLTP
0V
J1015B
3
2
1
PS21
J1015
PCB24
6
5
4
Cassette 3
re-try sensor
1 2 3
J1014C
Main controller PCB
PS11
1 2 3 J567
PS7
1 2 3 J513
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
40
40
J1014A
J1026
4 3 2 1
J9005
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
9
8
7
3
2
1
6
5
4
Cassette 4
re-try sensor
PS22
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J1020
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Right deck
paper
sensor
1 2 3 J517
SVR2
J810
1 2 3
PS28
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
5V
COUNT
TXD
RXD
GND
40
J1022
SVR3
FM7
Left deck
paper
sensor
J6501
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
For FOOT SW
PS10
J544
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1060
Relay PCB
1 2 3
Right deck
limit
sensor
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
5V
CARD_DETECT
COUNT
GND
5V
DETECT
COUNT
GND
5V
COUNT
TXD
RXD
GND
4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1024
9
8
7
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
3.3VB
5V
LCDON
IOLP
GND
IOSP
GND
IOLCDF
GND
IOLCDEN
GND
RXDM
GND
TXDM
GND
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2 1
E-18
J1012
J1021
11
PS15
1 2 3 J535
1 2 3 J568
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
UISOFTSW 12
13
5V
CONT-RESET 14
15
5V
GND
IUOD3
GND
IUOD2
GND
IUOD1
GND
IUOD0
GND
ONDCLK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
5V
RXDC
5V
LCDON
GND
FPLINE
GND
FPHIFT
GND
FPDAT1
GND
FPDAT3
GND
FPDAT5
GND
FPDAT7
GND
3.3VA1
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
SOFTSWC
GND
FPDAT6
GND
FPDAT4
GND
FPDAT2
GND
FPDAT0
GND
LCDPWR
GND
FPFRAME
GND
CONT_RESET
5V
TXDC
5V
J1023
PS16
1 2 3 J545
HDD fan
PS20
PS19
1 2 3 J515
PS32
J1017
J1018
1 2 3 J518
Cassette 3
open/closed
sensor
Environment
sensor
level
level
detection detection
Left deck
re-try
sensor
Right deck
re-try sensor
PS8
PS26
1 2 3 J536
Cassette 4
open/closed
sensor
PCB17
PCB21
<J321F-4>
<J321F-3>
Vertical path 3
paper sensor
1 2 3
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J903
Anti-rush current PCB
TRANSFER
Vertical path 4
paper sensor
J546
40 J1551
E-18
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J1552
Right deck
feeding
paper sensor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J6504
POST ROLLER
J537
J537M 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
J6509
PRIMARY/GRID
J537F 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J6604
3 5V
2 VD2PD
1 0V
J547F 2 1
J547
J547M 1 2
J1533
J9016M
1 2 3 4 J9016F
J8502M
A15 J1012A
J1012B B15
J8503
A18 J1018A
J1018B B18
GND
24VA
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
J9016
J1534
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J1534M
J1414M
J6510
1 2
4 3 2 1
J902
J1413
3 2 1
1 2 3 J569
J6602
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TTP-U
TTP-R
TTP-D
TTP-L
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
SSTS
GND
SCMD
GND
SVD[14]
GND
SVD[12]
GND
SVD[10]
GND
SVD[8]
GND
SVD[6]
GND
SVD[4]
GND
SVD[2]
GND
SVD[0]
GND
SPRDY
GND
SCPRDY
GND
GND
GND
SPI[2]
GND
SPI[0]
GND
SPO[1]
GND
SVSYNC
GND
SCTS
GND
GND
SRTS
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Left deck open/

closed sensor
SL
Hard disk
J8503M 1 2
4 3 2 1
J1534F
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
J1538
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J9012M
4 3 2 1
24V
MULTI 24V
24V
FRONT 24V
INTERLOCK 24V
HVT 24V
24V
24V
24V
40 GND
39 EVEN7
38 EVEN6
37 EVEN5
36 EVEN4
35 GND
34 EVEN3
33 EVEN2
32 EVEN1
31 EVEN0
30 GND
29 ODD7
28 ODD6
27 ODD5
26 ODD4
25 GND
24 ODD3
23 ODD2
22 ODD1
21 ODD0
20 GND
19 GND
18 GND
17 VCLK
16 GND
15 GND
14 GND
13 NC
12 AP-LD
11 NC
10 RING_LD
9 RING_SIN
8 RING_CLK
7 GND
6 NC
5 GND
4 RSYNC
3 5V
2 NC
1 GND
12V
GND
GND
5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
SL3
Keypad PCB A
J6601
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
L
4 3 2 1
E-8
6 5V
5 C3PLV
4 0V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
40 GND
39 SPRTST
38 GND
37 SSCNST
36 GND
35 SVD[15]
34 GND
33 SVD[13]
32 GND
31 SVD[11]
30 GND
29 SVD[9]
28 GND
27 SVD[7]
26 GND
25 SVD[5]
24 GND
23 SVD[3]
22 GND
21 SVD[1]
20 GND
19 SPOWER
18 GND
17 GND
16 GND
15 SVCLK
14 GND
13 GND
12 GND
11 SPI[1]
10 GND
9 SPO[2]
8 GND
7 SPO[0]
6 GND
5 SHSYNC
4 GND
13 NC
2 GND
1 NC
Cassette 3
pickup solenoid
SL4
4 3 2 1 J1402M
J9012F
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1532
Keypad
PCB D
J6502
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GND
24V
24V
GND
Cassette 4
pickup solenoid
PS27
Control Card
IV (accessory)
Coin vendor
(accessory)
E-2
J1415M
M-8
J1530
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J6505A
M1-24V
A15
B15
J6505B
M2-24V
A18 J6801A
J6801B B18
Remote Diagnostic
Device II (accessory)
B/W
J6505
M19-24V
PCB10
J6801
E-2
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PS9
Control panel PCB

COLOR
J322F
J1414F
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SL
J322M
4 3 2 1
G-7
J1415F
J5113
CCD/AP PCB
M1-GND
J5112
M2-GND
40
M19-GND
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
+5V
BKL TON
J1404F
J1404M
J955
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
GND
RX
TX
+5V
J5008
1 2 3
AWG24
PCB13
J5004B
40
40
AWG18
J5004A
J5009
1 2 3 4
GND
TRAY 5V
ET10
J5004
J5002
1 2 3 4
<J222FC-4>
<J222FC-3>
<J222FC-2>
<J222FC-1>
PCB12
J5003
L_RTN2
L_RTN0
K_RTN2
K_RTN1
K_RTN0
L_DGT3
L_DGT2
L_DGT1
L_DGT0
GND
GND

40
J1405F
J323F
MSW_IP
GND
L_RTN2
K_RTN2
L_DGT2
K_DGT2
1 2 3 4 5 6
J5012
J1405M
K_DGT0
K_DGT4
K_DGT2
L_DGT3
L_DGT7
L_DGT5
K_RTN5
K_RTN1
GND
5 4 3 2 1
J5007
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW2
J323M
3 5V
2 LWRPD
1 0V
4 3 2 1
J5006
F-16
MSW2
J5051M
VEE
VR
VLCD
GND
L_RTN3
K_RTN7
L_DGT2
K_DGT2
J5051
1 2 J160F
1 2 3 4 5
J5062M
GND
D_SENS3*
+5V
GND
+24V
1 2 3
3 2 1
J5062
1 2 3
GND
+24V
GND
RX
TX
ITOP*
GND
GND
+24V
J5010
<J4004-4>
<J4004-3>
<J4004-2>
<J4004-1>
1 2 3
J5052
3 2 1
J5052M
5 4 3 2 1
J5053
Manual feed cover open/

closed detection
J5051F
J5052F
J5062F
3 2 1
1 2 3
J5001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PCB18
J5053F
Fuse PCB
J5053M
2 1
J5005
J5011
K-17
6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1 J5056
3 2 1
J1402F
1 2 3 4
+24V
+24V
M3_B*
M3_B
M3_A*
M3_A
1 2
1 2
1 2 3
J5601
3 2 1
PS40
J5057
J5101
1 2 3 4 5
PS43
J15101F
J15101M
1 2
1 2
J15100F
J15100M
J5002
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PS39
Inverter PCB
9 5V
8 C4PLV
7 0V
1 2
4 3 2 1
11 C3LMD
10 0V
1 2
J9009F
M34
J8500M
0V
C4LMD
0V
C3LMD
5V
C4PLV
0V
5V
C3PLV
0V
5V
LWRPD
0V
J9009M
E-18
M
Scanner home Copyboard

position sensor cover sensor
1 2 3 4
J5102
Original size
detection 3
B-20
M3
10
11
LA2
H6
+24V
GND
LAMP_ON
INV_ERR
4 3 2 1
Scanner motor
12
5V
LODOP
0V
H7
To ADF
J5105A
13
Scanning lamp
(Xenon tube)
Mirror heater
Lens heater
To ADF
J5105
14
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15
GND
GND
HVT_24V
19
13 C4LMD
12 0V
20
15
14
21
GND
HPSENS
+5V
GND
ADFOPEN*
+5V
22
Delivery assembly
jam sensor
PS45
Fixing web
length sensor
A-9
D. PAPER DECK -G1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

13
12
11
10
To host machine
M-CLK
J1BL
NC
CLOCK
5
TXENDN
6
TXDATA
TXOUTEN
GND
24V
7
RXROADN
1234
RXDATA
J1
MT1
M4
123
J03
J09
J10
5
123
DOPD
24V
5V
DOPND*
0V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5V
DSET
24V
0V
DPSP
5V
0V
DPLD
5V
0V
DLLD
DMMA*
0V
J08
1
DMMA
10 11 12
24V
5V
DMMB
DPUCD*
24V
5V
DPFD
0V
3
DPPD
DPRSD*
5V
DOPSD*
J01
1
24V
10 11 12 13
DLPD
0V
5V
5V
DLUL
0V
0V
5
DPE*
4
DOPN*
0V
5V
DOLON*
DMMB*
J05
1
0V
J04
Deck driver PCB
PCB1
24V
J02
NC NC
4
J2D
10 9
J4D
J8H
J17F
J8L
1
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
J17M
J4H
J4L
J8D
J2H
J2L
1
14 13 12 11 10 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 11 12 13 14
J13D
J13H
J14
12
321
J3
J7
J5
J9D
J10
J12
J9H
LED100 SW100
PCB2
Open switch PCB
PS102
Deck
paper
sensor
J6
PS103
Deck lifter
upper limit
sensor
PS104
Deck lifter
position
sensor
SL
PS101
Deck pickup
sensor
PS106
Deck feed
sensor
J18
M
CL
M101
Deck main motor

SL101
Deck pickup
roller releasing
solenoid
CL102
Deck pickup
clutch
J20D
J20H
1
J20L
J22F
J22M
J23D J24
J23H
PS105
3 2
PS107
Deck paper J19
12
Deck set
SL
J21 3 2 1
supply position
M
sensor
sensor
PS108
123
M102
SL102
Deck paper
level sensor
NC Deck lifter Deck open
solenoid
motor
SW102
Deck lifter
lower limit
detecting switch
J25
PS109
Deck open
sensor
J26
3<MID>
SW101
Deck open
detecting switch
A-11
E. SHIFT TRAY GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

10
Limit sensor (front)

Shift motor
PS105
P
S
J208
1 2 3
SDCM2
SDCM1
5V
SPSFULL*
GND
2 1
J105
PCB1
J104
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4 3 2 1
J106
Shift Tray Driver PCB

J103
1 2 3 4 5 6
J102
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J101
4 3 2 1
3 2 1
J203
NC
1 2 3 4 J205F
PS102
GND
24V
GND
5V
J204 3 2 1
J205H
S
P
PS104
Limit sensor
(rear)
J205
GND
STCNCT*
STHPR
STHPL
SPEXIST*
SPFULL*
SCCW
SCW
FULLON
GND
4 3 2 1
GND
STHPR
5V
NC
GND
SPEXIST*
5V
J207 3 2 1
GND
STHPL
5V
GND
SPCFULL*
5V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J123
<To host machine>
4 3 2 1
J114
<To host machine>
PS101
HP sensor
(front)
3 2 1 J206
PS103
Tray paper sensor
A-12
APPENDIX
F. List of Special Tools

The following special tools will be needed in addition to the standard tools set:
No.
Name
1 Digital
Toll No.
FY9-2002
Shape
Rank
A
multimeter
Remarks
Used when making
electrical checks.
2 Door switch
TKN-0093
3 Mirror
positioning tool
(front, rear)
FY9-3009
Used when positioning

the No. 1/No. 2 mirror.
4 NA-3 Test Sheet
FY9-9196
Used when adjusting/

checking images.
5 Potential sensor
electrode
FY9-3012
Used to make zero-level

checks on potential
sensors.
A-13
APPENDIX
No.
Name
Toll No.
Shape
Rank
Remarks
6 Environment
sensor checking
sensor
FY9-3014
Used to check the

environment sensor.
7 Tester extension
FY9-3038
Used when making
pin
8 Tester extension
pin (L-shaped)
electrical checks.
FY9-3039
Used when making

electrical checks.
Rank:
A: each service person is expected to carry one.
B: each group of five persons is expected to carry one.
C: each workshop is expected to carry one.
A-14
APPENDIX
G. List of Solvents/Oils
No.
Name
1 Alcohol
Uses
Cleaning:
e.g., glass, plastic,
Composition
Fluorescent family
hydrocarbon,
Remarks
Do not bring near fire.
Procure locally.
alcohol, surface
activating agent,
water
Substitute: IPA (isopropyl alcohol)
Cleaning:
metal part; oil,
toner.
Fluorescent family
hydrocarbon,
chlorine family
Do not bring near fire.

Procure locally.
Lubrication: fixing
hydrocarbon,
alcohol.
Mineral family
rubber parts;
external covers.
2 Solvent
3 Heat resisting
grease
drive parts
4 Lubricant
5 Lubricant
Lubrication: drive
lithium soap,
molybdenum
disulfide,
Tool No.: CK-0427 (500g/can)
Mineral oil
(paraffin family)
Silicone oil
Tool No.: CK-0524 (100cc)
parts, friction parts

Tool No.: CK-0551 (20g)
6 Drum cleaning
Cleaning:
Cerium oxide
powder
7 Lubricant
photosensitive drum
Lubrication: scanner Silicone oil
rail
8 Conducting
Lubrication: drum
Ether, polytetra
heater contact
fluoethylene
Tool No.: CK-0429
Tool No.: FY9-6011 (50cc)

grease
Tool No.: FY9-6008 (10 g)
A-15
Prepared by
Office Imaging Products Technical Support Division
Office Imaging Products Quality Assurance Center
CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
REVISION 0 (JULY 2000) (18723/22109)
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan
This publication is printed on

100% reprocessed paper.
PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
0800M1.05-1

Image Reader-A1 iR5000i/iR6000i: FY8-13HH-000

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationCanon

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Image Reader-A1 iR5000i/iR6000i: FY8-13HH-000

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Image Reader-A1 iR5000i/iR6000i: FY8-13HH-000

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Image Reader-A1

COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC.

COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC.

CANON iR5000i/iR6000i REV.0 JUNE 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

2. Outline of the Manual

Original Exposure System:

Image Processing System:

Laser Exposure System:

Image Formation System:

functional construction, outline of electrical

safety of the laser, image formation, auxiliary

Externals and Controls:

principles of operation of the fixing system,

table of periodically replaced parts, table of

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

3.1 External View ......................... 1-13S

CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER

Wiring Diagram of the Major

4.4 Power Save Mode .................. 2-14S

Binary Processing (error diffusion; T-BIC) ....................... 2-9S

2.10 Supplying Toner ..................... 3-15S

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.1.2 Hard Disk

1.1.3 Stackless, Duplexing Mechanism

1.1.4 Large-Capacity Paper Source

1.1.5 Variety of Delivery Processing (with accessories)

1.1.6 Printer Type

1.1.7 Addition of the Differential PCB

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Manual feed tray

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Manual feed tray

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The specifications are subject to change for product improvement.

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

* Cannot be set in an ADF as an original.

The specifications are subject to change for product improvement.

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2.2 Paper Deck-G1

The specifications are subject to change for product improvement.

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2.3 Shift Tray-B1

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

F01-301-01 External View 1

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Delivery assembly cover